HomeMy WebLinkAboutOlin Hall B01 and 101_Drawings
Olin Hall B01 and 101 Lab Renovations Specifications.pdf
OLIN HALL B01, 101 LAB RENOVATIONS Project Manual & Specifications June 2, 2021 Owner Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect Chiang | O’Brien Architects, DPC
217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 OLIN HALL B01, 101 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATIONS Page 1 Instructions to Bidders Bid Proposal Submission Form
General Conditions and Exhibits Supplemental Conditions DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01 11 00 Summary of the Work Section 01 14 00 Work Restrictions Section 01 25
00 Substitutions and Product Options Section 01 31 19 Project Meetings Section 01 31 50 Electronic Project Management Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules Section 01 33 00 Submittal
Procedures Section 01 35 29 General Health & Safety Section 01 35 43 General Environmental Requirements Section 01 35 44 Spill Control Section 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements Section
01 42 00 References Section 01 45 00 Quality Control Section 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 51 00 Temporary Utilities Section 01 66 00 Storage and Protection
Section 01 73 29 Cutting, Patching and Repairing Section 01 77 00 Project Close Out Section 01 78 22 Fixed Equipment Inventory Section 01 78 23 Operating and Maintenance Data Section
01 78 36 Warranties and Bonds Section 01 78 39 Record Documents OLIN HALL B01, 101 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATIONS Page 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Section 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry Section 06 41 16 Plastic Laminate Clad Architectural
Cabinets DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 09 – FINISHES Section 09 01 90.52 Maintenance
Repainting Section 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING Section 22 05 18 Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping Section 22 05 23.12
Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping Section 22 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22 05 53 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Section 22
07 19 Plumbing Piping Insulation Section 22 11 16 Domestic Water Piping Section 22 15 13 General-Service Compressed-Air Piping Section 22 42 16.16 Commercial Sinks Section 22 66 00
Chemical-Waste Systems for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities DIVISION 23 – HVAC Section 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting,
and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 09 23 Building Automation Control System Section 23 09 25 Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability Section 23 31
13 Metal Ducts Section 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories Section 23 33 46 Flexible Ducts Section 23 36 00 Air Terminal Units Section 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles DIVISION
26 - ELECTRICAL Section 26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems Section 26 27 26 Wiring Devices OLIN HALL B01,
101 TABLE OF CONTENTS LAB RENOVATIONS Page 3 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS Section 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling DRAWINGS G001 Cover Sheet A101 B01 - Demo &
Equipment Plans A102 101 - Demo & Equipment Plans A151 B01 Reflected Ceiling Plan A152 101 Reflected Ceiling Plan A201 Equipment Matrix - Room B01 A202 Equipment Matrix - Room 101
A203 Existing Photos - B01 A204 Existing Photos - 101 P001 Drawing Index, Symbol Lists & Abbrevs. P101 Partial Floor Plan - Lab B01 P102 Partial Floor Plans - Lab 101 M001 Drawing
Index, Symbols & Abbrevs. M101 B01 Floor Plans M102 101 Floor Plans M601 Schedules & Details M701 Controls E001 Drawing Index, Schedules, Symbol Lists & Notes E101 Partial Electrical
Plans - Lab B01 E102 Partial Electrical Plans - Lab 101 END OF DOCUMENT Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Project: Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations
Owner: Cornell University Ithaca, New York 14853 Architect: Chiang | O’Brien Architects, DPC 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 1. BID DOCUMENTS The Bid Documents provided
electronically by the Owner will consist of the following: (1) Instructions to Bidders. (2) Bid Proposal Certification Form. (3) General Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
- "General Requirements", and Supplemental Conditions. (4) Drawings and Specifications. (5) Addenda and/or bulletins issued prior to date of opening of Proposals. Bid Documents are
available electronically in the eBuilder Bid Portal under the Bid Package Invitation – Invitation Documents Tab. Dataflow, Inc. maintains the current set of Documents and all addenda
and is the contracted supplier for printed plans and specifications for this project. Contact Dataflow at CUProjects@goDataflow.com. Bid Documents Terms of Use / Disclaimer - By accessing
and/or using the Cornell University Document Files, You accept without limitation or qualifications, the following Terms of Use: a. Cornell University grants You the permission to
use and view the Document Files subject to these Terms of Use. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-2 b. Except in connection with preparing your bid, You may not modify, copy,
transmit, display, reproduce, publish, license, create derivative works from, transfer, or sell any information, materials, drawings, content, products or services from the Document
Files (together "Content") in any form without Cornell University's prior written permission. You may print out a copy or download Content solely for Your internal use. In doing so,
you may not remove or alter, or cause to be removed or altered, any copyright, trademark, trade name, service mark, or any other proprietary notice or legend appearing on any of the
Content. c. You may not provide parts of or full sets of Document Files to any planhouse or online document repositories. d. The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively
the "Trademarks") displayed on the Document Files are registered and unregistered Trademarks of Cornell University and others. Nothing contained on the Document Files should be construed
as granting, by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license or right to use any Trademark displayed on the Document Files without the written permission of Cornell University or
such party that may own the Trademark. Your use of the Trademarks displayed on the Document Files, or any other content, except as provided in these Terms of Use, are strictly prohibited.
2. EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS a. Each Bidder shall acquaint themselves with location conditions as they exist, as well as the character of the necessary work to be
carried out under the proposed Contract. A Pre-Bid Zoom meeting will be scheduled and include: a review of project related information, an opportunity to ask and receive responses to
Bidder questions, and make such inquiries as are necessary to fully understand the subject facilities, physical conditions and/or restrictions attendant to the work under the Contract.
b. Boring information, water levels, indications of sub-surface conditions and similar information given on the Drawings or in the Specifications are furnished only for the convenience
of the Bidders. The Owner, Architect and Consulting Engineer make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other sub-surface conditions to be encountered
during the work and no guarantee as to the accuracy or validity of interpretation of such data or conditions is made or intended. c. Each Bidder shall also thoroughly examine and
become familiar with the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents. d. By submitting a Bid, the Bidder covenants and affirms that the Bidder has carefully examined all
of the Bid Documents including Drawings, Specifications, and the Addenda and Bulletins, if any, as well as posed any questions associated with the Site, and that Bidder is satisfied
as to the nature and location of the work, the general and local conditions, and all matters which may in any way affect the work or its performance. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INS-3 3. DISCREPANCIES a. Should a Bidder find discrepancies in or omissions from the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents, or be in doubt as to their meaning, Bidder
shall at once enter the item in the Q&A Board of the eBuilder Bid Portal and an Addenda with written instructions will be sent to all bidders. Neither the Owner nor the Architect will
be responsible for oral instructions. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing and entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Q&A Board. Inquiries received in advance
of the deadline established at the Pre-Bid conference will be given consideration. 4. PRE-BID CONFERENCE a. A pre-bid conference has been scheduled for 1:00PM, July 6, 2021, in Conference
Room B26A of the Humphreys Service Building or via Zoom at: https://cornell.zoom.us/j/97225840677?pwd=V1lIU0NoZDlTUDNzbTkwQnY5bmFGU T09&from=addon A pre-bid walk-through will follow
and begin at Olin Main Entrance. The meeting will be to review project related information and respond to Bidder questions. The pre-Bid Conference is designed to assist Bidders in
understanding the Contract Documents, the opportunity to pose clarifying questions or make inquiries regarding Contract Documents. Results will be published in an Addendum. 5. BID
SUBMISSION Bid Submissions must include the following: a. Base Bid entered into the eBuilder Portal broken down per the Bid Scope Tab Schedule of Values (Step 1: Bid Form of the
Response Form tab). b. Additional Required Information: 1. Bid Proposal Certification Form 2. Bid Bond 3. Bond Surety Company 4. Bonding Rate for Change Orders 5. Proposed Project
Team and Resumes 6. Proposed Project Schedule 7. Substitutions c. Bid Proposal Certification Form: The Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be signed by the Principal(s) or Officer(s)
legally authorized to bind the Bidder, and to execute such documents on behalf of their respective firms or organizations, and the Certificates included in the Bid Proposal Certification
Form shall be completed accordingly. Bidder's legal name should be fully and accurately stated. Completed form shall be without interlineation, alterations, or erasures unless initialed
and dated by the signer; Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable discretion.
Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-4 d. Bid Bond: Each Bidder will be required to furnish a Bid Bond electronically via the eBuilder Bid Portal in the amount of 10% of the
Bid Amount. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the Bidder will execute the Contract if it is awarded to him in conformity with his Proposal. Such Proposal Guarantee Bond shall include
a statement that the Insurer shall, at the option of the Bidder, be willing to provide to the Bidder the Contract Bonds as described in 13 below. 6. SALES AND USE TAX EXEMPTION
a. The Owner, Cornell University, a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Sales and Use Taxes. 7. FEDERAL EXCISE TAX a. The Owner, Cornell University,
a non-profit educational institution, is exempt from payment of certain Federal Excise Taxes. 8. TAX EXEMPT STATUS a. Bidders shall inform all prospective subcontractors and suppliers
from whom they expect to obtain proposals or quotations of the tax-exempt status of the Owner as set forth above and request that they reflect anticipated tax credits in their proposals
or quotations. 9. EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES a. At the Contractor's request, following the award of a Contract, Contractor exempt purchase certificates will be furnished by the Owner
to the Contractor with respect to such tax-exempt articles or transactions as may be applicable under the Contract. 10. TRADE SUBCONTRACTORS, MATERIAL SUPPLIERS a. Each portion of
the work shall be performed by an organization equipped and experienced to do work in that particular field, and no portion of the work shall be reserved by the Bidder to himself unless
he is so equipped and experienced. Subcontracts shall be awarded only to parties satisfactory to the Owner and the Architect. Each subcontractor and materials supplier shall be approved
individually. b. In the spaces provided in the eBuilder Bid Portal Bid Scope form, the Bidder shall list all portions of the work he proposes to perform directly with his own forces.
c. A list of names from which the Bidder proposes to select subcontractors, materials suppliers, and/or manufacturers for the principal trades or subdivisions of the work is required
as part of the Proposal. d. In the Bid Scope Tab in the eBuilder Bid Portal, a list of the principal trades or subdivisions of the work for which such a listing is required, together
with the provisions which govern the listing, selection and approval of principal subcontractors. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-5 11. UNIT PRICES The Bidder agrees, if awarded
the Contract, to perform work "In addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit
prices, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject to the terms of the Contract Documents. a. Certain Unit Prices may be requested.
If requested, a form will be attached to these instructions and will need to be completed and uploaded to the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information
Custom Fields. All Bidders are required to bid on all Unit Prices without exception. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with
all work in connection therewith and shall include all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Unit prices shall be the total compensation for the item and includes
all overhead, profit and any other charges of the Contractor and/or subcontractor in connection therewith. d. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like
items. e. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all of the unit prices listed below prior to the execution of the Contract. 12. SUBSTITUTIONS a. Proposals shall
conform to the requirements of the Bid Documents. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item of material or equipment, element of work, or method of construction set forth
in the Bid Documents, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements - Division 1, are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form
– Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution, together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted
on the form supplied with these instructions. However, the Bidder is cautioned to make his base proposal on the materials and items specified by name or other particular reference.
13. ALTERNATE PROPOSALS a. Certain Alternate Proposals may be requested by the Owner and are included in the General Requirements. They will be listed in the Bid Scope Tab in the
eBuilder Bid Portal. All Bidders are required to bid on all Alternates without exception. b. Alternate Proposals shall include all overhead, profit and other expenses in connection
therewith. 14. METHOD OF SUBMISSION a. Base Bid shall be prepared and electronically submitted via the eBuilder Bid Portal. All required fields and attachments in the eBuilder Bid
Portal must be completed. b. Bid Proposal Certification Form shall be prepared electronically submitted as an attachment via the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional
Required Information Custom Fields. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-6 c. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals shall be submitted through the eBuilder Bid Portal no later
than 3:00 PM on July 22, 2021. d. Bid Proposals shall not contain any recapitulation of the work to be done. No oral, written, electronic or telephonic proposals, or modifications
will be considered. 15. BID OPENING a. Completed and responsive Bid Proposals will be opened electronically via eBuilder Bid Portal. Responsive Bid results will be posted to the
Facilities Contracts website at: https://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/pob/projects.cfm The Owner reserves the right to postpone the date and time of opening of proposals at any
time prior to the date and time announced in this Instruction to Bidders or amendments thereto. 16. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. It is the intent of the Owner to enter into a Contract with
one General Contractor for the entire project. All labor and services and materials and supplies, etc. are to be provided in accordance with the Contract. b. Award of the Contract
shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible base bid who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. The competence and responsibility
of the Bidders' proposed principal subcontractors will be considered in making the Award. c. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals, and to waive any informalities
in Bidding. Contract award shall be subject to approval of Cornell University’s Contractors Qualification Statement. d. Bidder expressly warrants and commits that its Proposal shall
remain unchanged and in full force and effect at the Owner’s option for a period of not less than ninety (90) calendar days following the bid opening date. e. Bidders may submit, recall,
modify, resubmit or withdraw their Bids through the eBuilder Bid Portal up until the Bid Due Date and Time. 17. SCHEDULE OF VALUES a. The successful Bidder shall submit a complete
"Schedule of Values" showing the amounts allocated to the various trades, suppliers, subcontractors, installers and General Contractor's work, aggregating the total sum of the Contract.
If requested by the Owner or Architect, the complete "Schedule of Values" shall be submitted prior to award of Contract. Rev. 9-2016 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS INS-7 18. PERFORMANCE
AND LABOR AND MATERIALS PAYMENT BONDS Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder shall furnish the Owner with "Performance" and “Labor and Material
Payment Bonds", each in the amount of 100% of the Contract Price. Each of these Bonds are to be in a form with such sureties as the Owner may approve. The cost of such bonds shall
be included in the Bidders Proposal. 19. START OF WORK a. Work at the site shall be started within five (5) calendar days from the date of issuance of written authorization to proceed
and shall achieve substantial completion of the project no later than September 15, 2021. 1. NOTE: Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities, the successful Bidder
shall: i. Furnish the Owner with fully executed and satisfactory Payment and Performance bonds. No on-site construction activities may commence until executed and satisfactory bonds
are in place for the subject project. ii. Furnish the Owner with safety plan related to COVID-19 pandemic b. The construction schedule and completion are critical. The Contractor
shall provide adequate labor and equipment in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. 20. ADDENDA AND BULLETINS a. Bidders must acknowledge in Step 3 of the
Bid Response in the eBuilder Bid Portal each Addendum and/or Bulletin issued during the bidding period. 21. REQUIRED POST-AWARD SUBMISSIONS BY THE APPARENT LOW BIDDER a. Within fourteen
days after bid opening: (1) Use of Minority and Female Vendor Forms (2) Summary of Bid Activity with Minority and Female Subcontractors/Vendors (3) Six-Month Workforce Projection
b. Upon Execution of Contract: (1) Insurance Certificate (2) Performance Bond (3) Labor and Material Payment Bond (4) Schedule of Work (bar chart) (5) Federal Tax Identification Number
END OF SECTION BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-1 OLIN HALL B01, 101 LAB RENOVATIONS Cornell University, Ithaca, New York BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM Vendor Name: Type
of Firm, State of Incorporation if Applicable Street Address, City, State, Zip Having carefully examined the Instructions to Bidders, the "Conditions of the Contract" (General,
Division 1 - "General Requirements"), Supplemental Conditions, the Drawings, Specifications and associated Bid Documents dated June 2, 2021 prepared by Chiang | O’Brien Architects,
DPC, 217 North Aurora Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, as well as the premises and conditions affecting the work, proposes to furnish all material, equipment, labor, plant, machinery,
tools, supplies, services, applicable taxes and specified insurance necessary to perform the entire work, as set forth in, and in accordance with the said documents. 1. Receipt of
the Addenda to the Terms and Conditions, Drawings or Specifications has been acknowledged in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 2. Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (M/WBEs) Facilities
and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor community by promoting minority owned and controlled
business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority, women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses
through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors,
engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships
with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's events, contracts, services, and initiatives." 3. Milestone
Dates a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to commence work at the site within five (5) calendar days after date of issuance of written notice to proceed and to achieve
substantial completion of the project no later than September 7, 2021, with final completion no later than September 15, 2021. b. The Contractor shall provide adequate labor and equipment
in the Bid to ensure that no slippage of the schedule will occur. Contractor shall attach a Project Duration Schedule to this form that meets the duration established. BID PROPOSAL
CERTIFICATION FORM BF-2 c. Following are additional Milestone Dates: a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to furnish a "Construction Progress Schedule" consistent
with the agreed upon Construction Duration showing the starting and completion dates for all principal trades and subdivisions of the Work, together with such additional information
related thereto as may reasonably be required. Such schedule shall be in conformance with General Requirements, Section 01 32 16, 1.3, A. 4. Proposed Principal Subcontractors a.
The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to employ subcontractors from the list submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information
Custom Fields subject to the following provisions: i. The Owner and Architect reserve the right to review the list of "Proposed Principal Subcontractors" prior to the award of the
Contract, and to delete from it the name or names of any to whom they may have a reasonable objection. The Contractor may make the final selection of principal subcontractors at his
option from the resulting list after the award of the Contract. 5. Contractor Team: a. The Owner reserves the right to reject the names of any Project Manager or Superintendent provide
in the eBuilder Bid Portal submission to whom they have a reasonable objection. 6. Bonds a. Bid Bond. A Bid Bond in the amount of a minimum of 10% of Bid Amount is attached to the
eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields. b. Performance and Payment Bonds. Prior to commencement of any on-site construction activities,
the undersigned expressly agrees if awarded the Contract, to deliver to Owner executed "Performance" and "Labor and Material Payment Bonds" in such forms as are acceptable to the Owner
and in an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Sum. c. Such bonds will be furnished by the Surety entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required
Information Custom Fields d. Bonding Rate for Change Orders has been entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields
BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-3 7. Bid Scope - Schedule of Values a. The undersigned agrees, prior to the award of a construction contract and upon the request of the Architect
or Owner, to submit a complete, itemized and detailed "Schedule of Values" including Alternates elected, if any, showing the amount allocated to the various trades and subdivisions
of the work, aggregating to the total Contract Sum submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal. 8. Substitutions a. The Base Bid is predicated on compliance with the Drawings and Specifications
without substitutions. b. The Bidder may offer substitutions for any item noted in the Specifications, with the exception of Form of Contract, General Conditions and General Requirements
- Division 1. c. Any Substitutions are to be entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields by listing each proposed substitution,
together with the amount to be deducted from the Base Bid if the substitution is accepted. d. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any proposed substitution. e. The sum
stated includes any modifications of work or additional work that may be required by reason of acceptance of substitution. Substitute materials must be approved and accepted by the
Owner in writing before same may be used in lieu of those named in the Specifications. 9. Unit Price Schedule a. The undersigned agrees, if awarded the Contract, to perform work "In
addition to" or "deducted from" the scope of the Contract Documents as directed by the Owner and/or Architect, computed in accordance with the unit prices form uploaded in the eBuilder
Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields, which prices include all overhead, profit and other expense items in connection therewith, subject
to the terms of the Contract Documents. b. All unit prices include the installation or omission, complete for each item, together with all work in connection therewith and shall include
all shoring, bracing, dewatering and other incidental work. c. Adjustments will be computed on net variation of total quantities of like items. d. The Owner reserves the right to
accept or reject any or all of the unit prices entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields prior to the execution of
the Contract. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-4 10. Acceptance a. The undersigned agrees that the amount submitted for the Base Bid and any Alternates and Unit Pricing along
with the required attachments in the Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields submitted in the eBuilder Bid Portal have been reviewed and are accurate.
b. It is understood and agreed that the Owner expressly reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bids, and to waive irregularities or informalities in its sole and reasonable
discretion. c. Upon acceptance of Bidder’s Proposal, Bidder expressly agrees and affirms to hold its unchanged Bid Proposal for ninety (90) calendar days. The undersigned will execute
an Agreement between Contractor and Owner, amended and/or supplemented, if required, in accordance with the Proposal as accepted. Nothing contained herein shall preclude Bidder and
Owner from mutually agreeing upon a Contract based upon the unchanged Bid Proposal if the time elapsed from Award is in excess of ninety (90) calendar days. d. The undersigned acknowledges
the following Addendum(s) (if applicable): e. It is understood and agreed that award of the Contract shall be made to the bidder submitting the lowest responsive and responsible bid
who, in the opinion of the Owner, is qualified to perform the work. f. The undersigned agrees to furnish Owner satisfactory and executed Performance and Payment Bonds prior to the
commencement of any Work on-site. g. The undersigned acknowledges as Contractor to be and remain exclusively in control of the Project site and Work, as well as the Project’s Health
& Safety Plan, measures, and/or protocols, for the duration of construction activities. i. The undersigned acknowledges receipt of Supplemental Conditions to the Contract surrounding
Contractor Response and Health & Safety Protocols for COVID-19, or other viral, bacterial, or microbial presence (as applicable). ii. The undersigned acknowledges that no one will
be permitted on the job site until the Health & Safety Plan has been submitted. Addendum No. __ dated ____. BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-5 The following documentation is required
to be submitted electronically in the eBuilder Bidding Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields This Form with Proposed Milestone Schedule – signed
and executed Bid Bond Proposed Project Team Resumes Bidder Project Qualifications (Bidder) By: Title: Business Address: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION
FORM BF-6 CERTIFICATE OF NON-COLLUSION By submission of this bid, each bidder and each person signing on behalf of any bidder certifies, and in the case of a joint bid each party
thereto certifies as to its own organization, under penalty of perjury, that to the best of its knowledge and belief: a. The prices in this bid have been arrived at independently
without collusion, consultation, communication, or agreement, for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such prices with any other bidder or with any
competitor. b. Unless required by law, the prices that have been quoted in this bid have not been knowingly disclosed, directly or indirectly, by the bidder and will not knowingly
be disclosed by the bidder to any other bidder or any competitor prior to opening. c. No attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other persons, partnership,
or corporation to submit or not submit a bid for the purpose of restricting competition. (Bidder) By: Title: Dated: BID PROPOSAL CERTIFICATION FORM BF-7 CERTIFICATE
AS TO CORPORATE BIDDER I, _____________________________________________________, certify that I am the _____________________________ of the Corporation named as Bidder within
this Bid Form for General Contractors; that __________________________________, who signed said Bid Form on behalf of the bidder was then _______________________________ of said Corporation;
that I know his signature; that his signature thereto is genuine and that said Bid Form and attachments thereto were duly signed and executed for and on behalf of said Corporation by
authority of its governing body. (Secretary-Clerk) Dated: Rev 4-2021 G E N E R A L C O N D I T I O N S FOR OLIN HALL B01, 101 LAB RENOVATIONS
CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK i Rev 4-2021 GENERAL CONDITIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 1 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 Owner 1 Section 1.02
Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings 1 Section 1.03 Order of Precedence 1 ARTICLE 2 CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 Contractor's Obligations 2 Section 2.02 Contractor's
Title to Materials 2 Section 2.03 "Or Equal" Clause 2 Section 2.04 Quality, Quantity and Labeling 3 Section 2.05 Superintendence by Contractor 3 Section 2.06 Subsurface or Site
Conditions 4 Section 2.07 Representations of Contractor 4 Section 2.08 Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions 4 Section 2.09 Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors 5 Section
2.10 Meetings 5 Section 2.11 Related Work 5 Section 2.12 Surveys and Layout 5 Section 2.13 Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies 5 Section 2.14 Project Labor Rates 6 Section 2.15
Daily Reports 6 ARTICLE 3 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 Access to the Work 6 Section 3.02 Notice for Testing 6 Section 3.03 Inspection of Work 7 Section 3.04 Inspection
and Testing 7 Section 3.05 Defective or Damaged Work 7 Section 3.06 Acceptance 7 ARTICLE 4 CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 Changes 8 Section 4.02 Claims for Extra Work 11 Section
4.03 Form of Change Orders 12 ARTICLE 5 TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 Time of Completion 12 ii Rev 4-2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 6 TERMINATION Section 6.01 Termination
for Cause 13 Section 6.02 Termination for Convenience of Owner 13 Section 6.03 Owner's Right to do Work 13 ARTICLE 7 DISPUTES Section 7.01 Disputes Procedure 14 ARTICLE 8 SUBCONTRACTS
Section 8.01 Subcontracting 15 ARTICLE 9 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 Cooperation with Other Contractors 15 ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 Accidents and Accident Prevention 16 Section 10.02 Adjoining Property 17 Section 10.03 Emergencies 17 Section 10.04 Bonds 17 Section 10.05 Risks Assumed by the Contractor
18 Section 10.06 Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance 18 Section 10.07 Liability Insurance of the Owner 20 Section 10.08 Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards 20 Section 10.09 Effect of Procurement of Insurance 21 Section 10.10 No Third Party Rights 21 ARTICLE 11 USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO
ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 Substantial Completion 21 Section 11.02 Occupancy Prior to Acceptance 21 ARTICLE 12 PAYMENT Section 12.01 Provision of Payment 22 Section 12.02
Stored Materials & Equipment 23 Section 12.03 Retention 24 Section 12.04 Withholding Payments 24 Section 12.05 Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment 25 Section 12.06
Final Payment and Release 26 iii Rev 4-2021 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ARTICLE 13 TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 Tax Exemption 26 ARTICLE 14 GUARANTEE Section 14.01 Guarantee 27
ARTICLE 15 STANDARD PROVISIONS Section 15.01 Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted 27 Section 15.02 Laws Governing the Contract 27 Section 15.03 Assignments 27 Section 15.04
No Third Party Rights 28 Section 15.05 Waiver of Rights of Owner 28 Section 15.06 Limitation on Actions 28 Section 15.07 Owner's Representative 28 ARTICLE 16 MINORITY AND WOMEN
BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 Definitions 28 Section 16.02 Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises 28 Section 16.03 MWBE Utilization Plan 29 Section 16.04
Reports and Records 29 ARTICLE 17 ACCOUNTING, INSPECTION AND AUDIT 30 ARTICLE 18 CONTRACTOR PERFORMANCE EVALUATION 30 ARTICLE 19 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 30 ARTICLE 20 CONFIDENTIALITY
AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 Release of Information 31 Section 20.02 Confidential Information 31 Section 20.03 Use of Owner's Name 31 ARTICLE 21 CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS
OF ETHICAL CONDUCT 32 iv Rev 4-2021 EXHIBITS A Change Order Documentation Instructions Construction Contract Change Order Request Construction Contract Change Order Summary
B Final Release C Guarantee D Form I MWBE Utilization Plan Form II Contractor’s Affirmative Action Plan Form III Affirmative Action Workforce Report E Labor Rate Breakdown
F Stored Materials Invoicing Documentation G Contractor Performance Evaluation 1 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 1 -- INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 1.01 - Owner A. The Owner
is Cornell University as identified in the Agreement and referred to throughout the Contract Documents as the "Owner" or "Cornell University". B. Ownership of Documents: All drawings,
specifications, computations, sketches, test data, survey results, photographs, renderings and other material relating to the Work, whether furnished to or prepared by the Contractor,
are the property of Cornell University. The Contractor shall use such materials or information therefrom only in connection with the Work of this Contract. When requested, the Contractor
shall deliver such materials to Cornell University. C. The Owner shall give all orders and directions contemplated under the Contract relative to the execution of the Work. The Owner
shall determine the amount, quality, acceptability, and fitness of the Work and shall decide all questions which may arise in relation to said Work. The Owner's estimates and decisions
shall be final except as otherwise expressly provided. D. Any differences or conflicts concerning performance which may arise between the Contractor and other Contractors performing
Work for the Owner shall be adjusted and determined by the Owner. E. The table of contents, titles, captions, headings, running headlines, and marginal notes contained herein and in
said documents is intended to facilitate reference to various provisions of the Contract Documents and in no way affect the interpretation of the provisions to which they refer. Section
1.02 - Meaning and Intent of Specifications, Plans and Drawings The meaning and intent of all specifications, plans and drawings shall be determined in a manner approved by the Owner.
Section 1.03 - Order of Precedence A. Should a conflict occur in or between or among any parts of the Contract Documents that are entitled to equal preference, the more expensive
way of doing the Work, the sounder technique or workmanship, or better quality or greater quantity of material shall govern, unless the Owner directs otherwise so directs in writing.
B. Drawings and specifications are reciprocal. Anything shown on the plans and not mentioned in the specifications, or mentioned in the specifications and not shown on the plans,
shall have the same effect as if shown or mentioned in both. C. Requirements of reference standards form a part of these specifications to the extent indicated by the reference thereto.
When provisions of reference standards conflict with provisions in these specifications, the specifications shall govern. 2 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 2 -- CONTRACTOR Section 2.01 - Contractor's
Obligations A. The Contractor shall, in good workmanlike manner, perform all the Work required by the Contract within the time specified in the Contract. The Contractor shall comply
with all terms of the Contract, and shall do, carry on, and complete the entire Work to the satisfaction of the Owner. 1. All labor for this project which is normally under the jurisdiction
of one of the local unions as covered in the contract between the Tompkins-Cortland Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division and Cornell University shall be performed by Union
labor. B. The Contractor shall furnish, erect, maintain, and remove such construction plant and such temporary Work as may be required. C. The Contractor shall provide and pay for
all labor, material, tools, equipment, machinery, as well as utility connections, transportation, and all other facilities and services necessary for the proper execution and completion
of the Work, except as otherwise specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. D. Whenever a provision of the Specifications conflicts with agreements or regulations in force among
members of trade associations, unions, or councils which regulate or distinguish what work shall or shall not be included in the work of a particular trade, the Contractor shall make
all necessary arrangements to reconcile such conflict without delay, damage, or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. In case progress of the Work is
affected by undue delay in furnishing or installing items of material or equipment required under the Contract because of a conflict involving such agreement or regulations, the Owner
or the Architect may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Section 2.02 - Contractor's Title to Materials
A. The Contractor warrants that the Contractor has full, good and clear title to all materials and supplies used by the Contractor in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances.
B. All materials, equipment and articles which become the property of the Owner shall be new unless specifically stated otherwise. Section 2.03 - "Or Equal" Clause A. Whenever a
material, article or piece of equipment or method is identified on the plans or in the specifications by reference to manufacturers' or vendors' names, trade name, catalogue number,
or make, no others or alternatives may be substituted. Any and all other "Or Equal" considerations will be handled under this Section in accordance with General Requirements, Section
01 25 00. 3 Rev 4-2021 B. Where the Architect approves a product proposed by the Contractor and said proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the Work covered
by this Contract, or the Work covered by other contracts, all said revision(s) or redesign(s), and all new drawings and details required thereto shall be provided by the Contractor
and shall be approved by the Architect. All time spent by the Architect or its agents to evaluate the proposed substitution and or necessary engineering cost to accommodate the requested
change shall be reimbursed to the Owner by the Contractor via the Change Order procedure. Section 2.04 - Quality, Quantity and Labeling A. The Contractor shall furnish materials
and equipment of the quality and quantity specified in the Contract. Unless otherwise provided, all materials and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable
grade of their respective kinds for the purpose. When required by the Contract Documents or when directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall supply the Owner's Representative, for
their acceptance, full information concerning any material which the Contractor contemplates incorporating into the Work. Materials and articles installed or used without such acceptance
shall be at the risk of subsequent rejection. B. When materials are specified to conform to any standard, the Owner may require that the materials delivered to the Site shall bear
manufacturer's labels stating that the materials meet said standards. C. The above requirements shall not restrict or affect the Owner's right to test materials as provided in the
Contract. D. Whenever several alternative materials or items are specified by name or other particular reference for one use, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor
to submit in writing a list of the particular materials or items the Contractor intends to use before the Contract is executed. Section 2.05 - Superintendence by Contractor A. The
Contractor shall employ a full-time effective, responsive and competent construction superintendent and necessary staff; the construction superintendent shall devote full time to the
Work and shall have full authority to act for the Contractor at all times. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with the names and authority of such personnel in writing. B. If
at any time the superintendent is not satisfactory to the Owner, the Contractor shall, if requested by the Owner, replace said superintendent with another superintendent satisfactory
to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. The Contractor shall remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor or of any Subcontractor
when so directed by the Owner. 4 Rev 4-2021 Section 2.06 - Subsurface or Site Conditions A. The Contractor acknowledges that it has assumed the risk and that the Contract consideration
includes such provision as the Contractor deems appropriate and adequate to account for all subsurface conditions as the Contractor could reasonably anticipate encountering from the
provisions of the Contract Documents, borings, rock cores, topographical maps and such other information as the Owner made available to the Contractor or from their own inspection and
examination of the site prior to the Owner's receipt of Contractor bids. B. In the event that the Contractor encounters subsurface physical conditions at the site differing substantially
from those shown on or described or indicated in the Contract Documents and which could not have been reasonably anticipated from the aforesaid information made available by the Owner
or from the Contractor's inspection and examination of the site, the Contractor shall give immediate notice to the Owner of such conditions before they are disturbed. Such notice shall
include probable cost and/or any impact to the Project Schedule. The Owner will thereupon promptly investigate the conditions and if Owner finds that they do substantially differ from
that which should have been reasonably anticipated by the Contractor, the Owner shall make such changes in the drawings and specifications as may be necessary and a change order shall
be issued. Section 2.07 - Representations of Contractor The Contractor represents and warrants: A. That the Contractor is financially solvent, sufficiently stable to secure the required
payment and performance bonds, and is sufficiently experienced in and competent to perform the subject Work or retain qualified subcontractors to perform elements of the Work pursuant
to the Project’s plans and specifications; B. That the Contractor is familiar with all Federal, State, or other laws, ordinances, orders, building codes, rules and regulations, which
may in any way affect the Work; C. That any temporary and permanent Work required by the Contract can be safely and satisfactorily constructed. D. That the Contractor has carefully
examined the Contract and the Site of the Work and that, from the Contractor's own investigations is satisfied as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and
quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, accounted for weather
days, the general and local conditions, and all other materials or items which may affect the Work. The Contractor has correlated those observations with the requirements of the Contract
Documents and has made all other investigations essential to a full understanding of the Work and the difficulties which may be encountered in performing the Work. 5 Rev 4-2021
Section 2.08 - Verifying Dimensions and Site Conditions A. The Contractor shall take all measurements at the Site and shall verify all dimensions and site conditions at the Site before
proceeding with the Work. If said dimensions or conditions are found to be in conflict with the Contract, the Contractor immediately shall refer said conflict to the Owner. B. During
the progress of Work, the Contractor shall verify all field measurements prior to fabrication of building components and equipment, and proceed with the fabrication to meet field conditions.
C. The Contractor shall consult all Contract Documents to determine exact location of all Work and verify spatial relationships of all Work. Any question concerning said location
or spatial relationships shall be submitted in a manner approved by the Owner. D. Specific locations for equipment, pipelines, ductwork and other such items of Work, where not dimensioned
on plans, shall be determined in consultation with the Owner and other affected Contractors and Subcontractors. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of the
Work in place. F. Should Contractor’s failure to perform services under this section result in additional costs to the Owner, the Contractor shall be responsible for such additional
costs. Section 2.09 - Copies of Contract Documents for Contractors A. The Contractor will have access to view and download the Bid Documents in eBuilder. B. All drawings, specifications,
and copies thereof furnished by the Owner are the property of the Owner. They are not to be used on other work with the exception of the signed Contract Set, are to be returned to
the Owner along with the As-Builts at the completion of the Work. Section 2.10 - Meetings The Contractor and all subcontractors as requested shall attend all meetings as directed
by the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.11 - Related Work The Contractor shall examine the Contract for related work to ascertain the relationship of said work to the
Work under the Contract. Section 2.12 - Surveys and Layout Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract, the Owner shall furnish the Contractor all surveys of the property
necessary for the Work, but the Contractor shall lay out the Work. 6 Rev 4-2021 Section 2.13 - Errors, Omissions or Discrepancies The Contractor shall examine the Contract thoroughly
before commencing the Work and report in writing any errors or discrepancies to the Owner or the Owner's Representative. Section 2.14 - Project Labor Rates The Contractor shall submit
to the Owner, for review and approval, within thirty (30) days after Contract is awarded all trade labor rates inclusive of fringe benefits, taxes, insurance for the duration of the
individual craft agreement in accordance with Exhibit. Revised rates shall be provided within thirty (30) days of signing any new agreements with the individual crafts during this
project. Section 2.15 – Daily Reports The Contractor's Construction Superintendent shall submit a Daily Report to the Cornell University Project Manager or the Resident Field Engineer
at the job site. Such reports shall, at a minimum, contain the following information: Name of Project Project Number Date of Report Weather Conditions Equipment on the site Contractors
on site including name and number of employees on site for each contractor Work/area and activity for each contractor Overtime worked and planned work progress Environmental problems
and corrections Other information, such as special events, occurrences, materials delivered, accidents or injuries, recommendations, suggestions, visitors, inspections, equipment start-up
and check out, occupancy, etc. ARTICLE 3 -- INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE Section 3.01 - Access to the Work The Owner and Architect, or their duly authorized representatives, assistants,
or inspectors shall at all times and for any purpose have access to the Work and the premises used by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall provide safe and proper facilities therefor.
In addition, the Contractor shall, whenever so requested, give the Owner and Architect or their duly authorized representatives access to the proper invoices, bills of lading, specifications,
etc., which may be required in determining the adequacy and/or quantity of materials used in completion of the Work. Section 3.02 - Notice for Testing If the Contract Documents, laws,
ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction require any Work to be inspected, tested, accepted, or approved, the Contractor shall give the
Owner timely notice of its readiness and of the date arranged so the Owner may observe such inspection, testing, or approval. The Contractor shall bear all costs of such inspection,
tests, and approvals unless otherwise provided. 7 Rev 4-2021 Section 3.03 - Inspection of Work A. The Contractor will cooperate in all ways to facilitate the inspection and examination
of the Work. The inspections and examinations will be carried out in such a manner that the Work will not be delayed. B. All Work, all materials whether or not incorporated in the
Work, all processes of manufacturer, and all methods of construction shall be, at all times and places, subject to the inspection of the Owner and the Owner shall be the final judge
of the quality and suitability of the Work. Any Work not approved by the Owner shall immediately be reconstructed, made good, replaced or corrected by the Contractor including all
Work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by said removal or replacement. C. Required certificates of inspection, testing, acceptance, or approval shall be secured by the Contractor
and promptly delivered to the Owner. Section 3.04 - Inspection and Testing All materials and equipment used in the Work shall be subject to inspection and testing in accordance with
accepted standards to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for uses intended, unless otherwise specified in the Contract. If any Work shall be covered or concealed
without the approval or consent of the Owner, said Work shall, if required by the Owner, be uncovered for examination. If any test results are below specified minimums, the Owner may
order additional testing. The cost of said additional testing, any additional professional services required, and any other expenses incurred by the Owner as a result of said additional
testing shall be paid by the Contractor. Reexamination of any part of the Work may be ordered by the Owner, and if so ordered the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If said
Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract, the Owner shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If said Work is found not to be in accordance with the Contract,
the Contractor shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. Section 3.05 - Defective or Damaged Work If, in the opinion of the Owner, it is undesirable to replace any defective
or damaged materials or to reconstruct or correct any portion of the Work injured or not performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, the compensation to be paid to the Contractor
shall be reduced by an amount which, in the judgment of the Owner, shall be deemed to be equitable. Section 3.06 - Acceptance No previous inspection shall relieve the Contractor of
the obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. No payment, either partial or full, by the Owner to the Contractor shall excuse any failure by the Contractor
to comply fully with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall remedy all defects, paying the cost of any damage to other Work resulting therefrom. 8 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 4 --
CHANGES IN WORK Section 4.01 - Changes A. The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order and approve changes within the general scope of the Contract and the Contractor shall
promptly comply with such change orders. B. A change order is a written direction to the Contractor signed by the Owner, issued after execution of the Contract, authorizing a change
in the Work, extra work, or an adjustment in the Contract price or time of performance. C. No claims for changes, extra work or additional time to complete the Contract or an adjustment
in the Contract price shall be allowed unless such change is ordered in writing by the Owner. D. The Owner shall determine the amount by which the Contract consideration is to be increased
or decreased by a change order by one (1) or more of the following methods: 1. By agreement with the Contractor. 2. By applying the applicable price or prices previously bid and approved.
(i) To the extent that Unit Prices are applicable, as determined by the Owner, work shall be priced and paid for or credited in accordance with such Unit Prices; except that a Unit
Price shall not apply to any portion of work which is either reduced or increased by more than 25%. Said Unit Prices shall be valid for the duration of the project as applicable, unless
stipulated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. (ii) For Unit Price items, additions and deletion of like items shall be algebraically summed and then multiplied by the applicable
Unit Prices. For Direct Labor and Material items, all additions and deletions shall be algebraically summed for each subcontractor and then multiplied by the applicable markup. (iii)
Unit Prices are for work complete, measured in place and cover profit and all other costs and expenses. Unit Prices include, without limit, all conditions of the contract and all general
requirements such as layout, reproduction of Drawings and Specifications, testing and inspection, shop drawing and sample coordination, supervision (field and home office), small tools
and expendable items, insurance, taxes, temporary facilities and services, including access and safety, "asbuilt" drawings, and general and administrative overhead and profit. 9
Rev 4-2021 3. By estimating the fair and reasonable cost of: (i) Labor, including all wages, required wage supplements and insurance required by law paid to employees below the rank
of superintendent directly employed at the Site. (ii) Materials (iii) Equipment, excluding hand tools, which in the judgment of the Owner, would have been or will be employed exclusively
and directly on the Work. When submitting change orders, equipment which is common to the project scope at hand is expected to be previously paid for as overhead / general conditions
to the project. Special rental equipment or tools not common to the project that are required to perform the change order will be accepted as additional costs. 4. By determining
the actual cost of the extra work in the same manner as in Subsection 3 except the actual costs of the Contractor shall be used in lieu of estimated costs. E. Mark-up Percentages
1. Work performed by the Contractor: Where the Work is performed directly by the Contractor by adding to the total of such estimated costs a sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) thereof.
2. Work performed by a Subcontractor: Where the change order work is performed by a Subcontractor under contract with the Contractor, by adding a sum equal to fifteen (15%) of said
costs for the benefit of said Subcontractor, and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to ten percent (10%) of said costs. 3. Work performed by a Sub-Subcontractor:
Where work is performed by a Sub-Subcontractor, by adding the sum equal to fifteen percent (15%) of said costs for the benefit of said Sub-Subcontractor, by adding for the benefit
of the Subcontractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost and by adding for the benefit of the Contractor an additional sum equal to five percent (5%) of said cost.
The maximum aggregate of all mark-up percentages may not exceed twenty five percent (25%). 4. No Markup on Bonds and Insurance Costs: Change Order cost adjustments due to increases
or decreases in bond or insurance costs (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage. 5. Overtime Pay: No mark-up shall be paid on the premium portion of overtime
pay. 10 Rev 4-2021 6. Direct and Indirect Costs Covered by Markup Percentages: As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage is intended to cover the Contractor's
profit and all indirect costs and expenses associated with the change order work. Items intended to be covered by the Markup Percentage include, without limit: home office expenses,
branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management; superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting; purchasing; detailing;
legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; reproduction of drawings and specifications; shop drawings and sample coordination; “as-built” drawings; permits;
auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; parking permits; cellular phones; testing and inspection; temporary facilities; access and safety provisions; and warranty
expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools and/or tools already in use on site are also to be considered covered by the Markup Percentage. Small tools shall be defined as tools
and equipment (power or non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $750 7. Deduct Change Orders and Net Deduct Changes: The application of the markup percentage will
apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change order, the credit will be computed by applying the percentage so that a deductive change order
would be computed in the same manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted
and the markup percentage adjustments will be applied to the net amount F. Regardless of the method used by the Owner in determining the value of a change order, the Contractor, within
thirty (30) calendar days after a request for the estimate of value shall submit to the Owner a detailed breakdown of the Contractor's estimate, including all subcontractors details,
of the value of the Change Order Work, in the format detailed in Exhibit A. Each submission shall include an electronic .pdf format of all documentation. G. Unless otherwise specifically
provided for in a change order, the compensation specified therein includes and shall constitute a full payment for both the Work covered or arising from the order and for any damage
or expense incurred by the Contractor by any delays, including any and all impacts, known or unknown, or delays to other Work to be done under the Contract resulting from said change
order. The Contractor expressly waives all rights to any other compensation for said damage or expense. H. The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills, payrolls and vouchers covering
all items of cost and when requested by the Owner shall give the Owner access to accounts and records relating thereto. 11 Rev 4-2021 Section 4.02 – Claims for Extra Work If the
Contractor claims (i) that any work it has been ordered to do is extra work or (ii) that it has performed or is going to perform extra work or (iii) that any action or omission of the
Owner or the Architect is contrary to the terms and provisions of the Contract, the Contractor shall: A. Promptly comply with such order; B. Notwithstanding the provisions of this
Agreement, Article 4 of these General Condition and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within fourteen (14) calendar days after being
ordered to perform the work claimed by it to be extra work or within fourteen (14) calendar days after commencing performance of the extra work, whichever date shall be the earlier,
or within fourteen (14) calendar days after the said action or omission on the part of the Owner or the Architect occurred, a written notice of the basis of its claim and request a
determination thereof; C. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Agreement and any other provisions of the Contract documents to the contrary, file with the Owner, within thirty (30)
calendar days after said alleged extra work was required to be performed or said alleged extra work was commenced, whichever date shall be the earlier, or said alleged action or omission
by the Owner or the Architect occurred, a verified detailed statement, with documentary evidence, of the items and basis of its claim; D. Produce for the Owner’s examination, upon
notice from the Owner, all its books of account, bills, invoices, payrolls, subcontracts, time books, progress records, daily reports, bank deposit books, bank statements, checkbooks
and cancelled checks, showing all of its actions and transactions in connection with or relating to or arising by reason of its claim, and submit persons in its employment and in its
subcontractors' employment for examination under oath by any person designated by the Owner to investigate any claims made against the Owner under the Contract, such examination to
be made at the offices of the Contractor; and E. Proceed diligently, pending and subsequent to the determination of the Owner with respect to any such disputed matter, with the performance
of the Contract and in accordance with all instructions of the Owner and the Architect. F. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts of Section 4.02 shall be deemed
to be: (i) a conclusive and binding determination on its part that said order, work, action or omission does not involve extra work and is not contrary to the terms and provisions of
the Contract; and (ii) a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation or damages as a result of said order, work, action or omission. The provisions of Section
4.02 is to promptly afford the Owner opportunity to cancel or revise any order, change its plans, mitigate or remedy the effects or circumstances giving rise to a claim or take such
other action as may seem desirable and to verify any claimed expenses or circumstances as they occur. Compliance with such provisions is essential whether or not the Owner is aware
of the circumstances of any order or other circumstances which might constitute a basis for a claim and whether or not the Owner has indicated it will consider a claim in connection
therewith. G. No person has power to waive or modify any of the foregoing provisions and, in any action against the Owner to recover any sum in excess of the sum certified by the Owner
to be due under or by reason of the Contract, the Contractor must allege in its complaint and prove compliance with the provisions of this Section. 12 Rev 4-2021 Section 4.03 - Form
of Change Orders All change orders shall be processed, executed and approved via the Owner's E-Builder Change Order Process. No payment for change order Work shall be due the Contractor
unless a change order has been issued and approved as noted above and processed via E-Builder. ARTICLE 5 -- TIME OF COMPLETION Section 5.01 - Time of Completion A. The Work shall
be commenced at the time stated in the written order of the Owner and shall be completed no later than the dates of completion specified in the Contract. All required overtime to
maintain progress schedule is included in the Base Bid. B. The date of beginning and the times for completion of the Work, as specified in the Contract, are essential conditions of
the Contract. C. The Work shall be prosecuted diligently at such rate of progress as shall insure substantial and full completion within the time specified. It is expressly understood
and agreed, that the times for the completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual business and labor conditions
prevailing in the locality of the Site. D. Time is of the essence on each and every portion of the Work. In any instance in which additional time is allowed for the completion of
any Work, the new time of completion established by said extension shall be of the essence. If in the Architect’s or Owner's judgment, it becomes necessary at any time during construction
to accelerate and/or complete certain areas of the project, the Contractor shall concentrate efforts and manpower on designated areas. E. Where Work occurs within occupied areas, perform
same only on the approved schedule, so as not to interfere with normal operation of occupied areas. F. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or any excess cost if the Owner
determines that the Contractor is without fault and the Contractor's reasons for the time extension are acceptable to the Owner. The Contractor shall not be charged with damages or
any excess cost for delay in completion of the work if the Owner determines that the delay is due to: 1. any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Government
of the United States or the State of New York; 2. unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and approved by the Owner, including,
but not limited to, acts of God or of public enemy, acts of the Owner, fires, epidemics, quarantine, restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and unusually severe weather. 13 Rev
4-2021 G. The time for completion can only be extended by change order and may be extended for: 1. all of the Work, or 2. only that portion of the Work altered by the change order.
H. Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owner not more than ten (10) days after the commencement of the delay; otherwise it shall be waived. ARTICLE 6
– TERMINATION Section 6.01 - Termination for Cause In the event that any provision of this Contract is violated by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor of the Contractor, the Owner
may serve written notice upon the Contractor, and upon the Contractor's surety, if any, of the Owner's intention to terminate the Contract. The notice shall briefly state the reasons
for the termination and shall specify a termination date. If arrangements satisfactory to the Owner are not made to remove and remedy the violation, the Contract shall terminate upon
the date specified by the Owner in the notice. In the event of termination, the Owner may take over and complete the Work at the expense of the Contractor. The Contractor and Contractor's
surety shall be liable to the Owner for all costs thereby incurred by the Owner. In the event of such termination the Owner may take possession of and may utilize such materials, appliances,
and plant as may be located on the Site and which may be necessary or useful in completing the Work. Section 6.02 - Termination for Convenience of Owner The Owner, at any time, may
terminate the Contract in whole or in part. Any said termination shall be effected by delivering to the Contractor a notice of termination specifying the extent to which performance
of Work under the Contract is terminated and the date upon which said termination becomes effective. Upon receipt of the notice of termination, the Contractor shall act promptly to
minimize the expenses resulting from said termination. The Owner shall pay the Contractor for costs actually incurred by the Contractor up to the effective date of said termination,
but in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to compensation in excess of the total consideration of the Contract. In the event of said termination the Owner may take over the
Work and prosecute same to completion. Section 6.03 - Owner's Right to do Work The Owner may, after notice to the Contractor, without terminating the Contract and without prejudice
to any other right or remedy the Owner may have, perform or have performed by others all of the Work or any part thereof and may deduct the cost thereof from any monies due or to become
due the Contractor. 14 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 7 -- DISPUTES Section 7.01 - Disputes Procedure A. If the Contractor claims that any Work which the Contractor has been ordered to perform
will be Work which should have been authorized or directed by change order, or that any action or omission of the Owner is contrary to the terms of the Contract, the Contractor shall:
1. File a notice with the Owner which sets forth the basis of the Contractor's claim and requests a resolution of the dispute. Such notice shall be filed within fifteen (15) working
days after being ordered to perform the disputed work or within fifteen (15) working days after commencing performance of the disputed work, whichever is earlier, or within fifteen
(15) working days after the act or omission of the Owner which the Contractor claims is contrary to the terms of the Contract. 2. Proceed diligently with the performance of the work
in accordance with the instructions of the Owner pending the resolution of the dispute by the Owner. 3. Promptly comply with the order of the Owner regarding the disputed matter.
4. Any such decision, or any other decision of the Owner in respect to a dispute, shall be final unless the Contractor, within ten (10) working days after such decision, shall deliver
to the Owner a verified written statement which sets forth the Contractor's contention that the decision is contrary to a provision of the contract. Pending the decision of the Owner,
the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with the original decision. The Owner shall determine the validity of the Contractor's claim and such determination shall be final. The
Contractor may file a notice with the Owner reserving its rights in connection with the dispute but shall comply with the Owner's decision and complete the work as directed. B. No
claim for additional costs regarding changed or extra work shall be allowed unless the work was done pursuant to a written order of the Owner. C. The value of claims for extra work,
if allowed, shall be determined by the methods described in the Contract. Refer to Article 4 of these General Conditions. D. The Contractor's failure to comply with any or all parts
of Article 7 shall be deemed to be: 1. a conclusive and binding determination on the part of the Contractor that the order, work, action or omission is not contrary to the terms and
provisions of the Contract; 2. a waiver by the Contractor of all claims for additional compensation, known or unknown, including time extensions, or damages as a result of said order,
work, action, or omission. 15 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 8 -- SUBCONTRACTS Section 8.01 - Subcontracting A. The Contractor may utilize the services of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor
shall submit to the Owner, in writing, the name of each proposed Subcontractor and Sub-Subcontractor, as required by the Contract. The Contractor shall not award any Work to any Subcontractor
or Sub-Subcontractor without the prior written approval of the Owner. C. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the Work, acts and omissions of Subcontractors, and of persons
either directly or indirectly employed by Subcontractors. D. The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors
to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors, indemnification and to give the Contractor the same power to terminate any subcontract
that the Owner may exercise over the Contractor. E. The Contractor's use of Subcontractors shall not diminish the Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract. The Contractor shall control and coordinate the Work of Subcontractors. F. Nothing contained in the Contract shall create any contractual relationship between Subcontractors
and the Owner. ARTICLE 9 -- COORDINATION AND COOPERATION Section 9.01 - Cooperation with Other Contractors A. Normally, the Work will be performed by a single Contractor. However,
the Owner reserves the right to perform work related to the Work with its own forces or award separate contracts. In that event, the Contractor shall coordinate its operations with
the Owner's forces or separate Contractors. B. The Owner cannot guarantee the responsibility, efficiency, unimpeded operations or performance of any contractor. The Contractor acknowledges
these conditions and shall bear the risk of all delays including, but not limited to, delays caused by the presence or operations of other contractors. C. The Contractor shall keep
informed of the progress and workmanship of other contractors and shall notify the Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors where
said delay or defective workmanship may interfere with the Contractor's operations. D. Failure of a Contractor to keep so informed and failure to give notice of lack of progress or
defective workmanship by others shall be construed as acceptance by the Contractor of said progress and workmanship as being satisfactory for proper coordination with the Work. 16
Rev 4-2021 E. If the Contractor notifies the Owner, in writing, that another contractor on the Site is failing to coordinate the work of said contractor with the Work, the Owner shall
investigate the charge. If the Owner finds it to be true, the Owner shall promptly issue such directions to the other contractor with respect thereto as the situation may require.
The Owner shall not be liable for any damages suffered by the Contractor by reason of the other contractor's failure to promptly comply with the directions so issued by the Owner,
or by reason of another contractor's default in performance. F. If the Owner shall determine that the Contractor is failing to coordinate the Work with the work of other contractors
as the Owner has directed: 1. the Owner shall have the right to withhold any payments due under the Contract until the Owner's directions are complied with by the Contractor; and
2. the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from any and all claims or judgments for damages and from any costs or damages to which the Owner may be subjected or which
the Owner may suffer or incur by reason of the Contractor's failure promptly to comply with the Owner's directions. G. Should the Contractor sustain any damage through any act or omission
of any other contractor having a contract with the Owner or through any act or omission of any Subcontractor of said other contractor, the Contractor shall have no claim against the
Owner for said damage. H. Should any other contractor having a Contract with the Owner sustain damage through any act or omission of the Contractor or its Subcontractor, the Contractor
shall reimburse said other contractor for all said damages and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from all said claims. ARTICLE 10 -- PROTECTION OF RIGHTS, PERSONS AND PROPERTY
Section 10.01 - Accidents and Accident Prevention A. The Contractor shall at all times take reasonable precautions for the safety of persons engaged in the performance of the Work.
The Contractor shall comply fully with all applicable provisions of federal, state, and local law. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy
of the Contractor's Work, plant, appliances and methods, and for any damage which may result from the failure or the improper construction, maintenance, or operation of said Work, plant,
appliances and methods. B. The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of all cases of death, occupational disease, public health statistics or information, and injury requiring
medical attention, pursuat to government authority, or causing loss of time from work, arising out of or in the course of employment on Work under the Contract, and shall immediately
notify the Owner in writing of any injury which results in hospitalization or death, or significant near miss incidents that had the potential to result in serious injury or death.
The Contractor shall upload all completed Contractor and Subcontractor incident investigation forms and reports within five (5) working days of the incident. The report shall include
the extent of damage or injury, the persons involved and their employers, the number of days persons are hospitalized, and any other pertinent information required by Cornell University.
Such reporting shall be submitted on the e-Builder Accident Form. 17 Rev 4-2021 C. The Contractor shall provide to the Project Manager, Material Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 20 or
the equivalent) for all chemicals to be used on site. All chemicals requiring any precautionary measures (e.g., special storage or disposal requirements, personal protective equipment,
or additional ventilation), shall be brought to the attention of Cornell University for review and approval, prior to their use on site. 1. All chemicals brought on site by the Contractor
shall be clearly labeled. The label shall state the identity of the chemical, any associated hazards, and the Contractor's name. 2. All Contractor employees who are using chemicals
shall be made aware of the hazards associated with their use. Safe chemical handling procedures in accordance with OSHA or other governmental agencies, and manufacturer's recommendations
shall be used at all times. 3. The Contractor shall dispose of all chemicals in accordance with EPA and Cornell University requirements, regardless of the size of the container or
the quantity of waste, and must receive prior approval of Cornell University. 4. A Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan form is required (with or without waste) to be submitted
with submission of the first payment. The form can be found at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resourcefiles/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf D. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the initiation, maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. E. The Contractor shall, at all times,
guard the Owner's property from injury or loss in connection with the Work. The Contractor shall, at all times, guard and protect the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall replace
or make good any said loss or injury unless said loss or injury is caused directly by the Owner. F. The Contractor shall have full responsibility to install, protect and maintain all
materials and supplies in proper condition and forthwith repair, replace and make good any damage thereto until Final Acceptance. Section 10.02 - Adjoining Property A. The Contractor
shall be required to protect all the adjoining property and to repair or replace any such properties damaged or destroyed by the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors thereof,
by reason of, or as a result of activities under, for or related to the Contract. Section 10.03 - Emergencies A. In case of an emergency which threatens loss or injury to persons
or property, the Contractor will be allowed to act, without previous instructions from the Owner, in a diligent manner, to the extent required to avoid or limit such loss or injury,
and the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately thereafter of the action taken. 18 Rev 4-2021 Section 10.04 - Bonds A. Before commencing the performance of any work covered
by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner any required Bonds. The failure of the Contractor to supply the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the Contract signing
shall constitute a default on the part of the Contractor. Section 10.05 - Risks Assumed by the Contractor A. Indemnification. The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless
the Owner and its trustees, officers, agents and employees from and against all claims, damages, losses, fines, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys' fees, arising out of or
resulting from the performance of the Work including, but not limited to, bodily or personal injury, sickness, disease, death, or injury or damage to tangible property, to the extent
they arise out of or result from: 1. any negligent act or omission, or intentional or willful misconduct, violation of law, or breach of this Contract by the Contractor, or any of
its subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, or 2. any injury to an employee of the Contractor, its
subcontractors, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them. The indemnification obligation under this section shall not be limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation
or benefits payable by or for the Contractor under workers’ compensation, disability benefit or other employee benefit laws. B. In the event that Contractor is requested but refuses
to fully comply with and honor its indemnification obligations hereunder, then the Contractor shall, in addition to all other obligations, pay the cost, including reasonable attorneys'
fees, of bringing an action to enforce such indemnification obligations. C. Neither the Owner's final acceptance of the work to be performed hereunder nor the making of any payment
shall release the Contractor from its obligations under this Section. The enumeration elsewhere in the Contract of particular risks assumed by the Contractor or of particular claims
for which the Contractor is responsible shall not be deemed to limit the effect of the provisions of this Section or to imply that the Contractor assumes or is only responsible for
risk or claims of the type enumerated. Section 10.06 - Contractor's Compensation and Liability Insurance A. The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at its own cost and expense,
until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by this Contract, the following kinds of insurance: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance. A policy complying with the requirements
of the laws of the State of New York and any other laws that may be applicable thereto, including Coverage B - Employer's Liability with a limit of not less than $1,000,000. 19
Rev 4-2021 2. Contractor's Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A standard comprehensive general liability insurance policy, with contractual, completed operations, explosion,
collapse and underground property damage coverage’s issued to and covering the liability of the Contractor for all work and operations under this Contract, all obligations assumed by
the Contractor under this Contract and all damage to work performed by subcontractors on your behalf. The Contractor shall provide Broad Form Comprehensive General Liability Insurance,
and the Owner shall be an additional insured in the policy. The policy shall include cross liability coverage and shall be endorsed to indicate that it is primary coverage. The completed
operations coverage’s shall be maintained for not less than two years after acceptance of the work. The coverage under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for
Bodily Injury and Property Damage as follows, or such limits carried by the Contractor, whichever is greater: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY (BROAD FORM) $ 5,000,000
Each Occurrence $ 5,000,000 Aggregate 3. Automobile Liability Insurance. A policy covering the use in connection with the Work covered by the Contract Documents of all owned, non-owned
and hired vehicles bearing, or, under the circumstances under which they are being used, required by the Motor Vehicle Laws of the State of New York to bear license plates. The coverage
under such policy shall be not less than a combined single limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage of: BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY $ 1,000,000 Each Person $ 1,000,000
Each Accident B. In addition to maintaining all of the above insurances, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and its agents and employees from and against liability,
including additional premium due because of the Contractor's failure to maintain coverage limits as required under this section. C. Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor
shall be provided by or on behalf of all subcontractors to cover their own operations performed under this Contract. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modifications
in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. 20 Rev 4-2021 D. Before commencing the performance of any work covered by the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish
to the Owner a current certificate or certificates, in duplicate, of the insurance required under the foregoing provisions including copies of subcontractor’s certificates. Such certificates
shall be on a form prescribed by the Owner, shall list the various coverage’s and shall contain, in addition to any provisions hereinbefore required, a provision that the policy shall
not be changed or cancelled and that it will be automatically renewed upon expiration and continued in force until final acceptance by the Owner of all the work covered by the Contract,
unless the Owner is given thirty (30) days written notice to the contrary. Upon renewal of each of the Contractor's insurance coverage’s, the Owner shall be provided with a new certificate
of insurance showing such renewal. Certificates and written notices shall be directed to the Office of Facilities Contracts. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a certified
copy of each policy including any and all exclusions to such policy. E. If at any time any of the above required insurance policies should be cancelled, terminated or modified so
that insurance is not in effect as above required, then, if the Owner shall so direct, the Contractor shall suspend performance of the work covered in the Contract. If the said work
is so suspended, no extension of time shall be due on account thereof. The Owner may, at its option, obtain insurance affording coverage equal to that above required, at the Contractor's
expense. Section 10.07 - Liability Insurance of the Owner A. The Owner, at its own cost and expense, shall procure and maintain such liability insurance as will, in its opinion, protect
the Owner from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, and property damage which may arise from operations under this Contract. Section
10.08 - Owner's and Contractor's Responsibilities for Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance Hazards A. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in force a builders risk insurance
policy on the entire work. Such insurance shall be written on a completed value form and in an amount equal to the initial contract sum and modified by any subsequent modifications
to the contract sum. The insurance shall name Cornell University and the State of New York, all subcontractors and sub- subcontractors. The insurance policy shall contain a provision
that the insurance will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until the Contractor has given at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to Cornell University. The insurance shall
cover the entire work at the site, including reasonable compensation for Architect’s services and expenses made necessary by an insured loss. Insured property shall include portions
of the work located away from the site and in transit to the site. The policy shall cover the cost of removing debris and demolition as may be legally necessary. The policy shall
cover any boiler or machinery loss which may be suffered during installation and until final acceptance. The insurance required shall be written to cover “all risk” of physical loss
including a loss due to collapse. Any deductible shall be the responsibility of the Contractor but in no case shall the deductible be more than $10,000 unless Cornell University has
agreed to a higher deductible. The Contractor shall provide to Cornell University a certificate of insurance and a summary of coverage’s including all endorsements and exclusions prior
to commencement of the work. Once the policy is received, the Contractor shall provide a copy of such policy to Cornell University. There shall be a mutual waiver of recovery between
Cornell University, the Contractor and all other parties to the extent such losses are covered by the builders risk policy. If Cornell University wishes to occupy the building prior
to final acceptance and if the policy contains a provision which limits coverage for such partial occupancy, the parties agree work 21 Rev 4-2021 together to obtain consent of the
insurance company for such partial occupancy or use under mutually acceptable terms. B. Losses, if any, under such insurance shall be payable to the Owner. C. The Contractor shall
be responsible for any and all loss of materials connected with the construction due to unexplainable disappearance, theft or misappropriation of any kind or nature. D. The foregoing
provisions shall not operate to relieve the Contractor and subcontractors of responsibility for any loss or damage to their own or rented property or property of their employees, of
whatever kind or nature, or on account of labor performed under the Contract incidental to the repair, replacement, salvage, or restoration of such items, including but not limited
to tools, equipment, forms, scaffolding, and temporary structures, including their contents, regardless of ownership of such contents, except for such contents as are to be included
in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Owner shall in no event be liable for any loss or damage to any of the aforementioned items, or any other property of the Contractor,
subcontractors and the Architect, or employees, agents, or servants of same, which is not to be included in and remain a part of the permanent construction. The Contractor and subcontractors
severally waive any rights of recovery they may have against the Owner and the Architect for damage or destruction of their own or rented property, or property of their employees of
whatever kind or nature. Section 10.09 - Effect of Procurement of Insurance A. Neither the procurement nor the maintenance of any type of insurance by the Owner or the Contractor
shall in any way be construed or be deemed to limit, discharge, waive or release the Contractor from any of the obligations and risks imposed upon the Contractor by the Contract or
to be a limitation on the nature or extent of such obligations and risks. Section 10.10 - No Third Party Rights A. Nothing in the Contract shall create or give to third parties; any
claim or right of action against the Contractor, the Architect, and the Owner beyond such as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. ARTICLE 11 -- USE OR OCCUPANCY PRIOR TO
ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER Section 11.01 – Substantial Completion A. The term "substantial completion" means the completion of the Work to the extent that Cornell University may have uninterrupted
occupancy or use of the facility or specified portion thereof for the purpose for which intended. The Contractor shall obtain all certificates of occupancy required prior to occupancy,
and any electrical, mechanical and plumbing certificates, or other certificates or required approvals and acceptances by City, County, and State governments or other authority having
jurisdiction. 22 Rev 4-2021 Section 11.02 - Occupancy Prior to Acceptance A. If, before Final Acceptance, the Owner desires Beneficial Occupancy of the Work, or any part thereof,
which is completed or partly completed, or to place or install therein equipment and furnishings, the Owner shall have the right to do so, and the Contractor shall in no way interfere
with or object to said Beneficial Occupancy by the Owner. B. Said Beneficial Occupancy (1) shall not constitute acceptance of space, systems, materials or elements of the Work, nor
shall said Beneficial Occupancy affect the start of any guarantee period, and (2) shall not affect the obligations of the Contractor for Work which is not in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract or other obligations of the Contractor under the Contract. C. The Contractor shall continue the performance of the Work in a manner which shall not unreasonably interfere
with said use, occupancy and operation by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 -- PAYMENT Section 12.01 - Provision for Payment A. The Owner agrees to pay the Contract Price to the Contractor
for the performance of this Contract and the fulfillment of all the Contractor's obligations. The Contract Price means all costs reimbursable under the Contract Documents. B. The
final certificate of the Architect shall certify that the Contract has been completed within the stipulated time, and shall not be issued until all drawings and specifications have
been returned to the Owner. The issuance of said certificates, however, or any payments made thereon shall not lessen the total responsibility of the Contractor to complete the work
to the satisfaction of the Owner in accordance with the Contract. C. Payments on the Contract Price shall be made each month as the work progresses in accord with the following procedure:
1. The Contractor's schedule of values, including quantities, aggregating the total Contract Price, divided so as to facilitate payments to subcontractors as specified herein, shall
be the basis for monthly progress payments. This schedule, as shown in the E-Builder Schedule of Values Process, when approved by the Owner shall be used as a basis for progress payments.
In applying for payments, the Contractor shall submit a statement based upon this approved schedule. 2. (a) On a date agreed upon by the Owner, Architect, and Contractor, a meeting
shall be held by the Owner to review the work completed and materials on hand. This meeting shall review each item to be submitted by the Contractor in the requisition for payment.
(b) On the first day of each month, or as soon thereafter as practicable, the Contractor shall submit via the E-Builder Payment Application Process, a statement and all applicable
documentation setting forth in detail the cost of the work done and materials delivered to the job site up to and including the last day of the previous month and shall make application
for payment 23 Rev 4-2021 of ninety percent (90%) of the amount of said statement, less the aggregate of all previous payments made by the Owner against the Contract Price. (c) Each
statement and application shall be accompanied by an affidavit, executed by the Contractor, certifying that the statement is true and correct, and that all bills for labor, and materials
incorporated in or delivered to the job, due and payable at the time of the preceding progress payment, have been paid. The Contractor shall attach a single .pdf file of certified
payrolls for all employees on the project as indicated in the EBuilder Payment Application Process. Before final payment is made, the Contractor shall submit evidence that all payrolls,
material bills and other indebtedness incurred in connection with the Contract have been paid, including final waivers of any liens. 3. Each such application for payment shall be subject
to the review and approval of the Architect. If the Architect finds that the affidavit and application for payment are acceptable and that all the above requirements in connection
therewith have been complied with, the Architect shall, within seven (7) calendar days after receiving such application for payment, certify to the Owner that the payment applied for
is due and payable to the Contractor. 4. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment constitutes a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the date of the Application
for Payment, that the work has progressed to the point indicated, that, to the best of their knowledge, information, and belief, the quality of the work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The Owner shall make payment in the manner provided in the Agreement within thirty (30) calendar
days of receipt of the approved Certificate in E-Builder. Approval of the Payment Application by the Architect shall not be deemed to represent that the Architect has made exhaustive
or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work or that the Architect has reviewed the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or proceedings
or that the Architect has made any examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. Section 12.02
– Stored Materials & Equipment A. The Contractor may submit, no more than thirty (30) calendar days after contract approval and prior to the first application for payment, a written
request to Cornell University for permission to invoice for critical materials and equipment ready, but not yet incorporated into the work. For the purpose of this paragraph, "critical
materials and equipment" eligible for payment are defined as those items affecting project schedule or budget as determined by Cornell University's evaluation of the project schedule.
This includes finished goods normally shipped to the job site in a condition ready for incorporation into the work that require significant time for delivery. Raw materials or work-in-process
at a manufacturer's plant location shall not be eligible for such consideration unless the Contractor can demonstrate that Cornell University can save money by purchasing material in
bulk quantities at the beginning of the project. 24 Rev 4-2021 B. Cornell University will be under no obligation to accept such requests. C. Payment authorized by Cornell University
for such "long-lead" critical materials and equipment not yet incorporated in the work will be made provided the Contractor submits Exhibit H and complies with the following: 1. Items
shall be listed in the “Total Materials Presently Stored” column on the Application for Payment. 2. Transfer of Title shall be executed and included in the Application for Payment.
3. The method used to store off-site items shall be described in the Contractor's request to invoice for such materials and equipment. Cornell University shall give prior approval
of the location of off-site storage. Items requiring special environmental conditions to protect their integrity (temperature, humidity, etc.) shall be continuously stored in such
an environment. 4. Items in storage shall be identified as property of Cornell University, and a description of the identification method used shall be submitted in the Application
for Payment. Contractor shall maintain all necessary insurance on items in storage. 5. A written and photographic inventory of items and method used to verify such inventory, including
Contractor's certification that all quantities have been received in good condition at the job site or other location acceptable to Cornell University shall be submitted with the Application
for Payment. 6. A copy of the vendor's invoice is included with the Contractor's invoice. Packing lists will not be accepted. D. Cornell University retains the right to verify storage
by physical inspection prior to payment approval and at any time thereafter. Such payment shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for protecting, safeguarding, and properly
installing the equipment or materials. The Warranty and Guarantee period shall not commence until installation and final acceptance of the completed work by Cornell University. The
Contractor shall bear the cost of transporting materials stored off-site to the site E. Each subsequent invoice will restate the prior months' materials and equipment not incorporated
in the Work and current month additions and deletions for materials and equipment incorporated into the Work. F. Upon the making of partial payment by Cornell University, all work,
materials, and equipment covered thereby shall become the sole property of Cornell University. Partial payments, however, shall not constitute acceptance of the Contractor's work by
Cornell University, nor be construed as a waiver of any right or claim by Cornell University. 25 Rev 4-2021 Section 12.03 – Retention A. Retention in the amount of ten percent
(10%) of the value of the Work done and materials furnished and installed under this Agreement shall be retained by the Owner as part security for the faithful performance of the Contractor’s
work within the time specified, and shall be paid as indicated in Section 12.06. B. Cornell University in its sole discretion may, upon the Contractor's application thereof, release
retention applicable to a subcontractor, provided that there are no outstanding claims associated with the subcontractor's work and the subcontractor and Contractor submit an acceptable
partial or final release when submitting the payment application process. If the project is bonded, a Consent of Surety to the reduction must be attached as well. Section 12.04 -
Withholding Payments A. The Owner may, on account of contemporaneous or subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or a part of any Certificate to such extent
as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account of: 1. Defective work not remedied. 2. To assure payment of just claims of any persons supplying labor or materials for
the work and to discharge any lien filed against the Owner's property. 3. A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed for the balance of the Contract Price then unpaid.
4. Damage to another Contractor. 5. Unsatisfactory prosecution of the work by the Contractor. 6. Failure to provide and maintain an acceptable Critical Path Method Network Schedule.
Section 12.05 – Documents and Conditions Precedent to Final Payment A. As-Built Documentation 1. Prior to acceptance by the Owner of all work covered by the Contract, the Contractor
shall furnish to the Owner through the Architect one (1) set of current reproducible full-size Contract Drawings on which the Contractor has recorded in a neat and workmanlike manner
all instances where actual field construction differs from work as indicated on the Contract Drawings. B. Final Documentation: 1. Prior to final payment, and before the issuance
of a final certificate for payment in accordance with the provisions of these General Conditions, file the following documents with the Owner. 26 Rev 4-2021 a. Warranties, Bonds,
Service & Maintenance Contracts and any other extended guarantees stated in the technical sections of the Specifications. b. Release or Waiver of Lien for the Contractor and Sub-Contractors
in accordance with Exhibit C, attached hereto. c. Project Record Documents as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 39. d. Notification that Final Punch List work has been
completed. e. Manufacturers Instruction and Maintenance Manuals as defined in General Requirements Section 01 78 23. f. Fixed Equipment Inventory as defined in General Requirements
Section 01 78 22. 2. The Contractor shall also provide a CD containing scanned .pdf format and/or Word Documents of all documentation. Section 12.06 - Final Payment and Release
A. When the Contractor determines that the work or a designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare for submission to the Owner a list of items to
be completed or corrected. This list, prepared by the Contractor, shall constitute a complete detailed list of defects and deficiencies which, when remedied, will complete all Contract
requirements. The submittal shall be accompanied by a statement to that effect. B. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor
to complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. When the Architect, on the basis of an inspection, determines that the work is substantially complete, the Architect
will then prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the Architect will promptly
make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the work acceptable under the provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contract fully performed, and if bonds have been required,
the written Consent of the Surety to the payment of the balance due, and a satisfactory Release of Lien, attached hereto as Exhibit "C" and made a part of the Contract Documents, has
been submitted by the Contractor, each subcontractor and subsubcontractor, the Contractor will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment, stating that to the best of their knowledge,
information, and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections the work has been completed in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, and
that the entire balance is due and payable. D. All prior certificates upon which progress payments may have been made, being estimates, shall be subject to correction to the final
certificate. E. The acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment aforesaid shall constitute a general release of the Owner and its agents or representatives from all claims and
liability to the Contractor. 27 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 13 -- TAX EXEMPTION Section 13.01 - Tax Exemption A. The Owner is exempt from payment of Federal, State and local taxes, including
sales and compensating use taxes on all materials and supplies incorporated into the completed Work. These taxes are not to be included in bids. This exemption does not apply to tools,
machinery, equipment or other property leased by or to the Contractor or a Subcontractor, or to supplies and materials which, even though they are consumed, are not incorporated into
the completed Work, and the Contractor and Subcontractors shall be responsible for and pay any and all applicable taxes, including sales and compensating use taxes, on said leased tools,
machinery, equipment or other property and upon all said unincorporated supplies and materials. B. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall obtain any and all necessary certificates
or other documentation from the appropriate governmental agency or agencies, and use said certificates or other documentation as required by law, rule or regulation. ARTICLE 14 --
GUARANTEE Section 14.01 - Guarantee A. The Contractor, at the convenience of the Owner, shall remove, replace and/or repair at their own costs and expense any defects in workmanship,
materials, ratings, capacities or characteristics occurring in or to the work covered by Contract for the period of one (1) year or within such longer period as may otherwise be provided
in the Contract, the period of such guarantee to commence with the Owner's final acceptance of all work covered under the Contract, and the Contractor, upon demand, shall pay for all
damage to all other work resulting from such defects and all expenses necessary to remove, replace and/or repair such work which may be damaged in removing, replacing or repairing the
said defects. Acceptance means final acceptance of the entire work, early partial occupancy notwithstanding B. In some instances the nature of the work may require the Owner to accept
various components, equipment, spaces or phase of the project. In such cases the Contractor shall submit a separate guarantee for the Owner's acceptance on the form attached hereto
as Exhibit "E". Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a guarantee for the project on the form attached hereto as Exhibit "E". ARTICLE 15 -- STANDARD
PROVISIONS Section 15.01 - Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted Each and every provision of law or clause required by law to be inserted in the Contract and made a part hereof,
shall be deemed to be inserted herein and, in the event any such provision is not inserted or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, this Contract shall
forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. 28 Rev 4-2021 Section 15.02 - Laws Governing the Contract The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the
State of New York, without reference to conflict of law principles. Any and all proceedings relating to the subject matter hereof shall be maintained in New York State Supreme Court,
Tompkins County or the federal district court for the Northern District of New York, which courts shall have exclusive jurisdiction for such purposes. Section 15.03 - Assignments
The Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part without prior written consent of the Owner. Section 15.04 - No Third Party Rights Nothing in the Contract shall create
or shall give to third parties any claim or right of action against the Owner, beyond such rights as may legally exist irrespective of the Contract. Section 15.05 - Waiver of Rights
of Owner A. None of the provisions of the Contract will be considered waived by the Owner except when such waiver is given in writing. Section 15.06 - Limitation on Actions No action
or proceeding shall be filed or shall be maintained by the Contractor against the Owner unless said action shall be commenced within six (6) months after receipt by the Owner of the
Contractor's final requisition or, if the Contract is terminated by the Owner, unless said action is commenced within six (6) months after the date of said termination. Section 15.07
- Owner's Representative The Owner shall designate a representative authorized to act in its behalf with respect to the Project. The Owner or its representative shall examine documents
and shall render approvals and decisions pertaining thereto promptly, to avoid unreasonable delay in the progress of the Contractor's work. Only directives from Cornell University’s
designated representative (Caterina McFadden) shall be recognized by the Contractor. ARTICLE 16 – MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISES Section 16.01 – Definitions The terms "Minority-owned
business enterprise" ("MBE") or “Women-owned business enterprise” (“WBE”) or “minority group member” shall have the same meaning as under Section 310 of the New York State Executive
Law, as the same may be from time to time amended. 29 Rev 4-2021 Section 16.02 – Participation by Minority and Women Business Enterprises A. The Contractor shall, in addition to
any other nondiscrimination provision of the Contract and at no additional cost to Owner, fully comply and cooperate with the Owner in the implementation of MBE and WBE programs. These
requirements include equal employment opportunities for minority group members and women (“EEO”) and contracting opportunities for certified minority and women-owned business enterprises
(“MWBEs”). The Contractor’s demonstration of “good faith efforts” shall be a part of these requirements. These provisions shall be deemed supplementary to, and not in lieu of, the nondiscrimination
provisions required by New York State or other applicable federal, state or local laws. B. The Contractor shall include the provisions of this Article in each and every Agreement and/or
Contract in such a manner that the provisions of this Article will be binding upon each subcontractor and supplier as to work in connection with and related to this Agreement. C.
For purposes of this procurement: Facilities and Campus Services supports Cornell University’s ongoing commitment to encourage business opportunities and diversity among its vendor
community by promoting minority owned and controlled business’ development as a shared responsibility. The University’s intention is to create and expand opportunities for minority,
women, veteran, LGBTQ, small and locally owned businesses through construction labor opportunities and the procurement of goods and services. Positive good faith efforts to advance
the University’s objectives shall be made by all Contractors, engaging, and maximizing these diverse enterprise goals, and to positively drive Cornell's economic impact. Cornell
University Diversity Council Statement: "Cultivate partnerships with the widest spectrum of Off-Campus entities and include a fully diverse range of Off-Campus participants in Cornell's
events, contracts, services, and initiatives." Section 16.03 – Reports and Records A. The following forms, attached hereto as Exhibit "D" and made a part of the Contract Documents,
are to be used in submitting MBE/WBE Utilization Reports when requested by the Owner. 1. MWBE Utilization Report 2. Affirmative Action Workforce Report B. The Contractor shall submit
an Affirmative Action Workforce Report on a monthly basis, or as requested by Owner. The Contractor shall provide a single monthly report, or as requested by the Owner, inclusive of
all subcontractor information for the project labor and such report must document the use of MWBE businesses in the Contract. 30 Rev 4-2021 ARTICLE 17 -- ACCOUNTINGS, INSPECTION
AND AUDIT The Contractor agrees to keep books and records showing the actual costs incurred for the Work. Such books and records (including, without limitation, any electronic data
processing files used by the Contractor in analyzing and recording the Work) shall be open for inspection and audit by the Owner and its authorized representatives at reasonable hours
at the Contractor's local office or at the Owner's office, if necessary, and shall be retained by the Contractor for a period of seven years after the Work has been completed, except
that if any litigation, claim or audit is started before the expiration date of the seven year period, the records shall be retained until all litigation, claims or audit findings involving
the records have been resolved.. Each Sub-Contractor shall be similarly obligated to maintain, for inspection and audit by the Owner, books and records respecting the Work. If requested
by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish copies of any and all subcontracts, purchase orders and/or requisitions of any nature associated with the project. ARTICLE 18 – CONTRACTOR
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION At project completion the Owner shall schedule a meeting to review with the Contractor their performance for the project unless performance warrants additional
reviews. The Owner may schedule a meeting at fifty percent (50% completion) based on project complexity and/or duration. The Owner shall present its review based on the attached “Contractor
Performance Evaluation”, Exhibit I. The Contractor shall be given the opportunity to provide input as to the findings of the evaluation after completion by the Owner. ARTICLE 19
-- ROYALTIES AND PATENTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patents, and shall save Cornell University
harmless from loss on account thereof; except that Cornell University shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or product is specified by Cornell University
unless the Contractor shall have reason to believe that the particular process or product infringes a patent, in which event it shall be responsible for loss on account thereof unless
it promptly provides such information to Cornell University. ARTICLE 20 -- CONFIDENTIALITY AND USE OF OWNER'S NAME Section 20.01 - Release of Information The Contractor shall not
divulge information concerning the Work (including news releases, social media, internal house organizations, applications for permits, etc.) to anyone without Cornell University's
prior written approval, except to subcontractors and suppliers to the extent that they need such information to perform their work. The Contractor shall require a similar agreement
from each such subcontractor and supplier, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. Cornell University reserves the right to release all information, as well as to time its release
and specify its form and content. The Contractor may obtain Cornell University's approval to release information by submitting such request to the Cornell University Project Manager.
31 Rev 4-2021 Section 20.02 - Confidential Information The term "Confidential Information" means all unpublished information obtained or received from Cornell University during
the term of this Contract which relates to Cornell University's research, development, manufacturing and business affairs. The Contractor shall not disclose confidential information
to any person, except to its employees and subcontractors to the extent that they require it in the performance of their Work, during the term of this Contract and until authorized
by Cornell University in writing. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall hold all confidential information in trust and confidence for Cornell University, and shall use confidential
information only for the purpose of this Contract. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall require all of their employees to whom confidential information is revealed to comply
with these provisions. The Contractor shall have an agreement with each subcontractor, requiring their compliance with the foregoing. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to
defend in case of litigation related to its services rendered, permission shall be sought from Cornell University, who shall not unreasonably withhold such permission, before any disclosures
are made. This Section does not apply to information which (1) is or becomes known in public domain or (2) is learned by the Contractor from third parties. Section 20.03 - Use of
Owner's Name on Non-Work Related Content The Contractor shall not use or permit on the job site, in its external, advertising, marketing program, social media, or other promotional
efforts, any date, pictures, or other content unrelated to the Contracted Work, or any representation of the Owner except on the specific written authorization in advance of the Owner's
Representative. ARTICLE 21 -- CORNELL UNIVERSITY STANDARDS OF ETHICAL CONDUCT Cornell University expects all executive officers, trustees, faculty, staff, student employees, and
others, when acting on behalf of the university, to maintain the highest standard of ethical conduct as per Cornell University's Policy 4.6 - Standards of Ethical Conduct, a copy of
which is available at https://fcs.cornell.edu/project-contractors-and-consultants This includes treating equally all persons and firms currently doing business with or seeking to
do business with or for Cornell University, whether as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. Such persons and firms are respectfully reminded that Cornell University employees
and their families may not personally benefit from Cornell University's business relationships by the acceptance of gifts or gratuities, defined as a gift in excess of $75.00 given
to a Cornell employee for personal use. Items not considered gifts/gratuities include occasional business meals, items of an advertising nature, and items that are generally distributed
to all potential customers. In addition, it is expected that the Contractor's officers and employees shall conduct all business related to this Contract within the highest ethical
standards, observing applicable policies, practices, regulations, law, and professional standards. All parties are expected to report violations of this policy to appropriate university
personnel. You may file a report to on the web https://secure.ethicspoint.com/domain/en/report_custom.asp?clientid=6357 or contact Cornell University through EthicsPoint by dialing
toll-free 1-866-293-3077. 32 Rev 4-2021 CORNELL UNIVERSITY Construction Contract Change Order Forms Instructions to Change Order Documentation Cornell University has several
standard forms related to Changes in the Work. These forms have been prepared to comply with contract requirements related to Changes in the Work. The standard Construction Contract
Change Order Request and Change Order Summary Forms shall be used to facilitate preparation of change order requests in conformity with construction contract requirements. These
forms shall be used by the Contractor and by all Subcontractors in preparing their respective cost estimates for services associated with the Changed Work for the Owner’s consideration
and shall include all associated back-up documentation supporting the request. Direct Cost of the Work: 1. Direct Labor – Include the “wages paid” hourly direct labor and/or foreman
necessary to perform the required change. “Wages paid” is the burdened labor rate documented in accordance with Section 2.14 – Project Labor Rates of the General Conditions. “Assigned
Personnel or Work Crews” should be stated by trade or type of work performed not by name of person or company title. For example carpenter, mason, backhoe operator, etc. Supervisory
personnel in district or home office shall not be included. Supervisory personnel on the job-site, but with broad supervisory responsibility and paid as salaried personnel, shall not
be included as Direct Labor 2. Direct Material – Include the acquisition cost of all materials directly required to perform the required change. Examples of “Unit of Measure” include
square feet, cubic yards, linear feet, days, gallons, etc. 3. Equipment – Include the rental cost of equipment items necessary to perform the change. For company-owned equipment
items, include documentation of internal rental rates. Charges for small tools, and craft specific tools are not allowed. Bond Premiums The Contractor’s actual documented bond premium
rate as entered into the eBuilder Bid Portal Response Form – Step 3 – Additional Required Information Custom Fields at time of bid shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of
the proposed change. Overhead & Profit The Contractor’s overhead & profit rate shall be added to all direct and indirect costs of the proposed change in accordance with the Contract.
EXHIBIT "A" EXHIBIT "A" CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY DATE: PCO # PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1 DIRECT COST OF WORK:
NAME OF CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTORS TOTAL PERFORMING WORK COST TOTAL COST OF PROPOSED CHANGE ORDER ITEM $0 TOTAL CONTRACT DAYS ADDED/DELETED FROM PROJECT SCHEDULE THIS PAGE
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK FINAL RELEASE EXHIBIT "B" FINAL WAIVER OF CLAIMS AND LIENS AND RELEASE OF RIGHTS Sworn to before me this Corporation or Business Name
Day of 20 By: Title: Date Contract Date Project Contract Price Address Net Extras and Deductions City Adjusted Contract Price County Amount
Previously Paid State Balance Due - Final Payment The undersigned hereby acknowledges that the above Balance Due when paid represents payment in full for all labor, materials,
etc., furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier in connection with its work on the above Project in accordance with the Contract. In consideration of the amounts and sums
previously received, and the payment of $ being the full and Final Payment amount due, the below named Contractor or Supplier does hereby waive and release the Owner from any and all
claims and liens and rights of liens upon the premises described above, and upon improvements now or hereafter thereon, and upon the monies or other considerations due or to become
due from the Owner or from any other person, firm or corporation, said claims, liens and rights of liens being on account of labor, services, materials, fixtures or apparatus heretofore
furnished by the below named Contractor or Supplier to the Project. The premises as to which said claims and liens are hereby released are identified as follows: . The undersigned
further represents and warrants that he/she is duly authorized and empowered to sign and execute this waiver on his/her own behalf and on behalf of the company or business for which
he/she is signing; that it has properly performed all work and furnished all materials of the specified quality per plans and specifications and in a good and workmanlike manner, fully
and completely; that it has paid for all the labor, materials, equipment and services that it has used or supplied, that it has no other outstanding and unpaid applications, invoices,
retentions, holdbacks, expenses employed in the prosecution of work, chargebacks or unbilled work or materials against the Owner as of the date of the aforementioned last and final
payment application; and that any materials which have been supplied or incorporated into the above premises were either taken from its fully-paid or open stock or were fully paid for
and supplied on the last and final payment application or invoice. The undersigned further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner for any losses or expenses (including
without limitation reasonable attorneys' fees) should any such claim, lien or right of lien be asserted by the below named Contractor or Supplier or by any of its or their laborers,
material persons or subcontractors. In addition, for and in consideration of the amounts and sums received, the below named Contractor or Supplier hereby waives, releases and relinquishes
any and all claims, rights or causes of action in equity or law whatsoever arising out of through or under the above mentioned Contract and the performance of work pursuant thereto.
The below named Contractor or Supplier further guarantees that all portions of the work furnished and installed are in accordance with the Contract and that the terms of the Contract
with respect to this guarantee will remain in effect for the period specified in said Contract. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "C" GUARANTEE Date:
In accordance with plans and specifications and the terms and conditions of our contract with Cornell University dated , we hereby guarantee the as found in the specifications
for , Ithaca, New York to be free (Project Title) from defects in materials and workmanship for the period of year(s) from , the date of acceptance by the Owner. (Date)
(COMPANY) By: Title: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I 1 MWBE Utilization Report PART I – PROJECT INFORMATION
e-Builder Project No. Project Name: Contract Value: Contractor Name and Address: Primary Contact Name, Phone Number, Email: Bid Date: Contractor’s MWBE Contact Name, Phone Number,
Email: PART II – MWBE LIST (Update as MWBE firms come under contract, sign and date, resubmit) Subcontractor Name, Address, Contact, Email, MBE or WBE (List your firm if also MBE
or WBE) Federal ID Number Dollar Value of Contract or Purchase Order Description of Work or Supplies Subcontractor or Supplier Start and End Dates
(Update totals as MWBE firms are added/subtracted to above list) Print Name of Principal or Officer: Title: Signature: Date: EXHIBIT "D" – FORM I
2 MWBE Utilization Report PART III – Quarterly Utilization Report (Subcontractors & Sub-subcontractors fill this out and submit to General Contractor to compile into a single
form.) Double click on table to edit. Month/Year: General Contractor, Subcontractor, SubSubcontractor, or Vendor Trade Dollar Value of SubContract or Purchase Order MBE, WBE, or
N/A % of Total Contract TOTALS 0 0 EXHIBIT "D" - FORM II SUMMARY OF BID ACTIVITY WITH MBE AND WBE SUBCONTRACTORS AND VENDORS Please print or type all information, except
where a signature is required. PROJECT: Name of Prime Contract Bidder: Address (Street, City, State and Zip Code): Contact Person (Name, Title and Telephone Number):
MBE and WBE Subcontractor/Vendor Item/ Bid Submitted: Award Status Date of (Indicate which) Trade Date Amount Date Amount Elimination
EXPLANATION OF ELIMINATION: Include meetings held for negotiation, etc. (Use additional sheet if necessary) OFFICER OF FIRM: Name and Title:
Date: Signature: EXHIBIT "D" - FORM III EXHIBIT "E" LABOR RATE BREAKDOWN PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: TRADE: EFFECTIVE DATE: EXPIRATION DATE:
Base Hourly Rate: $ Payroll Taxes and Insurance % per Hour F.I.C.A. Federal Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) State Unemployment (Base on 1500 hours of work) * Worker's Compensation
* Bodity Injury & Property Damage Disability TOTAL % Payroll Taxes and Insurance Rates: Base Rate (x) Total % = $ * Supplemental Benefits $ per Hour Vacation Health & Welfare Pension
Annuity Education / Training Industry Total Hourly Fringe Benefits $ Hourly Labor Rate: Base Rate, Taxes/Insurance and Fringe Benefits $ Adjustment for a composite rate which includes
apprentices: $ CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATION Signature of Authorized Representative: Print Name: Print Title: I certify that the labor rates, insurance enumerations, labor fringe enumerations
and expenses are correct and in accordance with actual and true cost incurred. Rates are net Contractor cost after premium discounts and experience modifications have been applied against
manual rate. THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "F” STORED MATERIALS INVOICING DOCUMENTATION PROJECT TITLE: CONTRACT NO. CONTRACTOR: SUBCONTRACTOR: REASON
FOR REQUEST: APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT NO. __________ DATE: 1 Material Identification Description: Quantity: Provide Specific Location of Materials Stored: 2 Material Value Attach an
Invoice or Quantified Statement of Value. $ 3 Certificate of Insurance Attach a Certificate of Insurance for the above specified materials. Certificate shall name "Cornell University"
as a loss payee with respect to the specified materials. 4 Transfer of Title The Contractor hereby agrees to transfer complete ownership of all listed materials to Cornell University
at the time payment is made to Contractor for the above referenced Application for Payment. The Contractor remains responsible for all contractual requirements for the above listed
materials including complete installation and providing of all warranties. Signed: Date: THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK EXHIBIT "G" Contractor Performance Evaluation
Project Information Project Name:____________________________________________ Date Of Evaluation___________________ Project Number___________________________ Evaluators; Project Team________________
_____________ Campus_________________________________ Project Start Date_________________________ Substantial Completion________________ Contractor______________________________________________
Prequalification Status_________________ Original Contract Amount__________________________________ Total Change Order Amount_____________ Contractor Project Manager_________________________________
__________ Initial Evaluation_____ Contractor Superintendent____________________________________________ Final Evaluation_____ Type Of Contract Prime Contractor___ Subcontractor___ Construction
Manager___ Project Comments/Description Performance Evaluation Please give one rating for each category. Add comments as required to justify your rating. Fails to Achieve Needs
Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 1 Quality of Workmanship Rate this contractor's performance in regards to
quality of work a. Compliance with project drawings and specifications b. Workmanship quality and accuracy c. Tools- quality and sufficient quantity d. Equipment - sufficient quantity
and operating condition e. Quality of jobsite craft personnel Comments: 2 Scheduling/Productivity Rate this contractor's performance with regard to producing and meeting contract schedules
and milestones a. Project schedule quality and completeness b. Controlling of project schedule c. Manpower allocation for maintaining schedule d. Material deliveries to support project
schedule e. Ability to meet substantial completion date and project milestones f. Productivity of work force g. Ability to deal with added work and unforeseen issues. Comments: 3 Subcontractor
Management Rate this contractor's ability, effort and success in managing and coordinating subcontractors(if no subcontractors rate overall management performance) Comments: 3A Major
subcontractor performance(score not added in final Contractor Evaluation For contractor information only a. Plumbing Contractor overall Performance Comments: b. HVAC Contractor overall
Performance Comments: c. Electrical Contractor overall Performance Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation
Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 4 MBE/WBE Participation Rate this contractor's MBE/WBE solicitation effort and participation for this project for, Project Team, Subcontractors, Material Vendors
Comments: 5 Safety Rate this contractor's performance in regards to project safety a. Timely submission of site specific safety program b. Knowledge of OSHA standards c. Implementation
of safety rules and regulations d. Promotion and creation of safety awareness e. Daily overall housekeeping f. Safety record g. Response to safety concerns h. Awareness of public safety
Comments: 6 Contract Administration Rate this contractor's performance in regards to contract administration as per criteria below a. Timely submission of complet and correct documentation
required for insurance and bond b. Change order processing c. Timely submission of RFI's, Shop Drawings, and change orders d. Subcontractor payments made promptly e. Timely submission
of complete and correct payment applications f. Quality of paperwork Comments: 7 Working Relationships Rate this contractor's working relationships with other parties (Cornell, Design
Team, subcontractors,ect.) Comments: Fails to Achieve Needs Fully AchieveFreq ExceedsCons Exceed Expectation Improvement Expectation Expectation Expectation 1 2 3 4 5 8 Supervisory
Personnel Rating Rate the overall performance of this contractor's on site supervisory personnel and project management staff Comments: 9 Contract Close-Out Rate this contractor's overall
ability to efficiently close out the project a. Timely completion of all punchlist items b. Timely resolution of all outstanding change orders c. Timely submission of all close out
documents(O&M's, As-Builts, warranties, final releases and consent of surety) d. Quality of close out documentation and timely completion of any outstanding audit questions Comments:
Summary Sheet Project:___________________________________________ Contractor:________________________________________ Rating Per Weight Performance Categories Category % Scoring 1 Quality
of Workmanship 0 15.00% 0 2 Scheduling 0 10.00% 0 3 Subcontractor Management 0 10.00% 0 4 MBE/WBE Participation 0 10.00% 0 5 Safety 0 10.00% 0 6 Contract Administration 0 10.00% 0 7
Working Relationships 0 10.00% 0 8 On Site Supervisory Personnel Rating 0 18.00% 0 9 Contract Close Out 0 7.00% 0 Over All Rating 0 Rating Reference Fails to achieve expectation 1 Needs
improvement 2 Fully achieves expectation 3 Frequently exceeds expectation 4 Consistently exceeds expectatio 5 OWNER COMMENTS: OWNER COMMENTS on 3A Ratings: CONTRACTOR COMMENTS:
(To be completed by Contractor prior to Owner/Contractor discussion meeting) THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS TO THE CONTRACT PATHOGENS CONTAGIONS
COVID-19 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS PROTOCOLS AND SAFETY REQUISITES TO CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY APPLICABLE TO PATHOGENS, CONTAGIONS AND/OR COVID-19 VIRUS In response to the public health
emergency for the COVID-19, requirements, recommendations and guidelines from civil authorities including, but not limited to, New York State Executive Orders, CDC, OSHA and New York
State Department of Health (herein after referred to as “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”) surrounding health and safety measures designed to eliminate or reduce the transmission
of the COVID-19 virus, these Supplemental Conditions are provided for guidance for construction related work. Contractors and businesses are further required to comple with applicable
“COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” mandatory directives and health and safety practices issued. 1.0 These Supplemental Conditions apply to the current COVID-19 pandemic, but may
also apply to any existing or future pathogen or contagion impacting construction activity and necessitating protective health and safety measures for worker safety, the general public,
and any personnel connected to the advancement of Work on this, or any applicable project. 1.1 The purpose of this document is to set forth recommended elements and practices to
safeguard the public and all persons connected to each project for Cornell University. 1.2 The direction from “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” are applicable to businesses,
entities, and services, and they must comply with the most recent direction. Contractor obligations include modification of all their existing protocols and practices as necessary
to adhere to the most current modifications to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 2.0 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract with Owner as provided in the General
Conditions and General Requirements are unchanged. Nothing contained herein shall alter or modify the Contractor’s exclusive control over the job site, subcontractors, project labor,
Health & Safety Plans, Protocols, Measures, or the Contractor’s exclusive control over the methods and means associated with any and all of the foregoing elements. 2.1 Cornell University
possesses neither control nor any right of control over the job site, project labor, health & safety practices or programs, or methods and means of advancing the Contracted Work.
2.2 These Supplemental Conditions are provided to the Contractor for the attainment of Contractor’s fully compliant health and safety measures and practices communicated by applicable
civil authorities as requirements, recommendations, and/or guidance necessary to engage in qualifying construction activities. 2.3 Contractor’s responsibilities under the Contract
with Owner as provided in the General Conditions and General Requirements shall remain and include, but not limited to: 2.3.1 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are
required at all times to guard the safety and health of all persons on and in the vicinity of the work site 2 2.3.2 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are required
to comply with all applicable rules, regulations, codes, and bulletins of the New York State Department of Labor and the standards imposed under the Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970, as amended (“OSHA”) and New York State Executive Orders 2.3.3 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers are also required to comply with all applicable
job site safety requirements 2.3.4 Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must comply with all County, City or State of New York safety requirements for projects within
the City or State of New York constructed in accordance with the applicable Building Code, and contractors are required to provide written Safety Plans for the site demonstrating how
all applicable safety requirements are to be implemented for all elements of the Work for the duration of the contract. 3.0 Contractors, their subcontractors and suppliers, and workers
are required to adhere to “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines” to prevent or limit the possible exposure or spread of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.1 To that
end, Contractor shall develop a written Health & Safety Plan related to the protective measures and protocols Contractor shall employ on the Project in response to “COVID-19 Authorities
and Guidelines” necessary to manage and mitigate the exposure or transmission of COVID-19, pathogens, or contagions (as applicable). 3.2 This Plan shall be submitted to the Owner prior
to start of Construction Activity on the Campus. Owner’s receipt of the subject Plan is to document that measures and practices are in place, not for substantive review or approval.
3.3 Health and safety practices constitute a continuing compliance obligation, Contractors and their subcontractors and suppliers must remain current with, and immediately implement
updated health and safety protocols and practices as they are published. The Campus may request updated elements of the Contractor’s written safety plan to address evolving best practices
for measures and/or practices of the “COVID-19 Authorities and Guidelines”. 3.4 The Contractor must notify Cornell immediately upon discovery of any employees of their firm, or subcontractors,
or suppliers that are, or have been working on the Cornell Campus that have been confirmed to have COVID-19 contagion. 4.0 Guidance & General Recommendations for Inclusion in the
Plan: 4.1 Information for local health departments can be found at www.health.ny.gov 4.2 OSHA Guidance on Preparing Workplaces for COVID-19 can be found at www.osha.gov/Publications/OSHA3990.pdf
4.3 Comply with all OSHA requirements in accordance with the Hazard Communication (Global Harmonization) Standard at https://coronavirus.health.ny.gov/home 4.4 Centers for Disease
Control -- https://www.cdc.gov/coronavirus/2019-ncov/index.html 3 5.0 Project Closure: 5.1 Where work is suspended on a project, contractors are directed to follow any additional
project shut-down protocols as provided by the Owner. Including, but not limited to, photographs, securing the work site and project status narrative. 6.0 Contractor expressly agrees
to fully comply and remain exclusively responsible for the implementation of applicable Contractor Health and Safety Protocols and Measures as set forth in applicable and then current
Guidance for Construction Activities. Express Contractor agreement to the foregoing and Contractor submission of the Plan are conditions precedent to engage in any onsite construction
activity. JUNE 2, 2021 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR OLIN HALL B01, 101 LAB RENOVATIONS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 11
00 SUMMARY OF WORK ....................................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL .............................................................................................
........................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS ..................
......................................... 2 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS .............................................. 2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED.............................................
................................................ 4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4 SECTION 01 14
00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ..................................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL .............................................................................................
........................... 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS .................................................................................. 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES ...............................
................................. 1 1.3 UNIVERSITY CLOSURES ................................................................................. 2 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION .............................
............................................... 2 1.5 PARKING .............................................................................................................. 2 1.6 CHANGEOVERS
AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES ................................. 3 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION............................. 4 1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS ................................
..................................... 4 1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. ......................... 5 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. ....................................
5 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES ...................................................................................... 6 1.12 WORKING HOURS ..................................................................
........................... 6 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 6 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .........................
................................................................. 6 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS .............................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ...................................
..................................................................................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................
...... 1 1.2 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS ...............................................
...................................... 2 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST ................................................................................................. 2 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ..................
.................................................................. 2 1.6 PROCEDURES .....................................................................................................
3 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL .......................................................... 3 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS .............................................................................
. 4 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS ................................................................................................ 6 1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS .....................................................
........................ 7 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION ............................................................ 8 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES ....................................................
.................................. 8 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 8 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..................
........................................................................ 8 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS ........................................................................
1 JUNE 2, 2021 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION .............................
........................................................................ 1 1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING ................................................................... 1 1.3 PROGRESS
MEETINGS ..................................................................................... 3 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)........................................................
4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................
...................................... 4 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT .................................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ..............................................................
.......................................................... 1 1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ........................................................................................ 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ......................................................................
................................ 1 1.4 PROCEDURES ..................................................................................................... 1 1.5 PROCESS OVERVIEW ........................
............................................................... 2 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ........................................................................ 4 2.0 PRODUCTS –
NOT USED............................................................................................. 4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .....................................................................
..................... 4 SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ......................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................
........................................................ 1 1.1 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.2
FORM OF SCHEDULES ..................................................................................... 1 1.3 CONTENT OF SCHEDULES ...................................................................
.......... 1 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS .................................................................................... 2 1.5 SUBMISSIONS ............................................................
......................................... 3 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ............................................................................................. 3 3.0 EXECUTION......................
.............................................................................................. 3 3.1 DISTRIBUTION .....................................................................................
.............. 3 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ............................................................ 1 1.0 GENERAL .....................................................................
................................................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTAL
REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE .................................................. 1 1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS ..............................................................................................
3 1.4 PRODUCT DATA ................................................................................................ 3 1.5 SAMPLES.....................................................................
......................................... 4 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS ...... 5 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS ...................................................................
...... 6 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES .............................................................. 9 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ....................................................................
...... 10 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS .................................................................................. 12 JUNE 2, 2021 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS..................................
............................. 12 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES .................................................................................... 12 1.13 DISTRIBUTION ....................................
............................................................. 13 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED........................................................................................... 13
3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ........................................................................................ 13 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY.........................................
............. 1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ................................
..................................................................... 1 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN ..................................... 1 1.3 ASBESTOS ..............................
............................................................................. 2 1.4 LEAD ..............................................................................................................
....... 3 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION................................................................................. 3 1.6 SITE VISITS....................................................................
...................................... 3 1.7 CONFINED SPACE ............................................................................................. 3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED....................
......................................................................... 3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..........................................................................................
3 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS .................... 1 1.0 GENERAL .............................................................................................................
........... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS ............................................
............................................ 1 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION
.......................................................................... 1 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION AND SITE USE ...................................... 2 1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION
.................................................................................. 2 1.7 DUST CONTROL ................................................................................................
. 2 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT ....................................................... 3 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK .................... 3 1.10 HAZARDOUS
OR TOXIC MATERIALS ......................................................... 4 1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE ......................................... 4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT
USED............................................................................................. 5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .........................................................................
................. 5 SECTION 01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL ................................................................................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ....................................................
.................................................................... 1 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION ..........................................................................................
1 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES .................................................................... 1 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION .............................................
4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................
...................................... 5 SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 1 JUNE 2, 2021 1.0 GENERAL ....................................
.................................................................................... 1 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES ................................................................................
1 1.2 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.3 COMPLIANCE ............................................................
......................................... 1 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................ 2 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................
................................................................. 2 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ..........................................................................................
2 SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES ....................................................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL ..................................................................
...................................................... 1 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ........................................................ 1 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................
...................................................... 2 1.3 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................... 2 1.4
OWNER AGREEMENTS .................................................................................... 4 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS .......................................................................
.......... 4 1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ............................................................ 5 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED ....................................................................
....................... 17 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ......................................................................................... 17 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL......................
.................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................
1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION ........................................
............ 1 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS ........................................................ 2 1.4 TESTING ..............................................................................
................................. 3 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ......................................................................... 3 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED.....................................
........................................................ 3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3 SECTION
01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ............................ 1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................................
........ 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ............................
........... 1 2.0 PRODUCTS ...................................................................................................................... 1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ............................
....................................................... 1 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES........................................................... 1 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION................
.................................................. 1 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS ..................................................................................... 3 2.5 SUPPORTS .......................
..................................................................................... 3 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES ...........................................................................
4 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL .................................................................. 5 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION ........................... 5 JUNE
2, 2021 2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS ..................................................... 5 2.10 SECURITY ...................................................................................
......................... 5 2.11 FIELD OFFICES ................................................................................................... 5 3.0 EXECUTION.....................................
............................................................................... 5 3.1 PREPARATION....................................................................................................
5 3.2 GENERAL ............................................................................................................. 6 3.3 REMOVAL ............................................................
................................................ 6 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES ................................................................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ...............................
......................................................................................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ...........................................................................................
.......... 1 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES ....................................... 1 2.0 PRODUCTS ...........................................................................................
........................... 1 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL ................................................................................... 1 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER
........................... 1 2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR ................................................................ 2 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION ....................................
............... 3 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE .............................. 4 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES .........................................................
4 3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4 3.1 REMOVAL ....................................................
........................................................ 4 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND PROTECTION........................................................ 1 1.0 GENERAL ..............................
.......................................................................................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..........................................................................................
........... 1 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING .......................................................... 1 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE ........................................................................
.................... 1 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE ..................................................... 2 1.5 PROTECTION .....................................................................
................................. 3 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER INSTALLATION ......................................................... 4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED..............................................
............................................... 5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5 SECTION 01 73
29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING .................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL ................................................................................................................
........ 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS .....................................................
................................................. 2 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.4 WARRANTIES .......................
.............................................................................. 4 2.0 PRODUCTS .........................................................................................................
............. 4 2.1 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 4 JUNE 2, 2021 3.0 EXECUTION.................................
................................................................................... 4 3.1 INSPECTION ..................................................................................................
...... 4 3.2 PREPARATION.................................................................................................... 5 3.3 PERFORMANCE.........................................................
......................................... 5 3.4 CLEANING ........................................................................................................... 7 SECTION 01 77 00
PROJECT CLOSEOUT ....................................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL ...............................................................................................
......................... 1 1.1 INSPECTIONS ...................................................................................................... 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................
................................................................... 2 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP ...............................................................................................
3 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK ................................................................................... 5 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED.................................................................
............................ 5 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 5 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT
INVENTORY ................................................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................
1 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY.................................................................. 1 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED...........................................................................
.................. 3 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 3 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
DATA .................................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1 1.1
DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS ...........................................................
........................ 1 1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL ................................................................................... 2 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES...........................
.................... 3 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS .............................................. 4 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ...............................................................
........ 6 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL ............................................... 6 1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS..........................................................................
7 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................................................. 7 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ....................................................
...................................... 7 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS ............................................................. 1 1.0 GENERAL ............................................
............................................................................ 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION .....................................................................................................
1 1.2 SUMMARY ........................................................................................................... 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ..........................................................
............................................ 1 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .................................................................................... 2 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS
....................................................................... 2 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................... 3 JUNE
2, 2021 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED ................................................................................ 4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED............................................................
................................. 4 3.0 EXECUTION.................................................................................................................... 4 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS
................................................................................... 4 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS.....................................................................................
5 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS ..................................................................... 1 1.0 GENERAL ..............................................................................
.......................................... 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................... 1 1.2 MAINTENANCE OF
DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES................................... 1 1.3 RECORDING ........................................................................................................ 1 1.4
SUBMITTAL ........................................................................................................ 4 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED..........................................................
................................... 4 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED .......................................................................................... 4 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work to be Done 1. Olin B01 a. Provide fire-rated poly protection to adjacent space during construction. Remove existing equipment, furnishings and electric as noted. b. Patch
walls and repaint area of work, including cabinets, frames and doors, and reinstall ceiling, grid, and any equipment to pre-renovation conditions. c. Relocate and install owner furnished
items and equipment as noted on drawings. d. Provide new coat hooks and wall mounted lab safety glasses box. e. New and reconfigured plumbing, HVAC, and electric. 2. Olin 101 a.
Remove existing shelving and modify countertop as noted. Remove existing equipment, furnishings and electric as noted. b. Patch walls and repaint area of work, including cabinets,
frames and doors, and reinstall ceiling, grid, and any equipment to pre-renovation conditions. c. Install new flooring and base. Add compressed air, flexible duct and plywood above
sink, provide correct ADA clearances for all equipment. d. New and reconfigured plumbing, HVAC, and electric. B. The Scope of the Work 1. The scope of the WORK in all SECTIONS of this
Specification shall consist of the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and appliances and the performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents and/or by the conditions
at the site, joining all parts of this Work with itself and the Work of others to form a complete, functioning entity. 2. Items not specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown
on the drawings, but which are inherently necessary to make a complete working installation, shall be included. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE
WORK OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 3. It is the intent and purpose of the Contract Documents to cover and include under each item all
materials, machinery, apparatus, and labor necessary to properly install materials and equipment, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installation specified
and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and operating whole. Any equipment, apparatus, machinery, material and small items not mentioned
in detail, and labor not hereinafter specifically mentioned, which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner, and in compliance
with the requirements stated, implied, or intended in the Contract Documents, shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. The Contractor shall provide the greatest quantity,
highest quality, highest degree of safety, and most stringent material, equipment or Work. Should the Drawings or the Specifications disagree in themselves or with each other, the
Contractor shall provide the better quality or greater quantity of work and/or materials unless otherwise directed by written addendum to the Contract. 1.2 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A. The Contractor shall cooperate with other contracts performing related work, including providing labor, materials, and other costs necessary to satisfactorily coordinate the Contract
work with work performed under others contracts. B. Concurrent / Future Work: 1. Work is being done in work in Rooms 201 and 341. C. New York State Electric & Gas (NYSEG): 1. Contractor
shall be responsible for the project management of NYSEG work including coordinating any scheduling associated with the Project. 2. The Owner shall be responsible for the cost associated
with the work to be performed by NYSEG. No NYSEG costs shall be carried in the Contractor’s bid. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF OWNER FURNISHED ITEMS A. Owner provided furniture, equipment and sink
as described in construction documents as OFCI (Owner Furnished Contractor Installed). 1. Thermal Spallation 2. Wooden Work bench with vice 3. Large HTL Reactor with casting 4. Electric
control box 5. Steel moveable toolbox 6. Fume hood 7. ADA sink CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-3
LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 8. Refrigerators 9. Morgan Milwaukee Bench Vise 10. Some noted on plans, wall cabinets. B. The Contractor shall receive, unload, store and install Owner
furnished equipment as shown on the plans and called for in the Specifications. C. Storage 1. Upon written acknowledgment by Contractor of receipt in proper condition, the Contractor
shall maintain responsibility for proper storage and protection of the equipment. Provide insurance for the Owner-furnished products up to the time of Final Acceptance by the Owner.
D. Receiving and Unloading 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for logging in, checking and verifying receipt of items and shall be responsible for confirming that the quantities
and condition of the materials are appropriate for installation and the completion of the Work of the project. 2. The Contractor shall note any damage and/or short count on the Bill
of Loading for any Owner Furnished Equipment received at the storage facility, such listing of damages or short count being required to establish the Owner's potential claim against
the carrier. The Contractor shall also notify the Owner directly on any such damage and/or short count. 3. Unload Owner Furnished Equipment at the job site using necessary care and
equipment as required to handle the equipment in a safe manner. 4. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers necessary to handle, receive and install Owner Furnished Equipment. 5. Install
Owner Furnished Equipment as called for in the Drawings or in these Specifications. E. Installation 1. Install products in conformance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Provide interconnecting structures, equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation work, finish painting, and appurtenances to achieve a complete and functional system. F. Use
of Materials 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of Owner provide materials in an efficient manner in accordance with industry standards and best practices to reduce
waste materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 11 00 Ithaca, New York SUMMARY OF THE WORK OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 2.0 PRODUCTS –
NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 11 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-1
LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. All traffic and pedestrian control measures shall be compliant with the National Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) and 17 NYCRR Chapter V (New York Supplement), (https://www.dot.ny.gov/mutcd) and all other local laws and regulations.
B. The Contractor shall carry on the Work in the manner which will cause the least interruption to pedestrian and vehicular traffic and permit access of emergency vehicles at all times.
C. The Work shall be scheduled and performed in such a manner that at least one lane of traffic will be maintained on all public streets. Two flag persons, equipped with radio communication
devices, must be provided for any activity blocking a traffic lane. One lane of traffic must be maintained at all times. Where traffic must cross open trenches, the Contractor shall
provide suitable bridges and railings; including pedestrian bridges. D. The Contractor shall maintain 20’ minimum fire lane access to all facilities in the area. E. The Contractor shall
post and maintain flag persons and suitable signs indicating that construction operations are under way and other warning signs as may be required. F. The Contractor shall safeguard
the use by the public and Owner of all adjacent highways, roadways and footpaths, outside the Contract Limit Lines (work area), and shall conform to all laws and regulations concerning
the use thereof, especially limitations on traffic and the movement of heavy equipment. Access to the site for delivery of construction materials and/or equipment shall be made only
at the locations shown in the Contract Documents or approved by the Owner’s Representative. G. The Contractor shall make every effort to keep dirt and debris from making its way to
roadways. The Contractor shall immediately remove dirt and debris which may collect on permanent roadways due to the Work. H. The Contractor shall limit the extent of its activities
to that area of the site defined on the Contract Drawings as being within the Contract Limit Lines. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS OLIN HALL
B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 I. For that portion of the Work required under this Contract which must be performed in other than the defined areas
both on-site and off, including operations involving delivery and removal of materials, the Contractor shall schedule and coordinate its activities through the Owner's Representative,
to meet the approval of the Owner and minimize disruption of the normal scheduled activities of the occupants of adjacent spaces. J. It is the Owner’s expectation that the Contractor
will take protective measures to minimize damage caused by construction activities including, but not limited to, the use of personnel lifts, material handling equipment, on-site material
storage, etc. All portions of the site, including the staging area and those areas affected by the work, shall be returned to their original condition after completion of Work. Such
repair work shall include lawn restoration and reseeding, if required, and shall be included in the Contractor's Guarantee of Work. K. Routes to and from the location of the Work shall
be as indicated in the Contract or as directed by the Owner's Representative. Temporary roadways shall be closed only with prior approval of the Owner's Representative. 1.3 UNIVERSITY
CLOSURES A. In the event of University closure, the Contractor should use their judgement, follow their internal guidance on continuity of operations, and the direction of law enforcement,
as to whether or not they will maintain operations on construction sites on campus. They should make this decision with the awareness that Cornell response to any project needs (shutdowns,
emergencies) will not possible and the maintenance of roads and walks will not be to normal operating standards. B. With your safety as a top priority, the Cornell University Police
allows you the ability to take advantage of our Emergency Mass Notification System that enables your cellphone to become a personal safety device for you. Contractor’s wishing to participate
may text the following: CornellAlert to 67283 and you will be set up to receive alert messages. Be advised that you may stop receiving messages at any time by sending “stop” to CornellAlert.
There will also be a system generated “stop” every year on August 1st at which point you will need to send the text CornellAlert to re-enlist. 1.4 WATER USE RESTRICTION A. The Contractor
shall adhere to any University issued Water Use Restrictions in place at the time of construction. 1.5 PARKING A. The Owner may designate an area for parking of essential Contractor
vehicles on the project site. B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements, and bear the cost, for transportation of all trade persons from the designated parking area to the construction
site, as necessary. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. It should
be noted that there is a fee for all parking on the Cornell University campus. The Contractor is responsible for the payment for all parking costs imposed by the Owner. The Contractor
should contact the Project Manager (Caterina McFadden) for additional information. The Contractor will be required to complete a “New Construction Employee Form” for each permit requested.
This form may be found at http://finance.fs.cornell.edu/contracts/forms/contractors.cfm. D. Contractor shall cooperate with Transportation Services and/or other authorities having
jurisdiction, as follows: 1. Ensure parking by all employees of the Contractor, subcontractors, material suppliers, and others connected with this project only within construction
fence or the designated parking area. 2. Prohibit employees from parking in any other areas, roads, streets, grounds, etc. 3. Discharge any employee refusing to comply with these requirements.
4. Ensure proper transportation of personnel between the designated parking area and the construction site. E. The Contractor shall remove from the parking area and staging area all
temporary trailers, rubbish, unused materials, and other materials belonging to the Contractor or used under the Contractor’s direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance
of the property and shall restore such areas affected by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the
expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be liable therefore. 1.6 CHANGEOVERS AND CONTINUITY OF SERVICES A. Make all changeovers, tie-ins and removals, etc., of any part
of the Work that would affect the continuity of operation of the adjacent services at approved times that will not interfere with the Owner's operations. Secure approval of Owner before
proceeding. B. Make all necessary temporary connections required to permit operation of the building services and/or equipment. Remove the connections after need has ceased. C. The
Contractor may be permitted to make changeovers during normal working hours at the Owner’s discretion. Should the Contractor perform this Work outside of normal working hours, no extra
payment will be made for resulting overtime expenses. D. When connecting new facilities do not shut off any existing Mechanical/Electrical facilities or services without prior written
approval of Owner's Representative. E. The Contractor shall not, except in an emergency condition, shutdown any utility without the express permission of the Owner's Representative.
Major, affecting life safety or outside contract limit lines, shutdowns of utilities will be performed by Cornell University to enable Contractor to perform required work. Major shutdowns
shall be defined as those affecting life safety or which are outside the project site limits. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS OLIN HALL B01,
101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 F. Maintain domestic water and firewater in service at all times. No service may be out for more than twenty-four (24)
hours. Maintain firewater flow capability (hose, if necessary) to all buildings and coordinate with Cornell Utilities, Cornell Environmental Health and Safety (EH&S), and City of Ithaca
Fire Department. G. All shutdowns to be scheduled a minimum of seven (7) calendar days in advance and requests shall be submitted via ePM system to the Owner’s Representative. H.
IN THE EVENT OF AN EMERGENCY WHERE THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DIAL 911 IMMEDIATELY. 1.7 OBSTACLES, INTERFERENCE AND COORDINATION A. General 1.
Plans show general design arrangement. Install work substantially as indicated and verify exact location and elevations; DO NOT SCALE PLANS. 2. Due to small scale of Drawings, it is
not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, changes in elevations, interferences, etc. Make necessary changes in the Work, equipment locations, etc., after notification to the
Owner's Representative and Architect. Obtain approval from same, as part of Contract, to accommodate work to obstacles and interferences encountered. 3. Obtain written approval for
all major changes before installing. If requested, submit drawings, detailing all such deviations or changes. 4. Exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes or other
building equipment are essential parts of the artistic effect of the building design and shall be installed in locations as shown on the drawings. Conformance to given dimensions and
alignments with the structural system, walls, openings, indicated centerlines are a requirement of the Contract and the Contractor shall familiarize himself with the critical nature
of proper placement of these items. The Contractor shall notify the Architect of conflicts which would cause such equipment to be installed in locations other than as indicated on the
Drawings. The Contractor shall not proceed with the installation of exposed to view mechanical units, ductwork, conduit, pipes, etc. until all conflicts have been identified by the
Contractor and resolutions to conflicts approved by the Architect. B. Interference 1. Install work so that all items are operable and serviceable and avoid interfering with removal
of rails, filters, belt guards and/or operation of doors, etc. Provide easy and safe access to valves, controllers, motor starters and other equipment requiring frequent attention.
1.8 EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENTS A. Since all equipment of equal capacity is not necessarily of same arrangement, size of construction, these Plans are prepared on basis of one manufacturer
as "basis-of-design equipment", even though other manufacturers' names are mentioned. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 WORK
RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 B. If Contractor elects to use specified equipment other than "design equipment" which differs in arrangement, size, etc., the
Contractor does so subject to following conditions: 1. Submit detailed drawings indicating proposed installations of equipment and showing maintenance and service space required. 2.
If revised arrangement meets approval, make all required changes in the work of all trades, including but not limited to louvers, panels, structural supports, pads, etc. at no increase
in Contract. Provide larger motors and any additional control devices, valves, fittings and other miscellaneous equipment required for proper operation of revised layout, and assumes
responsibility for proper location of roughing in and connections by other trades. 3. If revised arrangement does not meet approval because of increase in pressure loss, possibility
of increase in noise, lack of space or headroom, insufficient clearance for removal of parts, or for any other reason, provide equipment which conforms to Contract Drawings and Specifications.
1.9 EXISTING EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, FIXTURES, ETC. A. Where existing equipment, piping, fittings, etc. are to be removed, Contractor shall submit complete list to Owner. All items that
Owner wishes to retain shall be carefully removed and salvaged and delivered to building storage where directed by Owner. Items that Owner does not wish to retain shall be removed
from the site and legally disposed. 1.10 EXAMINATION OF PREMISES, DRAWINGS, ETC. A. Before Submitting Proposal 1. Examine all Drawings and Specifications relating to Work of all trades
to determine scope and relation to other work. 2. Examine all existing conditions affecting compliance with Plans and Specifications, by visiting site and/or building. 3. Ascertain
access to site, available storage and delivery facilities. B. Before Commencing Work on Any Phase or in any Area 1. Verify all governing dimensions at site and/or building. 2. Inspect
all adjacent work. C. Tender of Proposal Confirms Agreement 1. All items and conditions referred to herein and/or indicated on accompanying Drawings. 2. No consideration, additional
monies or time extensions will be granted for alleged misunderstanding. D. Existing or Archived Drawings CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 14 00 Ithaca, New York WORK RESTRICTIONS OLIN
HALL B01, 101 WORK RESTRICTIONS 01 14 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1. Existing or Archived drawings of impacted buildings are appended in electronic format only for reference
and informational purposes. These historic drawings are not to be considered contract drawings and are provided “FOR INFORMATION ONLY”. The Owner makes no representation as to the
accuracy of the drawings as representing current conditions. 1.11 STAND DOWN DATES A. Strict and effective enforcement by Contractor’s management and supervision of the following dates
and hours is required. 1. Student and Campus Life Residence Halls Open August 18-20, 2021 No deliveries, no hauling materials into or out of the project site. All work to be contained
to the fenced area of the project site. 1.12 WORKING HOURS A. Normal work hours are 7AM-dusk Monday-Saturday except during above noted restrictions. This means that Contractor shall
not permit any noise generating activities that could disturb campus occupants or residents to take place outside of these hours. Should any conditions necessitate work to extend beyond
these hours – Contractor may submit a detailed request with reasonable advance notice to Cornell. Cornell (at its sole discretion) may issue a written relaxation of the above but Contractor
is advised never to assume that it will be granted. B. During Construction periods, no work shall take place prior to 9AM in a Residence Hall, Fraternity, Co-Op, Sorority, or any type
of Housing Unit. Residence Halls require 72 hours notification to the Student & Academic Services representative prior to entering a Residence Hall or Student Room. This does not
apply to Fraternity, Co-Op or Sorority House which require 24 hours notification to the Facilities Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 14
00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2,
2021 SECTION 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the products specified, under the options and conditions
for substitutions stated in this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract
Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions that are beyond the Contractor’s
control, such as unavailability of product, or regulatory changes. a. Products that are not available from Contractor’s preferred suppliers does not constitute unavailability of product.
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or
Owner. B. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or
listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another
project or facility. Items salvaged from other projects are not considered new products. Items that are manufactured or fabricated to include recycled content materials are considered
new products, unless indicated otherwise. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type,
function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01
25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification:
A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to
establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit indicated number of copies of each Substitution Request
Form, attached hereto, for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers
and titles. 1. In addition to submission of Substitution Request Form, substitutions shall be listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form with description, specification references,
and corresponding change in base bid 1.4 PRODUCTS LIST A. Within thirty (30) days after the award of Contract, submit to the Architect five copies of a complete list of products which
are proposed for installation. B. Tabulate the products by listing under each specification section title and number. C. For products specified only by reference standards, list for
each such product: 1. Name and address of the manufacturer. 2. Trade name. 3. Model or catalog designation. 4. Manufacturer's data: a. Reference standards. b. Performance test data.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing
agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. B. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on
Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Contractor is responsible for providing products and
construction methods compatible with other products and construction methods. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01,
101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021 2. If a dispute or compatibility issue arises over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect
will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of accepted substitutions and approved comparable
products. 1.7 EQUIVALENTS – APPROVED EQUAL A. Equivalents or Approvals - General 1. The words “similar and equal to”, or “or equal”, “equivalent” and such other words of similar content
and meaning shall for the purposes of this Contract be deemed to mean similar or equivalent to one of the named products. For the purposes of Paragraph A and B of this Section 1.4
and for the purposes of Bidding Documents, the word “products” shall be deemed to include the words “articles”, “materials”, “items”, “equipment” and “methods”. Whenever in the Contract
documents one or more products are specified, the words “similar and equal to” shall be deemed inserted. 2. Whenever any product is specified in the Contract documents by a reference
to the name, trade name, make or catalog number of any manufacturer or supplier, the intent is not to limit competition, but to establish a standard of quality which the Architect has
determined is necessary for the Project. The Contractor may at its option use any product other than that specified in the Contract Documents provided the same is approved by the Architect
in accordance with the procedures set forth in Paragraph B of this Section 1.4. In all cases the Architect shall be the sole judge as to whether a proposed product is to be approved
and the Contractor shall have the burden of proving, at its own cost and expense, to the satisfaction of the Architect, that the proposed product is similar and equal to the named product.
In making such determination the Architect may establish such objective and appearance criteria as it may deem proper that the proposed product must meet in order for it to be approved.
3. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall be construed as representing, expressly or implied, that the named product is available or that there is or there is not a product similar
and equal to any of the named products and the Contractor shall have and make no claim by reason of the availability or lack of availability of the named product or of a product similar
and equal to any named product. 4. The Contractor shall have and make no claim for an extension of time or for damages by reason of the time taken by the Architect or by reason of the
failure of the Architect to approve a product proposed by the Contractor. 5. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be received by the Architect only from the Contractor.
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Equivalents or Approvals After Bidding 1. Request for approval of proposed equivalents will be considered by the Architect after bidding only in the following cases: (a) the named
product cannot be obtained by the Contractor because of strikes, lockouts, bankruptcies or discontinuance of manufacturer and the Contractor makes a written request to the Architect
for consideration of the proposed equivalent within ten (10) calendar days of the date it ascertains it cannot obtain the named product; or (b) the proposed equivalent is superior,
in the opinion of the Architect, to the named product; or (c) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and its use is to the advantage
of the Owner, e.g., the Owner receives an equitable credit, acceptable to it, as a result of the estimated cost savings to the Contractor from the use of the proposed equivalent or
the Owner determines that the Contractor has not failed to act diligently in placing the necessary purchase orders and a savings in the time required for the completion of the construction
of the Project should result from the use of the proposed equivalent; or (d) the proposed equivalent, in the opinion of the Architect, is equal to the named product and less than ninety
(90) calendar days have elapsed since the Notice of Award of the Contract. 2. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this Section 1.4 approves a product proposed by the Contractor
and such proposed product requires a revision or redesign of any part of the work covered by this Contract, all such revision and redesign and all new Drawings and details required
therefore shall be subject to approval of the Architect and shall be provided by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 3. Where the Architect pursuant to the provisions of this
Section approves a product proposed by the Contractor and such proposed product requires a different quantity and/or arrangement of duct work, piping, wiring, conduit or any other part
of the work from that specified, detailed or indicated in the Contract Documents, the contractor shall provide the same at its own cost and expense. 1.8 CONTRACTOR'S OPTIONS A. For
products specified only by reference standard, select any product meeting that standard, by any manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers,
select any one of products and manufacturers named. 1. Products: a. Restricted List (Products): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Products” or that include
the phrase “provide one of the following”, and include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable
products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS
AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021 b. Non-restricted List (Available Products): Where Specifications
include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Products” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a list of names of both available
manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for
consideration of an unnamed product. 2. Manufacturers: a. Restricted List (Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Manufacturers” or that include
the phrase “provide products by one of the following”, and include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Comparable products for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (Available Manufacturers):
Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs titled “Available Manufacturers” or that include the phrase “include, but are not limited to, the following”, and include a
list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements
in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated
on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications
indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. a. Restricted List (List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs
or subparagraphs titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and include a list of other manufacturers' names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the
other named manufacturers that complies with requirements. - Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named
manufacturers. - Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List (No List of Manufacturers): Where Specifications include paragraphs or subparagraphs
titled “Basis-of-Design Product”, and do not include a list of other manufacturers’ names, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by another manufacturer
that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25
00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS AND 01 25 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. For products specified by naming
one or more products or manufacturers and stating "or equal", the Contractor shall submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. Such
substitution shall have been listed on Bid Proposal Submission Form as required in Instructions to Bidders. If not so listed, no substitution will be allowed. D. For products specified
by naming only one product and manufacturer, no option and no substitution will be considered unless listed on the Bid Proposal Submission Form as provided in the Instructions to Bidders.
Base Bid must include the specified product or manufacturer. Substitutions will be at the sole discretion of the Owner. 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests
for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 21 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. B. Substitutions for
Convenience: Submit requests for substitution within thirty (30) days of contract award. C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with: 1. Completed
"Request for Substitution" form in eBuilder. A request for substitution of a product, material, or process for that specified in the Contract Documents must be formally submitted as
such accompanied by evidence that the proposed substitution ﴾1﴿ is equal in quality and serviceability to the specified item; ﴾2﴿ will not entail changes in detail and construction
of Other Work; ﴾3﴿ will be acceptable to the Architect and Owner's Design Consultant's in achieving design and artistic intent; and ﴾4﴿ will not result in a cost and/or schedule disadvantage.
2. Complete data substantiating compliance of the proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and
address. b. Manufacturer's literature; identify: - Product description. - Reference standards. - Performance and test data. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar
projects on which product has been used, and the date of each installation. 3. An itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with the product specified listing any variations.
4. Data relating to any changes in the construction schedule. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS
AND 01 25 00-7 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021 5. The effect of the substitution on each separate contract of the Project. 6. List any changes required in other work or
projects. 7. Designate any required license fees or royalties. 8. Designate availability of maintenance services, and source of replacement materials. D. Substitutions shall not result
in additions to the Contract Sum. E. Substitutions will not be considered as having been accepted when: 1. They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals
without a formal request from the Contractor. 2. They are requested by a subcontractor or supplier. 3. The acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. F. Substitute
products shall not be ordered or installed without written acceptance of the Owner. G. The Owner and the Architect shall be the sole judges of the acceptability of a proposed substitution.
1.10 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Contractor's request for approval of comparable product will be considered when the following conditions are satisfied. If
the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may reject or return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Where products or manufacturers
are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of an unnamed product or manufacturer: 1. Evidence that the proposed product
does not require revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions
of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance,
weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the product
specified. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses
of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 25 00 Ithaca, New York SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBSTITUTIONS
AND 01 25 00-8 LAB RENOVATIONS PRODUCT OPTIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION A. In making a formal request for a substitution the Contractor represents that: 1. By submitting
Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and verified all dimensions, quantities, field dimensions, relations
to existing work, coordination with work to be installed later, coordination with information on previous Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples and compliance with all the requirements
of the Contract Documents. The accuracy of all such information is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. The Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and has
determined that it is equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 3. The Contractor will provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution as for the product specified.
4. The Contractor will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into the Work, and will make such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects.
5. The Contractor waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which may subsequently become apparent. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review Contractor's requests
for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Transmit evaluations and recommendations to the Owner, so that the Owner can notify the Contractor of the decision for acceptance or
rejection of the request for substitution. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 25 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT
MEETINGS OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Owner will schedule and
administer pre-construction meeting, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written
notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings
and decisions. 6. Duplicate and distribute copies of minutes after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting.
c. To the Architect. B. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents.
1.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Schedule at least fifteen (15) days after date of Notice to Proceed. B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's
Representative(s) 2. Contractor(s) 3. Architect and its professional consultants 4. Major Subcontractors 5. Major suppliers 6. Safety Representatives for the Owner and Contractor CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 D. Minimum Agendum: 1. Distribution and discussion
of: a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers b. Projected Construction Schedules 2. Critical work sequencing a. Identification of major shut downs and approximate schedule 3. Major
equipment deliveries and priorities 4. Project Coordination a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals
d. Change Orders e. Applications for Payment f. Requests for Information g. Daily Reports 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents
8. Use of premises: a. Office, work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements c. Job site personnel conduct d. Building access and security 9. Temporary facilities, controls and construction
aids 10. Temporary utilities CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 11.
Safety and first-aid procedures a. Contractor’s Project Site Specific Plan 12. Security procedures 13. Housekeeping procedures 14. Affirmative Action Plan and Reporting requirements
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule regular periodic meetings on the site, not less than once every two weeks throughout the Construction period. B. Attendance: 1. Architect 2. Architect's
professional consultants when, in the opinion of the Owner, needed 3. General Contractor, including Site Superintendent 4. Owner's Representatives 5. Subcontractors as appropriate to
the agenda 6. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda 7. Safety Representative C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting 2. Review percentage of work to be
in place by next meeting by individual trades 3. Review of work progress since previous meeting 4. Field observations, problems, and conflicts 5. Problems which impede Construction
Schedule 6. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules 7. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule 8. Revisions to Construction Schedule 9. Planned progress
and schedule, during succeeding work period 10. Coordination of schedules CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 19 Ithaca, New York PROJECT MEETINGS OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT MEETINGS
01 31 19-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 11. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required 12. Maintenance of quality standards 13. Review status of all issued proposal requests
and change orders 14. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date b. Effect on other contracts of the Project 15. Other business D. All decisions,
instructions, and interpretations given by the Architect/Engineer or its representative at these meetings shall be binding and conclusive on the Contractor. 1.4 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE(S)
A. The Contractor to hold pre-installation conferences where required by individual specification sections or others at the discretion of the Owner. Minimum attendees would be Architect
and/or their specific sub-consultant, Owner, Contractor, Subcontractor, key Suppliers, testing & inspection firm, Facilities Engineering subject matter expert, etc. Minimum agenda
would include review of key submittals, RFI’s, safety, logistics, material procurement, quality control, etc. Contractor to assemble and distribute the Agenda minimum 48 hours prior
to meeting as well as distribute meeting minutes a minimum of seven (7) calendar days after the meeting. B. Submit a list of pre-installation meetings with preliminary dates within
fifteen (15) days of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END OF SECTION 01 31 19*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca,
New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-1 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 31 50 ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT
1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Owner Provided System: The Contractor will utilize the Owner’s electronic Project Management (e-PM) system eBuilder on this project. 1. The Owner shall
manage the day to day use of the Owner provided ePM system and organize the training, support and maintenance of the ePM Website System for the entire project team for the period of
its use on the Project. B. There are no fees to utilize this system. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. General Conditions Article 9 – Coordination and Cooperation. B. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal
Procedures 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ePM: defined as an internet-based information and project communication system that allows the entire project team to collaborate in a centralized and
secured repository. All project-specific correspondence, workflow processes, and documentation will be stored and routed within the ePM system. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Users will be provided
a username and password. The Contractor shall log into the e-PM system to enter the Project Documentation listed in section 2.0. All correspondence should be communicated through the
e-PM system. B. Training 1. The Owner will hold training sessions to familiarize team members with the system, and all Contractor staff are expected to attend one of these sessions
or otherwise receive proper training on the system’s use. All cost for personnel time and travel to attend the training as needed shall be included in the Contractor’s proposal. C.
The Contractor shall provide on-site personnel with personal computer(s) and personal computer equipment that will allow the Contractor’s personnel to access and use the ePM Website
System in a timely and efficient manner. At a minimum, the Contractor is to provide the following equipment and software: CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC
PROJECT MANAGEMENT OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-2 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021 1. Web Browser: with high-speed connection, up/downloading
capability 2. Color printer and plotter capable of full-size document production 3. Scanner: capable of scanning a high volume of project documents clearly and quickly 4. Digital Camera:
(1) single lens reflex (SLR) type camera 5. Portable Document Format (PDF) Reader/writer software D. Contractor shall log on to the ePM Website System on a daily basis, and as necessary
to be kept fully appraised of the project developments, correspondence, assigned tasks and other matters that occur on the site. These may include but are not limited to RFI’s, action
items, meeting minutes, discussion threads, schedule updates, submittals, submittal log, punch list items, daily reports, site photos and/or videos and preconstruction surveys. 1.5
PROCESS OVERVIEW A. The Contractor is required to timely and accurately post, review, respond, and collaborate with other team members using the following features and/or workflow processes
within the ePM system. B. Project Team Directory – Contractor shall provide an updated directory of contact information for all companies, subcontractors and project team members who
are engaged on this project. C. Request for Information (RFI): All project RFI’s will be submitted using the ePM Website System. The submission of a Request for Information (RFI) is
the Contractor’s exclusive means of requesting information from the Owner and/or Architect. Attachments to RFI’s (which may include sketches, photographs, documentation, and the like,
will be uploaded to the ePM Website System and attached to the RFI electronically. D. Meeting Minutes: Contractor shall enter meeting agendas, records and minutes in the system for
all applicable meetings as designated by the Owner. E. General Communications, memorandums and Letters (Project Correspondence): Shall be created in or posted to the ePM Website System
in PDF format electronically linked to action items. These action items shall include names of party (ies) required to respond, time frame within which action is to be taken and any
solutions the Contractor recommends. F. Drawings and Specifications: The Contract Documents will be posted to the ePM Website System as directed by the Owner. The Owner shall retain
the right to assign download rights to active CAD or model files. CAD or model files, in any format, posted to the ePM Website System are for viewing and printing only and cannot be
edited. G. Submittals: All submittals shall be fully electronic. Reference Section 01 33 00. H. Submittal Schedule and Log: Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC PROJECT MANAGEMENT OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-3 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021 I.
Field Reporting: The Contractor shall post and/or update on a daily basis all reports required by other specification sections. These reports include, but are not limited to, daily
construction reports, material location reports, unusual event reports, safety and accident reports. J. Project Photographs: Contractor shall upload project photographs to the ePM system,
field by date and type including but not limited to: 1. General Progress Photographs 2. RFI Issues 3. Non-Conforming Work 4. Special Events 5. As required by individual Specification
Sections K. Project Schedule: The contractor shall post, distribute, review, and/or respond to the project schedule, monthly updates, and any other schedule submittals onto the ePM
in both native and PDF formats. L. Permits & Approvals: Contractor shall upload and maintain current copies of all permits and agency approvals that relate to the project. M. Issue
Tracking: Contractor to log and respond to issues that are related and affect other stakeholders within the project team. N. Quality Assurance: The Owner and/or Architect will issue
reports on conforming items in the ePM system. The Contractor is required to review and respond with corrective actions in the system. O. Change Management – Cost Events and Change
Orders will be managed by the e-PM system and the Contractor shall be responsible for reporting potential changes and logging Requests for Change Orders in the system. The Contractor
shall also upload and manage all documentation supporting Requested Change Orders. P. Pay Applications Requests (Invoices) – The Contractor shall create and submit invoices for review
by the Owner. Once the invoices are agreed to by the Owner then the invoices should be submitted electronically per the instructions for the ePM system. Q. Budget and Cost Management
– Contractor to provide estimates and work breakdown structure (WBS) to provide Owner with accurate budget/cost analysis. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 31 50 Ithaca, New York ELECTRONIC
PROJECT MANAGEMENT OLIN HALL B01, 101 ELECTRONIC PROJECT 01 31 50-4 LAB RENOVATIONS MANAGEMENT (ePM) SYSTEM JUNE 2, 2021 1.6 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A. The Owner may change the standards
for distribution and process prescribed above as required to suit the project. B. The Owner shall retain ownership of all data entered into either system and shall administrate and
distribute all information contained therein. C. The Contractor shall make certain that all subcontractors performing significant work on the project shall actively participate in the
e-PM system. Requirements for participation in the e-PM system shall be made part of each bid document and final contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ****END
OF SECTION 01 31 50*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE OLIN HALL B01, 101 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Contractor shall, within fourteen (14) calendar days of Notice to Proceed, prepare and submit to the Owner estimated
construction progress schedules for the entire Work, with sub-schedules of related activities which are essential to the progress of the Work. B. Conferences will be held with the Architect,
Owner and Contractor at the start of the project to agree mutually on a progress schedule which must be diligently followed. C. Submit revised progress schedules periodically and when
requested to do so by Owner. D. Submit to Owner and Architect a cash flow projection in accordance with Schedule of Values. E. Submit electronic versions of all schedules, including
updates, as well as all back-up to the submitted schedules. 1.2 FORM OF SCHEDULES A. Prepare Network Analysis system, or prepare schedules in the form of a horizontal bar chart. 1.
Provide separate horizontal bar for each trade or operation. 2. Horizontal time scale: Identify the first work day of each week. 3. Scale and spacing: To allow space for notations
and future revisions. B. Format of listings: The chronological order of the start of each item of work. C. Identification of listings: By specification section numbers. 1.3 CONTENT
OF SCHEDULES A. Construction Progress Schedule: 1. Show the complete sequence of construction by activity. 2. Show the dates for the beginning, and completion of, each major element
of construction. Specifically list: a. Area of Work demolition CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE OLIN HALL B01, 101 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
01 32 16-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 b. Subcontractor work c. Equipment installations d. Finishes e. Pre-Installation meetings 3. Show projected percentages of completion for each
item, as of the first day of each month. 4. Show estimated dates for the beginning and completion of work which must be completed by or coordinated with the Owner such as hazardous
materials abatement, moving, training and other such items as they are identified. B. Submittals Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: Confer with the Architect and
agree on all elements of the Submittals Schedule. The schedule will be based on the understanding that minimum turn-around time in the Architect's office is ten (10) working days.
Some submittals or groups of submittals may take longer to review. Submittals which do not conform to the agreed schedule may be subject to delays in processing. Show: 1. The dates
for Contractor's submittals. 2. The dates reviewed submittals will be required from the Architect. 3. Confirmed lead time for manufacturing, production, fabrication and shipment to
the project site of all materials which have an impact on the critical path of the Project's construction schedule. 1.4 PROGRESS REVISIONS A. Indicate progress of each activity to date
of submission. B. Show changes occurring since previous submission of schedule: 1. Major changes in scope 2. Activities modified since previous submission 3. Revised projections of
progress and completion 4. Other identifiable changes C. Provide a narrative report as needed to define: 1. Problem areas, anticipated delays, and the impact on the schedule. 2. Corrective
action recommended, and its effect. 3. The effect of changes on schedules of other prime contractors. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 32 16 Ithaca, New York CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE OLIN
HALL B01, 101 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 01 32 16-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.5 SUBMISSIONS A. Submit initial Construction Progress Schedules within fifteen (15) calendar days after
award of Contract. 1. Owner will review schedules and return review copy within ten (10) days after receipt. 2. If required, resubmit within seven (7) days after return of review copy.
B. Submit progress revision schedules to accompany each application for payment. C. Submit Submittals Schedule within thirty (30) calendar days after date of commencement of work. D.
Submit one reproducible transparency and one opaque reproduction. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute copies of the reviewed schedules to: 1. Owner
Job Site personnel 2. Subcontractors 3. Other concerned parties B. Instruct recipients to report to the Contractor, in writing, any problems anticipated by the projections of the schedule.
***END OF SECTION 01 32 16*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2,
2021 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals, including the following: 1. Shop
Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples 4. Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals 5. Coordination Drawings 6. Certification of Asbestos free products 7. Owner audio/visual 8.
Owner furnishings and fixed equipment B. Designate in the construction schedule, and/or in a separate Submittals Schedule, the dates for submission and the dates reviewed Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples will be needed. C. With the exception of physical samples and color charts, or as otherwise approved by the Owner, all submittals shall be electronic images
in PDF format created electronically (saved with commenting allowed) which shall be submitted for review and approval via the electronic project management web site. PDFs shall be
created directly from the native file format electronically. Scanning of paper to PDF shall be used minimally. Any nonelectronic submittals shall be approved on a case by case basis
and logged into the electronic management system as directed by a Cornell representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL REGISTRY AND SCHEDULE A. The Architect shall provide a draft submittal registry
in the template needed for eBuilder importation. It will be part of the contract documents and turned over to the Contractor in native format for their use. The Contractor shall be
responsible for review and completion of the registry including addition of dates identified below and other information as deemed necessary by the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 B. The submittal registry and schedule shall list all
submittals required by the specifications, listed in order by the specification section in which they are required. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the Contractor's Critical
Path Method Construction Schedule and other related documents. C. The Submittal Registry shall include the following information: 1. Title (by Architect for Contractor review) 2.
Related specification section and paragraph numbers (by Architect for Contractor review) 3. Subsection (by Architect for Contractor review) 4. Category of Submittal (Certification,
Mock-Up, Operations/Maintenance Manual, Product Data, Sample, Shop Drawing, Test Report, As Built, etc.) (by Architect for Contractor review) 5. Submittal Description including description
of the part of the Work covered by the submittal (by Architect for Contractor review) 6. Name of Subcontractor, if applicable (Contractor provided, optional) 7. Date due from Subcontractor
(Contractor provided, optional) 8. Date due to be submitted for review (Contractor provided, required) 9. Date due for submittal review to be completed (Contractor provided, required)
10. Date for transmittal to Subcontractor (Contractor provided, optional) 11. Date for material or product delivery to project (Contractor provided, required) 12. Priority. Low, normal
or high (Contractor provided, required) D. Schedule a resubmittal for each major submittal. Except where specified otherwise in the contract documents, provide review times for submittals
in accordance with Submittal Procedures and Architect’s Duties below. E. Distribution: Initially submit the Submittal Schedule to the Owner for review via the electronic Project Management
system. A submittal schedule compliant with the requirements of this section showing all submittals for the preliminary schedule submission duration shall be submitted with the Contractor’s
preliminary schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. The schedule shall also enumerate all submittals to be processed after the initial preliminary schedule submission duration
period, although the date for these submittals does not have to be indicated. A final baseline submittal schedule showing all submittals for the entire project shall be included in
the baseline schedule submittal described in Section 01 32 16. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01
33 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 F. Updating: The Submittal Schedule shall be kept up-to-date by the Contractor until all submittals are approved. Failure to provide the requested
information, or delay in submitting required submittals may result in the payment request being returned to the Contractor until the required schedule or submittals are received. 1.3
SHOP DRAWINGS A. Drawings shall be newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale by skilled draftsperson and presented in a clear and thorough manner. 1. Highlight, encircle,
or otherwise indicate deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as basis of Shop Drawings. 3. Standard information prepared
without specific reference to Project is not Shop Drawing. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns, templates and similar
Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards.
4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurements. 6. Submittal: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically
via the electronic project management system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain returned document as a “Record Document”. 1.4 PRODUCT
DATA A. Product Data includes brochures, diagrams, standard schedules, performance charts, and instructions that illustrate physical size, appearance and other characteristics of materials
and equipment. All submittals shall identify all products as being asbestos free, see Section 01 35 29. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. 1. Clearly
mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Failure to do so will result in rejection of the submission. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions
and clearances required. 4. Show wiring or piping diagrams and controls. 5. Where Product Data includes information on products that are not required, eliminate or mark through information
that does not apply. 6. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the Work. 7. Preliminary Submittal: Submit single copy of Product Data where
selection of options by Architect is required. 8. Submittals: a. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management system
and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. b. Maintain one (1) copy as a “Record Document”. 1.5 SAMPLES A. Samples include partial sections of manufactured
or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern. B. Office samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity
to clearly illustrate: 1. Functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 2. Full range of color, texture and pattern. C. Field samples
and mock-ups: 1. Contractor shall erect, at the Project site, at a location acceptable to the Architect. 2. Size or area: that specified in the respective specification section. 3.
Fabricate each sample and mock-up complete and finished. 4. Remove mock-ups when directed by the Architect. 5. Perform necessary work to bring any area disturbed by mock-ups to the
areas original condition. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
D. Submit fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with material or product proposed. 1. Mount or display Samples in manner to facilitate review
of qualities indicated. 2. Identify Samples with generic description, product name, and name of manufacturer. 3. Submit Samples for review and verification of size, kind, color, pattern,
and texture. 4. Where variation in color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is inherent in material or product represented, submit at least three (3) multiple units that
show approximate limits of variations. 5. Preliminary Submittals: Submit one (1) full set of choices where Samples are submitted for Architect’s selection of color, pattern, texture,
or similar characteristics from a range of standard choices. 6. Submittals: a. Submit four (4) sets for Architect’s review. Architect will return at least one (1) set marked with
action taken. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at Project Site, for quality comparisons throughout course of construction. Additionally, for electronic transmittal, photograph
sample and its label and attached to the submittal item electronically via the electronic project management. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL SUBMITTALS A. Quality assurance
and quality control submittals include design data, test reports, certifications, manufacturer’s instructions, and manufacturer’s field reports. B. Professional design services or certifications:
Where Contract Documents require professional design services or certifications by a design professional, Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
qualified design professional, whose registration seal shall appear on drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional.
Architect shall be entitled to rely upon adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of services, certifications, or approvals performed by such design professionals. C. Inspection and Test
Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in the Contract Documents. D. Manufacturer’s instruction: Preprinted
instructions concerning proper application or installation of system or product. E. Manufacturer’s field reports: Reports documenting testing and verification by manufacturer’s field
representative to verify compliance with manufacturer’s standards or instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES 01 33 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 F. Submittals: 1. For electronic transmittal, submittals shall be distributed electronically via the electronic project management
system and will be reviewed and returned electronically marked with action taken. 2. Maintain one (1) additional copy as “Record Document”. 1.7 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. The Contractor
shall coordinate and manage the preparation and submittal of coordinated layouts of the mechanical, electrical and fire protection systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale
not less than 1/4" per foot showing on both plan and elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting,
special supports and other items contained within the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide electronic
record of each coordination drawing submitted in TIFF and PDF formats to the Owner. Provide coordination drawings for all corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler
room, shafts, tunnels, and all congested areas. Copies of coordination drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the
space available. B. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required thirty (30) days prior to commencement of fabrication and/or installation of any work item. C. Prepare
and submit coordinated layouts of the mechanical and electrical systems and equipment for all areas; drawn at a scale not less than 3/8 inch =1 foot (1:32) showing on both plan and
elevation including but not limited to all equipment, ducts, pipe sleeves, piping including plumbing and, sprinkler system, lighting, special supports and other items contained within
the space. Show mechanical and electrical services as well as architectural and structural features drawn to scale. Provide copies of each coordination drawing submitted. Provide
coordination drawings for all spaces, including but not limited to, corridors, laboratories, offices, mechanical rooms, boiler room, shafts, tunnels, and other areas. Copies of coordination
drawings shall be distributed to all trades to assure a complete, coordinated installation of work within the space available. 1. Show architectural, structural and other adjacent work
requiring coordination with services. Show items, including but not limited to, access doors, ceiling grids, ceiling construction, structural decks and framing, fixtures, devices,
and other adjacent work coordinated with services and architectural layouts shown on Drawings. 2. Prepare plans, sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship
of various systems and components. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 3. Include room names and numbers of each space.
4. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple entities in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution
of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
01 33 00-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 5. Contract drawings are diagrammatic. Exact location of receptacles, light fixtures, exit signs, fire alarm devices, and other devices shall
be coordinated with the Architectural Drawings and shall not be scaled from locations indicated on the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings. Coordinate modifications in layout as necessary
to complete the Work in accordance with the design intent. 6. Coordinate modifications in layout and components necessary to ensure maintenance accessibility and prevent conflict between
each portion of the Work. 7. Maintain maximum headroom at all locations. Unless indicated otherwise, all mechanical and electrical systems and associated components are to be installed
as tight to underside of structure as possible. 8. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, electrical
systems, communications systems, security systems, and other portions of the Work. Drawings shall indicate dimensions, to avoid interference with existing conditions, structural frame,
ceilings, partitions, services, and other portions of the Work. Where conflicts occur with placement of materials of various portions of the Work, Contractor shall be responsible to
resolve conflicts and coordinate the available space to accommodate each portion of the Work. Adjustments resulting from coordination shall be initialed and dated by the entity(s)
affected by the adjustments. 9. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. 10. Show location
and size of access doors and access panels required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. 11. Indicate required installation sequences. 12. Indicate dimensions,
elevations, and alignments shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions, elevations, and alignments that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance
requirements and notify Architect. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will
not be considered changes to the Contract. 13. Indicate suspended ceiling heights and show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. 14. Indicate
locations of fire-rated partitions, smoke partitions, and other required barriers. 15. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical
equipment, toilet partitions, overhead-mounted equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.
Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components and notify Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01,
101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-8 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 16. Exposed Ceiling Construction: In addition to other indicated information, show fullydimensioned locations of all
items exposed at ceiling space. Indicate alignment requirements and centerline locations of light fixtures, ducts, piping, conduit, and other services. Show dashed outline locations
of laboratory casework, shelving, and other items that extend 7 feet or more above the floor. 17. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical and
electrical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fireprotection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. Indicate paths of egress from rooms. Indicate paths for
equipment removal from rooms. Indicate clear areas required for access and maintenance. 18. Structural Penetrations: Indicate scheduled and requested penetrations and openings required
for all disciplines. Request un-scheduled penetrations and openings where Contractor has reviewed, analyzed, and coordinated all possible routing options and structural penetrations
are only feasible option to accommodate indicated ceiling heights. Refer to the drawings for general guidelines and request confirmation by Architect for structural penetrations. 19.
Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show dimensioned locations, sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, accessories, and
support systems. Show locations of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 20. Electrical Work: Show electrical
distribution, systems, equipment, and runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. Show light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke
detector, fire alarm, and other device locations. Show panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, bus way, generator, and motor control center locations. Show location of
pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. Show lighting control systems. Show cable tray layouts including vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions,
clearances for access above and to side of cable trays, and vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. 21. Fire Suppression System: Show locations
of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 22. Refer to individual Sections for additional Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.
23. Contractor Sign-Off: Contractor and each entity performing portions of the Work shall sign and date coordination drawings. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-9 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 24. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work
is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared
in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. Review of coordination drawings shall
not reduce Contractor’s responsibility for final coordination of installation and maintenance clearances of systems and equipment with existing conditions and each portion of the Work.
D. Submittal and review of coordination drawings will be required before work can start in any given area of the building. 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Review submittals for compliance
with Contract Documents and approve submittals prior to transmitting to the Architect. B. Specifically record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations
and limitation. Comply with requirements of Section 01 25 00 Substitutions and Product Options. C. Contractor’s approval of submittals shall indicate that the Contractor has determined
and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria, and has checked and coordinated information within each submittal with requirement of the Work and Contact
Documents. Field conflicts which arise from the contractor’s failure to fully review and approve submittals before ordering equipment, will result in the contractor being burdened
with all costs to remediate the situation. D. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. Confirming and correlating quantities and dimensions.
3. Selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction. 4. Coordination of the work represented by each submittal with other trades. 5. Performing the work in a safe and
satisfactory manner. 6. Compliance with the approved Construction Schedule. 7. All other provisions of the agreements. E. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittals
is not to be construed as an authorization for additional work or additional cost. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES 01 33 00-10 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 F. If any notations represent a change to the Contract Sum, submit a cost proposal for the change in accordance with procedures
specified before proceeding with the work. G. It is understood that the Architect's notation on the submittal is not to be construed as approval of colors. Make all color-related submittals
at one time. H. Notify the Architect by letter of any notations made by the Architect which the Contractor finds unacceptable. Resolve such issues prior to proceeding with the Work.
I. Begin no fabrication of work until all specified submittal procedures have been fulfilled. J. Do not submit shop drawings, product data or samples representing work for which such
submittals are not specified. The Architect shall not be responsible for consequences of inadvertent review of unspecified submittals. K. The review of shop drawings shall not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility for proper construction and the furnishing of materials and labor required even though the same may not be indicated on the review shop drawings.
L. Certify that only asbestos free material is used in the execution of all work. Reference Section 01 35 39. 1.9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination 1. Coordinate submittals with
performance of construction activities in accordance with the Submittal Schedule approved by the Architect and Owner. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing,
delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity. 3. Prepare and transmit each submittal in accordance with the Submittals Schedule, agreed to by all
entities involved. 4. Prepare, review, approve and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 5. Architect's Review:
Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's initial processing of each submittal requiring the Architect’s review and response, except for longer periods required as noted below, and
where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals. The Architect will advise the Contractor promptly when it is determined that a submittal being processed
must be delayed for coordination. Allow ten (10) working days for Architect's reprocessing of each submittal. Notify the Architect when processing time for a submittal is critical
to the progress of the work, and the work would be expedited if its processing time could be shortened. An additional five (5) working days will be required for items specified in Divisions
2, 3, 5, 23 and 26, and for Architectural Woodwork, Hollow Metal Work and Hardware Schedules. 6. Allow time for delivery in addition to review. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca,
New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-11 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 7. Allow time for reprocessing each submittal. 8. No extension of Contract
Time will be authorized because of failure to prepare submittals sufficiently in advance of Work to permit processing. 9. Submittals made which do not conform to the schedule are subject
to delays in processing by the Architect. 10. Refer to Section 01 32 16 Construction Schedules for requirements of the Submittals Schedule. 11. Failure of the Contractor to obtain approval
of Shop Drawings shall render all work thereafter performed to be at Contractor’s sole risk, cost and expense. B. Submittal Preparation 1. Place permanent label or title block on each
submittal for identification. 2. Indicate name of entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 3. Provide space on label or beside title block on Shop Drawings to record
Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to review of submittal, action taken, verification of products, field measurements and field construction criteria, and coordination
of the information within the submittal with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 4. Complete all fields on submittal item details in ePM system including meaningful
description. 5. Include the following information on submittal documentation: a. Drawing, detail or specification references, including section number, as appropriate to clearly identify
intended use of product. b. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such. c. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the work or materials. d. Applicable standards, such as ASTM
or Federal Specification numbers. e. Provide a blank space for the Architect’s stamps f. On transmittal, record relevant information including deviations from Contract Document requirements,
including minor variations and limitations. 6. Identification of revisions on re-submittals, other than those noted by the Architect on previous submittals. 7. Shop drawings with the
comment "by others" are not acceptable. All such work must specifically identify the related responsible subcontractor. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL
PROCEDURES OLIN HALL B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-12 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Submittal Transmittal: 1. Transmit submittals via the electronic project management
system to Architect unless otherwise noted or directed. 2. Prepare and generate transmittal in ePM system for submission of samples. Package sample and other each submittal appropriately
for transmittal and handling. 1.10 RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Provide a record copy of the submittal (electronic format) for the O&M Manual. 1.11 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS A. Make any corrections
or changes noted on previous submittals. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data: 1. Revise initial drawings or data, and resubmit as specified for the initial submittal. 2. Indicate any
changes which have been made other than those noted by the Architect. C. Samples: Submit new samples as required for initial submittal. 1.12 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES A. Review submittals
with reasonable promptness as identified in 1.8, paragraph 5 of this Section. B. Notations on the Submittal Review Stamp or eBuilder file mean the following: 1. "Approved (APP)" indicates
that no deviations from the design concept have been found and Work may proceed. 2. "Approved as Noted (AAN)" indicates that deviations from the design concept which have been found
are noted, and the Contractor may proceed accordingly. 3. "Revise and Resubmit (RAR)" indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other
activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 4. “Rejected
(REJ)” indicates that Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity may not proceed. Revise or prepare new submittal according to Architect’s
notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark. 5. “On Hold (ONH)” is used in a very limited capacity and means that the Contractor should not
take action until the reason for hold has been cleared and may be required to revise and resubmit. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 33 00 Ithaca, New York SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES OLIN HALL
B01, 101 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00-13 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 6. “Not Reviewed (NRV)” is used for submittals that were submitted in error, duplicate, or other reason that
does not require review by the Architect but need to be closed by the Contractor upon return to them. 7. “For Record Only (FRO)”: Submittals for information or record purposes, including
Quality Assurance and Quality Control Submittals, and Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS), will not require responsive action by the Architect. a. Architect will forward informational
submittals without action. b. Architect will reject and return informational submittals not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Incomplete Submittals: Architect will return incomplete
submittals without action. D. Unsolicited Submittals: Architect will return unsolicited submittals to sender without action. E. Return submittals to Contractor for distribution, or
for resubmission. 1.13 DISTRIBUTION A. Distribute reviewed Shop Drawings and copies of Product Data when possible via the electronic project management system to: 1. Job site file 2.
Record Documents file 3. Subcontractors 4. Installers 5. Suppliers 6. Manufacturers 7. Fabricators 8. Architect 9. Owner B. Do not permit use of unmarked copies or rejected copies of
submittals in connection with construction at Project Site or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 33 00*** CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 35 29 GENERAL HEALTH
& SAFETY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This Section provides requirements for general health and safety during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both
Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section, all laws and regulations by applicable local, state, and federal
agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements, but in no case shall this
Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. 1.2 CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SITE SPECIFIC PLAN A. Contractors are required to submit a Project Site
Specific Plan (PSSP) for review by Cornell University representatives before commencement of work on the site. The PSSP should address site specific information, controls and or requirements
as it relates to the entire scope of work for the project. All contractors shall use the Project Site Specific Plan Template below to develop their Project’s PSSP. The template may
be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/campus-health-safety/occupational-safety/contractor-safety 1. Within the PSSP Template are example(s) to use as reference. The provided examples
demonstrate Cornell University’s expectations for providing detailed site specific information, controls and requirements. 2. Project Site Specific Plan’s that inadequately address
site specific operations will be returned with comments for resubmission. Failure to submit a PSSP may result in delay of project and/or denial of the payment. 3. All projects must
have the PSSP submitted via e-Builder for review and comment. B. PSSP submittal should be submitted a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the commencement of work on site. The Contractor
may opt to submit their PSSP in phases. The Contractor must submit a phase submission plan using the PSSP Submission table included in the PSSP template for approval by Owner’s Representative
with initial submission. Submit remaining phases no later than ten (10) days prior to the start of a new, predetermined project phase or milestone. 1. Projects having less than a ten
(10) day turn-around shall coordinate their submittal with the Owner’s Representative, who should coordinate with Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP), the University
Fire Marshall’s Office and Contract College’s Codes Enforcement Official, if applicable. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY OLIN HALL B01,
101 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. The Contractor is responsible for its employees and its subcontractors. Subcontractors are required to submit
their PSSP to the General Contractor. The General Contractor is responsible to ensure all subcontractor(s) PSSP’s are adequate per their scope of work. D. The General Contractor is
required to ensure their project’s PSSP is accurately maintained throughout the duration of the contract. Resubmission is required for any new scope elements not previously addressed
by the Contractor’s original PSSP. E. Definitions: 1. Project Site Specific Plan (PSSP): A structured document that details the scope of the contract work and related site specific
controls, requirements and information for University and Contractor personnel. This document is not intended to be all inclusive of all applicable local, state and federal laws and
regulations for which the General Contractor and its Subcontractor(s) are expected to comply. 2. Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ): • The organization, office or individual responsible
for approving equipment, an installation or a procedure (NYS Fire Code). • The local government, county government or state agency responsible for the administration and enforcement
of an applicable regulation or law (NYS Building Code-§202.2). 3. Occupational Health, Safety and Injury Prevention (OHSIP): A division of Cornell University’s Environmental Safety
and Health Department. The OHSIP division can be contacted at (607)-255-8200 or by email at askEHS@cornell.edu. 4. SME: The University’s subject matter expert. 1.3 ASBESTOS A. All products
provided for use in construction at Cornell University are to be free of asbestos. At Substantial Completion, prior to beneficial service, the Contractor shall provide a signed certification
form “Exhibit AC” stating that all Contractor supplied & installed products are 100% asbestos free. The Contractor has to attach applicable Safety Data Sheets/ Material Safety Data
Sheets for each product documenting a 100% asbestos free status. The University may provide random testing of products for asbestos content. Any Contractor installed product found to
contain asbestos shall be classified as defective work. Defective work shall be corrected by the Contractor as specified in the General Conditions. B. Attached for the Contractor’s
information are asbestos reports which represent samples taken within the building. C. Based on the above, disposal of asbestos containing material is not anticipated. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 35 29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY 01 35 29-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.4 LEAD A. Building may contain lead-based
paint. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. The Contractor selects the means and/or methods to address the presence of lead based paint, and must
concurrently protect its workers based on the Contractor’s means and/or methods. The Contractor is required to submit a lead plan that is site specific, indicating that the protective
measures the Contractor proposes meet the OSHA standard 1926.62 “Lead in Construction Standards”. This site-specific plan should address the particular methods the Contractor intends
to protect its workers, the building occupants and the building structure based on its selection of addressing the presence of lead-based paint. 1.5 MERCURY COLLECTION A. Building may
contain mercury. Mercury is a metal that is liquid at room temperature and is toxic to humans and the environment. Mercury can accumulate under laboratory benches and especially in
the pipes in old laboratories. Dismantling old fixtures with care can prevent unnecessary spills. The Contractor shall protect workers in accordance with OSHA regulations. Mercury
is regulated by OSHA and the EPA. If encountered, mercury shall be collected safely utilizing proper measures to prevent exposure and must be turned over to Cornell Environmental Health
& Safety for disposal. In the event of a spill, leave and secure the area, call Cornell Dispatch 255-1111 and request the campus Spill Response Team. 1.6 SITE VISITS A. The undertaking
of periodic Site Visits by Architects, Engineers or the Owner shall not be construed as supervision of actual construction, or make them responsible for the safety of any persons; or
make them responsible for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction selected by the Contractor or its Subcontractors; or make them responsible for safety programs
and precautions incident to the Work, or for the safe access, visit, use, Work, travel or occupancy of any person. 1.7 CONFINED SPACE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
identification of confined space in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35
29 Ithaca, New York GENERAL HEALTH & SAFETY Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Survey Snee Hall – Cornell University Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations Prepared For
Chaing O’Brien Architects Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 April 2021 Snee & Olin Halls – Cornell University
Ithaca, New York Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Survey April 2021 Prepared For Chiang O’Brien Architects
Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 Prepared By Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 11 Centre Park, Suite 203 Rochester, New York 14614 Snee & Olin Halls
Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ i ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Table of Contents Section Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ..................................
................................................................................................ 1 1.0 INTRODUCTION ...............................................................................
................................................. 2 2.0 SCOPE OF WORK .............................................................................................................................
. 3 3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS .................................................................................................................... 4 4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM .......
...................................................................... 5 5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM ...........................................................................................
...... 6 6.0 DISCUSSION ...................................................................................................................................... 7 Tables
Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form ..................................................................................... 5 Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form ..............................
............................................................................. 6 Appendices Appendix A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Resu
lts and Chain‐of‐Custody Records Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates Appendix D Laboratory Certificates Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos
Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 1 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. (B&L), was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a limited prerenovatio
n asbestos survey for the Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab renovation project at Snee and Olin Halls on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The purpose of the survey was to
identify and quantify suspect asbestos‐containing materials (ACMs) prior to the Researchers Planning & Enabling Work project. Sampling was conducted based upon previous survey information and draw
ings provided by the architect which highlight areas to be renovated. The inspection was conducted on March 19, 2021. This report represents the conditions of the property at the time of the surv
ey. Materials suspected of potentially containing asbestos were sampled by B&L’s New York State Certified Asbestos Inspectors. These materials included ceiling panels, lab bench, glued on ceiling
tile, ceiling tile glue, and canvas covered corkboard. The following material was presumed to be ACM base on previous sampling data: Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations
Material Code Description Quantity Location FLVCT‐AAA 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 2,451 SF Snee Hall SINK‐AAA Counter Top Black Mastic 39 SF Snee Hall HOOD‐AAA
Transite Fume Hood (not impacted by this project) 60 SF Snee Hall GLAZE‐AAA Grey Window Glaze (not impacted by this project) 10 SF Snee Hall The other materials sampled were found to co
ntain no asbestos or less than one percent (<1%) and are, therefore, categorized as non‐ACM. Refer to Table 1 – “Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary” for a listing of the location, condition, and
quantity of ACM in the building. Since the building is slated for renovation, all materials identified as ACM and PACM that will be impacted during the course of the project should be abated by a
licensed NYS asbestos abatement contractor prior to commencement of renovation activities. The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) also requires that a copy of this report to be kept on si
te during all phases of construction. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 2 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. INTRODUCTION B&L was retained by
Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct an asbestos inspection of Snell and Olin Halls located on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The inspection was designed to
determine the presence and quantity of ACM/PACM prior to Researchers Planning & Enabling Work project renovations. B&L’s inspection team consisted of New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) a
ccredited inspectors Michael Goff (Certificate No. 01‐07588) and Joseph Cavallaro (Certificate No. 19‐00091). B&L’s license and each inspector’s asbestos certificate are presented in Appendix C.
The inspection was performed on March 19, 2021. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 3 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. SCOPE OF WORK
The above referenced buildings were surveyed for the presence of thermal system insulation, surfacing materials, and miscellaneous materials suspected of containing asbestos. Both friable and non‐
friable materials were sampled. Prior asbestos survey investigation data conducted by Delta in both Snee and Olin Halls was provided. Data for Snee Hall appears limited, while sampling data from Ol
in Hall is quite extensive. The inspection was performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 56 of the Official Compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State of New York (12 NYCR
R Part 56, as amended and adopted March 21, 2007), Section 56‐5.1, Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling, and Repair. Inspection procedures followe
d the requirements of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) found at 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E ‐ Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule and Notice, Asbestos Hazard Emergency Resp
onse Act (AHERA). When suspect ACM was encountered, the material was assessed, quantified, and either assumed to be ACM or sampled. The condition of the ACM and PACM materials is reported in Table
1. The sample location was noted in the field sketches. Sample locations are summarized in Table 2, Bulk Sampling Summary Form. Each sample was sent to a laboratory accredited by the New York St
ate Department of Health (NYSDOH) Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) and the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program
(NVLAP) for analysis. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 4 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. ANALYTICAL METHODS Bulk samples collected at the
building were analyzed by AmeriSci New York (AmeriSci), 117 East 30th Street, New York, New York. AmeriSci is accredited by NIST under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) for Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of bulk samples (Accreditation Number 200546‐0). AmeriSci is also accredited by the New York State Department of Health under the
Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP, Accreditation No. 11480). Samples were analyzed by polarized light microscopy (PLM) in accordance with the NYSDOH Polarized Light Microscopy Method
for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.1). Samples were analyzed sequentially until positive for asbestos or until each sample in the set was analyzed. A mater
ial was classified as non‐asbestos containing only if each sample in the set was determined to be less than one percent by weight (<1%). Non‐friable organically bound (NOB) materials, such as floor
tiles, mastic and roofing materials, and ceiling tiles/panels containing cellulose that were found to be <1% by PLM, were also analyzed using the NYSDOH Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Meth
od for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Non‐Friable Organically Bound Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.4). If TEM confirmed that the asbestos content was <1%, the material was considered non‐a
sbestos containing. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 5 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM
The quantities of the homogeneous ACM/PACM identified within the building are summarized on Table 1. The information is listed by homogeneous material code and presents the location, class,
description, condition, and quantity of the ACM/PACM as it occurs. The total quantity of each ACM/PACM found in the building has been calculated and is presented at the end of the list. The
information presented on the form is derived from the sample results and proposed work area floor plans. Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157
Lab Renovations ‐ Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY March 19, 2021 Snee Hall Material Code Material Location Material Class Material Description Sample ID Condition Quantity
ACM? FLVCTAAA 1149 M 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile Not Sampled Good 559 PACM 1156 M Good 1238 PACM 3158 M Good 654 PACM TOTAL
2,451 SF SINKAAA 1149 M Counter Top Black Mastic Not Sampled Good 3 PACM 1156 M Good 15 PACM 2157 M Good 3 PACM 3158 M Good 18 PACM
TOTAL 39 SF HOODAAA 3158 M Transite Fume Hood Not Sampled Fair 60 PACM TOTAL 60 SF M = Miscellaneous S = Surfacing T = Thermal *Additional (GLAZE‐AAA) grey
window glaze locations and quantities will be listed if the project scope changes to include removal of classroom/laboratory doors. Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbe
stos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 6 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM This table presents a summary of the bulk sampling performed at the building. It lists the mate
rial code, material description, sample location, sample ID, and the analytical results. Results for PLM and TEM analyses are presented as appropriate. Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form
Cornell University Snee Hall 1149, 1156, 2157 Lab Renovations ‐ Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY March 19, 2021 Material Code Material Description Sample Location Sample
ID Analytical Results PLM TEM Snee Hall FLVCTAAA 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile –B&L 1/2020 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM SINK‐AAA Counter Top Black Mastic –
Delta 8/27/13 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM HOODAAA Fume Hood– Delta 8/5/19 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM GLAZEAAA Grey Window Glaze – B&L 1/2020 report
Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM CLTL‐1 1’x1’ Fissured Glued‐On Ceiling Tile 1156 1156 CLTL‐1‐1 CLTL‐1‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLGL‐2 Brown Ceiling Tile Glue 1156 1156 CLGL‐2‐1
CLGL‐2‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CANVAS‐3 Canvas Corkboard Cover 1149 1149 CANVAS‐3‐1 CANVAS‐3‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLGL‐4 Tan Ceiling Tile Glue 1156 1156 CLGL‐4‐1 CLGL‐4‐2 NAD
NAD NAD NAD Olin Hall CLLI‐1 2’x4’ Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel w/ Grey Speckle 201 201 CLLI‐1‐1 CLLI‐1‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BENCH‐2 Black Lab Bench 101 101
101 BENCH‐2‐1 BENCH‐2‐2 BENCH‐2‐3 NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD NAD CLLI‐3 2’x4’ Long Deep Fissure Ceiling Panel 101 101 CLLI‐3‐1 CLLI‐3‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CLLI‐4 2’x4’ Long Fissure Ceiling
Panel 101 101 CLLI‐4‐1 CLLI‐4‐2 NAD NAD NAD NAD Snee & Olin Halls Limited Pre‐Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.003.001/4.21 ‐ 7 ‐ Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. DISCUSSION
Of the suspect materials sampled by B&L from Snee Hall, none are considered asbestos containing as per laboratory analysis. 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile (FLVCT‐AAA) was determined to b
e asbestos containing in B&L’s previous sampling. Black floor tile mastic associated with this tile was determined non‐asbestos by Delta‘s sampling. Black Trespa countertops are non‐asbestos as per
Delta’s survey, but (SINK‐AAA) associated countertop black mastic is asbestos containing. The fume hood in Room 3158 is presumed asbestos based on Delta’s sampling report. Grey window glazing on
interior door glass was sampled by B&L in January of 2020 and is asbestos containing but should not be impacted by based on the scope of this project. Delta’s asbestos survey details extensive sam
pling in Olin Hall. Some suspect asbestos materials in the proposed renovation area were determined non‐asbestos through Delta’s sampling and subsequent laboratory analysis. Four additional suspect
material, not covered by Delta’s report, were sampled by B&L and are non‐asbestos as per laboratory analysis. The fume hood in Room 101 may be asbestos containing transite, but is not scheduled to
be impacted by renovations. Appendix A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data CANVAS-3-1,2 CLTL-1-1,2 CLGL-2-1,2 CLGL-4-1,2 CLLI-1-1,2 BENCH-2-1,2,3CLLI-3-1,2 CLLI-4-1,2
Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Snee Hall – Cornell University EAS Consolidation Design Prepared for Chaing O’Brien Architects Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street
Ithaca, New York 14850 January 2020 Snee Hall – Cornell University Ithaca, New York Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey January 2020 Prepared for Chiang
O’Brien Architects Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New York 14850 Prepared by Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 11 Centre Park, Suite 203 Rochester, New York 14614
Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - i - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page EXECUTIVE SUMMARY ........................................
.......................................................................................... 1 1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................
........................................ 2 2.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION ...................................................................................................................
3 3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS .................................................................................................................... 4 4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM
............................................................................. 5 5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM ......................................................................................
........... 7 6.0 DISCUSSION...................................................................................................................................... 9 Tables Table
1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form ............................................................................ 5 Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form ................................................
.................................................. 7 Appendices Appendix A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and Chain-of-Custody
Records Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates Appendix D Laboratory Certificates Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020
- 1 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. (B&L) was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct a limited prerenovation asbestos survey at Snee
Hall on the Cornell University Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The purpose of the survey was to identify and quantify suspect asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) prior to the
EAS Consolidation renovation project. Sampling was conducted based upon previous survey information and drawings provided by the architect which highlight areas to be renovated. A
portion of the second floor of Olin Hall was included as part of the survey since the area will be used as transition space during the project. The inspection was conducted on January
8, 2020. This report represents the conditions of the property at the time of the survey. Materials suspected of potentially containing asbestos were sampled by B&L’s New York State
Certified Asbestos Inspector. These materials included cove base, cove base mastic, caulk materials, window glaze, ceiling panel, floor leveler, ceiling panels, sink undercoating,
pipe sealant, floor tile, mastic material, and firestop. The following materials were determined to be ACM: Material Code Description Quantity Location GLAZE-7 Grey Window Glaze TBD
Snee Hall FLVCT-14 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 13,284 SF Snee Hall The following material was presumed to be ACM: Material Code Description Quantity Location SINK-AAA
Counter Top Black Mastic 17 SF Snee Hall The other materials sampled were found to contain no asbestos or less than one percent (<1%) and are, therefore, categorized as non-ACM. Refer
to Table 1 – “Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary” for a listing of the location, condition, and quantity of ACM in the building. Since the building is slated for renovation, all materials
identified as ACM and PACM that will be impacted during the course of the project should be abated by a licensed NYS asbestos abatement contractor prior to commencement of renovation
activities. The New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) also requires that this report be forwarded to the Commissioner of Labor through the Division of Safety and Health, Asbestos
Control Bureau and to the local government agency charged with issuing demolition permits (see 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1). The local NYSDOL office is located at: New York State Department
of Labor Division of Safety and Health Asbestos Control Bureau 450 S. Salina Street Syracuse, NY 13202 Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 2
- Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 1.0 INTRODUCTION B&L was retained by Chiang O’Brien Architects to conduct an asbestos inspection of Snell Hall and Olin Hall located on the Cornell University
Campus located in Ithaca, New York. The inspection was designed to determine the presence and quantity of ACM/PACM prior to EAS Consolidation Project renovations. The work areas consist
of approximately 11,000 SF of Snee Hall and approximately 750 SF of Olin Hall. B&L’s inspection team consisted of New York State Department of Labor (NYSDOL) accredited inspectors
Michael Goff (Certificate No. 01-07588) and Joseph Cavallaro (Certificate No. 19-00091). B&L’s license and the inspector’s asbestos certificate are presented in Appendix C. The inspection
was performed on January 8, 2020. Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 3 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 2.0 SCOPE OF WORK The above referenced
buildings were surveyed for the presence of thermal system insulation, surfacing materials, and miscellaneous materials suspected of containing asbestos. Both friable and non-friable
materials were sampled. Prior asbestos survey investigation data conducted by Delta in both Snee and Olin Halls was provided. Data for Snee Hall appears limited, while sampling data
from Olin Hall is quite extensive. The inspection was performed in accordance with the requirements of Part 56 of the Official Compilation of Codes, Rules and Regulations of the State
of New York (12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended and adopted March 21, 2007), Section 56-5.1, Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation, Remodeling, and Repair.
Inspection procedures followed the requirements of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) found at 40 CFR Part 763, Subpart E - Asbestos Containing Materials in Schools; Final Rule
and Notice, Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA). When suspect ACM was encountered, the material was assessed, quantified, and either assumed to be ACM or sampled. The condition
of the ACM and PACM materials is reported in Table 1. The sample location was noted in the field sketches. Sample locations are summarized in Table 2, Bulk Sampling Summary Form.
Each sample was sent to a laboratory accredited by the New York State Department of Health (NYSDOH) Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP) and the National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST) National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for analysis. Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 4 - Barton
& Loguidice, D.P.C. 3.0 ANALYTICAL METHODS Bulk samples collected at the building were analyzed by AmeriSci New York (AmeriSci), 117 East 30th Street, New York, New York. AmeriSci
is accredited by NIST under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) analysis of bulk samples (Accreditation Number 200546-0).
AmeriSci is also accredited by the New York State Department of Health under the Environmental Laboratory Approval Program (ELAP, Accreditation No. 11480). Samples were analyzed by
polarized light microscopy (PLM) in accordance with the NYSDOH Polarized Light Microscopy Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.1). Samples
were analyzed sequentially until positive for asbestos or until each sample in the set was analyzed. A material was classified as non-asbestos containing only if each sample in the
set was determined to be less than one percent by weight (<1%). Non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials, such as floor tiles, mastic and roofing materials, and ceiling tiles/panels
containing cellulose that were found to be <1% by PLM, were also analyzed using the NYSDOH Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) Method for Identifying and Quantifying Asbestos in
Non-Friable Organically Bound Bulk Samples (ELAP Method 198.4). If TEM confirmed that the asbestos content was <1%, the material was considered non-asbestos containing. Snee Hall
Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 5 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 4.0 HOMOGENEOUS ACM/PACM SUMMARY FORM The quantities of the homogeneous ACM/PACM identified
within the building are summarized on Table 1. The information is listed by homogeneous material code and presents the location, class, description, condition, and quantity of the
ACM/PACM as it occurs. The total quantity of each ACM/PACM found in the building has been calculated and is presented at the end of the list. The information presented on the form
is derived from the sample results and proposed work area floor plans. Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca NY January 8, 2020
Snee Hall Material Code Material Location Material Class Material Description Sample ID Condition Quantity ACM? GLAZE-7 2159 M Grey Window Glaze GLAZE-7-1,2 Good 1 Y TOTAL TBD
FLVCT-14 2002 M 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile Good 118 Y 2021 M Good 1997 Y 2022 M FLVCT-14-1,2 Good 814 Y 2034 M Good 24 Y 2149 M Good 538 Y 2152 M Good
754 Y 2160C M Good 227 Y 2161 M Good 309 Y 2161B M Good 143 Y 3021 M Good 1737 Y 3022 M Good 873 Y 3147 M Good 447 Y 3161 M Good 1132 Y 4021 M Good 1771 Y 4022
M Good 874 Y 4154 M Good 1272 Y 4154D M Good 254 Y TOTAL 13,284 SF Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 6 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Table 1 Homogeneous ACM/PACM Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca NY January 8, 2020 Snee Hall Material Code Material Location Material Class Material Description
Sample ID Condition Quantity ACM? SINKAAA 2149 M Counter Top Black Mastic Not Sampled Fair 3 PACM 2152 M Fair 3 PACM 3161 M Fair 3 PACM 4154 M Fair 8 PACM TOTAL 17 SF
M = Miscellaneous S = Surfacing T = Thermal *Additional (GLAZE-7) grey window glaze locations and quantities will be listed pending further field investigation. Snee Hall Limited
Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 7 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 5.0 BULK SAMPLING SUMMARY FORM This table presents a summary of the bulk sampling performed at
the building. It lists the material code, material description, sample location, sample ID, and the analytical results. Results for PLM and TEM analyses are presented as appropriate.
Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY January 8, 2020 Material Code Material Description Sample Location Sample ID Analytical Results
PLM TEM Snee Hall SINK-AAA Counter Top Black Mastic – Delta 8/27/13 report Not Sampled Not Sampled PACM PACM BBD-1 Brown Cove Base 1134 1134 BBD-1-1 BBD-1-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BBDMAS-2
Tan Cove Base Mastic 1134 1134 BBDMAS-2-1 BBDMAS-2-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD GLUE-3 Green/Tan Carpet Glue 1134 1134 GLUE-3-1 GLUE-3-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CAULK-4 White Caulk 1134 1134 CAULK-4-1
CAULK-4-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BBD-5 Grey Cove Base 1134 1134 BBD-5-1 BBD-5-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD CAULK-6 Black Window Caulk 1134 1134 CAULK-6-1 CAULK-6-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD GLAZE-7 Grey Window
Glaze 2159 2159 GLAZE-7-1 GLAZE-7-2 1.6% CH NA NA NA CLLI-8 2’x2’ Smooth Fiberglass Ceiling Panel 2160 2160 CLLI-8-1 CLLI-8-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD BBD-9 Black Cove Base 2159 2159 BBD-9-1
BBD-9-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD LEVELER-10 Black/Grey Floor Leveler 2159 2159 2159 LEVELER-10-1 LEVELER-10-2 LEVELER-10-3 NAD NAD NAD - - - FLVCT-11 12”x12” Black w/ White Fleck Floor Tile
2162 2162 FLVCT-11-1 FLVCT-11-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD SINK-12 Grey Sink Undercoating 2162 2162 SINK-12-1 SINK-12-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD SEALANT-13 White Pipe Sealant 2162 2162 SEALANT-13-1 SEALANT-13-2
NAD NAD NAD NAD FLVCT-14 12”x12” Black w/ Grey Mottled Floor Tile 2022 2022 FLVCT-14-1 FLVCT-14-2 <0.25% CH <0.25% CH 6.0% CH NAD Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection
2289.001/1.2020 - 8 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Table 2 Bulk Sampling Summary Form Cornell University Snee Hall / Olin Hall Ithaca, NY January 8, 2020 Material Code Material Description
Sample Location Sample ID Analytical Results PLM TEM CAULK-15 Grey Door Caulk 2022 2022 CAULK-15-1 CAULK-15-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD MAS-16 Black Mastic – Raised Flooring Stanchions 2161A
2161A MAS-16-1 MAS-16-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD FLVCT-17 Light Grey 2’x2’ Floor Panel 2161A 2161A FLVCT-17-1 FLVCT-17-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD FRSTP-18 Red Firestop Material 3149 3149 FRSTP-18-1 FRSTP-18-2
NAD NAD NAD NAD CLLI-19 2’x2’ Smooth w/ Recessed Edge Ceiling Panel 4154A 4154A CLLI-19-1 CLLI-19-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD Olin Hall CLLI-20 2’x2’ Smooth w/ Recessed Edge Ceiling Panel 230
230 CLLI-20-1 CLLI-20-2 NAD NAD NAD NAD Snee Hall Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Inspection 2289.001/1.2020 - 9 - Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 6.0 DISCUSSION Of the suspect materials
sampled by B&L from Snee Hall, (GLAZE-7) grey window glazing and (FLVCT-14) 12”x12” black w/ grey mottled floor tile are asbestos containing as per laboratory analysis. Black floor
tile mastic associated with (FLVCT-14) was determined non-asbestos by Delta‘s sampling. Black Trespa countertops are non-asbestos as per Delta’s survey, but (SINK-AAA) associated countertop
black mastic is asbestos containing. Delta’s asbestos survey details extensive sampling in Olin Hall. Suspect asbestos materials in the proposed renovation area were determined non-asbestos
through Delta’s sampling and subsequent laboratory analysis. One additional suspect material, not covered by Delta’s report, was sampled by B&L and is non-asbestos as per laboratory
analysis. APPENDIX A Floor Plans and Previous Sampling Data BBD-1-1,2 BBDMAS-2-1,2 GLUE-3-1,2 BBD-5-1,2 CAULK-4-2 CAULK-4-1 CAULK-6-1,2 BBD-9-1,2 CLLI-8-1,2 FLVCT-11-1,2 LEVELER-10-1,2,3
SINK-12-1,2 SEALANT-13-1,2 CAULK-15-1,2 + FLVCT-14-1,2 MAS-16-1,2 FLVCT-17-1,2 + GLAZE-7-1,2 FRSTP-18-1,2 CLLI-19-1,2 CLLI-20-1,2 Cornell University Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos
Survey Report Performed at Snee Hall (Building 2049) For the Snee Hall Rooms 4158/4160A/4160B Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Cornell University Ithaca, New York Campus
Prepared for: Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects II Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management FM Administration 116 Humphreys Service Building, Ithaca, NY
14853 Prepared by: 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Phone: 607-231-6600 Fax: 607-231-6640 www.delta-eas.com Delta Project No. 2019.003.108 Cornell Work Order No. 11898216
/ Task Authorization No. 108 Field work performed by: Michael Drobak, July 31, 2019 Report prepared by: Michael Drobak, August 5, 2019 Report reviewed by: Stephen Prislupsky
2 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................
........................ 3 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS ................. 5 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS AND CONCLUSIONS ..................................................
...... 12 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS................................................................................. 13 Appendix A, ASBESTOS BULK SAMPLE REPORT FORM ...............................
........... 14 Appendix B, LABORATORY ANALYTICAL RESULTS ................................................. 15 Appendix C, DELTA ENGINEERS, COMPANY AND PERSONNEL CERTIFICATIONS .......
16 Appendix D, LABORATORY CERTIFICATIONS ......................................................... 17 Appendix E, SURVEY LOCATION / LIMITS & SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWINGS..............
18 Appendix F, PHOTO LOG .................................................................................... 19 3 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650
www.delta-eas.com 1.0 INTRODUCTION: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors (Delta) was contracted by Cornell University to provide a Limited Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey
in Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A & 4160B at Snee Hall (Bldg. 2049) in support of the upcoming Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project. The survey addressed all accessible Spaces
included in the project renovation areas referenced above and associated suspect building materials with the potential to be impacted by the upcoming Project. The areas addressed as
a part of this Survey were based on the drawings and information provided onsite at the time of the Survey by Cornell Project Representative Michael Swartwout (reference Attachment
E for the Renovation Area Location / Limits Drawing). The initial stage included a review of past Delta sample information, sample information from other Consultants, and Cornell 4D
Database information for the Building. Cornell 4D Database information and bulk sample results through previous Delta/Cornell Consultant sampling efforts have been incorporated into
this Survey and associated Survey Report where applicable. On July 31st, 2019, Delta Certified Inspector Michael Drobak conducted a walkthrough of the renovation area spaces/rooms
to identify the various accessible suspect materials present. Based on a visual inspection of the affected areas along with a review of the project scope and existing sample information,
a total of eight (8) bulk samples were collected representing four (4) separate suspect homogenous building materials. All eight (8) of the samples collected were non-friable organically
bound (NOB) representing four (4) homogenous materials. In addition to the samples collected above, other suspect homogenous materials with the potential to be impacted by the project
were observed but not sampled as they were either addressed through previous sampling efforts or they were not sampled as they would not be impacted by the scope of work. For the previously
sampled materials, the results from the Cornell 4D Database information and previous Delta/Cornell Consultant Surveys have been incorporated into this report. For those materials that
were not sampled based on the scope of work, they are “assumed” asbestos containing for the purposes of this Survey. The suspect homogenous building materials identified and/or sampled
in the affected mass spectrometer installation project renovation areas included the following: Homogenous Area (HA) Suspect Building Material 01 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant
02 Yellow Mastic from 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base 03 Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 04 Black Trespa Countertop 05* Fume Hood Transite Panels 06** Brown
Drywall 07** Joint Compound from Brown Drywall 08** White Drywall 09** Joint Compound from White Drywall 10** White Caulk 11** 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 4 860 Hooper
Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com * – Material confirmed to be Asbestos Containing Transite based on Visual Inspection ** – Material previously
sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database Specific information required by 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1, (f) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information” to
be included in this pre-renovation report is as follows: 1) Building Name/Address: Snee Hall, Building 2049 112 Hollister Drive Cornell University Campus Ithaca, NY 14850 2) Owner’s
Name/Address: Cornell University Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, NY 14853 3) Owner’s Agent: Mr. Dale Houseknecht 4) Survey Performed By: Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land
Surveyors 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 5) Certified Inspectors: Michael Drobak Certificate No. 02-18996 6) Date of Survey: July 31st, 2019 7) Laboratory: America Science
Team New York, Inc. 117 East 30th Street, New York, NY 10016 5 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com 2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY
AND SAMPLING PROCEDURES AND METHODS: 2.1 Survey requirements Requirements to perform Pre-Demolition/Pre-Renovation Asbestos Surveys are based on the following State and Federal Regulations.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA): OSHA survey requirements and sampling protocols are included in 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j) (2) & (j) (8) and 29 CFR Part 1926.1101(k),
(5): 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j)(2), Installed Asbestos Containing Material: Employers and building owners are required to treat installed TSI and sprayed on and troweled-on surfacing
materials as ACM in buildings constructed no later than 1980 for purposes of this standard. These materials are designated "presumed ACM or PACM", and are defined in paragraph (b) of
this section. Asphalt and vinyl flooring material installed no later than 1980 also must be treated as asbestos-containing. The employer or building owner may demonstrate that PACM
and flooring material do not contain asbestos by complying with paragraph (j) (8) (iii) of this section. 29 CFR Part 1910.1001(j) (8), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed
material as PACM: 1910.1001(j)(8)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building
owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph
(j)(8)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained
pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section. 1910.1001(j) (8) (ii) - An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM does not contain asbestos by the following: 1910.1001(j)(8)(ii)(A)
- Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 CFR 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that no ACM is present in the material; or 1910.1001(j) (8)
(ii) (B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in
the manner described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed
by persons or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA)
or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1910.1001(j)(8)(iii) -The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated
mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. 29 CFR
Part 1926.1101(k) (5), Criteria to rebut the designation of installed material as PACM: 1926.1101(k)(5)(i) - At any time, an employer and/or building owner may demonstrate, for purposes
of this standard, that PACM does not contain asbestos. Building owners and/or employers are not required to communicate information about the presence of building material for which
such a demonstration pursuant to the requirements of paragraph (k)(5)(ii) of this section has been made. However, in all such cases, the information, data and analysis supporting the
determination that PACM does not contain asbestos, shall be retained pursuant to paragraph (n) of this section. 1926.1101(k) (5) (ii) – An employer or owner may demonstrate that PACM
does not contain more than 1 percent asbestos by the following: 1926.1101(k)(5)(ii)(A) - Having a completed inspection conducted pursuant to the requirements of AHERA (40 6 860
Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com CFR Part 763, Subpart E) which demonstrates that the material is not ACM; or 1926.1101(k) (5) (ii)
(B) - Performing tests of the material containing PACM which demonstrate that no ACM is present in the material. Such tests shall include analysis of bulk samples collected in the manner
described in 40 CFR 763.86. The tests, evaluation and sample collection shall be conducted by an accredited inspector or by a CIH. Analysis of samples shall be performed by persons
or laboratories with proficiency demonstrated by current successful participation in a nationally recognized testing program such as the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation
Program (NVLAP) or the National Institute for Standards and Technology (NIST) or the Round Robin for bulk samples administered by the American Industrial Hygiene Association (AIHA)
or an equivalent nationally-recognized round robin testing program. 1926.1101(k)(5)(iii) - The employer and/or building owner may demonstrate that flooring material including associated
mastic and backing does not contain asbestos, by a determination of an industrial hygienist based upon recognized analytical techniques showing that the material is not ACM. EPA National
Emissions Standard for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs): (NESHAPs) regulates asbestos under “40 CFR Part 61, Subpart M - National Emission Standard for Asbestos”. Subpart M regulates
demolition and/or renovation of “facilities” that may contain asbestos-containing materials (ACMs). “Facilities,” as defined by NESHAPs, includes any institutional, commercial, public,
industrial, or residential structure or building, except residential buildings having four or fewer units. ACMs are defined in NESHAPs as materials containing more than 1 percent asbestos.
Section 61.145 states: 61.145 Standard for demolition and renovation. (a) Applicability. To determine which requirements of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of this section apply to
the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and prior to the commencement of the demolition or renovation, thoroughly inspect the affected facility or part of the facility
where the demolition or renovation operation will occur for the presence of asbestos, including Category I and Category II nonfriable ACM. It should be noted that 40 CFR Part 1 Subpart
M, NESHAPS has no cut-off date exempting survey requirements. New York State Department of Labor (NYS DOL): Guidelines followed for the inspection are those established by the NYS
DOL’s Industrial Code Rule 56 (Cited as 12 NYCRR Part 56, as amended, adopted January 11, 2006; effective September 5, 2006). The specific survey, sampling and reporting requirements
included in 12 NYCRR Part 56-5.1(e) – “Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements” include: 56-5.1 Asbestos Survey Requirements for Building/Structure Demolition, Renovation,
Remodeling and Repair (a) Asbestos Survey Required. An owner or an owner’s agent, except the owner of one and two-family dwellings who contracts for, but does not direct or control
the work, shall cause to be conducted, an asbestos survey completed by a licensed asbestos contractor using inspectors certified in compliance with Section 56-3.2(d), to determine whether
or not the building or structure, or portion(s) thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or have repair work, contains ACM, PACM or asbestos material. This asbestos survey shall
be completed and submitted as indicated in Subdivision (g) of this Section, prior to commencing work. All such asbestos surveys shall be conducted in conformance with the requirements
of Subdivision (e) of this Section. 7 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com (b) Exemptions to Asbestos Survey Requirements:
The asbestos survey required by this Subdivision (a) of this Section shall not be required for the following classes of buildings or structures: (1) An agricultural building; (2) Buildings
or structures for which original construction commenced on or after January 1, 1974; (3) A structure certified in writing to be structurally unsound by a licensed Professional Engineer,
Registered Architect, Building Inspector, Fire Inspector or other official of competent jurisdiction. (See Section 56-11.5) (c) Building/Structure Demolition. If a building/structure
asbestos survey is not required or performed per Subdivision (b) of this Section, and the building/structure is certified to be unsound or slated for contracted demolition, the building/structure
shall be assumed to contain asbestos, and shall be demolished per this Part, unless the building/structure is adequately certified to be free of asbestos containing material. Acceptable
documentation for certification shall be a previous thorough building/structure asbestos survey, abatement records or other documentation acceptable to the Commissioner or his or her
representative. (d) Responsibility to Comply. No exemption to the requirement to conduct an asbestos survey shall exempt any person, asbestos contractor, property owner or business
entity from the inspection or asbestos survey requirements of EPA, OSHA, and any other applicable section of this Part. (e) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Requirements. The asbestos
survey shall include a thorough inspection for and identification of all PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material throughout the building/structure or portion thereof to
be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or to have repair work. The required inspection shall be performed by a certified asbestos inspector, and, at a minimum, shall include identification
of PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material by all of the following methods: (1) The review of building/structure plans and records, if available, for references to asbestos,
ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM or asbestos material used in construction, renovation or repair; and (2) A visual inspection for PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM throughout the
building/structure or portion thereof to be demolished, renovated, remodeled, or repaired. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous ACM visually assessed shall
be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered
systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both ELAP and
federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document non-asbestos containing material. (f) Building/Structure Asbestos Survey Information. (1) The asbestos survey
shall, at a minimum, identify and assess with due diligence, the locations, quantities, friability and conditions of all types of installations at the affected portion of the building/structure
relative to the ACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, PACM or asbestos 8 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com material contained therein.
The following list is not inclusive of all types of ACMs, it only summarizes typical ACMs. The certified asbestos inspector is responsible for identification and assessment of all types
ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM and asbestos material within the affected portion of the building/structure: PACM (i) Surfacing Treatments: (a) Fireproofing; (b) Acoustical Plaster;
(c) Finish Plasters; and (d) Skim Coats of Joint Compound. (ii) Thermal System Insulation: (a) Equipment Insulation; (b) Boiler, Breeching, Boiler Rope, Duct, or Tank Insulation, Cement
or Mortar Used for Boilers and Refractory Brick; (c) Piping and Fitting Insulations including but not limited to, Wrapped Paper, Aircell, Millboard, Rope, Cork, Preformed Plaster, Job
Molded Plaster and coverings over fibrous glass insulation. SUSPECT MISCELLANEOUS ACM (i) Roofing and Siding Miscellaneous Materials: (a) Insulation Board; (b) Vapor Barriers; (c)
Coatings; (d) Non-Metallic or Non-Wood Roof Decking (e) Felts; (f) Cementitious Board (Transite); (g) Flashing; (h) Shingles; and (i) Galbestos. (ii) Other Miscellaneous Materials:
(a) Dust and Debris; (b) Floor Tile; (c) Cove Base; (d) Floor Leveler Compound; (e) Ceiling Tile; (f) Vermiculite Insulation (g) Gaskets, Seals, Sealants (including for condensate control);
(h) Vibration Isolators; (i) Laboratory Tables and Hoods; (j) Chalkboards; (k) Pipe Penetration Packing or Other Firestopping Materials (l) Cementitious Board; (m) Electrical Wire Insulation;
(n) Fire Curtains; (o) Fire Blankets; (p) Fire Doors; (q) Brakes and Clutches; 9 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com (r) Mastics,
Adhesives and Glues; (s) Caulks; (t) Sheet Flooring (Linoleum); (u) Wallpaper; (v) Drywall; (w) Plasterboard (x) Spackling/Joint Compound; (y) Textured Paint; (z) Grout; (aa) Glazing
Compound; and (ab) Terrazzo. (2) All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM, or asbestos material reported under Paragraph (1) of this Subdivision shall include the location of the materials,
an estimate of the quantities, types, friability and condition of the identified materials to be treated and handled as ACM. For the purpose of this Part, all PACM and suspect miscellaneous
ACM visually assessed shall be treated and handled as ACM and shall be assumed to be ACM, unless bulk sampling is conducted as per this Section, standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods,
including multilayered systems sampling protocols; the subsequent analyses are performed by a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses
satisfies both ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses, to document nonasbestos containing material. (3) The building/structure asbestos survey shall
also include the building/structure name, address, the building/structure owner’s name and address, the name and address of the owner's agent, the name of the firm performing the asbestos
survey and a copy of the firm’s current asbestos handling license, the names of the certified inspector(s) performing the survey and a copy of the current asbestos handling certificate
for each inspector utilized, the dates of the asbestos survey, a listing of homogeneous areas identifying which ones are ACM, all laboratory analyses reports for bulk samples collected,
and copies of the appropriate certifications for the laboratory used for analysis of samples taken during the asbestos survey. (g) Transmittal of Building/Structure Asbestos Survey
Information. One (1) copy of the results of the building/structure asbestos survey shall be immediately transmitted by the building/structure owner as follows: (1) One (1) copy of
the completed asbestos survey shall be sent by the owner or their agent to the local government entity charged with issuing a permit for such demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair
work under applicable State or local laws. (2) The completed asbestos survey for controlled demolition (as per Subpart 56-11.5) or pre-demolition asbestos projects shall also be submitted
to the appropriate Asbestos Control Bureau district office. (3) The completed asbestos survey shall be kept on the construction site with the asbestos notification and variance, if
required, throughout the duration of the asbestos project and any associated demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project. 10 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com (h) Removal Required. If the building/structure asbestos survey finds that the portion of the building/structure to be demolished, renovated, remodeled,
or have repair work contains ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material, which is impacted by the work, the owner or the owner’s agent shall conduct,
or cause to have conducted, asbestos removal performed by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor in conformance with all standards set forth in this Part. All ACM, PACM, suspect miscellaneous
ACM assumed to be ACM, or asbestos material impacted by the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair project shall be removed as per this Part, prior to access or disturbance by
other uncertified trades or personnel. No demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair work shall be commenced by any owner or the owner’s agent prior to the completion of the asbestos
abatement in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. For multi-phased work, the access restriction for uncertified trades or personnel applies to each intermediate
portion of the entire project. Upon completion of the intermediate portion of the asbestos project, other trades or personnel may access that portion of the work site. For demolition
projects that are exempt from asbestos survey requirements due to being structurally unsound, the demolition is considered an asbestos project and shall proceed as per Section 56-11.5.
(1) All building/structure owners and asbestos abatement contractors on a demolition, renovation, remodeling, or repair project, which includes work covered by this Part, shall inform
all trades on the work site about PACM, ACM, asbestos material and suspect miscellaneous ACM assumed to be ACM at the work site. (i) Bidding. Bids may be advertised and contracts awarded
for demolition, remodeling, renovation, or repair work, but no work on the current intermediate portion of the project shall commence on the demolition, renovation, remodeling or repair
work by any owner or agent prior to completion of all necessary asbestos abatement work for the current intermediate portion of the entire project, in conformance with all standards
set forth in this Part. (j) Unidentified and Unassessed Asbestos. When any construction activity, such as demolition, remodeling, renovation or repair work, reveals PACM or suspect
miscellaneous ACM that has not been identified by the asbestos survey per this Part, or has not been identified by other inspections as per current OSHA or EPA requirements, all activities
shall cease in the area where the PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM is found and the Asbestos Control Bureau shall be notified by telephone by the building/structure owner or their
representative, followed with a written notice in accordance with the notification requirements of this Part. Unassessed PACM or suspect miscellaneous ACM shall be treated and handled
as ACM and assumed to be ACM, unless proven otherwise by standard EPA and OSHA accepted methods, including multi-layered systems sampling protocols; subsequent analyses performed by
a laboratory that meets the requirements of Section 56-4.2 of this Part; and the analyses satisfies both NYS ELAP and federal requirements, including multi-layered sample analyses,
to document non-asbestos containing material. 2.2 Sample Analysis Bulk sample analysis was performed by American Science Team New York Inc., an independent laboratory approved/accredited
by the NYS Department of Health (ELAP), the American 11 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com Industrial Hygiene Association
(AIHA), and the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP). Samples collected during the course of this survey fell into one of two categories. The first category
includes non-friable organically bound (NOB) materials. These materials are those which have an organic binder in their matrix and include items such as floor tiles, sheet flooring,
mastics, glazings, caulks and roofing materials. The second category includes non-NOB “friable” materials including parging, sheetrock, joint compound, wall insulations, and wallboard.
Analysis of all “NOB” materials was initially performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the New York State Department of Health ELAP 198.6 Gravimetric Reduction Methodology.
If a given sample was reported as non-asbestos following this analysis, it was then analyzed by Transmission Electron Microscopy (TEM) following the NYS DOH ELAP 198.4 Methodology.
Analysis of all “non-NOB” materials was performed by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) following the EPA 600/M4/82/020 and the NYS DOH ELAP 198.1 Methodologies. 2.3 Materials not sampled
There were several materials present at the site which were not considered “suspect” by the inspector and were not sampled. These included various fiberglass, foam, vinyl, silicone,
wood/cellulose products and concrete/cinder block/brick components. 12 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com 3.0 SURVEY FINDINGS
AND CONCLUSIONS 3.1) Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey, Non-Asbestos Materials – Based on results from previous Delta Sampling
efforts, results from previous sampling efforts of other Consultants, results from the Cornell 4D Database, and results reported for samples collected during this Survey of accessible
suspect materials within the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Renovation area, the following materials were identified as non-asbestos: Homogenous Area (HA)
Non-Asbestos Building Material 01 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant 02 Yellow Mastic from 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base 03 Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 04 Black
Trespa Countertop 06** Brown Drywall 07** Joint Compound from Brown Drywall 08** White Drywall 09** Joint Compound from White Drywall 10** White Caulk ** – Material previously
sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database 3.2) Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Installation Project Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey, Asbestos-Containing Materials
– Based on results from previous Delta Sampling efforts, results from previous sampling efforts of other Consultants, results from the Cornell 4D Database, and results reported for
samples collected during this Survey of accessible suspect materials within the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Project Renovation area, the following materials were
identified as being asbestos-containing: Homogenous Area (HA) Asbestos Containing Material 05* Fume Hood Transite Panels 11** 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile * – Material
confirmed to be Asbestos Containing Transite based on Visual Inspection ** – Material previously sampled by Cornell Consultant or included in Cornell 4D Database A breakdown of asbestos-containing
materials by Homogeneous Area is as follows: A) Fume Hood Transite Panels, HA 05*: The panels present in the Rooms 4158 and 4160 fume hoods were visually confirmed to be asbestos-containing
transite. The total quantity of this material is approximately 40 square feet in each fume hood (two fume hoods total), with the amount of this material to be impacted by the Project
being unknown at the time of this survey. 13 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com B) 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile, HA
11**: The asbestos-containing 12”x12” Black Mottle Pattern Floor Tile is present in Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A, and 4160B. There is approximately 1,650 square feet of this tile
present I these rooms, with the actual amount of this material to be impacted by the Project being unknown at the time of this survey. The mastic associated with this tile (HA 03)
was reported as “No Asbestos Detected 4.0 INACCESSIBLE AREAS This Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey was limited to ONLY accessible rooms/spaces included in the Snee Hall Mass Spectrometer
Exhaust Replacement Project renovation area. The associated rooms, spaces and areas which were accessible were inspected and sampled as a part of this survey. Inaccessible areas such
as wall cavities, fixed/hard ceiling plenum spaces and enclosed pipe chases were not included as a part of this Survey. Any suspect materials present in areas not accessible or not
included as a part of this Survey shall be assumed ACM when encountered, until tested. 14 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX A Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel:607.231.6600 Fax:607.231.6640 www.delta-eas.com 2019.003.108 Date(s) Sampling Performed:
07/31/2019 Date of Report: 08/05/2019 Building Code: Material Asbestos PLM Result TEM Result Bulk Sample Description / Details Type Type % Asbestos % Asbestos 2019.003.108 - 01A 01
4 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant - Corridor Adjacent to Room 4160. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 01B 01 4 Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant - Corridor Adjacent to Room 4160. Miscellaneous
ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 02A 02 4 Yellow Mastic from 4" Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base - Room 4160A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 02B 02 4 Yellow Mastic from 4" Dark Brown Vinyl
Cove Base - Room 4158A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 03A 03 4 Black Mastic from 12"x12" Black Mottled Floor Tile - Room 4160A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 03B 03
4 Black Mastic from 12"x12" Black Mottled Floor Tile - Room 4158A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108 - 04A 04 4 Black Trespa Countertop - Room 4160A. Miscellaneous ND ND ND 2019.003.108
- 04B 04 4 Black Trespa Countertop - Room 4160B. Miscellaneous ND ND ND Task Authorization No.: TA-108 / Work Order No.: 11898216 Number of Samples Analyzed: PLM - 08 / TEM - 08 Delta
Proj. No.: HA - Homogenous Area ND - No Asbestos Detected NA - Not Analyzed by Methodology NA/PS - Not Analyzed, Positive Stop TSI - Thermal System Insulation
Misc - Miscellaneous Material Trace / < 1% - Non-asbestos by definition Number of Samples Collected: 08 Number Client: Cornell University Asbestos Inspector(s): Michael
C. Drobak Asbestos Bulk Sample Report Form Sample Laboratory: AmeriSci, NY Labs HA* Floor Project: Snee Hall 4th Floor Rooms 4158/4160A/4160B Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement
Asbestos Survey 2049 Cornell University Snee Hall 4th Floor Mass Spectrometer Exhaust Replacement Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey Page 1 of 1 15 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760
Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX B Laboratory Analytical Results 16 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX C Delta Engineers, Architects, & Land Surveyors Company and Personnel Certifications New York State – Department of Labor Division of
Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240 ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Delta Engineers & Architects & Land Surveyors, P.C. 860 Hooper
Road Endwell, NY 13760 FILE NUMBER: 05-0851 LICENSE NUMBER: 29322 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 09/12/2018 EXPIRATION DATE: 09/30/2019 Duly Authorized Representative
– Stephen Prislupsky: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules
and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos
project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and
this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project
in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director
SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor 17 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX D Laboratory Certifications
18 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com APPENDIX E Survey Location / Limits & Bulk Sample Location Drawings
Survey Location / Limits 860 Hooper Road, Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 : Fax: 607.231.6651 www.delta-eas.com Delta Project No.: 2019.003.108 Project Name: Snee Hall 4th Floor
Mass Spectrometer Installation Project Work Area: Rooms 4158, 4158A, 4160, 4160A & 4160B Client: Cornell University Bulk Sample Type: Bldg. No.: 2049 Page: of 1 1 Scale: NTS Drawn By:
M. Drobak Date(s) Sampled: 07/31/2019 N 03A 04A 01B 01A 02A 04B 02B 03B 19 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com
APPENDIX F Photo Log 20 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 01: Gray Ductwork Seam Sealant No Asbestos Detected
HA 02: Yellow Mastic from non-suspect 4” Dark Brown Vinyl Cove Base, No Asbestos Detected 21 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com
HA 03: Black Mastic from 12”x12” Black Mottled Floor Tile, No Asbestos Detected HA 04: Black Trespa Countertop, No Asbestos Detected 22 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel:
607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 05*: Fume Hood Transite Panels Visually Confirmed to be Asbestos-Containing Transite HA’s 06**, 07**, 08** & 09** -
Brown Drywall/ associated Joint Compound & White Drywall/ associated Joint Compound, All No Asbestos Detected 23 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650
Website: www.delta-eas.com HA 10** - White Caulk, No Asbestos Detected HA 11** - Black Mottled Floor Tile, Asbestos-Containing 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600
Fax: 607.231.6650 Website: www.deltaengineers.com AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” August 27, 2013 Mr. Dale Houseknecht,
Asbestos Project Coordinator Cornell University Maintenance Management 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Snee Hall Building 2049 - Suspect Asbestos Material
Overview Dear Mr. Houseknecht: The following information is associated with the various “suspect” building materials present at Snee Hall (Building 2049). It should be noted that
a comprehensive “Full Building” Asbestos Survey has not been performed at Snee Hall and other suspect building materials not listed/included below are known to be present in the Building.
As per the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor, OSHA and NESHAPS, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects addressing the affected renovation
areas and the associated suspect materials present in each. When these “other” undocumented suspect materials are encountered, they should be considered “Presumed Asbestos Containing
Materials” or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise by a given project’s Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey. Based on previous Delta sampling efforts and bulk
sample information from Cornell University’s 4D Database, the following is a breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s) and known Non-Asbestos Materials. For the Asbestos
Containing Materials, they should be considered to be asbestos containing wherever present in the Building. For each Non-Asbestos Material, the given material was either sampled as
a part of the facility-wide Snee Hall Telecommunications Survey or included in the Cornell 4D Database, so the material classification is applicable for the given material wherever
present in the Building. 1) Asbestos Containing Materials: Counter-Top Black Mastic 12”x 12” Dark Brown Floor Tile 12”x 12” Black Mottled Floor Tile 2) Non-Asbestos Materials:
- White Grout from 2” x 2” Ceramic Wall Tile - Mortar from 2” x 2” Ceramic Wall Tile - Brown Drywall - Joint Compound from Brown Drywall - White Caulk - 1’ x 1’ Splined Fissured Ceiling
Tile - 1’ x 1’ adhered Fissured Ceiling Tile - Brown Glue Pucks from 1’ x 1’ Adhered Fissured Ceiling Tile - 2’ x 2’ Recessed “Line” Patterned Ceiling Tile - White Drywall - Joint
Compound from White Drywall DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Page 2 of 2 AN ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations”
Again, as per applicable State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials with the
potential to be impacted by the given project’s scope are identified as ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given project’s survey must be performed by a New York State Department
of Labor/EPA Certified Asbestos Inspector and would include a review of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the collection and analysis of bulk samples for those suspect
materials encountered that have not been previously identified. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your convenience. Respectfully,
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, P.C. Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services 860 Hooper Road Endwell, NY 13760 Tel: 607.231.6600 Fax: 607.231.6650 Website:
www.delta-eas.com AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” October 7, 2019 Mr. Dale Houseknecht, Facilities Coordinator Projects
II Cornell University IPP – Facilities Management FM Administration 116 Humphreys Service Building Ithaca, New York 14853-3701 Re: Olin Hall Building 2024 – Suspect Asbestos Material
Overview Dear Mr. Houseknecht: The following information is associated with the various “suspect” building materials present at Olin Hall (Building 2024). It should be noted that
sampling of all suspect exterior building materials present at Olin Hall has not been performed. When these undocumented suspect exterior building materials are encountered, they should
be considered “Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials” or “assumed” asbestos containing materials until proven otherwise by a given project’s PreRenovation Asbestos Survey. As per
the requirements of the NYS Department of Labor, OSHA and NESHAPS, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for all Renovation Projects addressing the affected renovation areas
and the associated suspect materials present in each. Based on Delta’s Full Building Interior Survey and limited exterior building materials asbestos bulk sampling efforts, the following
is a breakdown of known Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM’s) and known Non-Asbestos Materials. For the Asbestos Containing Materials, they should be considered to be asbestos containing
wherever present in the Building. For each Non-Asbestos Material, the given material was sampled as a part of the full building interior Asbestos Survey, so the material classification
is applicable for the given material wherever present in the Building. 1) Asbestos Containing Materials: • All Non-Foam / Non-Fiberglass Pipe and Pipe Fitting Insulation • Dark Brown
12" x 12" Floor Tile • White w/ Brown Streaks 12" x 12" Floor Tile • Green Mottle Pattern 12” x 12” Floor Tile • Light Grey w/ White Spec 12” x 12” Floor Tile • All Colors/Patterns
of 9” x 9” Floor Tile • Interior Black Tar Waterproofing on Brick Walls • Exterior Window Frame Caulk from Original Window System • Exterior Window Glazing Compound from Original Window
System • Brown Exterior Door Frame Caulk • Black Glazing Compound from Door Windows • Black Fire Curtain • Transite Bench-tops / Lab-Tops • Felt Paper from Roofing Vapor Barrier System
DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 2 of 3 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” 2) Non-Asbestos Materials:
• White w/Gray Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • White w/Dark Gray Streaks 12" x 12” Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Tan Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and
its associated Mastic • Dark Grey Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Grey Mottled 12" x 12" Floor Tile and its associated Mastic • Black Mottled 12" x 12" Floor
Tile and its associated Mastic • Black Mastic from all colors / patterns of asbestos containing 9” x 9” Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing Dark Brown 12" x 12" Floor Tile
• Mastic from asbestos containing White w/Brown Streaks 12" x 12" Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing Green Mottle Pattern 12” x 12” Floor Tile • Mastic from asbestos containing
Light Grey w/ White Spec 12” x 12” Floor Tile • Grey Sheet Flooring and its associated Mastic • Blue Sheet Flooring and its associated Mastic • Light Green w/ Gray Sheet Vinyl Flooring
and its associated mastic • Speckled Blue Sheet Flooring and its associated Paper Backing / Mastic • Grey Epoxy Flooring • All Colors of Carpet Mastics/Adhesives • Raised Floor Panels
and associated Yellow Mastic • Raised Floor Pedestal Mastic • Black Mastic from Quarry Tile Flooring • Mastic from non-suspect vinyl flooring transition strips • All Colors of Floor
Levelers • All Colors/Sizes of Cove Base and their associated Mastics • Grout/Mortar Bed for all Colors/Sizes of Ceramic Wall Tile and Ceramic Floor Tiles • All Colors/Ages of Sheetrock/Gypsum
Board • All Colors/Ages of Joint Compound • Skim-Coat Wall Plasters • All Single-Coat and Two-Coat Wall and Ceiling Plasters • Mastic from non-suspect Wall Fabric • Mastic from Wood
Wall Paneling • Mastics/Adhesives from All Acoustical Wall Panels • Perlite Insulation Board • All Colors/Patterns of Wall Coverings/Wall Paper and their associated Mastics/Adhesives
• Yellow Mastic from Wall Cork Board • Yellow Adhesive from Chalk Boards / Wall-mounted Boards • Spray-on Fireproofing (Confirmed though SOF-V 198.8 Analysis) • All Sizes/Patterns of
Suspended Ceiling Tiles • All Patterns of 12” x 12” Adhered Ceiling Tiles and their associated Mastics/Adhesives • Paper Wrap/Covering/Tape on non-suspect fiberglass pipe insulation
• Fiberglass Pipe Insulation End Sealant • Hot Water Tank Insulation Silver Wrap • White Seam Tape from metal ductwork • All Colors of Duct Seam/Joint Sealant DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS,
& LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Page 3 of 3 AN ISO 9001:2015 CERTIFIED COMPANY “We are a seamless extension of our clients’ organizations” 2) Non-Asbestos Materials (continued): • Red Fire Stop
• Grey Fire Stop • All Electrical Conduit Caulks • Window Frame Caulk from Glass Block Windows • Glazing Compound from Glass Block Windows • Frame Caulk from In-Fill Window Panels •
All Colors of Interior Door Frame Caulks • All Door Core Materials • Non-Transite Bench-tops/Lab-tops and associated Adhesives/Mastics/Seam Epoxies • Black Sink Undercoating • Exterior
Foundation White Parging • Exterior Foundation Black Waterproofing • Black Paper Backing from roofing ISO Board • Hot-Mop Tar from Roofing Vapor Barrier System • Lap Sealant from EPDM
Roof System Again, as per applicable State and Federal requirements, a Pre-Renovation Asbestos Survey is required for every individual Renovation Project to assure all suspect materials
with the potential to be impacted by the given project’s scope are identified as ACM vs. Non-ACM and dealt with accordingly. A given project’s survey must be performed by a New York
State Department of Labor/EPA Certified Asbestos Inspector and would include a review of the existing “known” ACM’s and Non-ACM’s along with the collection and analysis of bulk samples
for those suspect materials encountered that have not been previously identified. If you have any questions, or require any other information, please feel free to contact me at your
convenience. Respectfully, DELTA ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS, & LAND SURVEYORS, DPC Stephen Prislupsky Director of Environmental Services APPENDIX B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results
and Chain-of-Custody Records APPENDIX C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos License and Certificates New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License
and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240 ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 FILE NUMBER:
99-0130 LICENSE NUMBER: 29267 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE OF ISSUE: 02/14/2019 EXPIRATION DATE: 02/29/2020 Duly Authorized Representative – Scott D Nostrand: This license
has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56).
It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack
of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must
be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued
an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform, by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner
of Labor APPENDIX D Laboratory Certificates www.bartonandloguidice.com Appendix B Asbestos Bulk Sample Analytical Results and
Chain‐of‐Custody Records AmeriSci New York 117 EAST 30TH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114 03/22/21 AmeriSci Job # 221033090 03/24/21 ELAP # 11480
1 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University Snee Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received Date Examined RE: ofPage P.O. # Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics
Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 Attn: John E. Rigge Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLTL-1-1
221033090-01 NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile1 White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 15.7% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location:
Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLTL-1-2 221033090-02 NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile1 White/Grey, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous
19.8% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLGL-2-1 221033090-03 NAD Brown Ceiling Tile Glue2 Brown, Homogeneous,
Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 46.5% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLGL-2-2 221033090-04
NAD Brown Ceiling Tile Glue2 Brown, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 44.9% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos
Types: Other Material: NoCANVAS-3-1 221033090-05 NAD Corkboard Canvas Cover3 Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 16.1% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on
03/24/21 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 221033090 Page 2 of 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University Snee Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Client
Name:Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCANVAS-3-2 221033090-06 NAD
Corkboard Canvas Cover3 Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 15.5% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types:
Other Material: NoCLGL-4-1 221033090-07 NAD Tan Ceiling Tile Glue4 Tan, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 25.7% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location:
Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLGL-4-2 221033090-08 NAD Tan Ceiling Tile Glue4 Tan, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 32.5% (by NYS ELAP 198.6)
by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Reporting Notes: *NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop, (SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite;
(SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope, Serial #: 229915, by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP
200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-M4-82-020
(NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM
are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory
for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without
the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031.
____________END OF REPORT___________ Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu Date: 3/24/2021 Reviewed by: John P. Koubiadis Client Name: 221033090
Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University - Snee Hall AmeriSci Job #: Page 1 of 1 Table I Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results Client
Sample# Sample Weight (gram) Heat Sensitive Organic % Acid Soluble Inorganic % Insoluble Non-Asbestos Inorganic % HG Area ** Asbestos % by PLM/DS ** Asbestos % by TEM AmeriSci Sample
# 01 CLTL-1-1 1 0.270 13.4 70.9 15.7 NAD NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling TileLocation: 02 CLTL-1-2 1 0.217 15.2 65.0 19.8 NAD NAD 1' x 1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling TileLocation:
03 CLGL-2-1 2 0.199 50.7 2.8 46.5 NAD NAD Brown Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: 04 CLGL-2-2 2 0.208 50.7 4.4 44.9 NAD NAD Brown Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: 05 CANVAS-3-1 3 0.082 80.4 3.6
16.1 NAD NAD Corkboard Canvas CoverLocation: 06 CANVAS-3-2 3 0.097 80.0 4.5 15.5 NAD NAD Corkboard Canvas CoverLocation: 07 CLGL-4-1 4 0.264 32.3 41.9 25.7 NAD NAD Tan Ceiling Tile
GlueLocation: 08 CLGL-4-2 4 0.361 32.9 34.6 32.5 NAD NAD Tan Ceiling Tile GlueLocation: **Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR
763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or NYSDOH ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples; TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples).
Analysis using Hitachi, Model H7000-Noran 7 System, Microscope, Serial #: 747-05-06. NAD = no asbestos detected during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V)
= Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative
only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM Analysis only (no accreditation coverage
available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses): NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID #NY031. Warning Note: PLM limitation,
only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of nonuniformly dispersed
debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended (i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials). Analyzed by: John P. Koubiadis Date: 3/25/2021 Reviewed by: John P. Koubiadis ffimw qpm
effircxx*##mw Client Chiang O'Brien Architects Location: Cornell University Bulk Sample Ghain-of-Custody 11 Centre Park Suite 203 Rochester, NY 14614 585-325-71 90 Fax: 31 5-325-4856
2289.003.001 Date Sampled: 3t19t2A21 1'x1' Fissured Glued-On Ceiling Tile Ceiling Tile Glue Tan Ceiling Tile Glue Polarized Light Microscopyl x |a,oo ", orst positive (> than 1olo asbestos)
in each sampre series. elru - uoa I r lAdvance ro TEM if pLM resutt is 1olo asbestos of tess Email: Mike Goff Email: Dave Morse nrg"---]-ot { #221 0 5 5 0 I0 AmeriSci New York 117 EAST
30TH ST. NEW YORK, NY 10016 TEL: (212) 679-8600 • FAX: (212) 679-3114 03/22/21 AmeriSci Job # 221033091 03/24/21 ELAP # 11480 1 2 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell
University, Olin Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Date Received Date Examined RE: ofPage P.O. # Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 Attn: John E. Rigge
Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No. Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-1-1 221033091-01 NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered
Ceiling Panel W/ Gray Fleck1 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material Fibrous glass 20%, Non-fibrous 52.7% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst
Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-1-2 221033091-02 NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray Fleck1 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Fibrous, Bulk Material
Fibrous glass 25%, Non-fibrous 43.9% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoBENCH-2-1 221033091-03 NAD Lab
Bench2 Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100% (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description:
Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoBENCH-2-2 221033091-04 NAD Lab Bench2 Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious, Bulk Material Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100% (by NYS ELAP
198.1) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoBENCH-2-3 221033091-05 NAD Lab Bench2 Black, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Cementitious,
Bulk Material Cellulose Trace, Non-fibrous 100% (by NYS ELAP 198.1) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 See Reporting notes on last page AmeriSci Job #: 221033091 Page 2 of 2 2289.003.001;
Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University, Olin Hall PLM Bulk Asbestos Report Client Name:Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. Asbestos Present Total % AsbestosClient No. / HGA Lab No.
Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-3-1 221033091-06 NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel3 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material
Non-fibrous 52.3% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-3-2 221033091-07 NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure
Ceiling Panel3 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 43.3% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types:
Other Material: NoCLLI-4-1 221033091-08 NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling Panel4 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous, Bulk Material Non-fibrous 52.4% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu
Voicu on 03/24/21 Location: Analyst Description: Asbestos Types: Other Material: NoCLLI-4-2 221033091-09 NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling Panel4 White/Beige, Homogeneous, Non-Fibrous,
Bulk Material Non-fibrous 49.2% (by NYS ELAP 198.6) by Valeriu Voicu on 03/24/21 Reporting Notes: *NAD/NSD =no asbestos detected; NA =not analyzed; NA/PS=not analyzed/positive stop,
(SOF-V) = Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; PLM Bulk Asbestos Analysis using Olympus, Model BH-2 Pol Scope, Microscope,
Serial #: 229915, by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR 763 (NVLAP 200546-0), ELAP PLM Method 198.1 for NY friable samples, which includes the identification and quantitation of vermiculite
or ELAP 198.6 for NOB samples or EPA 400 pt ct by EPA 600-M4-82-020 (NY ELAP Lab 11480); Note:PLM is not consistently reliable in detecting asbestos in floor coverings and similar
non-friable organically bound materials. NAD or Trace results by PLM are inconclusive, TEM is currently the only method that can be used to determine if this material can be considered
or treated as non asbestos-containing in NY State (also see EPA Advisory for floor tile, FR 59,146,38970,8/1/94) National Institute of Standards and Technology Accreditation requirements
mandate that this report must not be reproduced except in full without the approval of the lab.This PLM report relates ONLY to the items tested. AIHA-LAP, LLC Lab ID 102843, RI Cert
AAL-094, CT Cert PH-0186, Mass Cert AA000054, NJ Lab ID #NY031. ____________END OF REPORT___________ Analyzed by: Valeriu Voicu Date:
3/24/2021 Reviewed by: Aleks Barengolts Client Name: 221033091 Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 2289.003.001; Chiang O'Brien Architects; Cornell University, Olin Hall AmeriSci Job #: Page
1 of 1 Table I Summary of Bulk Asbestos Analysis Results Client Sample# Sample Weight (gram) Heat Sensitive Organic % Acid Soluble Inorganic % Insoluble Non-Asbestos Inorganic % HG
Area ** Asbestos % by PLM/DS ** Asbestos % by TEM AmeriSci Sample # 01 CLLI-1-1 1 0.100 16.3 11.0 72.7 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray FleckLocation:
02 CLLI-1-2 1 0.142 16.1 15.0 68.9 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Smooth White Vinyl Covered Ceiling Panel W/ Gray FleckLocation: 03 BENCH-2-1 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- NAD NA Lab BenchLocation: 04 BENCH-2-2
2 ---- ---- ---- ---- NAD NA Lab BenchLocation: 05 BENCH-2-3 2 ---- ---- ---- ---- NAD NA Lab BenchLocation: 06 CLLI-3-1 3 0.163 28.7 19.0 52.3 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling
PanelLocation: 07 CLLI-3-2 3 0.085 31.6 25.1 43.3 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Deep Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation: 08 CLLI-4-1 4 0.177 25.7 21.9 52.4 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation:
09 CLLI-4-2 4 0.142 28.1 22.7 49.2 NAD NAD 2' x 4' Long Fissure Ceiling PanelLocation: **Quantitative Analysis (Semi/Full); Bulk Asbestos Analysis - PLM by Appd E to Subpt E, 40 CFR
763 or NYSDOH ELAP 198.1 for New York friable samples or NYSDOH ELAP 198.6 for New York NOB samples; TEM (Semi/Full) by EPA 600/R-93/116 (or NYSDOH ELAP 198.4; for New York samples).
Analysis using Hitachi, Model H600-Noran 7 System, Microscope, Serial #: 542-26-10. NAD = no asbestos detected during a quantitative analysis; NA = not analyzed; Trace = <1%; (SOF-V)
= Sprayed On Fireproofing containing Vermiculite; (SM-V) = Surfacing Material containing Vermiculite; Quantitation for beginning weights of <0.1 grams should be considered as qualitative
only; Qualitative Analysis: Asbestos analysis results of "Present" or "NVA = No Visible Asbestos" represents results for Qualitative PLM or TEM Analysis only (no accreditation coverage
available from any regulatory agency for qualitative analyses): NVLAP (PLM) 200546-0, NYSDOH ELAP Lab 11480, AIHA-LAP, LLC (PLM) Lab ID 102843, NJ Lab ID #NY031. Warning Note: PLM limitation,
only TEM will resolve fibers <0.25 micrometers in diameter. TEM bulk analysis is representative of the fine grained matrix material and may not be representative of nonuniformly dispersed
debris for which PLM evaluation is recommended (i.e. soils and other heterogenous materials). Analyzed by: Aleks Barengolts Date: 3/24/2021 Reviewed by: Aleks Barengolts ffiBmmgsptr?
effimx-x*q#$ce Bulk Sampte Chain-of_Custody 11 Centre park Suite 203 Rochester, Ny 14614 585-325-71 90 Fax: 31 5_325_4856 Project No.: Date Sampled: Samoled bv: 2289.003.001 3t19t2021
MDG/JRC Smooth White Vinyl CovereO Panel M Grey Fleck BENCH-2-1,2,3 2'x4'Deep Long Fissure Ceiling Panel Long Fissure Ceiling panet Polarized Light Microscoorfr,o, ", rrst positive
(> th,'-, _ * o, p^.; ;""; ;;;:J:#:1'"," *:"":::::,,. *,.". rmail: Dave Morse Br 72hrs TAT il*tsbartonan.r^^,,;, rqlLr t{: p"s"J.r l_ #221055091 Appendix C Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C.
Asbestos License and Certificates New York State – Department of Labor Division of Safety and Health License and Certificate Unit State Campus, Building 12 Albany, NY 12240
ASBESTOS HANDLING LICENSE Barton & Loguidice, D.P.C. 443 Electronics Parkway Liverpool, NY 13088 FILE NUMBER: 99-0130 LICENSE NUMBER: 29267 LICENSE CLASS: RESTRICTED DATE
OF ISSUE: 01/26/2021 EXPIRATION DATE: 02/28/2022 Duly Authorized Representative – Scott D Nostrand: This license has been issued in accordance with applicable provisions of Article
30 of the Labor Law of New York State and of the New York State Codes, Rules and Regulations (12 NYCRR Part 56). It is subject to suspension or revocation for a (1) serious violation
of state, federal or local laws with regard to the conduct of an asbestos project, or (2) demonstrated lack of responsibility in the conduct of any job involving asbestos or asbestos
material. This license is valid only for the contractor named above and this license or a photocopy must be prominently displayed at the asbestos project worksite. This license
verifies that all persons employed by the licensee on an asbestos project in New York State have been issued an Asbestos Certificate, appropriate for the type of work they perform,
by the New York State Department of Labor. Eileen M. Franko, Director SH 432 (8/12) For the Commissioner of Labor Appendix D Laboratory Certificates
www.bartonandloguidice.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-1 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 35 43 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. This
Section and the listed Related Sections provides minimum requirements for the protection of the environment during the project. The requirements of this Section shall apply to both
Contractor and all tiers of sub-contractors involved in the project. B. In addition to the requirements of this Section and the listed Related Sections, all laws and regulations by
applicable local, state, and federal agencies shall apply to the work of this contract. In some cases the requirements of these Specifications may by intention exceed such legal requirements,
but in no case shall this Specification be interpreted or understood to reduce or eliminate such requirements. C. Prior to bidding, review the entire Bidding Documents and report in
writing to the Owner’s Representative any error, inconsistency, or omission that may have environmental impacts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 – Submittals: 1. Analytical laboratory sample results and material Certifications for all imported soil and granular materials
(“borrow”). 2. Contractor’s Waste Material Disposal Plan. 3. Weight tickets from the Borrow Material Supplier. 4. Proposed methods for dewatering and construction water management.
5. Analytical laboratory sample results for all waste materials. 6. Copies of manifests for all waste materials disposed of off-site. 1.4 JOB SITE ADMINISTRATION A. In accordance with
Article 2 of the General Conditions, provide a competent supervisory representative with full authority to act for the Contractor at the site. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43
Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-2 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021 B. If at any time operations under
the representative’s supervision do not comply with this Section, or the representative is otherwise unsatisfactory to the Owner, replace, if requested by the Owner, said representative
with another representative satisfactory to the Owner. There shall be no change in superintendent without the Owner's approval. C. Remove from the Work any employee of the Contractor
or any Subcontractor when so directed by the Owner. The Owner may request the removal of any employee who does not comply with these specifications. 1.5 CLEARING, SITE PREPARATION
AND SITE USE A. In accordance with Section 01 14 00, only that portion of the working area that is absolutely necessary and essential for the work shall be cleared for construction.
All clearing should be approved and performed to provide minimum practical exposure of soils. B. The Contractor shall make every effort to avoid the destruction of plants, trees, shrubs
and lawns outside the area of construction so as not to unduly disturb the ecological or environmental quality of the area. C. Topsoil excavated as part of the Project, which can be
reused as part of the Project, shall be stockpiled for future use and temporarily stabilized to prevent erosion. 1.6 NOISE AND VIBRATION A. Limit and control the nature and extent of
activities at all times to minimize the effects of noise and vibrations. Take adequate measures for keeping noise levels, as produced by construction related equipment, to safe and
tolerable limits as set forth by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the New York State Industrial Code Guidelines and Ordinances and all City, Town and Local
ordinances. Equip all construction equipment presenting a potential noise nuisance with noise-muffling devices adequate to meet these requirements 1.7 DUST CONTROL A. Take adequate
measures for controlling dust produced by drilling, excavation, backfilling, loading, saw cutting or other means. The use of calcium chloride or petroleum-based materials for dust
control is prohibited. Dust control measures are required throughout the duration of construction. B. If, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, the Contractor is not adequately
controlling dust, the Owner will first notify the Contractor. If the Contractor does not take adequate actions necessary, the Owner may, at the Contractor’s expense, employ alternative
means to control dust. C. Erect, maintain, and remove when appropriate barriers or other devices, including mechanical ventilation systems, as required by the conditions of the work
for the protection of users of the project area, the protection of the work being done, or the containment of dust and debris. All such barriers or devices shall be provided in conformance
with all applicable codes, laws, and regulations including OSHA. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL
ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-3 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021 1.8 PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT A. Construction procedures observed by the Contractor, its subcontractors and other
employees shall include protection of the environment, in accordance with all pertinent Cornell standards, policies, local laws, executive orders, ordinances, and federal and state
regulations. Construction procedures that are prohibited in the undertaking of work associated with this Contract include, but are not limited to: 1. Dumping of spoil material or any
liquid or solid pollutant into any storm or sanitary sewer, drainage way, stream sewer, any wetlands (as defined by federal and state regulations), any surface waters, or at unspecified
locations. 2. Indiscriminate, arbitrary, or capricious operation of equipment in any stream corridors, any wetlands, or any surface waters. 3. Pumping of any silt-laden water from trenches
or other excavations into any storm sewers, sanitary sewers, drainage ways, wetlands, or surface waters. 4. Damaging vegetation beyond the extent necessary for construction of the facilities.
5. Disposal of trees, brush, and other debris in any location on University property, unless such areas are specifically identified on the drawing or in the specifications or specifically
approved by the Owner’s site representative. 6. Permanent or unspecified alteration of the flow line of a stream. 7. Burning trash, project debris, or waste materials. B. Take all necessary
precautions to prevent silt or waste of any kind from entering any drainage or waterways or downstream properties as a result of the Work. C. Runoff of potable water used for concrete
curing or concrete truck or chute cleaning operations shall not be allowed to reach the storm water system or open water due to the levels of residual chlorine (New York State water
quality standards, 6 NYCRR Part 703.5) and other potential contaminants. If necessary, obtain permission from the local sewer authority and collect and pump the runoff to the sanitary
sewer. D. Limit the nature and extent of any activities that could result in the release or discharge of pollutants. Report any such release or discharge immediately to the Owner’s
Representative and clean up spills immediately, as detailed in Section 01 35 44 – Spill Control Procedures. 1.9 TEMPORARY RE-ROUTING OF PIPING AND DUCTWORK A. Obtain approval from the
Owner’s Representative prior to any temporary re-routing of piping and exhaust ductwork necessary for the completion of the Work. Submit re-routing plans to the Owner’s Representative
in writing. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-4 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS
JUNE 2, 2021 The following shall require approval of the Owner: 1. Temporary storm, sanitary or water line connections. 2. Temporary exhaust ductwork connections where such connections
may impact air emissions. B. Instruct all personnel to observe extreme caution when working in the vicinity of mechanical equipment and piping. Personnel shall not operate or tamper
with any existing valves, switches, or other devices or equipment without prior approval by the Owner’s Representative. 1.10 HAZARDOUS OR TOXIC MATERIALS A. Inform officers, employees,
agents, contractors, subcontractors at every tier, and any other party which may come into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of its performance hereunder of
the nature of such materials, and any health and safety or environmental risks associated therewith. B. Do not use hazardous or toxic materials in a manner that will violate Cornell
University Policies or any state, federal, or municipal environmental health and safety regulations. In situations where the risks are unclear consult with Environmental Health and
Safety (EH&S) for guidance. C. Provide complete care and treatment for any injury sustained by any parties coming into contact with any hazardous or toxic materials as a result of
Contractor’s performance or failure to perform hereunder. D. At the completion of project Contractor shall remove all unused chemical products and hazardous materials from campus.
Transportation of these materials shall be in accordance with all federal, state, and local regulations. Request and receive written approval from EH&S prior to disposal of any on-site
disposal. 1.11 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL AND TITLE A. Prior to start of work and first payment, Contractor shall prepare and submit “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” to the
Owner’s Representative. The plan shall identify the waste transportation and treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) companies which will manage all waste material and any site(s) for
disposal of the waste material. Contractor must use this form to document waste disposal methods and locations. B. The “Contractor Waste Material Disposal Plan” form, together with
definitions associated with the form waste descriptions. Forms may be downloaded at: https://ehs.cornell.edu/sites/default/files/resourcefiles/FRM_CWMDPContractorWasteMaterialDisposalPlan.pdf
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 43 Ithaca, New York GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 GENERAL ENVIRONMENTAL 01 35 43-5 LAB RENOVATIONS REQUIREMENTS JUNE 2, 2021
C. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper cleanup, containment, storage and disposal of any hazardous material/chemical spill occurring during its work. For Cornell University
owned hazardous waste EH&S will oversee, approve or effect the proper disposal. Title, risk of loss, and all other incidents of ownership to the Waste Material, shall vest in Contractor
at the time Contractor or any transporter acting on its behalf takes physical possession of Waste Material. Complete and maintain full records of the chain of custody and control,
including certificates of disposal or destruction, of all Waste Materials loaded, transported and/or disposed of. Deliver all such records to the Owner in accordance with applicable
laws and regulations and any instructions from the Owner in a timely manner and in any event prior to final payment(s) under this Contract. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT
USED ***END OF SECTION 01 35 43*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION
01 35 44 SPILL CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 SPILL PREVENTION A. In order to minimize the potential for discharge to the environment of oil, petroleum, or hazardous substances on site, the
following requirements shall apply to all projects: 1. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored or relocated temporarily on site during the construction process shall be stored
in such a manner as to provide protection from vehicular damage and to provide containment of leaks or spills. Horizontal diked oil storage tanks, temporary berms or barriers, or similar
methods shall be employed as appropriate at each site. 2. Any on-site filling or dispensing activities shall occur within an area in which a temporary berm, boom, or similar containment
barrier has been placed to prevent the inadvertent discharge to the environment of harmful quantities of any products. 3. All oil, petroleum, or hazardous materials stored on site shall
be located in such a manner as to minimize the potential of damage from construction operations or vehicles, away from drainage ways and environmentally sensitive areas, and in accordance
with all fire and safety codes. B. Remove immediately from the site any storage, dispensing, or operating equipment that is leaking oil or hazardous substances or is in anyway unsuitable
for the safe storage of such materials. 1.2 SPILL CONTROL PROCEDURES All Contractor personnel working at the project site shall be knowledgeable of the potential health and safety concerns
associated with petroleum and other hazardous substances that could potentially be released at the project site. Following are a list of activities that should be conducted by the
Contractor in the event of an oil/petroleum spill or the release of any other hazardous substance. In the event of a large quantity spill that would require cleanup procedures that
are beyond the means of the Contractor, an emergency spill cleanup contractor shall be hired by the Contractor. In the event the Contractor has the personnel necessary to clean up
the spill, the following procedures shall be followed: A. Personnel discovering/responding to a spill shall: 1. Identify and locate the source of the spill. If unsafe conditions exist,
leave the area, inform nearby personnel, notify the site supervisor, and initiate spill reporting (Section 1. 3). CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL
OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 2. Limit the discharge of product, if safely possible, by: (1) diverting discharge to a containment area;
(2) creating temporary dikes with soils or other available materials; and (3) utilizing sorbent materials. If secondary containment is present, verify that valves and drains are closed
prior to diverting the product to this area. 3. The individual discovering a spill shall initiate containment procedures to prevent material from reaching a potential migratory route,
through implementation of the following actions, or any other methods necessary. Methods employed shall not compromise worker safety. a. Stop the spill at once (if possible). b. Extinguish
sources of ignition (e.g., flames, sparks, hot surfaces, cigarettes, etc.). c. Clear personnel from the spill location and rope off the area. d. Utilize available spill control equipment
in an effort to ensure that fires, explosions, and releases do not occur, recur, or spread. e. Use sorbent materials to control the spill at the source. f. Construct a temporary containment
dike of sorbent materials, cinder blocks, bricks, or other suitable materials to help contain the spill. g. Attempt to identify the character, exact source, amount, and area of the
released materials. Identification of the spilled material should be made as soon as possible so that the appropriate cleanup procedure can be identified. h. Assess possible hazards
to human health or the environment as a result of the release, fire, or explosion. i. If spill response measures involve the temporary cessation of any operations, the Contractor shall
monitor the affected equipment for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure buildup; (3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in valves, pipes, or other equipment. B. Spill Cleanup: 1. Following containment
of the spill, the following spill cleanup procedures shall be initiated. a. Use proper waste containers. b. Remove bulk liquid by using vacuum, pump, sorbents, or shovel and place material
in properly labeled waste container. Be sure not to collect incompatible or reactive substances in the same container. c. Cleanup materials not reclaimed on-site shall be disposed
of in accordance with all applicable state and federal regulations. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-3 LAB
RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 d. Apply sorbent materials to pick up remaining liquid after bulk liquid has been removed. The Contractor shall not walk over spilled material. Absorbed
material shall be picked up with a shovel and placed in a separate waste container, and shall not be mixed with bulk liquid. e. Clean spill control equipment and containers. Replace
equipment in its proper location. Restock or reorder any sorbents used to clean up the spill. f. Carefully wash spilled product from skin and clothing using soap. Change clothes,
if necessary, to avoid further contact with product. g. Disposal of all spilled product shall be made off-site, and shall be arranged through the Contractor. h. A Spill Report shall
be completed, including a description of the event. A sample Spill Documentation Form is provided in Appendix B. C. Fire or Explosion: 1. In the event of a fire or explosion at the
site, the Contractor shall: a. Verify that the local fire department and the appropriate response personnel (e.g., ambulance, police) have been notified. b. Report to the scene, if
safe to do so, and evaluate the situation (e.g., spill character, source, etc.). Coordinate, as necessary, with other appropriate site and emergency personnel. c. Ensure that people
are cleared from the area. d. Ensure that fires are safely extinguished (if possible), valves closed, and other immediate actions necessary to mitigate the emergency, if safe to do
so. e. Initiate responsible measures necessary to prevent subsequent fires, explosions, or releases from occurring or spreading to other areas of the site. These measures include stopping
processes or operations, collecting and containing released oil, or removing and isolating containers. f. Take appropriate action to monitor for: (1) leaks; (2) pressure build-ups;
(3) gas generation; or (4) ruptures in pipes, valves, or other equipment. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35
44-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.3 SPILL REPORTING AND DOCUMENTATION In the event of a spill CALL CORNELL POLICE AT 255-1111 who will notify the appropriate departments within the
university and coordinate with the contractor for external reporting, if required. The contractor shall be responsible for the initiation of spill reporting and documentation procedures.
All petroleum spills must be reported to NYSDEC Spill Hotline at 1-800- 457-7362, less than two hours following discovery. Notification must be made to Cornell Environmental Health
and Safety (EH&S), 607.255.8200, within 24 hours of reporting the release. The Contractor will be expected to provide EH&S with the DEC issued spill number. Any petroleum spill must
be reported to NYSDEC unless ALL of the following criteria apply: TABLE 1 CRITERIA TO EXEMPT SPILL REPORTING CRITERIA DESCRIPTION Quantity The spill must be known to be less than
5 gallons. Containment The spill must be contained on an impervious surface or within an impervious structure, such that it cannot enter the environment. Control The spill must be under
control and not reach a drain or leave the impervious surface. Cleanup The spill must be cleaned-up within two hours of occurrence. Environment The spill must not have already entered
into the soil or groundwater or onto surface water. A release of a “reportable quantity”1 or unknown amount of a hazardous substance must also be immediately reported to NYSDEC Spill
Hotline. Spills of reportable quantities of chemicals or “harmful quantities”2 of oil to navigable waters must be reported to the federal National Response Center, 1-800-424-8802.
Spill Reporting Information: When making a telephone report, the caller should be prepared to provide the following information, if possible: 1. The date and time of the spill or release.
2. The identity or chemical name of the material released or spilled, including an indication of whether the material is defined as an extremely hazardous substance. 3. An estimate
of the quantity of material released or spilled into the environment and the approximate duration of the event. 4. The exact location of the spill, including the name(s) of the waters
involved or threatened, and/or other medium or media affected by the release or spill. 5. The source of the release or spill. 6. The name, address, and telephone number of the party
in charge of, or responsible for, the facility or activity associated with the release or spill. 7. The extent of the actual and potential water pollution. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 35 44 Ithaca, New York SPILL CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 SPILL CONTROL 01 35 44-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 8. The name and telephone number of the person in charge of operations
at the spill site. 9. The steps being taken or proposed to contain and cleanup the released or spilled material and any precautions taken to minimize impacts, including evacuation.
10. The extent of injuries, if any. 11. Any known or anticipated acute or chronic health risks associated with the emergency, and information regarding necessary medical attention for
exposed individuals. 12. Assistance required, if any. If the release of a hazardous substance or oil occurs in an amount which exceeds a reportable quantity (RQ) as defined in 40 CFR
Part 110, 40 CFR Part 117, 40 CFR Part 302, or 6 NYCRR Part 597, then the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Call to the National Response Center shall be made by the person in charge
of the site. The applicable phone numbers are 1-800-424-8802 or 1-202-426-2675. 2. Within 14 days of the release, submit a written description of the release. The description should
include: (1) a description of the release, (2) the type of material released, (3) estimated amount of the spill; (4) the date of the release, (5) an explanation of why the release occurred;
and (6) a description of the measures to be implemented to prevent and control future releases. (1)Reportable Quantity: A Reportable Quantity is the quantity of a hazardous substance
or oil that triggers reporting requirements under the Comprehensive Emergency Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA) (USEPA, September 1992). While the Contractor is legally
responsible for knowing the risks of materials that are part of construction, members of the owner’s spill response team have access to information that may help identify these quantities
with you. (2)Harmful Quantity: A Harmful Quantity of oil includes discharges that violate applicable water quality standards; cause a film, sheen, or discoloration on a water surface
or adjoining shoreline; or cause a sludge or emulsion to be deposited beneath the water surface or shoreline (40 CFR 110.3). 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END
OF SECTION 01 35 44*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
SECTION 01 41 00 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. The Contractor shall obtain, maintain and pay for all permits and licenses necessary for the execution
of the Work and for the use of such Work when completed. Such permits shall include but are not limited to building, electrical, plumbing, backflow prevention, dig safe, fill, street
use and building demolition. 1. City of Ithaca building permit applications shall be presented for review at the regularly scheduled Owner’s meeting with the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ). B. For any projects which include demolition of a structure or load-bearing elements of a structure, the Contractor is required to complete a “Notification of Demolition and
Renovation” and provide this notification to the United State Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) in advance of the work as specified in 40 CFR 61.145. The Contractor shall also
provide a copy of this notification to the Owner’s Representative prior to any demolition. C. All Construction / Building / Hot Work and Occupancy permits shall be issued and maintained
through the City of Ithaca. D. Ithaca Fire Department Permitting: 1. A permit is required from the Ithaca Fire Department to install or substantially repair a fire suppression, fire
detection, or fire alarm system as such as defined under the Uniform Code of New York State. 2. If the scope of work is classified under the Existing Building Code of NYS as Alteration
–Level 1; Alteration – Level 2; Alteration – Level 3; or Addition; a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department is required for all work affecting the fire suppression, fire detection,
or fire alarm system for that building. A building permit is also required for this type of work. 3. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code of NYS does not
require a permit from the Ithaca Fire Department. 1.2 INSPECTIONS A. Apply for and obtain all required inspections, pay all fees and charges for same, include all service charges, pavement
cuts and repairs. 1.3 COMPLIANCE A. The Contractor shall give all notices, pay all fees and comply with all laws, rules and regulations applicable to the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 41 00 Ithaca, New York REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.4 OWNER’S REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor, Subcontractors,
and employees of the Contractor and Subcontractors shall comply with all regulations governing conduct, access to the premises, operation of equipment and systems, and conduct while
in or near the premises and shall perform the Work in such a manner as not to unreasonably interrupt or interfere with the conduct of business of the Owner. B. Upon completion of the
project, the Contractor agrees to provide the Owner with a summary of municipal permit fees paid. This shall include the name of the permits secured, the permit fees paid by the Contractor
and a copy of the permit. If no permit fees were required, the Contractor shall so state, in writing, upon completion of the project. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED
***END OF SECTION 01 41 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 42 00
REFERENCES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Notes or instructions shown on any one Drawing, apply where applicable, to all other Drawings. B. All references to codes,
specifications and standards referred to in the Specification Sections and on the Drawings shall mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and/or revision of such
reference standard in effect as of the date of these Contract Documents. C. Install All Work in Compliance with: 1. NYS Uniform Code a. International Building Code b. International
Residential Code c. International Existing Building Code d. International Fire Code e. International Plumbing Code f. International Mechanical Code g. International Fuel Gas Code h.
International Property Maintenance Code i. Uniform Code Supplement 2. NYS Energy Code a. International Energy Conservation Code b. ASHRAE 90.1 c. Energy Code Supplement 3. National
Electric Code CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 4. Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA). 5. Life Safety Code NFPA 101. 6. All local ordinances 7. Plans and Specifications in excess of code requirements and not contrary to same. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. “General”: Basic Contract
definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. “Contract Documents”: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, General Conditions,
General Requirements, Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued before execution of the Agreement, other documents listed in the Agreement, and modifications issued after execution of
the Agreement. C. “The Contract”: The Contract Documents form the Contract for construction and represent the entire integrated Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. D. “The
Work”: The work comprises the completed construction required by the Contract Documents and includes all labor necessary to produce such construction and all materials and equipment
incorporated in such construction. E. “Owner”: Cornell University a New York corporation. F. “Architect/Engineer”: The Architect or Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice
architecture and/or engineering in the state of New York, identified as such in the Owner Contractor Agreement, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number. The terms Architect and/or Engineer mean the Architect and/or his authorized representative. G. “Contractor”: The Contractor, person, firm, or corporation with whom the Construction
Agreement contract is made by Owner. H. “Subcontractor”: A person, firm, or corporation, supplying labor and/or materials for work at site of the project for and under separate contract
or agreement with Contractor. I. “As Approved” or “Approved”: Architect’s or Owner’s approval. J. “As Directed”: Owner’s direction or instruction. Other terms including "requested,"
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." K. “Indicated”: Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings,
in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as “indicated.” CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 L. “Regulations”: Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued
by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. M. “Furnish”: Supply and deliver to
Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. N. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. O. “Reinstall”. To place back into a former
position. P. “Replace”. Provide a substitute for. Q. “Provide”: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. R. “Concealed’: Work installed in pipe shafts, chases
or recesses, behind furred walls, above ceilings, either permanent or removable. S. “Exposed”: All capital Work not identified as concealed. T. “Project Site”: Space available for
performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.
U. “As-Built Documents”: Drawings and other records that are maintained by the Contractor to record all conditions which exist when the building construction is completed. This includes
both the elements of the project itself and existing elements that are encountered during the course of project construction. V. “Record Drawings”: Shows construction changes in the
project and the final location of all services, lines, outlets, and connections including underground and concealed items. The “record” drawings shall be compiled by the Architect
based on the working as-built drawings and revised in accordance with the marked up drawings submitted by the Contractor. W. “Shop Drawings”: Drawings, diagrams, illustrations, charts,
brochures, and other data that are prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor, for some portion of the work. X. “Samples”: Physical examples
furnished to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which the work will be judged. Y. “General Conditions”: The standardized contractual provisions
describing the responsibilities, rights and relationships of the Owner and Contractor under the construction contract. Z. “Contract Limit Lines”: A limit line or perimeter line established
on the drawings or elsewhere in the contract documents defining the boundaries of the site available to the contractor for construction purposes. AA. "to do", "provide", "furnish",
"install", etc., in these Specifications or on Drawings are directions given to the Contractor; CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101
REFERENCES 01 42 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.4 OWNER AGREEMENTS A. Cornell University and the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division have
entered into an agreement. The local unions which are members of the Tompkins-Cortland Counties Building Trades Council, Maintenance Division are as follows: Local #241 - International
Brotherhood of Electrical Workers Local #267 - United Association of Plumbers and Steamfitters Local #281 - United Brotherhood of Carpenters Local #3NY - International Union of Bricklayers
and Allied Craftworkers Local #178 - International Union of Painters and Allied Trades Local #112 - International Brotherhood of Sheetmetal Workers Local #785 - Laborers International
Union of North America The definition of craft maintenance as applied to this agreement shall be as follows: All work associated with the demolition, repair, replacement, improvement
to or construction of equipment, buildings, structures, utilities, and/or system or components thereof. Craft maintenance for trades assistants shall be limited to work assigned to
individuals employed as building trade laborers and which directly assists the craft work performed by other employees covered by this agreement; the Employer is free to assign such
work; provided, however, such assignment does not fall within the craft performed by other employees covered by this agreement. 1.5 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards:
Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the
Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date
of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to
its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity,
obtain copies directly from publication source. D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are
subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL
B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office
(202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil
Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute
of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized
name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract
Documents. AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC
Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association
of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES
01 42 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America
(866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute)
www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530
www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated
General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960
www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org
ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association
International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505)
522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International)
(973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for
Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association
(334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353 www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01,
101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-8 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers
Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development
Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888)
881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423)
892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca,
New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-9 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010
www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers
Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937
www.esda.org FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 www.fmglobal.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367
66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400
www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-10 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HPVA
Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IBR Institute of Boiler & Radiation Manufacturers
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International
Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering
Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification
Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426
www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid
Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500 CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca,
New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-11 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen
Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org
(804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization
Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202)
737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800)
557-2848 www.nbgqa.com CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-12 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 NCAA National Collegiate
Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094
www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National
Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA International Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National
Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC
National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association
(800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association
(901) 526-5016 www.nofma.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-13 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 NRCA National
Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF
International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org
(703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NYBFU New York Board of Fire Underwriters (212) 227-3700 www.nybfu.org
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing
& Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network
(800) 395-2522 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400
www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415)
382-0662 SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SBI Steel Boiler Institute CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN
HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-14 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry
Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100
www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single
Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective
Coatings (877) 281-7772 www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES
01 42 00-15 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700
Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI
Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 www.tileroofing.org UFPO Underground Facilities Protective
Organization (800) 962-7962 www.ufpo.org (800) 962-7811 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902
www.uni-bell.org USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute
(916) 372-9943 www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association
(800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES
OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-16 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents,
they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date
as of the date of the Contract Documents. IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888)
422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543 NEC National Electric Code C. Federal Government
Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000 www.commerce.gov DOD Department of Defense
(215) 697-6257 http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal
Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322 www.fcc.gov FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332 www.fda.gov
CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 42 00 Ithaca, New York REFERENCES OLIN HALL B01, 101 REFERENCES 01 42 00-17 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 GSA General Services Administration (800)
488-3111 www.gsa.gov HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000 www.lbl.gov NCHRP
National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478 www.nist.gov OSHA Occupational Safety & Health
Administration (800) 321-6742 www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694 www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540 (See USDA) SD State Department (202) 647-4000 www.state.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934 www.nas.edu/trb
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791 www.usda.gov USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000 www.usps.com 2.0 PRODUCTS - NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION - NOT USED ***END OF SECTION
01 42 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY
CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain an effective Contractor Quality Control (CQC) program and perform sufficient inspections and tests
of all items of work, including those of Subcontractors, to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Include surveillance and tests specified in the technical sections of the Specifications.
Furnish appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of the quality control function. Controls must be adequate to cover construction operations
and be keyed to the construction sequence. Construction shall not begin until the Owner has approved the CQC program. 1.2 CONTROL OF ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION A. Include a control system
for the following phases of inspection: 1. Pre-Installation Meeting. For all sections where pre-installations are defined, the Contractor shall arrange for a pre-installation meeting.
When practical, pre-installation meetings shall be scheduled to take place on the same day as regularly schedule progress meetings. The Contractor shall make available, during this
meeting, all approved submittals and products. a. Agenda to include the following: i. Appointment ii. Appointment of official representatives of participants in the Project. iii.
Review of existing conditions and affected work, and testing thereof as required. iv. Review of installation procedures and requirements. v. Review of environmental and site condition
requirements. vi. Schedule of the applicable portions of the Work. vii. Schedule of submission of samples, color chips, and items for Owners consideration. viii. Requirements for temporary
facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, Section 01500. ix. Requirements for notification for reviews. Allow a minimum of 48 hour notice to Architect for review
of the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 x. Requirements for inspections
and tests, as applicable. Schedule and undertake inspections and tests in accordance with Section 01410. xi. Delivery schedule of specified equipment. xii. Special safety requirements
and procedures. b. The following minimum personnel shall be at the meeting: i. Project Manager. ii. Project Field Supervisor iii. Subcontractor iv. Architect’s Representative v. Owner’s
Representative vi. Commissioning Agent, when applicable vii. Testing Agency, when applicable 2. Preparatory Inspection. Perform this inspection prior to beginning work on any definable
feature of work. Include a review of contract requirements with the supervisors directly responsible for the performance of the work; check to assure that materials, products, and
equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved; check to assure that provisions have been made for required control testing; examine the work area to ascertain that preliminary
work has been completed; physically examine materials and equipment to assure that they conform to shop drawings and data and that the materials and equipment are on hand. 3. Initial
Inspection. Perform this inspection as soon as work commences on a representative portion of a particular feature of workmanship review control testing for compliance with contract
requirements. 4. Follow-up Inspections. Perform these inspections on a regular basis to assure continuing compliance with contract requirements until completion of that particular
work. 1.3 CONTROL OF OFF-SITE OPERATIONS A. Perform factory quality control inspections for items fabricated or assembled off-site as opposed to "off-the-shelf" items. The CQC Representative
at the fabricating plant shall be responsible for release of the fabricated items for shipment to the job site. The CQC Representative at the job site shall receive the item and note
any damage incurred during shipment. The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining the item in good condition throughout the period of on-site and during erection
or installation. Although any item found to be faulty may be rejected before its use, final acceptance of an item by the Owner is based on its satisfactory incorporation into the work
and acceptance of the completed project. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 45 00 Ithaca, New York QUALITY CONTROL OLIN HALL B01, 101 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2,
2021 1.4 TESTING A. The Owner may engage the services of an independent testing laboratory to confirm that an installed item or element of work conforms to the Specification and workmanship
requirements. 1.5 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Owner shall designate a Representative to monitor the progress and execution of the work. The Representative shall have the authority
to call for test samples, to approve or to reject work performed and to stop work in progress, if, in its opinion, the work is not in conformance with the Contract Documents. The Representative
shall not be authorized to make changes or interpretations of the Contract Documents. 1. The Contractor shall maintain a project Deficiency/Issues Log in e-Builder to track nonconforming
materials or sub-standard workmanship identified by Owner’s Representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 45 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION
01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY
FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain all temporary facilities and services of every kind, as required by the Contractor
and by its subcontractors for their performance of the Work and compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall remove such facilities and complete such services upon the completion
of all other work, or as Cornell University may direct. B. The Contractor shall obtain all required permits and approvals for and shall provide, construct, or install, as well as operate,
maintain, service and remove temporary facilities and services. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations. 2.0 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Choice of materials, as suitable for the accomplishment of the intended purpose, is the Contractor’s option. B. Materials may be new or used, but must not
violate requirements of applicable codes, standards and specifications. 2.2 TEMPORARY FIRST AID FACILITIES A. Provide first aid equipment and supplies, with qualified personnel continuously
available to render first aid at the site. B. Provide a sign, posted at the telephone, listing the telephone numbers for emergency medical services: Physicians, ambulance services
and hospitals. 2.3 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION A. Provide a fire protection and prevention program for employees and personnel at the site. Any fire watches as a result of construction
operations are the responsibility of the Contractor. Comply with NFPA 241. Develop, manage, and supervise an overall fire-prevention and protection program for personnel at Project
site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021 1. Impairments “Fire
Code of NYS Section 901.7”. Impairment; “the removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage in a building.” There are two different levels of impairments a. Partial Impairment.
The removal of fire alarm devices or sprinkler system coverage via control valve in the immediate area of where work is to be performed. - Basic Impairment Notification will be sent
to Local Authority Having Jurisdiction and FM Global. - No fire watch will be required in most cases. b. Full System Impairment. The complete removal of a fire alarm “system” or sprinkler
“system”. Impairment of both the fire alarm system and sprinkler system at the same time is not allowed. - Full System Impairment Notification will be sent to local Authority Having
Jurisdiction, FM Global, Ithaca Fire Department Officers, Building Manager, Maintenance Manager, and Customer Service. - Fire Watch will be required and will need the Fire Watch Person’s
name and contact information. Cornell EH&S does not perform the fire watch, it is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Equipment: 1. Provide and maintain fire extinguishing equipment
ready for instant use at all areas of the Project and at specific areas of critical fire hazard. 2. Hand extinguishers of the types and sizes recommended by the National Board of Fire
Underwriters to control fires from particular hazards. 3. Construction period use of permanent fire protection system. 4. Water hoses connected to an adequate water pressure and supply
system to reach each area or level of construction upon building enclosure or heating of the building. 5. Maintain existing standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Provide additional
temporary hoses where required to comply with requirements. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match
hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. Provide hoses of sufficient length to protect construction areas. 6. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers,
fire hydrants, siamese connections, standpipes, temporary fire-protection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. 7. Where existing or temporary fire protection
services are being replaced with new fire protection services, do not remove or impair existing or temporary services until new services are placed into operation and use. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021 8. At earliest feasible
date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fireprotection facility and systems, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel
on use of facilities. Protect and maintain permanent fire protection system. Repair or replace any components damaged during construction. C. Enforce fire-safety discipline: 1. Store
combustible and volatile materials in an isolated, protected location. 2. Avoid accumulations of flammable debris and waste in or about the Project. 3. Prohibit smoking in the vicinity
of hazardous conditions. 4. There is NO SMOKING allowed on construction sites located in any occupied building. Smoking is prohibited in all Cornell University buildings. 5. Closely
supervise welding and torch-cutting operations in the vicinity of combustible materials and volatile conditions. 6. Supervise locations and operations of portable heating units and
fuel. D. Maintain fire extinguishing equipment in working condition, with current inspection certificate attached to each extinguisher. E. Welding or burning operations shall be conducted
under a Hot Work Permit issued in accordance with Section 01 41 00. Where such work is permitted, the Contractor shall provide an approved fire extinguisher in good operating condition
within easy reach of the operating personnel. In each instance, obtain prior approval of Cornell University Environmental Health & Safety. F. Advise Cornell University Environmental
Health & Safety of any items affecting Life Safety, e.g., road blockages, exit closing, etc. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids and equipment required to assure safety
for personnel and to facilitate the execution of the Work; Scaffolds, staging, ladders, stairs, ramps, runways, platforms, railings, hoists, cranes, chutes, fall protection, harness,
tie-off points, and other such equipment. B. When permanent stair framing is in place, provide temporary treads, platforms and railings, for use by construction personnel. C. Maintain
all equipment in a safe condition. 2.5 SUPPORTS A. The Contractor shall include cost of all materials and labor necessary to provide all supports, beams, angles, hangers, rods, bases,
braces, etc. to properly support the Contract Work. All supports, etc. shall meet the approval of the Architect. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021 B. Any and all supports that are of “custom” fabrication or installation shall
be designed by the Contractor’s NYS licensed PE with stamped & signed shop drawings and calculations provided for same. 2.6 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure
for building exterior, maintain in-place until installation of permanent enclosures. Provide temporary weather-tight enclosure of exterior walls as work progresses for protection of
construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities, and as necessary to provide acceptable working conditions,
provide weather protection for interior materials, provide weather protection for occupied areas, allow for effective temporary heating, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
1. Provide temporary exterior doors with self-closing hardware and padlocks or locksets. 2. Other enclosures shall be removable as necessary for work and for handling of materials.
3. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary enclosures. 4. Coordinate enclosure with ventilation requirements, material drying or
curing requirements, and specified environmental limitations to avoid dangerous or detrimental conditions and effects. B. Provide temporary enclosures to separate work areas from areas
of the existing building occupied by Owner; to prevent penetration of dust or moisture into occupied areas, to prevent damage to existing equipment, and to protect Owner's employees
and operations from construction work. 1. Temporary partition and ceiling enclosures: Framing and sheet materials which comply with structural and fire rating requirements of applicable
codes and standards. a. Close joints between sheet materials, and seal edges and intersections with existing surfaces, to prevent penetration of dust or moisture. b. In locations where
fire protection is required, paint both sides of partitions and ceilings with fire-retardant paint as required by local fire regulations. 2. Do not remove existing exterior enclosure
systems until new exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing exterior enclosure systems as soon as possible. Immediately after completing
removal, install new exterior enclosure systems and complete installation as soon as possible. 3. Do not remove existing HVAC systems connected to louvers at existing exterior enclosure
systems until new HVAC systems and louvers at exterior enclosure systems are ready for installation. Complete removal of existing HVAC systems and louvers as soon as possible. Immediately
after completing removal, install new HVAC systems and new louvers and complete installation as soon as possible. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES
AND CONTROLS OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS AND CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021 2.7 TEMPORARY WATER CONTROL A. The Contractor shall provide, maintain and
operate pumps required to keep the Work free of water at all times. B. Dispose of all water with due care and shall not infringe on the rights of others on the Site, of adjacent property
owners and of the public. All cost in connection with the removal of such water shall be paid by the Contractor. 2.8 PERSONNEL, PUBLIC AND EMPLOYEE PROTECTION A. Provide guardrails,
barricades, fences, footways, tunnels and other devices necessary to protect all personnel, employees, and the public, against hazards on, adjacent to or accessing the construction
site. 1. Provide signs, warning lights, signals, flags and illumination as necessary to alert persons to hazards and to provide safe, adequate visibility in areas of hazards. 2. Closed
sidewalks need to be indicated with OSHA-approved signs, as well as, proper barricades. 3. Provide flag personnel as necessary to guide vehicles, protect personnel, public and employees.
2.9 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. No Contractor signs to be displayed at the project site, unless authorized by the Owner. B. Owner Construction Project Sign. The Contractor
shall install Owner provided project identification signage. 2.10 SECURITY A. The Contractor shall provide security services as required to protect the interests of the Owner. 2.11
FIELD OFFICES A. The Owner shall designate a space within the facility to serve as a field office for the use of the Contractor and Owner. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Consult with
Owner, review site conditions and factors which affect construction procedures and temporary facilities, including adjacent properties and public facilities which may be affected by
execution of the work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 50 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 00-6 LAB RENOVATIONS AND
CONTROLS JUNE 2, 2021 1. Designate the locations and extent of temporary construction, storage, and other temporary facilities and controls required for the expeditious accomplishment
of the Work. 2. Allow space for use of the site by Owner and by other contractors, as required by Contract Documents. 3.2 GENERAL A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in
sections of Division 02 through 40. B. Make work structurally, mechanically and electrically sound throughout. C. Install work in a neat and orderly manner. D. Maintain, clean, service
and repair facilities to provide continuous usage, and to the quality specified for the original installation. E. Relocate facilities as required by progress of construction, by storage
or work requirements, and to accommodate requirements of Owner and other contractors employed at the site. F. Keep the site, at all times during the progress of the Work, free from
accumulation of waste matter or rubbish and shall confine its apparatus, materials and operations of its workers to the limits prescribed except as the latter may be extended with the
approval of the Owner’s Representative. Cleaning of the structure or structures must be performed daily and removal of waste matter or rubbish must be performed at least once a week.
G. Contractor shall at all times keep access road and public roads clean of mud and construction debris and maintain dust control to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.3 REMOVAL A.
Completely remove temporary structures, materials, equipment and services: 1. When construction needs can be met by use of permanent construction. 2. At completion of the Project. B.
Repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Clean after removal. C. Restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary purposes to specified, or to
original condition. 1. Remove foundations and underground installations for temporary construction and utilities. 2. Grade the areas of the site affected by temporary installations
to required elevations and slopes, and clean the area. ***END OF SECTION 01 50 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY
UTILITIES 01 51 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 51 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall furnish, install and maintain temporary
utilities required by all trades for construction. Remove on completion of Work. B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and materials for temporary connections and distribution.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with National Electric Code, current edition. B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and safety regulations and with utility
company requirements. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the required usage, must not create unsafe conditions,
and must not violate requirements of applicable codes and standards. 2.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING AND WATER A. The Contractor shall have access to the Owner's water and electric
power for constructing the Work. Temporary utility connections shall be made by the Contractor as close to its operations as possible as long as such connections do not over-load the
capacity of the Owner's utilities or interfere with its customary utilization thereof. Utility access points shall be determined in cooperation with and acceptable to the Owner. B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the economic use of the Owner's Water and Power. The Owner will pay for the water and power consumed in the construction of the Work as long
as economical usage of these utilities is maintained. The Owner reserves the right to meter and charge for the power and water consumed if in the opinion of the Owner the usage of
these utilities is not economically conducted by the Contractor. In such an event, the Owner shall give three (3) days written notice to the Contractor of its intentions to meter and
charge for temporary utilities used by the Contractor. C. All temporary power systems including wiring shall be removed by the Contractor when no longer required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 D. The minimum temporary lighting to be provided
is at the rate of fifty foot candles, is to be maintained in each room and changed as required when interior walls are being erected. The required temporary lighting must be maintained
for twenty-four (24) hours a day and seven (7) days a week at all stair levels and in all corridors below ground; in any and all egress; in all other spaces temporary lighting is to
be maintained only during working hours. All temporary wiring and equipment shall be in conformity with the National Electric Code. E. The minimum temporary outdoor security lighting
to be provided is as follows: 1. Along the perimeter of the site fence, consisting of vandal-resistant light fixtures with HID lamps, located 150 foot center, mounted on the inside
of the construction fence. 2. Lighting for temporary pedestrian paths and roadways, to provide a minimum of 0.1 foot-candle on the path of travel. F. Three-phase temporary power circuits
shall be installed as required to operate construction equipment of the various trades and to install and test equipment such as pumps and elevators. The Contractor shall install and
maintain temporary or permanent service for the permanently installed building equipment such as sump pumps, boilers, boiler controls, fans, pumps, so that such equipment may be operated
when required and so ordered by the Owner's Representative for drainage or for temporary heat. G. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner
or the Owner's Representative for approval a proposed schedule of all utility shutdowns and cutovers of all types which may be required in connection with the Work. Such schedule shall
provide a minimum of four (4) weeks advance notice to the Owner prior to the time of the proposed shutdown and cutover. The Contractor shall be responsible for all charges relating
to shutdowns. H. Discontinuance, Changes and Removal The Contractor shall: 1. Discontinue all temporary services required by the Contract when so directed by the Owner or the Owner's
Representative. The discontinuance of any such temporary service prior to the completion of the Work shall not render the Owner liable for any additional cost entailed thereby. 2.
Remove and relocate such temporary facilities as directed by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, and shall restore the Site and the Work to a condition satisfactory to the Owner.
2.3 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATOR A. Use of Existing Elevator 1. If the Contractor elects to use the existing elevator equipment, the Contractor shall: a. Provide adequate protection for
such equipment and shall operate such equipment within a capacity not to exceed that allowed by law, rule or regulation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY
UTILITIES OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 b. Provide for the maintenance and cleaning of the elevator equipment as approved by the Owner's
Representative. c. Prior to start of construction, accurately record the condition of the existing elevator. Promptly repair or replace items that are damaged as a result of Contractor’s
use. Service calls that arise as a result of Contractor misuse will be charged to the Contractor. At Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial
use. d. Use only elevators designated by Owner’s Representative at dates and times designated by Owner’s Representative. Dates and times available for Contractor’s use shall be scheduled
with, and at the convenience of, the Owner, and may vary during the course of the Project. e. Owner will not provide elevator operators or other monitoring of elevator use. f. Do not
load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. g. Provide code compliant protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect elevator car and entrance
doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become damaged, engage elevator maintenance contractor to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of correction work. Return
items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required. h. Procure and coordinate the elevator maintenance
contractor to gain access to the elevator shaft as required to complete the work 2.4 TEMPORARY HEAT AND VENTILATION A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary heat as may be necessary
for constructing the Work. B. The Contractor will be permitted to use the building's permanent heating system for temporary heat. Permission to use the building's permanent heating
system shall in no way constitute the Owner's acceptance of that portion of the Work. C. When using the permanent building systems for space conditioning, provide a written maintenance
plan for acceptance by the Owner’s Representative, prior to utilizing the equipment. Plan to address temporary filtering of air and water, sealing of open ducts, lubrication, operation
outside of normal ranges, and controls/safeties. Return all equipment to its newly installed condition prior to acceptance testing. 1. If the Contractor elects to use the building’s
permanent heating system for temporary heat, the Contractor shall provide filters with a minimum MERV of 8 at each returnair grille in system, maintain to keep them free of dust and
debris, replace if necessary and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout. D. Any temporary system shall be removed when
no longer required. E. During heating cycles the enclosures separating the interior building areas from outside shall be maintained closed to conserve heat energy. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 51 00 Ithaca, New York TEMPORARY UTILITIES OLIN HALL B01, 101 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 F. The Contractor shall provide for ventilation
of all structures until Physical Completion of the Work and shall control such ventilation to avoid excessive moisture levels and rates of drying of construction materials, including
but not limited to concrete and to plaster, and to prevent condensation on sensitive surfaces. The Contractor shall be responsible for any moisture intrusion that is detrimental to
the Project. 2.5 TEMPORARY CONTRACTOR TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Site Superintendent or their Representative shall carry a cellular telephone at all times. B. Provide phone number to Cornell
project representatives for communication during Work. 2.6 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. The Owner shall designate sanitary facilities to be utilized by the Contractor during construction.
The Contractor shall maintain neat, clean and sanitary conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for costs associated with excessive custodial services associated with such
usage. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 REMOVAL A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations
or use of temporary facilities. C. Restore existing and permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified, or to original, condition. ***END OF SECTION 01 51 00*** CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 66 00 STORAGE AND
PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. Receive, pile, store and handle all materials, equipment and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work, including items furnished
by the Owner in a careful and prudent manner and shall protect them against loss or damage from every source. B. Obscure from public view, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, staging
and storage areas. 1.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. B. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction space. C. Coordinate delivery
with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. D. Deliver products
to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,
protecting, and installation. E. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct and products are undamaged. F. Provide equipment
and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement or damage. 1.3 ON-SITE STORAGE A. Materials stored on the Site shall be neatly piled and protected, and
shall be stored in a neat and orderly manner in locations that shall not interfere with the progress of the Work or with the daily functioning of the Institution. B. Materials subject
to weather damage shall be protected against the weather by floored weatherproof temporary storage sheds. C. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND
PROTECTION 01 66 00-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 D. Storage piles and sheds shall be located within the area designated as the Staging Area. The Contractor shall work to insure
that the condition of the staging area has no negative impact on the Campus, visually or otherwise; and that outside of that area. The Contractor has no impact at all on the Campus.
E. Materials stored within the building shall be distributed in such a manner as to avoid overloading of the structural frame, and never shall be concentrated in such a manner as
to exceed the equivalent of 50 pounds per square foot uniformly distributed loading. Stored materials shall be moved if they interfere with the progress of the work. F. Should it become
necessary during the course of the Work to move stored materials or equipment, the Contractor, at the direction of the Owner or the Owner's Representative, shall move such materials
or equipment. 1.4 CAMPUS SITE / PALM ROAD STORAGE A. All property including construction materials and equipment stored at the Palm Road or other Campus site shall be stored at the
Contractor’s sole risk. The Contractor is solely responsible for repair or replacement of property due to any cause of loss. Due to work at the Palm Road lot, staging space is limited
and not guaranteed to be provided. If staging space is needed a request should be submitted to the Project Manager. B. The Contractor agrees to hold Cornell harmless from any accident
or injury occurring at Palm Road storage or other assigned Campus site associated with the Contractor’s storage. C. The Contractor understands that Cornell makes “no” warranty regarding
any security at the Palm Road or other assigned Campus site. D. The Contractor agrees that it is solely responsible for any cleanup of any site contamination caused by the Contractor’s
storage or storage operations and the Contractor agrees to pay for cleanup of any contamination and restore the site back to the same condition it was found. E. It shall be assumed
that the Contractor is responsible for site contamination unless the Contractor has reported condition prior to moving storage materials and equipment onto the site. Each Contractor
shall be responsible for their own general area whether defined formally or not but in cases where pollutants have traveled or are found in the public areas used by all contractors,
the Contractor agrees as follows: 1. If it cannot be determined who is responsible for site contamination after an investigation, all contractors who could be responsible based upon
location of the incident agree to share the expense of cleanup equally. F. No storage of hazardous materials or environmental contaminants is permitted at the Palm Road or any Campus
site. All barrels must have labels affixed identifying contents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
01 66 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 G. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and maintaining any Campus site area designated to them. All contractor trailers or storage
containers located on Cornell Campus Property will need to file for a building permit with the Town of Ithaca. If the trailer/container is there longer than 180 days, the trailer/container
will need to meet the Building Code requirements of a permanent structure. The trailer/container will need a means of egress that can be operated from the inside and a fire extinguisher.
The contractor will also need to file for a demolition permit when the trailer/container is removed. H. Unoccupied storage containers not within the project fence shall be labeled
in the Cornell standard. Signs customized for the project shall be ordered from Ithaca Plastics, Inc., 305 West Green Street, Ithaca, New York 14850, Phone - 607.272.8232, Fax - 607.277.2579,
Email – db@ithacaplastics.com. 1.5 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide security personnel and adopt other security measures as may be necessary to adequately protect materials
and equipment stored at the site. The Contractor shall be obligated to replace or pay for all materials and equipment including items furnished by the Owner which have been damaged
or stolen prior to completion of the Work. B. Protection of Utilities 1. If during the course of the Project, it is necessary to work adjacent to existing utilities, pipelines, structures
and equipment, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect existing facilities from damage. 2. Locations of utilities as shown on the Contract Documents are approximate
only. The Contractor shall excavate or otherwise locate to verify existing utilities in advance of its operation. C. Protective Covering 1. All finished surfaces shall be protected
by the Contractor as follows: a. Door and window sills and the jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways or through which material is handled, shall be cased and protected adequately
against possible damage resulting from the conduct of the work of all trades. b. All surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the building to the Owner. The Contractor
shall, without extra compensation, replace all blocks, gypsum board, plaster, paint, tile, and all other surfaces, whether or not protected, which are damaged, and shall refinish (including
painting as specified) to satisfaction of Owner. c. Tight wood sheathing shall be laid under any materials that are stored on finished concrete surfaces and planking must be laid before
moving any materials over these finished areas. Wheelbarrows used over such areas shall have rubber tires on wheels. d. Contractor has the responsibility for protection of carpeting
and all finish flooring during all phases of the work including after installation. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE
AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 e. All floors exposed to view as a floor finish shall be protected by overlaying with plywood in all areas subject to construction
traffic within and without the building, special care shall be taken to protect all stair finish surfaces including but not limited to flooring, wood in-fill stairs, cabinetry, counters,
equipment, etc. 2. HVAC ductwork shall be protected by the Contractor as follows to prevent introduction of contaminants: a. Ductwork with interior lining shall be wrapped at the factory
using plastic wrap to exclude moisture and contaminants. The wrapping shall not be removed until immediately prior to installation. b. Ductwork shall not be exposed to moisture or
contaminants at any point in the manufacturing, shipping, storage or installation process. c. Ductwork shall not be staged or stored outside or otherwise exposed to the weather. d.
Ductwork shall be transported only inside of covered vehicles. e. Once installed, ductwork shall be protected from contamination during the construction process. 1.6 PROTECTION AFTER
INSTALLATION A. Protect installed products, including Owner-provided products, and control traffic in immediate area to prevent damage from subsequent operations. B. Provide protective
coverings at walls, projections, corners, and jambs, sills, and soffits of openings in and adjacent to traffic areas. C. Cover walls and floors of elevator cabins, and jambs of cab
doors, when elevators are used by construction personnel. D. Protect finish floors and stairs from dirt, wear, and damage: 1. Secure heavy sheet goods or similar protective materials
in place, in areas subject to foot traffic. 2. Lay planking or similar rigid materials in place, in areas subject to movement of heavy objects. 3. Lay planking or similar rigid materials
in place, in areas where storage of products will occur. E. Protect waterproofed and roofed surfaces: 1. Restrict use of surfaces for traffic of any kind, and for storage of products.
2. When an activity is mandatory, obtain recommendations for protection of surfaces from manufacturer. Install protection and remove on completion of activity. Restrict use of adjacent
unprotected areas. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 66 00 Ithaca, New York STORAGE AND PROTECTION OLIN HALL B01, 101 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 01 66 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 F.
Restrict traffic of any kind across planted lawn and landscape areas. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 66 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73
29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING, PATCHING AND
REPAIRING 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, fitting and patching, including excavation and backfill, required to complete the Work
or to: 1. Make its several parts fit together properly. 2. Uncover portions of the Work to provide for installation of ill-timed work. 3. Remove and replace defective work. 4. Remove
and replace work not conforming to requirements of Contract Documents. 5. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 6. Repair or restore existing or new surfaces and
finishes to match adjacent existing or new surfaces and finishes. B. Upon written instructions of the Owner’s Representative: 1. Uncover designated portions of Work for Architect's
observation of covered work. 2. Remove samples of installed materials for testing beyond that specified. 3. Remove work to provide for the alteration of previously incorrectly installed
work. 4. Patch work uncovered or removed. C. Do not damage or endanger any work by cutting or altering the Work or any part thereof. D. Do not cut or otherwise alter the work of the
Owner except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative. E. Where cutting and patching involves adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering
calculations showing integration of reinforcement with the original structure. F. Openings and Chases 1. Build openings, including but not limited to channels, chases and flues as required
to complete the Work as set forth in the Contract. 2. After installation and completion of any work for which openings have been provided, build in, over, and around and finish all
such openings as required to complete the Work. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
01 73 29-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 3. Furnish and install all sleeves, inserts, hangers and supports required for the execution of the Work. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit a written
request to the Architect prior to executing any cutting, alteration or excavation which affects the work of the Owner, or which may affect the structural safety of any portion of the
Project. Include: 1. Identification of the Project. 2. Description of the affected work. 3. The necessity for doing the cutting, alteration or excavation. 4. The effect on the work
of the Owner’s property, or on the structural integrity of the Project. 5. Description of the proposed work: a. The scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. b. Contractor
and trades who will execute the work. c. Products proposed to be used. d. The extent of refinishing to be done. 6. Alternatives to cutting, patching or excavation. 7. Designation of
the responsibility for the cost of cutting and patching. 8. Written permission of any separate contractor whose work will be affected. B. Should conditions of the work or the schedule
indicate a change of products from the original installation, submit a request for substitution as specified in Section 01 25 00 - Substitutions and Product Options. C. Submit a written
notice to the Architect and the Owner designating the date and the time the work will be uncovered. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch
structural elements in a manner that would change their load-carrying capacity for load-deflection ratio. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting
and patching structural elements, including but not limited to the following: a. Foundation construction b. Bearing and retaining walls CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New
York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 c. Structural concrete d. Structural steel and lintels
e. Structural decking f. Miscellaneous structural metals g. Exterior wall back-up supports and anchoring systems h. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment supports i. Equipment supports
B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut
and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operation life or safety. 1. Obtain written approval of the cutting
and patching proposal before cutting and patching the following operating elements or safety related systems: a. Primary operational systems and equipment b. Air or smoke barriers c.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers d. Membranes and flashings e. Fire protection systems f. Control systems g. Communication systems h. Electrical wiring systems i. Operating systems
of special construction in MEP work C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Owner’s opinion,
reduce the building’s aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction
which was cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner at no expense to the Owner. D. Waterproofing and Water Tightness: Do not cut or alter waterproofed walls or floors or
any structural members without written permission of the Owner. 1. Waterproofing and Roofing Membranes a. Employ qualified contractors to accomplish all required cutting, patching,
or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING
AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 b. Before beginning cutting, patching or repairing of existing waterproofing and roofing membranes, obtain approval of all materials,
methods and contractor to be used from the Owner and agency, or agencies, holding bond or guarantee/warranty in force for membrane. 2. Water Tightness a. The Contractor shall be responsible
for water tightness of product, materials, and workmanship, including work specified to be watertight and inferred by general practice to be watertight. b. All floors (slabs), walls,
roof, glazing, windows, doors, sleeves through foundation walls, flashings, and similar items shall be watertight. c. If details or materials shown or specified are felt not satisfactory
to produce water tightness, the Contractor shall inform the Owner’s Representative before installation and submit proposed substitution or alternative method for review and approval.
The Contractor shall execute approved change and make watertight at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.4 WARRANTIES A. Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged
by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Comply with the Contract Documents for each product
involved. B. Use materials identical to in-place or existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of in-place or existing materials, and will match visual
appearance of inplace or existing materials. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Inspect existing conditions of the Project, including elements subject to damage or to movement during:
1. Cutting and patching. 2. Excavation and backfilling. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND
REPAIRING 01 73 29-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 B. After uncovering work, inspect the conditions affecting the installation of products, or performance of the work. C. Report unsatisfactory
or dubious conditions to the Architect in writing; do not proceed with the work until the Architect has provided further instructions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide shoring, bracing and
other support as necessary to assure the structural safety of that portion of the Work. B. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of the Project from damage. C. Provide
for vertical and lateral support required to protect adjacent buildings and properties. D. Provide protection from the elements for that portion of the Project which may be exposed
by cutting and patching work, including but not limited to pumping to maintain excavations free from water. E. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free
passage to adjoining areas. F. Avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit, or ductwork serving the building but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass
them. 3.3 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.
1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore
surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods which will assure safety, will be least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction,
and will provide proper surfaces to receive new work. 1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes
and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. To avoid marring existing
finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine, such as a carbon saw or a diamond-core
drill. 4. Comply with the requirements of applicable MEP work where cutting and patching of services is required. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING
AND REPAIRING OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-6 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Comply with specified tolerances. 1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation. 2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend
finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer
and intermediate paint coats over patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: a. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection. b. For an assembly, refinish
the entire unit. 4. When patching existing plaster finished walls and partitions, the Contractor shall utilize plaster trim, lath and other metal components to match the integrity of
the existing system. All plaster finishes shall match existing finishes so as to provide a uniform visual appearance. 5. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished
extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove
existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 6. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang existing ceilings as necessary
to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance. 7. Concrete Masonry Units: Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new CMU units matching in-place units for type
and size. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features of in-place CMU walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. 8. Brick and Masonry:
Patch walls by toothing-in units using salvaged or new brick and masonry matching in-place brick and masonry units. Match coursing patterns, mortar joint profiles, and other features
of in-place brick and masonry walls. Use accessory materials compatible with in-place materials. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 73 29 Ithaca, New York CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING
OLIN HALL B01, 101 CUTTING, PATCHING AND REPAIRING 01 73 29-7 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 9. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to
a weather-tight condition. a. Existing Roofing: Comply with requirements of existing roofing manufacturer for cutting and patching existing roofing system. Provide flashing and trim,
base sheets, base flashing, adhesives, insulation, blocking, substrate boards, accessories, and other required items to patch roofing at penetrations and roof-top mounted items. D.
Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that
are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will assure
safety, will prevent settlement or damage to other work. F. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions,
tolerances and finishes. G. Restore work which has been cut or removed; install new products to provide completed work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. H. The
Contractor shall replace, repair and patch all surfaces of the ground and of any structure disturbed by its operations and its Work which surfaces and structures are intended to remain
even if such operations and work are outside the property lines. Such replacement, repair and patching shall be with like material and shall restore surfaces as they existed. 3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean area and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar items. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit, and similar features
before applying paint or other finishing materials. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris
caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. ***END OF SECTION 01 73 29*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 INSPECTIONS
A. Substantial Completion: 1. Within a minimum of five (5) days prior to substantial completion, when the Work has reached such a point of completion that the building or buildings,
equipment and apparatus can be occupied and used for the purpose intended, the Contractor shall conduct a detailed inspection of the Work to ensure that all requirements of the Contract
have been met and that the Work is complete and is acceptable. Contractor shall prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating
the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. 2. After receipt of the Contractor’s initial punch list, the Architect will make an inspection of the Work
to determine that the Work is substantially complete and that requirements of the Contract have been met and that the Work is sufficiently complete and is acceptable for use. The Architect
will submit a marked-up list of items to be completed and/or corrected, inclusive of the Contractor’s punch list. The Architect shall prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion,
on the basis of an inspection, when the Architect has determined that the work is substantially complete. 3. A copy of the report of the inspection will be furnished to the Contractor
as the inspection progresses so that the Contractor may proceed without delay with any part of the Work found to be incomplete or defective. 4. All work performed under a Fire Protection
System Installation/Alteration Operating Permit shall be inspected by the Ithaca Fire Department, or if so, delegated by the Ithaca Building Department. a. A member of the Ithaca Fire
Department shall witness all acceptance or reacceptance testing of work performed under a Fire Protection System Installation Operating Permit. All testing and inspections shall be
in compliance with the applicable NFPA codes as referenced by Section 906.1 of the Fire Code of NYS. b. Work classified as a ‘Repair’ under the Existing Building Code does not require
the Ithaca Fire Department to witness the testing of the affected systems. Systems that have been repaired must still be tested as required by the Fire Code of NYS and NFPA. c. The
Ithaca Fire Department Shall Witness the Acceptance or Reacceptance Testing for the Following Conditions: - Testing of any new installation of a fire alarm, fire suppression, or fire
detection system as required by the Fire Code of New York State. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-2
LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 - Hydrostatic testing of sprinkler system where the modification affects more than twenty (20) sprinkler heads and the modified area can be isolated from
the rest of the system - Installation or replacement of a fire pump or drive elements of the fire pump. - A Fire Alarm System with added or deleted components. - A Fire Alarm System
where the wiring or control circuits have been modified. - A Fire Alarm System where the control unit (Fire Alarm Panel) has been replaced or the control unit software has been replaced.
- A smoke control system where the master control unit, individual fan control unit, or fan drive unit has been replaced or modified - An alternative fire suppression system that has
been replaced or the actuation elements have been modified. Except: fusible link replacement. - A modification or extension of the piping for a fire standpipe system where a hydrostatic
test is required by NFPA 14. B. Final Acceptance: 1. When the items appearing on the report of inspection have been completed or corrected, the Contractor shall so advise the Architect.
After receipt of this notification and Contractor’s certified list of completed items, the Owner's Representative will inform the Contractor of the date and time of final inspection.
A copy of the report of the final inspection containing all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work will be furnished to the Contractor. 2. After receipt of notification
of completion and all remaining contract exceptions, omissions and incomplete work from the Contractor, the Architect will make an inspection to verify completion of the exception items
appearing on the report of final inspection. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial punch list submittal at Substantial Completion. 1. Organize list of spaces
in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor, listing by room or space number. Organize items applying to each space by
major element, including categories for individual exterior face elevations, ceilings, individual walls, floors, doors, roof levels, casework, equipment, and building systems. B. Contractor's
Certified List of Completed Items: Final signed punch list submittal at Final Completion. C. Certificates of Release: Occupancy permits from authorities having jurisdiction. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.3 FINAL CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of
the work covered by the Contract the Contractor shall leave the completed Project ready for use and occupancy without the need of further cleaning of any kind and with all Work in new
condition and in perfect order. In addition, upon completion of all Work the Contractor shall remove from the vicinity of the Work all plant, buildings, rubbish, unused materials,
concrete forms and other materials belonging to him or used under its direction during construction or impairing the use or appearance of the property and shall restore such areas affected
by the work to their original condition, and, in the event of its failure to do so, the same shall be removed by the Owner at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor and/or
its surety shall be liable therefore. Final clean-up shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. All finished surfaces shall be swept, dusted, washed and polished. This
includes cleaning of the Work of all finishing trades where needed, whether or not cleaning by such trades is included in their respective sections of the specifications. 2. Roofs,
utility tunnels, manholes and pipe trenches and spaces between the new and existing Work shall be left thoroughly cleaned. 3. Finished flooring shall be thoroughly cleaned in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 4. Where the finish of floors has been marred or damaged in any space or area, the entire floor of that space or area shall be refinished
as recommended by the manufacturers of the flooring. 5. All equipment shall be in an undamaged, bright, clean, polished and new appearing condition. 6. All new glass shall be washed
and polished, both sides. The Contractor shall be responsible for all breakage of glass in the area of the Work from the commencement of its activities until the building is turned
over to Owner. The Contractor shall replace all broken glass and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean. 7. Provide new filters for all fan convectors after
final cleaning. 8. Refer to exterior clean up. Remove paint and glazing compound from surfaces. B. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by construction
operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before construction operations began. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT OLIN HALL B01,
101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Cleaning of Renovated Duct Systems and Existing Duct Systems in Renovated Areas: 1. Cleaning work shall be performed
by firm which has minimum three (3) years’ experience in mechanical cleaning of air systems. Work shall be done by skilled mechanics, technicians and experienced supervisors. 2. Clean
dirt, dust and debris from air units, associated equipment air ducts; sanitize same. Cleaning shall include: a. Cleaning of air unit’s supply, return and exhaust sections including
coils, fans, filter racks, outdoor air intake shaft, and interior surfaces. b. Cleaning of dampers, heating coils, humidifiers, and similar devices in ductwork. c. Marking of duct-mounted
damper settings, prior to cleaning, and returning dampers to marked positions after cleaning. This includes fire dampers, zone dampers, balancing dampers and volume dampers. d. Cleaning
of terminal supply, return and exhaust grilles, registers and diffusers. e. Cutting of access holes in ductwork for cleaning process, as well as sealing and patching of same. f. Removal
of portions of duct system which cannot otherwise be thoroughly cleaned, and replacement thereof. g. Sealing of lined duct systems, upon completion. h. Removal and reinstallation of
ceiling panels, tiles, ceiling support tracks, and other ceiling construction, as required to facilitate cleaning. i. Providing access doors required to facilitate cleaning. 3. Cleaning
shall meet National Air Duct Cleaners Association (NADCA) Standards, capable of verification by NADCA Vacuum Test. Cleanliness shall be subject to Architect’s visual review; provide
re-cleaning as necessary to satisfy Architect a. Cleaning methods may include vacuuming, brushing, mechanical brushing, scraping, or air washing. Use method best suited for locations
involved. b. Do NOT use methods which could damage the system or the building. c. Remove dirt, dust, lint and other accumulations by HEPA filtered air machine capable of minimum 6000
cfm. Air machine shall operate to obtain 1250 fpm across the work space. Use brushes, mechanical agitators or air whips to dislodge contaminants to be collected by the air machine.
d. Cleaning shall begin at the furthest point of the return system and at the outdoor air intake. Cleaning shall proceed toward the air handling equipment. Cleaning shall finish at
the furthest point of the supply ductwork. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 77 00 Ithaca, New York PROJECT CLOSEOUT OLIN HALL B01, 101 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 77 00-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE
2, 2021 1.4 MAINTENANCE STOCK A. Turn over to Owner's Representative the maintenance stock specified. Contractor shall obtain signed receipt from Owner's Representative for all maintenance
stock. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 77 00*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY OLIN HALL B01,
101 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 78 22 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY A. The Owner shall provide
the Contractor with a list of Equipment Types to be inventoried and an Excel template. B. The Contractor shall populate the template (see Example Equipment List to be inventoried in
Section 1.2). Once populated, the Contractor shall electronically return to the list to the Owner’s Representative. The initial data to be captured on each piece of equipment shall
include: 1. Name of Product 2. Equipment Classification 3. Manufacturer 4. Model Number 5. Serial Number 6. Cost 7. Location (including Building and Room Number) 8. Acquisition Date
(Date of Installation) C. The Owner shall from the Contractor provided data create a follow-up equipment Excel template that contains the MAXIMO ID for the equipment with all the name
plate and specification fields for each type of equipment. This template shall then be returned to the Contractor. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial labeling of
the equipment and its’ disconnects with the MAXIMO ID using an electronic label maker. ID labels shall be in close proximity to Equipment Identification information, visually locatable
from the access point to the equipment and on the face of disconnects. E. The Contractor shall then populate the MAXIMO Equipment Specification Template with the equipment nameplate,
specification information, and warranty information. The Contractor shall electronically submit the equipment data and any related documentation (i.e. - O&M manuals) to the Owner’s
Representative. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca, New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY OLIN HALL B01, 101 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
F. EXAMPLE EQUIPMENT LIST • Building Equipment • AC Drive/VSD • Air Dryer • Backflow Preventor • Air Compressor • Building • Sprinkler • Control • Vacuum • Pump • Condensate • Glycol
• CWC • HWC • Potable • Sanitary Sewer • Storm Sewer • Sump • Quality Water • Fuel • Fan • Exhaust • Supply • Return • Fume Hood • Furnace • Generator • Hot Water Heater • Heat Exchangers
• Boiler • Tank • Unit Heater • Fan Coil • VAV Box • Transfer Switch • Motor • Pump • Fan • Lift/Levelers • Water Softener • Reverse Osmosis CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 22 Ithaca,
New York FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY OLIN HALL B01, 101 FIXED EQUIPMENT INVENTORY 01 78 22-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF
SECTION 01 78 22*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-1 LAB RENOVATIONS
JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's
maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section, as referenced in other pertinent sections
of Specifications and as necessary to operate the completed work. 2. Operations and maintenance data, in final format, shall be available to the Owner prior to substantial completion.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the maintenance of products and in the operation of equipment and systems. 1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual
for use by Owner's personnel. B. Submit a CD with electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system of complete manual in final form. 1. Format: a. Size: 8-1/2" x 11”.
b. Text: Manufacturer's, scanned .pdf and/or neatly typewritten Word file. c. Drawings in electronic format - Drawings are required in PDF format. Drawings shall be in AutoCAD v14
or higher format. d. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, and major component parts of equipment. - Provide type description of product, and major component parts of equipment.
- Provide indexed PDF bookmarks. - Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01
78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 e. Cover: Identify each volume with
title "OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". List: - Title of Project - Identity of separate structure as applicable. - Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
1.3 CONTENT OF MANUAL A. Table of contents, typewritten, for each volume, arranged in a systematic order. 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number.
2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to the content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, the name, address and telephone number of: a. Subcontract or installer.
b. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. c. Identify the area of responsibility of each. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 4. Identify each product by product name
and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to:
a. Clearly identify the specific product or part installed. b. Clearly identify the data applicable to the installation. c. Delete reference to inapplicable information. C. Submittal
Data: 1. Include a record copy of the final, approved product submittal. Record copy shall be a clean copy (free of notes from the design professional) which has been updated to reflect
the “as-installed” system. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-3 LAB RENOVATIONS
JUNE 2, 2021 D. Drawings: 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. b. Control and flow
diagrams. 2. Coordinate drawings with information on Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Do not use Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
E. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in a consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide
a logical sequence of instructions for each procedure. F. Original copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
a. Proper procedures in the event of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranties or bonds. 1.4 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Submit electronic .pdf files,
upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products: a. Catalog
number, size, and composition. b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for reordering special-manufactured products. d. Certification as to asbestos free 2. Instructions
for care and maintenance: a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to the product.
c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE
DATA 01 78 23-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Content, for moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable
standards b. Chemical composition c. Details of installation 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. D. Additional requirements for maintenance data: The respective
sections of Specifications. 1.5 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Submit electronic .pdf files, upload electronic files to ePM system. B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system,
as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts. a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of all replaceable parts. 2. Operating procedures: a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions. b. Regulation, control,
stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. c. Summer and winter operating instructions. d. Special operating instructions. 3. Maintenance Procedures: a. Routine operations. b.
Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Alignment, adjusting and checking. 4. Servicing and lubrication required: a. List of lubricants required. 5. Manufacturer's
printed operating and maintenance instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
01 78 23-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 6. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and
diagrams required for maintenance. a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear. b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. 8. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
9. Each contractor's coordination drawings. a. As-installed color coded piping diagrams. 10. Charts of valve tag numbers, with the location and function of each valve. 11. List of original
manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 12. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: 1. Description of system and component parts: a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data and tests. c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 2. Circuit directories of panel boards: a. Electrical service.
b. Controls. c. Communications. 3. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams. 4. Operating procedures: a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special
operating instructions. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-6 LAB RENOVATIONS
JUNE 2, 2021 5. Maintenance procedures: a. Routine operations. b. Guide to "trouble-shooting". c. Disassembly, repair and reassembly. d. Adjustment and checking. 6. Manufacturer's
printed operating and maintenance instructions. 7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications. D. Additional requirements for operations and maintenance data: See the respective sections of Specifications
and General Conditions. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit through ePM system preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents thirty (30) calendar days after approved
submittals. B. Submit completed data in final form twenty (20) calendar days prior the Acceptance Phase of the Project. C. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in
final form prior to final acceptance. 1.7 INSTRUCTIONS OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Prior to final inspections or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance
personnel in the operation, adjustment and maintenance of all products, equipment and systems: 1. Instruction time shall be sufficient to fully instruct all shifts of the Owner's operating
and maintenance personnel. B. Operations and maintenance shall constitute the basis of instruction: 1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects
of operations and maintenance. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 23 Ithaca, New York OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA OLIN HALL B01, 101 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 78 23-7 LAB
RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Submit typewritten statement, signed by each of Owner's Representatives who have been instructed, describing: 1. Method of Instruction. 2. Equipment and
Systems Operated. 3. Length of Instruction Period. D. Contractor is fully responsible until final acceptance, even though operated by Owner's personnel, unless otherwise agreed in writing.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. List under clear plastic (1/8" thick) all operating, maintenance and starting precautions and procedures to be followed by Owner for operating all systems
and equipment. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 23*** CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS OLIN HALL B01,
101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION The Contractor shall: A. Compile specified warranties
and bonds. B. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. C. Co-execute submittals when so specified. D. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. E.
Submit to Architect for transmittal to Owner. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies general administrative and procedural requirements for warranties and bonds required by the Contract
Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special warranties. 1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor's special warranty of workmanship
and materials. 2. General closeout requirements are included in Section 01 77 00 - "Project Closeout." 3. Specific requirements for warranties for the Work and products and installations
that are specified to be warranted, are included in the individual Sections of Divisions 2 through 40. 4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services
to Owner are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. B. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve the Contractor
of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the Contractor.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard Product Warranties are pre-printed written warranties published by individual manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the
manufacturer to the Owner. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-2 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
B. Special Warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater
rights for the Owner 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate care and diligence to review Contract Documents to identify detailed requirements relating to warranties and bonds. B. Verify
that each item required for this submittal conforms with specified requirements. 1.5 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS A. In addition to standard and special warranties described in Divisions 2
through 40, Contractor shall warrant Work included in this project, for a minimum period of one (1) year following acceptance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion by Owner, to
cover performance, materials, workmanship and compliance with Contract Documents. B. Corrective Work: Provide service within thirty (30) calendar days when requested by Owner. Perform
services during normal working hours, unless specifically directed otherwise by Owner. Coordinate with Owner’s representative to schedule performance of corrective work. Where designated
service providers cannot perform corrective work within the Owner’s required time frame, engage another qualified service provider. Submit a written statement to Owner upon completion
of corrective work; document work performed and list outstanding items, if any. 1. When a completed breakdown of a piece of equipment occurs of the malfunction of a system affects the
environment or program involving 50 or more persons at a time (employees and students combined), or creates a safety or security risk to the Owner, an EMERGENCY may be declared by the
Owner. The Owner may declare an emergency as defined above at which time the service response must be within 4 hours and may require action during non-normal working hours. 2. When
an emergency condition occurs, the Owner may take immediate corrective action to relieve the problem by making, a minimum as possible, temporary adjustments and/or repairs when necessary
to decrease the problem until the designated Contractor’s representative can respond. These temporary adjustments and repairs will in no way jeopardize the existing warranty. 3. The
Owner’s service staff will advise the Contractor’s Representative of all temporary adjustments and repairs done in relation to the malfunctioning equipment or facility. 4. If the Contractor
fails to respond with actual service within four (4) hours, and/or the necessary repairs or adjustments are not satisfactorily complete twenty-four (24) hours, the Owner will have the
authority to make the necessary repairs or adjustments and charge the Contractor for parts and labor. 5. If all adjustments and repairs done by the Owner in relation to the above conditions
are done by authorized district personnel, there will be no negative effect of future warranty claims. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS OLIN
HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted Work, remove and replace other
Work that has been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work. D. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work
covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original
warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation. E. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable
condition complying with requirements of Contract Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective Work regardless of whether the Owner has
benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life. F. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties,
and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which
the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. G. Contractor's Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others to purchase or
subcontract for materials or units of Work for Project where a special project guaranty, specified product warranty, certification, or similar commitment is required until it has been
determined that entities required to sign or countersign such commitments are willing to do so. H. Specific Warranty. Where a special warranty, certification, or similar commitment
is required on such Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work until the Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign
such commitments are willing to do so. 1.6 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion. If the Architect’s
Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion of the Work,
submit written warranties upon request of the Architect or Owner. 1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner, by separate agreement with
the Contractor during the construction period, submit properly executed warranties to the Architect and Owner within fifteen (15) days of completion of that designated portion of the
Work. B. When a special warranty is required to be executed by the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer, prepare a written document that contains
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft to the Owner through the Architect for acceptance prior to final execution. CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 1.7 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Submit
warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts as specified in the respective sections of Specifications. Submit a schedule listing all required warranties. 2.0 PRODUCTS
– NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION 3.1 FORM OF SUBMITTALS A. The Warranties and Bonds shall be in electronic pdf format. Each submission shall include the title of the Project and the name of
the Contractor. B. Provide a series of files organized in subdirectories with a summary index with hyperlinks to the various documents and or references. C. Assemble warranties, bonds
and service and maintenance contracts, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors. D. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in orderly sequence. Provide
complete information for each item. 1. Product or work item. 2. Item description. 3. Notation of what the equipment serves (e.g. – Provides perimeter heat) 4. Warranty Provider. Is
the warranty provided by a manufacturer or installer? 5. Firm, with name of principal and responsible party, address and telephone number. 6. Scope. 7. Duration. a. Date of beginning
of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract b. End date of warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 8. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure
in case of failure. b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 9. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. CORNELL UNIVERSITY
SECTION 01 78 36 Ithaca, New York WARRANTIES AND BONDS OLIN HALL B01, 101 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01 78 36-5 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 3.2 TIME OF SUBMITTALS A. Make final submittals
within ten (10) days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment. B. For items of work when acceptance is delayed materially beyond the Date of Substantial
Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the start of the warranty period. ***END OF SECTION 01 78 36*** CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-1 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 SECTION 01 78 39 RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The Contractor shall maintain at the site, during construction, one record copy of: 1. Drawings 2. Specifications 3. Addenda 4. Change Orders and other Modifications
to the Contract 5. Architect's Field Orders or written instructions. 6. Final Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 7. Field Test records 8. Construction photographs 1.2 MAINTENANCE
OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide cabinet or storage space for storage of samples. B. File documents and samples in accordance with Data Filing Format of the Uniform Construction Index. C. Maintain documents
in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. D. Make documents and samples available at all times for review by the
Owner’s Representative and the Architect. 1.3 RECORDING A. Label each document "AS BUILT" in neat large printed letters. B. Record information concurrently with construction progress.
1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-2
LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 C. Drawings As built drawings shall consist of making any changes neatly and clearly on the Contract Drawings using colored ink or pencil, shall be kept
current by the contractor on a day-to-day basis in concert with the progress of the work. Where applicable, the change marked on a drawing is to carry the notation “per Change Order
No. X”, or similar reference which cites the reason for the change. As an alternative approach the Contractor can submit a plan for producing the “As-Built” drawings via electronic
mark-up in Bluebeam, Adobe Professional, or other similar program as an alternative to colored pencil or ink mark-ups. Such plan shall be subject to approval of the Owner. The day-to-day
construction as built drawings shall be made available to the Architect or Owner’s Representative for review upon request. The "As built" drawings shall show all changes to the following
areas of construction: 1. Architectural: a. Modifications to components dictated by the building code b. Wall, door, window locations c. Built in casework locations d. New rated door
and wall schedules/ locations e. Material and products where submittals are requested 2. Civil and Structural a. Dimensions for load carrying elements, both horizontal and vertical
b. Materials and products where submittals are requested c. Load carrying elements and foundation systems d. Site related elements including: - Building outlines, entranceways, areaways,
roof overhangs, downspouts, significant architectural projections and other pertinent data. e. All significant changes in foundations, columns, beams, openings, concrete reinforcing,
lintels, concealed anchorages and "knock-out" panels made during construction. f. Building envelope systems including roofing systems and building shell systems g. Geotechnical subsurface
information h. Items that will require future maintenance i. Life safety critical items CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101
RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-3 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021 3. Mechanical (HVAC, Plumbing and Fire Protection) a. Products where submittals are requested b. Final locations of all equipment.
c. Final sizes and materials of piping and ductwork. d. Final locations of inaccessible piping and ductwork. e. Final locations of all controls equipment, including all sensors and
actuators. f. Final locations of all valves and dampers, including all shutoff valves, balance dampers and fire dampers. g. Location of access doors for all equipment in concealed locations.
h. Final location and arrangement of all mechanical equipment and concealed gas, sprinkler, domestic, sanitary and drainage systems piping and other plumbing, including, but not limited
to, supply and circulating mains, principal valves, meters, clean-outs, drains, pumps and controls, vent stacks, sanitary and storm water drainage. 4. Electrical a. Products where submittals
were requested. b. Circuit (wire and raceway) size, number, and type. c. Main circuit pathways for Fire Alarm, Emergency Power, and Access Control/Security systems. d. Final locations
of equipment and devices, interior and exterior luminaires, and power supplies. e. Final location of electric signal system panels, final arrangement of all circuits and any significant
changes made in electrical signal system design as a result of Change Order or job conditions. 5. Environmental a. Utility related elements and supporting infrastructure. D. Specifications
and Addenda Legibly mark each section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and Supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made
by Field Order or by Change Order. CORNELL UNIVERSITY SECTION 01 78 39 Ithaca, New York RECORD DOCUMENTS OLIN HALL B01, 101 RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 78 39-4 LAB RENOVATIONS JUNE 2, 2021
1.4 SUBMITTAL A. At Contract close-out, deliver copies of all record documents to the Owner’s Representative. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing:
1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and address 4. Title and number of each record document 5. Certification that each document is complete and accurate 6. Signature
of Contractor or its authorized representative. 2.0 PRODUCTS – NOT USED 3.0 EXECUTION – NOT USED ***END OF SECTION 01 78 39*** TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR Olin Hall
B01, 101 Lab Renovations CORNELL UNIVERSITY ITHACA, NEW YORK OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19
- 1 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of
existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and
salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse. 1. Remove
and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. 2. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be
permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition
waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting
individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective
Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 1. Detailed sequence
of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's other tenants' on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility
services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Coordination of Owner's continuing
occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner
prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed
and salvaged. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will
not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing
conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected
hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale
of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective
demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Review record documents of existing construction provided
by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated
to determine extent of selective demolition required. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered,
investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured
drawings. 1. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing
Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas
to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated,
or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. OLIN HALL B01
AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and
HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same
or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect
and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed:
Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or
compatible ductwork material. 3.3 PREPARATION A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with
roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury
to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied
portions of building. 2. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 3.4 SELECTIVE
DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work
within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions
required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering
and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid
marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19
- 5 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 6. Dispose of demolished
items and materials promptly. B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure
area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Existing Items to Remain:
Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage
location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES
FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient
Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled,
reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from
elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal:
Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 1 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood
blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Plywood panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal size in least dimension. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2
inches nominal or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal size in least dimension. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant
treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials
based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS
ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 2 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof
sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of
grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review.
Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp
of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact
with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark
lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants,
nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 3 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact
with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over
concrete slabs-on-grade. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article,
that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by
a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and
with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline
of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content
of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. C. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum
moisture content of 15 percent. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Plywood panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2
grade of any species. B. Other Framing: Construction or No. 2 grade of any of the following species: 1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA. 3. Southern pine
or mixed southern pine; SPIB. 4. Douglas fir-larch (north); NLGA. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06
10 53 - 4 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking.
2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. C. For blocking not used
for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with
its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with
attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.6 PLYWOOD
PANELS A. Plywood Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than ¾-inch nominal thickness. 2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather,
in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667. C. Screws
for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C1002 or ASTM C954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an
evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. E. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC01, ICC-ES AC58, ICC-ES AC193, or ICCES AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 5 1. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F593 and ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS
MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene
film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Framing Standard: Comply with
AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.
C. Install plywood panels by fastening to studs or framing. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated
and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. F. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum
joint arrangement. G. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected
from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. H. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking,
install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking. I. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with
the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53 - 6 J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate
members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug
but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILERS A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form
to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading.
Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF WOOD FURRING A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with
wood as required for tolerance of finish work. B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum
Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. B. Protect miscellaneous
rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with
EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16
- 1 SECTION 06 41 16 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring,
blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-clad architectural cabinets that are not concealed within other construction. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section
06 10 53 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets that are concealed within other construction before cabinet
installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support
loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and
attachment details. 2. Show large-scale details. 3. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other
Sections. 4. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for items installed in plastic-laminate architectural cabinets. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed
finish. D. Samples for Verification: For the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS
06 41 16 - 2 1. Plastic Laminates: 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish required. a. Provide one sample applied to core material with specified edge material
applied to one edge. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom
fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver
cabinets until painting and similar finish operations that might damage architectural cabinets have been completed in installation areas. Store cabinets in installation areas or in
areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets
until wet-work is complete and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction
period. B. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that
support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed/concealed by construction, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Unless
otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. The Contract
Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with requirements of Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality
standard. B. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. C. Type of Construction: Frameless. D. Door and Drawer-Front Style: Flush overlay. E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate:
NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by quality standard. 1. Manufacturer: Wilsonart. 2. Pattern/Color: Match Architect's samples. F. Laminate Cladding for
Exposed Surfaces: 1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 3. Edges: Grade HGS. 4. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.
G. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS; Matte white. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves:
PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure
decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. H. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate
Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL. I. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 4 1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued
dovetail joints. J. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1. Match Architect's samples. 2.2 WOOD MATERIALS A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of architectural cabinet
and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent. B. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde. 1. Medium-Density
Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood
or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide
metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrousmetal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.
C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate
architectural cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment
to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
1. Trial fit assemblies at manufacturer's shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed
after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101
RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 5 C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware,
appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition cabinets to humidity conditions in installation areas for not less than 72 hours.
3.2 INSTALLATION A. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Install cabinets to comply with quality standard grade of item to be installed. B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication
at Project site to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with wafer-head cabinet
installation screws. D. Install cabinets level, plumb, and true in line to a tolerance of ⅛ inch in 96 inches using concealed shims. 1. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work,
refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center
doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top
and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1½-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, or No.
10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate
functional and visual defects. Where not possible to repair, replace architectural cabinets. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean
cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 -
6 END OF SECTION 06 41 16 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PLASTIC-LAMINATE-CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 06 41 16 - 7 INTENTIONALLY
LEFT BLANK OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 1 SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART
1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to
this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetration firestopping systems for the following applications: a. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. b. Penetrations in
horizontal assemblies. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 84 43 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction and at exterior curtain-wall/floor
intersections. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. Product Data: For sealants, indicating VOC content. 2. Laboratory
Test Reports: For sealants, indicating compliance with requirements for lowemitting materials. C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration
of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing
and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's
fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. OLIN HALL B01
AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 2 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product
Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating
that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications:
A firm that has been approved by FM Approval according to FM Approval 4991, "Approval Standard for Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified
Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures
are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration
firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate
construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing
of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration
Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 3 a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) FM Approval
in its "Approval Guide." 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire, passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain
original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating
items if any. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
c. Grabber Construction Products. d. Hilti, Inc. e. Passive Fire Protection Partners. f. RectorSeal. g. Specified Technologies, Inc. h. Tremco, Inc. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated
Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: Not less
than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E814 or UL 1479,
based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating:
At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping
Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E84. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2. Sealant shall comply
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from
Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 4 E. Accessories:
Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration
firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve
lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations
that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized
to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric
sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for
mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with
a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags
from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 5 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's
written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items
or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates
and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems,
clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating
items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from
concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow
spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and
published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the
position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING 07 84 13 - 6 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components
of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating
items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will
remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label
walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches high and with minimum 0.375-inch
strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean
off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers
and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping
systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07 84 13 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants.
2. Nonstaining silicone joint sealants. 3. Butyl joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealing joints
in sound-rated construction. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product. For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, include
printed statement of VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for
each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in ½-inch-wide joints formed between
two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant
application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB
RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 2 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint
widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from
joint substrates. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another
and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior
Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following: 1. Architectural sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less.
2. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 3. Sealants and sealant primers for nonporous substrates shall have a VOC content
of 775 g/L or less. C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT (ES-1): Single-component,
nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT. 1. Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 791. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc; SCS2000 SilPruf.
c. Pecora Corporation; PCS. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 3 2.3 NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT (ES-2): Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use,
neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Dow
Corning Corporation; 790. 2.4 BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS A. Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants (RS-1): ASTM C 1311. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following: a. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300. b. Pecora Corporation; BC-158. 2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Acrylic Latex (LS-1): Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type
OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation;
AC-20. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834. 2.6 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING A. Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other
joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C
(closed-cell material with a surface skin), Type O (open-cell material), Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant
manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape:
Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back
of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 4 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS
MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substra
te tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other
substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive
joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint
sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with
adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old
joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or
a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations
above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Stucco. d. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic
tile. 3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 5 a.
Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience.
Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent
requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant
backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion
of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 6 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period
from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial
Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired
areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application 01: Exterior joints between aluminum storefront and window framing members. 1.
Joint Sealant: ES-1 (Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT). B. Joint-Sealant Application 02: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter
joints between wall finish materials and frames of windows and storefronts. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: ES-2 (Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT).
C. Joint-Sealant Application 03: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement. 1. Joint Locations: a. Perimeter joints
between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: LS-1 (Acrylic latex). D. Joint-Sealant Application
04: Concealed mastics. 1. Joint Locations: a. Aluminum thresholds. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 7 b.
Other joints as indicated on Drawings. 2. Joint Sealant: RS-1 (Butyl-rubber based). END OF SECTION 07 92 00 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 8 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 -
1 SECTION 09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes maintenance repainting as follows: 1. Cleaning, repair, patching, and preparation of existing
substrates. 2. Repainting. 3. Electrostatic applied coating to existing metal substrates. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting," for paint materials and systems
for new construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523. 1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units
at 85 degrees. 2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.
4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.
7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform maintenance repainting in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this
and other Sections: 1. Dismantle existing surface-mounted objects and hardware except items indicated to remain in place. Tag items with location identification and protect. 2. Verify
that temporary protections have been installed. 3. Examine condition of surfaces to be painted. 4. Perform repairs required to achieve smooth, sound surface ready to receive paint.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 2 5. Remove existing paint to the degree required for each
substrate and surface condition of existing paint. 6. Apply paint system. 7. Reinstall dismantled surface-mounted objects and hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for product application and use. 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B.
Samples: For each type of paint system and each pattern, color, and gloss; in sizes indicated below. 1. Include a list of materials for each coat of each Sample. 2. Label each Sample
for location and application. 3. Sample Size: a. Painted Surfaces: 4-by-8-inch Samples for each color and material, on hardboard. C. Product List: For each paint product indicated,
include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI
Approved Products List" for each MPI-product category specified in paint systems, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Color Matching: Custom
computer-match paint colors to match Architect's samples. B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of maintenance repainting processes for each type of coating system and substrate indicated and
each color and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Duplicate appearance of approved Sample submittals. 1. Locate
mockups on existing surfaces where directed by Architect. 2. Surface-Preparation Mockups: On existing surfaces using applicable specified methods of cleaning and other surface preparation,
provide mockup sample of at least 100 sq. ft. 3. Coating Mockups: One surface of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating system
under same conditions as the completed Work. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 3 5. Subject to compliance
with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not
in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures
are between 50 and 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREPARATORY CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate
(TSPP), ½ cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for every 5 gal. of solution required. C.
Mildewcide: Commercial proprietary mildewcide or a job-mixed solution prepared by mixing ⅓ cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite
bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water. D. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal, Floor Paint, and Concrete Floor Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, emery paper, fine steel wool, steel scrapers, and
steel-wire brushes of various sizes. E. Rust Remover: Manufacturer's standard phosphoric acid-based gel formulation, also called "naval jelly," for removing corrosion from iron and
steel. 2.2 PAINT REMOVERS A. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, waterrinsible, solvent-type paste, gel, or foamed emulsion formulation for
removing paint from masonry, stone, wood, plaster, or metal as required to suit Project; and containing no methanol or methylene chloride. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 4 a. ABR Products, Inc.; ABR Citrus Paint Removers or Super Bio Strip Gel. b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; S-301, S-303, or S-305. c. Dumond
Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 7 without paper covering, Smart Strip, or Smart Strip Pro. d. EaCo Chem, Inc.; InStrip. e. PROSOCO, Inc.; Enviro Klean SafStrip or Enviro Klean SafStrip 8.
2.3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility:
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,
based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate
indicated. C. VOC Content: For interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings:
50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 100 g/L. 5. Two-part
Epoxy Floor Coatings: 250g/L. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. E. Transition Coat: Paint manufacturer's recommended coating for use where a residual existing coating is incompatible
with the paint system. 2.4 PAINT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Interior Maintenance Repainting
Schedule at the end of Part 3, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company
(The). OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 5 2.5 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Metal-Patching Compound:
Two-part, polyester-resin, metal-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of metal repair indicated, tooling time required for the
detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be produced for filling metal that has deteriorated from corrosion. Filler shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to
feather edge. B. Gypsum-Plaster Patching Compound: Finish coat plaster and bonding compound according to ASTM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Gypsum Board Patching
Compound: Setting-type joint taping compound according to ASTM C 475; paper tape where required. D. Cementitious Patching Compounds: Cementitious patching compounds and repair materials
specifically manufactured for filling cementitious substrates and for sanding or tooling prior to repainting; formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of cementitious
substrate indicated, exposure to weather and traffic, the detail of work, and site conditions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions
for protecting building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. 3.2 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING, GENERAL A. Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard: Completed
work is to have a uniform appearance as viewed by Architect from building interior at 5 feet away from painted surface. B. Execution of the Work: In repainting surfaces, disturb them
as minimally as possible and as follows: 1. Remove failed coatings and corrosion and repaint. 2. Verify that substrate surface conditions are suitable for repainting. 3. Allow other
trades to repair items in place before repainting. 4. Repaint with sufficient coats to produce uniform appearance. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results
in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging surfaces. D. Perform additional general
cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard" Paragraph,
so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52
- 6 E. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use gentle methods, such as scraping and lightly hand sanding, that will not abrade softer substrates,
reducing clarity of detail. F. Heat Processes: Do not use torches, heat guns, or heat plates. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of painting work. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for inspection. B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: Do not begin application of coatings unless moisture content of exposed surface is below the maximum value recommended in writing by paint manufacturer
and not greater than the following maximum values when measured with an electronic moisture meter appropriate to the substrate material: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12
percent. 3. Gypsum Plaster: 12 percent. C. Alkalinity: Do not begin application of coatings unless surface alkalinity is within range recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
Conduct alkali testing with litmus paper on exposed plaster, cementitious, and masonry surfaces. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility
with existing finishes and primers. 1. If existing surfaces cannot be prepared to an acceptable condition for proper finishing by using specified surface-preparation methods, notify
Architect in writing. E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's
acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.4 PREPARATORY CLEANING A. General: Use the gentlest, appropriate method necessary to clean surfaces in preparation for painting. Clean all
surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 7 B. Detergent
Hand Cleaning: Wash surfaces by hand using clean rags, sponges, and bristle brushes. Scrub surface with detergent solution and bristle brush until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can
be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains
wet. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. C. Solvent Cleaning: Use solvent cleaning to remove oil, grease, smoke, and other contaminants from painted or unpainted surfaces
before other preparation work. Wipe surfaces with solvent using clean rags and sponges. If necessary, spot-solvent cleaning may be employed just prior to commencement of paint application,
provided enough time is allowed for complete evaporation. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the final wash to ensure that all foreign materials have been removed. Do not use solvents,
including primer thinner and turpentine, that leave residue. D. Mildew: Clean off existing mildew by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas
with mildewcide. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. E. Chemical Rust Removal: 1. Remove loose rust scale with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. 2. Apply
rust remover with brushes or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3. Allow rust remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined
by preconstruction testing. Do not allow extended dwell time. 4. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags, or clean with method recommended in writing
by manufacturer to remove residue. 5. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 6. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface
until primed. F. Mechanical Rust Removal: 1. Remove rust with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. Clean to bright metal. 2. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either
steel wool or soft rags. 3. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 4. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until
primed. 3.5 PAINT REMOVAL A. General: Remove paint where indicated. Where cleaning methods have been attempted and further removal of the paint is required because of incompatible or
unsatisfactory surfaces for repainting, remove paint to extent required by conditions. 1. Application: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Apply materials to all surfaces, corners, contours,
and interstices, to provide a uniform final appearance without streaks. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09
01 90.52 - 8 b. After work is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 2. Brushes: Use brushes that are resistant to chemicals being used. a.
Metal Substrates: If using wire brushes on metal, use brushes of same metal composition as metal being treated. B. Paint Removal with Hand Tools: Remove paint manually using hand-held
scrapers, wire brushes, sandpaper, and metallic wool as appropriate for the substrate material. C. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: 1. Remove loose and peeling paint
using water, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface with brushes. 3. Allow paint remover to remain
on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. 4. Remove chemicals and paint residue by the following methods, as recommended
in writing by paint remover manufacturer: a. Rinse with cold or hot water applied by low or medium-pressure spray. b. Use mechanical removal methods. 5. Repeat process if necessary
to remove all paint. 3.6 SUBSTRATE REPAIR A. General: Repair substrate surface defects that are inconsistent with the surface appearance of adjacent materials and finishes. B. Cementitious
Material Substrate: 1. General: Repair defects including dents and chips more than ¼ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with cementitious patching compound and sanding
smooth. Remove protruding fasteners. 2. Concrete, Cement Plaster, and Other Cementitious Products: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. If surfaces
are too alkaline to paint, correct this condition before painting. 3. Existing Coatings: Remove surface irregularities by scraping or sanding to produce uniform substrate for coating
application; sand or mechanically abrade coating to remove gloss and provide for adhesion of primer; apply one coat primer of type recommended by coating manufacturer for maximum coating
adhesion. C. Gypsum-Plaster and Gypsum-Board Substrates: 1. Repair defects including dents and chips more than ⅛ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with gypsum-plaster
patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove protruding fasteners. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52
- 9 2. Rout out surface cracks to remove loose, unsound material; fill with patching compound and sand smooth. D. Metal Substrate: 1. Preparation: Treat repair locations by wire-brushing
and solvent cleaning. Use chemical or mechanical rust removal method to clean off rust. 2. Defects in Metal Surfaces: Repair non-load-bearing defects in existing metal surfaces, including
dents and gouges more than 1/16 inch deep or ½ inch across and all holes and cracks by filling with metal-patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove burrs and protruding fasteners.
3. Priming: Prime iron and steel surfaces immediately after repair to prevent flash rusting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats to surfaces
that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. 3.7 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for application methods unless otherwise indicated
in this Section. B. Prepare surfaces to be painted according to the Surface-Preparation Schedule and with manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition. C. Apply
a transition coat over incompatible existing coatings. D. Metal Substrate: Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges before applying full coat. Apply two coats to
surfaces that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. Tint stripe coat different than the main coating and apply with brush. E. Blending Painted Surfaces: When painting new substrates
patched into existing surfaces or touching up missing or damaged finishes, apply coating system specified for the specific substrate. Apply final finish coat over entire surface from
edge to edge and corner to corner. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After
completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect
work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 10 3.9 SURFACE-PREPARATION SCHEDULE A. General: Before painting, prepare surfaces for painting
according to applicable requirements specified in this schedule. 1. Examine surfaces to evaluate each surface condition according to paragraphs below. 2. Where existing degree of soiling
prevents examination, preclean surface and allow it to dry before making an evaluation. 3. Repair substrate defects according to "Substrate Repair" Article. B. Surface Preparation for
MPI DSD 0 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Existing paint film in good condition and tightly adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Not required. 3. Preparation for Painting:
Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Roughen or degloss cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion according to paint manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 1 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film cracked or broken but adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Scrape by hand-tool cleaning methods
to remove loose paint until only tightly adhered paint remains. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate
if required. Roughen, degloss, and sand the cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion and a smooth finish according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. D. Surface Preparation
for MPI DSD 2 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film loose, flaking, or peeling. 2. Paint Removal: Remove loose, flaking, or peeling paint film by hand-tool
or chemical paint-removal methods. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Use other cleaning methods for small areas of
bare substrate if required. Sand surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges. Prepare bare cleaned surface to be painted according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for
substrate construction materials. 3.10 INTERIOR MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal Substrates (excluding radiator covers and laboratory casework): 1. Latex System: MPI
RIN 5.1N system over a transition coat. a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation,
touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE
REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 11 b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #23. 1) Benjamin Moore; Coronado Rust Scat Metal Primer. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex matching topcoat.
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. 1) Benjamin Moore; Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss. B. Metal Substrates (laboratory casework): 1. Alkyd Enamel,
Water Based a. Prime coat: Waterborne Bonding Primer. 1) Benjamin Moore; STIX Waterborne Bonding Primer SXA-110. b. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: High Gloss
Waterborne Interior Alkyd, MPI #157. 1) Benjamin Moore; Advance Waterborne Interior/Exterior Alkyd High Gloss N794. C. Metal Substrates (radiator covers in offices): 1. Electrostatic
Alkyd Enamel System. a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat.
3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #79. 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V140 Alkyd Metal Primer.
c. Intermediate Coat: Alkyd Enamel matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Alkyd Enamel, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5). 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V260 Electrostatic Semi-gloss Enamel.
D. Gypsum Board and Plaster: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System over Waterborne Primer: MPI RIN 9.2M: a. Prime Coat Conditions: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 12 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface
degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Stain Blocking, Water Based, MPI #137. 1) Benjamin
Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer. c. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500
Interior Flat Finish. d. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. E. Cementitious
Floor and Previously Painted Cementitious Floor: 1. Industrial High Performance Coatings a. Prime Coat: 100% solids epoxy pre-primer 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V155 Epoxy Pre-Primer.
b. Topcoat, Floors and Integral Base: Waterborne epoxy, gloss finish. 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech V440 Waterborne Amine Adduct Epoxy. c. Anti-slip additive: Broadcast into wet-film
and back-rolled. 1) Benjamin Moore; Corotech Anti-Slip Aggregate V630. END OF SECTION 09 01 90.52 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 13 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
09 22 16 - 1 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Grid
suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply
with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent
corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel
studs and tracks. 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal
Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 5) Steel Network, Inc. (The). OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 6) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. c. Depth: 3⅝ inches unless otherwise indicated
on Drawings. 2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional
ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products
Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) MarinoWARE. 4) MBA Building Supplies. 5) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 7) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal
Thickness: 0.0190 inch. c. Depth: 3⅝ inches unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Double-Track System:
ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner
track. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: provide one of the following: 1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST
2). 2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted Deflection Track. 3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 4) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted
Deflecto Track. 5) Metal-Lite; The System. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD. 7) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for
blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. E. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. 2. Depth: ⅞ inch. F. Resilient Furring
Channels: ½-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 2. Configuration: Asymmetrical. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener
systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure.
b. Type: Adhesive anchor. c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class
1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members
that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation;
640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced
installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 B. Isolation Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell
vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, ⅛ inch thick, in width to suit steel face width. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and
substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum
Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections
securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for
assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at
exterior walls, install continuous isolation foam gasket between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks
at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended
ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL
FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading
of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum ½-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for
installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings
other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. E. Direct
Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. F. Resilient Furring: 1. Install
horizontally to walls with attachment leg down and open leg up. 2. Apply continuous foam gasket to contact surface of resilient channels. G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing
member so fastening surfaces vary not more than ⅛ inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components
according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems
from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure
as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings
that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent
devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure
by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that
will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall
track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation
Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within ⅛ inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members
that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 -
GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for joint sealants
in gypsum board construction. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation,
direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum
panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture
damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD
09 29 00 - 2 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GYPSUM BOARD,
GENERAL A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corporation. 3. Georgia-Pacific Building
Products. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support
system indicated. 2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: ½ inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
3. Application: Where indicated on Drawings. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: ⅝ inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
3. Application: All locations except where ½-inch is indicated on Drawings. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet.
2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control)
joint. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C
475M. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Joint Compound: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At
open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners,
and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose
compound. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill
Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with
mineral fibers manufactured from rock wool. D. Acoustical Sealant: Comply with Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and
substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints
of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of
open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking
is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints
at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in
concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage
may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting
below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow ¼- to ⅜-inch-wide joints to install acoustical sealant. G. Isolate
perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide ¼- to ½-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges
of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each
panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. Acoustical Treatment: At all partitions, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings
and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919
and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical
ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR
GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels
vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one
framing member in alternate courses of panels. 2. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply
gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at
least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated or sound-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of
partitions. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended
for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints
according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended
to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless
otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound
and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from
damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged,
and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are
mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO
PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - 1 SECTION 22 05 18 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section
includes escutcheons. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ESCUTCHEONS A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated
finish and setscrew fastener. B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners. C. Split-Casting Brass Type: With polished,
chrome-plated finish and with concealed hinge and setscrew. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening. 1. Escutcheons for New Piping: a. Piping
with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. OLIN HALL B01 AND
101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 18 - 2 c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type
or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished, chrome-plated finish.
e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass
type with polished, chrome-plated finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Replace broken
and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials. END OF SECTION 22 05 18 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 1 SECTION 22 05 23.12 - BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of
the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes bronze ball valves. 1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CWP: Cold working pressure. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve. 1. Certification that products comply with NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,
AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, and soldered ends. 3. Set ball valves
open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher-than-ambient-dew-p
oint temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts.
Do not use operating handles or stems as lifting or rigging points. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer. B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B1.20.1 for threads for threaded end valves. 2. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 3. ASME B16.18
for solder-joint connections. 4. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service. D. Bronze
valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted. E. Valve Pressure-Temperature
Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. G. Valve Actuator Types:
1. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves smaller than NPS 4. H. Valves in Insulated Piping: 1. Include 2-inch stem extensions. 2. Extended operating handles of non-thermal-conductive material
and protective sleeves that allow operation of valves without breaking vapor seals or disturbing insulation. 3. Memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied. 2.2
BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 22 05 23.12 - 3 2. Description: a. Standard:
MSS SP-110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: Two-piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Soldered or threaded. f. Seats: RTFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless
steel, vented. i. Port: Full. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials,
such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible
by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt
to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance,
and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or
above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install valve tags. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping
and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BALL VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
22 05 23.12 - 4 3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valves with specified CWP ratings are unavailable, the same types of valves with higher CWP ratings may be
substituted. B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded or soldered ends. 3.4 DOMESTIC HOT- AND COLD-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Two-piece, bronze ball valve with stainless-steel trim. END OF SECTION
22 05 23.12 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05
29 - 1 SECTION 22 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Fastener
systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and
supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.5 ACTION
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS
SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 2 4. Padded
Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of stainless
steel. B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and
washer made of copper-coated steel or stainless steel. 2.2 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out,
tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless-steel anchors, for use
in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink
and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as
required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs
less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according
to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 3 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's
written instructions. C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. D. Install building attachments
within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes
in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. E. Load Distribution:
Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. F. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports
to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. G. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to
piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert
with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if
insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping
with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger
if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. 5. Thermal-Hanger Shields:
Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated
slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29 - 4 3.3 PAINTING A. Touchup: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,
and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and
apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.
B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings
for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with
copper tubing. E. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. F. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. G. Horizontal-Piping
Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1):
For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 24 if little
or no insulation is required. 3. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 4. Adjustable,
Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 5. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension
of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 6. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non-insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring
Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non-insulated,
stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 9. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 10. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion
or contraction. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22
05 29 - 5 H. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS
Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. I. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following
types: 1. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. J. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps
(MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching
to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For
attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of
steel I-beams. 8. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light
(MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 9. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. K. Saddles and
Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill
interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.
3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system
Sections. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 29
- 6 M. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 22 05 29 OLIN HALL B01
AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 1 SECTION 22 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipe labels. 2. Valve tags. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Valve numbering scheme. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Actioncraft Products,
Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Brady Corporation. 3. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 5. Marking Services Inc. 6. Seton Identification Products.
B. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. C. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled,
semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive. D. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive
backing. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 -
2 E. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings; also include pipe size and an arrow indicating flow
direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping-system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
2. Lettering Size: Size letters according to ASME A13.1 for piping. 2.2 VALVE TAGS A. Manufacturers: 1. Actioncraft Products, Inc.; a division of Industrial Test Equipment Co., Inc.
2. Brady Corporation. 3. Craftmark Pipe Markers. 4. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co. 5. Marking Services Inc. 6. Seton Identification Products. B. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch
letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. 1. Tag Material: 1-1/2-inch-diameter, brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment
hardware. 2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link chain. C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation
(as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff
and similar special uses. 1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping surfaces of substances that
could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 3 B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations
of access panels and doors. C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color Coding: Painting
of piping is specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." B. Stenciled Pipe Label Option: Stenciled labels may be provided instead of manufactured pipe labels, at Installer's
option. Install stenciled pipe labels, complying with ASME A13.1, with painted, color-coded bands or rectangles on each piping system. 1. Identification Paint: Use for contrasting background.
2. Stencil Paint: Use for pipe marking. C. Pipe Label Locations: Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible
maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding
short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced
at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately
spaced labels. D. Directional Flow Arrows: Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow in pipes, including pipes where flow is allowed in both directions. E. Pipe Label Color
Schedule: 1. Domestic Water Piping a. Background: Safety green. b. Letter Colors: White. 2. Sanitary Waste Piping: a. Background Color: Safety purple. b. Letter Color: White. 3.
Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: White letters on an ANSI Z535.1 safety-blue background. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 - 4 3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves,
valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and
units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule. B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated
in the following subparagraphs: 1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape: a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches, round. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches,
round. 2. Valve-Tag Colors: a. For each piping system, use the same lettering and background coloring system on valve tags as used in the piping system labels and background. ED OF
SECTION 22 05 53 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 1 SECTION 22 07 19
- PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01
Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water
piping. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied,
if any). 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates
of tests and test methods employed. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by
testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic,
tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 2 1.6 DELIVERY,
STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and,
where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment
of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General"
and "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products
that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic
stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville. b. Knauf. 2. Type I, 850
Deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factoryapplied jacket requirements
are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
22 07 19 - 3 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195. 1. Available Manufacturers: Ramco. B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating
Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196. 1. Available Manufacturers: Ramco. C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449. 1. Available Manufacturers:
Ramco. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless
otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle
Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Available
Manufacturers: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. For indoor applications,
adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials,
jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24). OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 4 B. Vapor-Barrier
Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Knauf Insulation. 2. Water-Vapor
Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent
by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 SEALANTS A. Joint Sealants: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. b. Eagle Bridges
- Marathon Industries. c. Foster Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F. 5. Color: White or gray. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC
content of 420 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Available
Manufacturers: a. Childers Brand; H. B. Fuller Construction Products. 2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant,
flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications.
When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING
PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 5 1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136,
Type I. 2.7 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Avery Dennison
Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division. b. Compac Corporation. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc.; an American Biltrite company. d. Knauf Insulation. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils.
4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
B. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive; suitable for indoor and outdoor applications. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Compac
Corporation. b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc.; an American Biltrite company. c. Venture Tape. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation:
500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Illinois Tool Works, Inc. b. RPR Products,
Inc. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 6 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide
with wing seal. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Available
Manufacturer: C & F Wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and
dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove
materials that will adversely affect insulation application. B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces,
use demineralized water. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout
the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item
of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not
corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install
multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. OLIN HALL
B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 7 G. Keep insulation materials dry during application
and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation
with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with
vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation
on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert
materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples
along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry
surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier
mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing
material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 8 P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control
devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That
Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. B. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously
through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various
pipe insulation material installation articles. B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers,
flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or
mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams,
voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed
fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next
and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness
as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate
up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed
fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange
or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 9 insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate
flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services
and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified
to receive a field-applied jacket, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining
insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER
INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation
materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied
jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation
Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows
and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. C. Insulation
Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not
available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 - 10 3.7 FINISHES A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and
as specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal
agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size. B. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow
visual inspection of the completed Work. C. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. 3.8 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular
insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed
is Contractor's option. B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following: 1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping.
3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 3.9 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Domestic Cold Water: 1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Insulation
shall be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Water: 1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall
be one of the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick. END OF SECTION 22 07 19 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 1 SECTION 22 11 16 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions
of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aboveground domestic
water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. System purging
and disinfecting activities report. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied
by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction
Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. 2. Do not interrupt water service without Construction Manager's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations,
and pipe sizes. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 2 B. Potable-water piping
and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61 Annex G. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw." 2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type
L water tube, drawn temper. B. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. C. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
D. Copper Unions: 1. MSS SP-123. 2. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. 3. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. 4. Solder-joint or threaded ends. 2.3 PIPING JOINING
MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. 2. Full-face
or ring type unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
D. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material.
Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. B. Dielectric Flanges: 1. Manufacturers: a. Matco-Norca. b. Watts; a Watts Water Technologies company. c. Wilkins. d. Zurn
Industries, LLC. 2. Standard: ASSE 1079. 3. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 3 4. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. 5. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous;
threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous. C. Dielectric Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: a. Elster Perfection Corporation. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Matco-Norca.
d. Precision Plumbing Products. e. Victaulic Company. 2. Standard: IAPMO PS 66. 3. Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 4. Pressure Rating and Temperature: 300 psig
at 225 deg F. 5. End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 6. Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and
diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other
design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. B. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric
fitting. C. Install domestic water piping level and plumb. D. Install piping to permit valve servicing. E. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. F. Install piping free of sags and bends. G. Install fittings for changes
in direction and branch connections. H. Prohibited Fittings: Screw or sand bushings; 90-degree or 45-degree street elbows, close nipples, long screws, bullhead tees, and special fittings,
unless approved by the local inspecting agency. I. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in
Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 4 3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside
of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads:
Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. D. Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper
tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping
systems. 3.3 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller:
Use dielectric couplings or nipples. C. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Use dielectric flanges. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements for pipe
hanger, support products, and installation in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual,
Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer than
100 Feet if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers,
to a minimum of 3/8 inch. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 5 D. Install hangers
for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. E. Install supports for vertical copper
tubing every 10 feet. F. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general
arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. C. Connect domestic water piping
to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that
required by plumbing code. 3.6 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification materials and installation in Section 22 05 53 "Identification
for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections:
a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. b. During installation, notify authorities having
jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection
of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. 2) Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified
in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 - 6 c. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange
for reinspection. d. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Piping Tests: a. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to
determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. b. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or
repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. c. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced
domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. d. Cap and subject piping to static
water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and
loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. e. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.
f. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required. B. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and
inspection reports. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 2. Open throttling valves to proper setting.
3. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having
jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. Flush piping system with clean, potable
water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
22 11 16 - 7 b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate
with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. 2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. d. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of watersample approvals
from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. 3.10 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special fittings
with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be
one of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints. 3.11 VALVE SCHEDULE A. Drawings indicate valve types to be
used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. END OF SECTION 22 11 16 OLIN HALL
B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 1 SECTION 22 15 13 - GENERAL-SERVICE
COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems, as follows: 1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Joining materials. 3. Valves. 4. Dielectric fittings. 5. Specialties. 6. Quick couplings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Safety valves. 3. Pressure
regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 4. Quick couplings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Brazing certificates. B. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 CLOSEOUT
SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR
PIPING 22 15 13 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications,"
or with AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Interruption of Existing Compressed-Air Service: Do not interrupt compressed-air
service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary compressed-air service according
to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of compressed-air service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption
of compressed-air service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. ASME Compliance: 1. Comply with ASME B31.3,
"Process Piping," for low-pressure, compressed-air piping. 2. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure, compressed-air piping. 2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type K or L seamless, drawn-temper, water tube. 1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, wrought copper with dimensions
for brazed joints. 2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300. 3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123. B. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling
or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM
B32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux in accordance with ASTM B813. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 3 2.4 VALVES A. Ball Valves: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2.5 DIELECTRIC
FITTINGS A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to
be joined. B. Dielectric Unions: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co. b. Jomar Valve. c. Matco-Norca.
d. Viega LLC. e. WATTS. f. Wilkins. 2. Description: a. Standard: ASSE 1079. b. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F. c. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded
ferrous. 2.6 SPECIALTIES A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed;
constructed of bronze body with poppet-type safety valve for compressed-air service. 1. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver pressure rating.
B. Air-Line Pressure Regulators, Bronze Body: Diaphragm operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200-psig-minimum inlet
pressure, unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101
RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 4 1. Aeroquip Performance Products; Eaton, Hydraulics
Sector. 2. Bowes Manufacturing Inc. 3. Parker Hannifin Corp. 4. Tuthill Corporation. B. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection
and disconnection of compressed-air hose. C. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and stainless steel or nickel-plated-steel operating
parts. 1. Socket End: With one-way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting. 2. Plug End: Straight-through type with barbed outlet for attaching hose.
D. Valveless Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with stainless steel or nickel-platedsteel operating parts. 1. Socket End: With O-ring or gasket seal, without valve, and with
barbed inlet for attaching hose. 2. Plug End: With barbed outlet for attaching hose. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Distribution Piping:
Use the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type K or L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed or soldered joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS
A. Metal General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements and use valve types specified in "Valve Applications" Article in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping," according
to the following: 1. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Valve types specified for low-pressure compressed air. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams
indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 5 calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact
by building occupants, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise indicated. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for
ceiling panel removal and to coordinate with other services occupying that space. E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance.
F. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow. G. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings
same as or higher than system pressure rating unless otherwise indicated. H. Equipment and Specialty Flanged Connections: 1. Use steel companion flange with gasket for connection to
steel pipe. 2. Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with gasket and brazed or soldered joint for connection to copper tube. Do not use soldered joints for connection to air compressors
or to equipment or machines producing shock or vibration. I. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main
and branch and at low points. J. Install piping to permit valve servicing. K. Install piping free of sags and bends. L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
M. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and
fittings before assembly. C. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join in accordance with AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 6 D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise
indicated, to tube end. Join in accordance with ASTM B828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." E. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket suitable for compressed air. Join
flanges with gasket and bolts in accordance with ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure. F. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A.
General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 23.12 "Ball Valves for Plumbing Piping." 3.6 INSTALLATION OF DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Install dielectric fittings in piping
at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. B. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF SPECIALTIES A. Install air-line pressure regulators in branch
piping to equipment. B. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections. C. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment and machine. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment"
for hangers, supports, and anchor devices. B. Install hangers for copper tubing, with maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters, to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced
codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. C. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. D. Support vertical
runs of copper tubing to comply with MSS SP-58, locally enforced codes, and authorities having jurisdiction requirements, whichever are most stringent. E. Individual, Straight, Horizontal
Piping Runs: 1. 100 Ft. or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Ft.: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 22 15 13 - 7 3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying labels and devices
for general-service compressed-air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Section 22 05 53 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.10 FIELD QUALITY
CONTROL A. Perform field tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Piping Leak Tests for Metal Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and
fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test
source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure. 2. Piping Leak Tests for Aluminum
Compressed-Air Piping: Test new piping system and modified parts of existing piping system. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping system to pressure of 15 psig, hold pressure
for 10 minutes. Repeat until reaching required operating pressure, not to exceed 220 psig. Once desired operating pressure is met, let stand for one hour. 3. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist. 4. Inspect pressure regulators for proper operation. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 22 15 13 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 1 SECTION 22 42 16.16 - COMMERCIAL SINKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings
and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:
1. Utility sinks. 2. Sink faucets. 3. Supply fittings. 4. Waste fittings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
specialties and accessories. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UTILITY SINKS A. Utility Sinks SK-A: Sink
by others. 1. Faucet: Type 1. a. Number Required: One. b. Mounting: On ledge. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 2 2. Supply Fittings: a. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. b. Supplies: Chrome-plated brass, one-quarter-turn, ball-type valve with inlet connection
matching water-supply piping type and size. 1) Operation: Wheel handle. 2) Risers: NPS 1/2, ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated steel flexible hose. 3. Waste Fittings: a. Standard:
ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. b. Trap(s): 1) Size: NPS 1-1/2. 2) Material: Chrome-plated, two-piece, cast-brass trap and swivel elbow with 17-gauge brass tube to wall; and chrome-plated
brass or steel wall flange. 4. Mounting: On counter with sealant. 5. Accessories: Rinsing basket. 2.2 SINK FAUCETS A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water
System Components - Health Effects," for faucet-spout materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Sink Faucets Type 1: Manual type, two handle-control mixing valve. 1.
Commercial, Solid-Brass Faucets. a. Product: Provide product indicated on Drawings. 2. General: Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and
fixture hole punchings; coordinate outlet with spout and sink receptor. 3. Body Type: Single hole. 4. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. 5. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 6.
Maximum Flow Rate: 2.2 gpm. 7. Handles: 4-inch wrist blade. 8. Mounting Type: Deck, concealed. 9. Spout Type: Rigid, gooseneck. 10. Spout Outlet: Aerator. 2.3 SUPPLY FITTINGS A.
NSF Standard: Comply with NSF/ANSI 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for supply-fitting materials that will be in contact with potable water. OLIN HALL
B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 3 B. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. C. Supply Piping:
Chrome-plated brass pipe or chrome-plated copper tube matching water-supply piping size. Include chrome-plated brass or stainless-steel wall flange. D. Supply Stops: Chrome-plated brass,
one-quarter-turn, ball-type valve with inlet connection matching supply piping. E. Operation: Wheel handle. F. Risers: 1. NPS 3/8 2. ASME A112.18.6, braided or corrugated stainless-steel
flexible hose. 2.4 WASTE FITTINGS A. Standard: ASME A112.18.2/CSA B125.2. B. Drain: Grid type with NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece.. C. Trap: 1. Size: NPS 1-1/2. 2. Material: Refer to Section 22
66 00 “Chemical Waste Systems For Laboratory And Healthcare Facilities.” 2.5 GROUT A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement
grout. B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications. C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink
installation. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMERCIAL SINKS 22 42 16.16 - 4 B. Examine walls, floors,
and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install
water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet. 1. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. B. Install wall flanges or escutcheons
at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in
Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." C. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match
sealant color to fixture color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers,
and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. B. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping."
3.4 ADJUSTING A. Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls. B. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow.
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes. B. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended
cleaning methods and materials. C. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings. D. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by
Owner. END OF SECTION 22 42 16.16 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND
HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 1 SECTION 22 66 00 - CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general
provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall
piping. 2. Piping specialties. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS A. Single-Wall Piping Pressure Rating: 5-psig air test pressure. 2.2 SINGLE-WALL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. PP Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F1412, extruded pipe and drainage-pattern
fittings molded, with Schedule 40 dimensions and with fire-retardant additive complying with ASTM D4101; with fusion- and mechanical-joint ends. 1. Exception: Pipe and fittings made
from PP resin without fire-retardant additive may be used for underground installation. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 -
2 a. GF Piping Systems: Georg Fischer LLC. b. IPEX USA LLC. c. Orion Fittings; A WATTS Brand. B. Adapters and Transition Fittings: Assemblies with combinations of clamps, couplings,
adapters, and gaskets; compatible with piping and system liquid; made for joining different piping materials. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Couplings: Assemblies with combinations of clamps,
gaskets, sleeves, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made by piping manufacturer for joining system piping. B. Adapters and Transition Fittings:
Assemblies with combinations of clamps, couplings, adapters, gaskets, and threaded or flanged parts; compatible with piping and system liquid; and made for joining different piping
materials. 2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Plastic Dilution Traps: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. GF Piping Systems:
Georg Fischer LLC. b. IPEX USA LLC. c. Orion Fittings; A WATTS Brand. 2. Material: Corrosion-resistant PP, with removable base. 3. End Connections: Mechanical joint. 4. Small Dilution
Jars: 1-pint capacity, with clear base unless colored base is indicated; with NPS 1-1/2 top inlet and NPS 1-1/2 side outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Chemical-Waste
Piping Inside the Building: 1. Install piping adjacent to equipment, accessories, and specialties, to allow space for service and maintenance. 2. Transition and special fittings with
pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used unless otherwise indicated. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 3 3. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
equipment rooms and service areas. 4. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal
runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. 5. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. 6. Install piping at indicated
slopes. 7. Install piping free of sags and bends. 8. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. 9. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. 10. Install
escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping." 3.2 JOINT
CONSTRUCTION A. Chemical-Waste Piping Inside the Building: 1. Plastic-Piping Fusion Joints: Make PP drainage-piping joints in accordance with ASTM F1290. 2. Dissimilar-Material Piping
Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with both system materials. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Make
connections to existing piping, so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work. C. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for sewerage
piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping. D. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance.
3.4 CLEANING A. Use procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if not prescribed, use procedures described below: 1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping
that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. 2. Clean piping by flushing with potable water. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CHEMICAL-WASTE SYSTEMS FOR LABORATORY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AND HEALTHCARE FACILITIES 22 66 00 - 4 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation,
charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
B. Chemical-waste piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Transition and special
fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground Chemical-Waste Piping: Use the following
piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 6: PP drainage piping and fusion or mechanical joints. END OF SECTION 22 66 00 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1 SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING
AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fastener systems. 2. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing"
for structural-steel shapes and plates for equipment supports. 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization
Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and
connected systems and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 2 B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened
portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded,
shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Fastener
System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion
anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 3 B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary
attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. C. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing
surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for equipment
supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply
with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials
and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust
hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup:
Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with
SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 4 B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic
coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. B. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required
in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of
Air Systems: a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems. 2. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of equipment. 3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of existing HVAC
systems and equipment. 4. Procedures for exhaust hoods. 5. HVAC-control system verification. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental
Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. E. TAB Specialist: An independent entity meeting qualifications to perform
TAB work. F. AHJ: Authority having jurisdiction. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the
TAB specialist and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days of Contractor's
Notice to Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report, as specified in Part 3. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step
procedures, as specified in "Preparation" Article. D. System Readiness Checklists: Within 30 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit system readiness checklists, as specified
in "Preparation" Article. E. Examination Report: Submit a summary report of the examination review required in "Examination" Article. F. Certified TAB reports. G. Sample report forms.
H. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. TAB Specialists Qualifications, Certified by AABC: 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by AABC. 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB specialist
and certified by AABC. B. TAB Specialists Qualifications, Certified by NEBB or TABB: 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB specialist and certified by NEBB or TABB. C. Instrumentation
Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 111, Section 4, "Instrumentation." D. Code and AHJ Compliance: TAB is required to comply with governing
codes and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate
with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar
with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine installed systems for balancing devices, such
as test ports, gauge cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are applicable
for intended purpose and are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of
design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance
data, including fan 0curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the
conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems
- Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning,
and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and verify
that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, filters are clean, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume
boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine control valves for proper installation for their intended function of isolating,
throttling, diverting, or mixing fluid flows. K. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. L. Examine operating safety interlocks and
controls on HVAC equipment. M. Examine control dampers for proper installation for their intended function of isolating, throttling, diverting, or mixing air flows. OLIN HALL B01 AND
101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 N. Report deficiencies discovered
before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes the following: 1. Equipment and systems to be tested. 2. Strategies and step-by-step procedures for balancing the systems. 3. Instrumentation to
be used. 4. Sample forms with specific identification for all equipment. B. Perform system-readiness checks of HVAC systems and equipment to verify system readiness for TAB work. Include,
at a minimum, the following: 1. Airside: a. Verify that leakage and pressure tests on air distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed. b. Duct systems are complete with
terminals installed. c. Volume, smoke, and fire dampers are open and functional. d. Clean filters are installed. e. Fans are operating, free of vibration, and rotating in correct direction.
f. Variable-frequency controllers' startup is complete and safeties are verified. g. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. h. Ceilings are installed. i. Windows and
doors are installed. j. Suitable access to balancing devices and equipment is provided. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures
on each system in accordance with the procedures contained in any of the following and in this Section: 1. AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance." 2. ASHRAE 111. 3.
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems." B. Cut insulation, ducts, and equipment casings for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. OLIN HALL B01 AND
101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 5 C. Mark equipment and balancing devices,
including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material
to show final settings. 3.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF HVAC EQUIPMENT A. Test, adjust, and balance HVAC equipment indicated on Drawings, including, but not limited to, the
following: 1. Motors. 2. Fans and ventilators. 3. Terminal units. 4. Lab hoods. 3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain
manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems'
Record drawings duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow
measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate
start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for
proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit
components. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. OLIN
HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 6 1. Measure total airflow.
a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube
traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total airflow. c. Where duct conditions are unsuitable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report
artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 3. Review Contractor-prepared shop drawings and Record drawings to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 4. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan
speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in HVAC Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance. 5. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload occurs. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows. 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts. 2. Adjust submain and branch duct
volume dampers for specified airflow. 3. Re-measure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. C. Adjust air inlets and outlets for each space to indicated airflows.
1. Set airflow patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 2. Measure inlets and outlets airflow. 3. Adjust each inlet and outlet for specified airflow. 4.
Re-measure each inlet and outlet after they have been adjusted. D. Verify final system conditions. 1. Re-measure and confirm that minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within
design. Readjust to design if necessary. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 7 2. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. 3. Re-measure all final fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile. 4. Mark all
final settings. 5. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. 6. Measure and record all operating data. 7. Record final fan-performance data. 3.7
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Verify that the system static pressure sensor is located two-thirds of the distance
down the duct from the fan discharge. 2. Verify that the system is under static pressure control. 3. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure
inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit
manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 4. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit
for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows: a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify
calibration procedure for specific project. b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor. c. When maximum airflow
is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor
as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow. f. On constant volume terminals, in
critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design
airflow or room pressure. 5. After terminals have been calibrated and balanced, test and adjust system for total airflow. Adjust fans to deliver total design airflows within the maximum
allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. a. Set outside-air, return-air, and relief-air dampers for proper position that simulates minimum outdoor-air conditions. b. Set terminals
for maximum airflow. If system design includes diversity, adjust terminals for maximum and minimum airflow, so that connected total matches fan selection and simulates actual load in
the building. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 8 c.
Where duct conditions allow, measure airflow by main Pitot-tube traverse. If necessary, perform multiple Pitot-tube traverses close to the fan and prior to any outlets, to obtain total
airflow. d. Where duct conditions are unsuitable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, a coil traverse may be acceptable. 6. Measure fan static pressures as follows: a. Measure static
pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan inlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure static pressure
across each component that makes up the air-handling system. d. Report any artificial loading of filters at the time static pressures are measured. 7. Set final return and outside airflow
to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Balance the return-air ducts and inlets. b. Verify that terminal units are meeting design airflow
under system maximum flow. 8. Re-measure the inlet static pressure at the most critical terminal unit, and adjust the system static pressure set point to the most energy-efficient set
point to maintain the optimum system static pressure. Record set point and give to controls Contractor. 9. Verify final system conditions as follows: a. Re-measure and confirm that
minimum outdoor, return, and relief airflows are within design. Readjust to match design if necessary. b. Re-measure and confirm that total airflow is within design. c. Re-measure final
fan operating data, speed, volts, amps, and static profile. d. Mark final settings. e. Test system in economizer mode. Verify proper operation and adjust if necessary. Measure and record
all operating data. f. Verify tracking between supply and return fans. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following
data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Phase and hertz. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate
and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter size and thermal-protection-element rating. 8. Service factor and frame size. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 9 B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test manual bypass of controller
to prove proper operation. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR EXHAUST HOODS A. Room Pressure: Measure and record room pressure with respect to atmosphere and adjacent space with hoods in room initially
not operating and then with hoods operating. B. Makeup Air: Systems supplying source of makeup air to hoods shall be in operation during testing and balancing of exhaust hoods. 1. Measure
and record temperature of makeup air entering hood. If hood makeup air is from multiple sources having different temperatures, measure and record the airflow and temperatures of each
source and calculate the weighted average temperature. 2. Use simulated smoke to observe supply air-distribution air patterns in vicinity of hoods. Consult with hood manufacturer and
report conditions that have a detrimental effect on intended capture, containment, and other attributes effecting proper operation. C. Rooms with Multiple Hoods: Test each hood separately,
one at a time, and repeat tests with all hoods intended to operate simultaneously by design. D. Laboratory Fume Hoods: Measure and record the following: 1. Pressure drop across hood.
2. Airflow by duct traverse where duct distribution will allow accurate measurement, and calculate hood average face velocity. If hood is connected to exhaust duct distribution through
an exhaust device with integral airflow measurement, that reading may be used in lieu of a duct traverse. 3. Face velocity across open hood face and calculate hood airflow. a. Clearly
indicate the direction of flow at each point of measurement. b. Measure velocity across opening on not less than 6-inch centers. Record velocity at each measurement, and calculate average
velocity. 4. Capture and Containment: Check each hood for proper capture and containment using a smoke-emitting device. Observe and report performance. Make adjustments to achieve optimum
results. E. AHJ Tests: Conduct additional tests required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3.10 HVAC CONTROLS VERIFICATION A. In conjunction with system balancing, perform the following:
1. Verify HVAC control system is operating within the design limitations. 2. Confirm that the sequences of operation are in compliance with Contract Documents. 3. Verify that controllers
are calibrated and function as intended. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 10 4. Verify that controller set points are as indicated. 5. Verify the operation of lockout or interlock systems. 6. Verify the operation of valve and damper
actuators. 7. Verify that controlled devices are properly installed and connected to correct controller. 8. Verify that controlled devices travel freely and are in position indicated
by controller: open, closed, or modulating. 9. Verify location and installation of sensors to ensure that they sense only intended temperature, humidity, or pressure. B. Reporting:
Include a summary of verifications performed, remaining deficiencies, and variations from indicated conditions. 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused. 1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan and
equipment with fan(s). 2. Measure and record flows, temperatures, and pressures of each piece of equipment in each hydronic system. Compare the values to design or nameplate information,
where information is available. 3. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information. 4. Check the refrigerant charge. 5. Check the condition of
filters. 6. Check the condition of coils. 7. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap. 8. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 9.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements taken. Report deficiencies. B. TAB After Construction: Before performing testing and balancing
of renovated existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished in accordance with renovation
scope indicated by Contract Documents. Verify the following: 1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings
and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected. C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing
systems are affected by the renovation work. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 11 1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow rates and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or decrease
is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required. 4. Balance each air outlet. 3.12 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's airflow rates and water flow rates within the following
tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than 100 cfm, within 10 cfm. 2. Air Outlets and
Inlets: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than 100 cfm, within 10 cfm. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is
less than 10 gpm, within 10 percent. 4. Chilled-Water Flow Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. If design value is less than 10 gpm, within 10 percent. 5. Condenser-Water Flow
Rate: Plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent. B. Maintaining pressure relationships as designed shall have priority over the tolerances specified above. 3.13 PROGRESS REPORTING A. Initial
Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systembalancing devices.
Recommend changes and additions to system-balancing devices, to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction
to allow access for performance-measuring and -balancing devices. B. Status Reports: Prepare monthly progress reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled
procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving
multiple floors. 3.14 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. OLIN
HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 12 1. Include a certification
sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof
of calibration. 3. Certify validity and accuracy of field data. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Fan curves. 2. Manufacturers'
test data. 3. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 4. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and Product Data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB specialist. 3. Project name. 4. Project location.
5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table
of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents, including the following: a. Indicated versus
final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item
of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated
values. 15. Test conditions for fans performance forms, including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil,
wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Heating coil, dry-bulb conditions. e. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. f. Fan drive settings, including settings and percentage of maximum
pitch diameter. g. Variable-frequency controller settings for variable-air-volume systems. h. Settings for pressure controller(s). i. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101
RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 13 1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return,
and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of
balancing devices. E. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following: 1. Fan Data: a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number
and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in
inches. 2. Motor Data: a. Motor make, and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and speed. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in
inches, and bore. f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number, make, and size of belts. 3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Total
airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan speed. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg. F. Round, Flat-Oval,
and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following: 1. Report Data: a. System fan and air-handling-unit
number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 14 f. Duct area in sq. ft. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated
velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig. G. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: 1. Unit Data: a. System and air-handling
unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Apparatus used for test. d. Area served. e. Make. f. Number from system diagram. g. Type and model number. h. Size. i. Effective area in
sq. ft. 2. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values): a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in
fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F. H. Instrument Calibration Reports: 1. Report Data: a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial
number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration. 3.15 VERIFICATION OF TAB REPORT A. The TAB specialist's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the
presence of Owner. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93
- 15 B. Owner shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report, to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to the lesser of either 10 percent of the total measurements
recorded or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in. C. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the
tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED." D. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final
inspection, the TAB shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected. E. If recheck measurements find the number of failed measurements noncompliant with requirements indicated,
proceed as follows: 1. TAB specialists shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the
final report and request a second final inspection. All changes shall be tracked to show changes made to previous report. 2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may pursue
others Contract options to complete TAB work. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.16 ADDITIONAL TESTS A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions. B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 1 SECTION 23 09 23 – BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section
Includes: 1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed
set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps. B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature.
C. BACnet-Specific Definitions: 1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services
over a network. 2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined
to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device. 3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network
is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number. 4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance
with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International. 5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified
by BACnet that are implemented in a device. D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED"
condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal. E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller
residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific
Controller. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 2 F. Control
System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system.
G. COV: Changes of value. H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated. I.
Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote
subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data. J. DOCSIS: Data-Over
Cable Service Interface Specifications. K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic. L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols.
M. HLC: Heavy load conditions. N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary
output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, pressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital
pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively.
O. I/P: Current to pneumatic. P. LAN: Local area network. Q. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling
power-limited circuits. R. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data. S. MTBF: Mean time between failures. T. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports
a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data. U. Network Repeater:
Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol. V. PDA: Personal digital assistant. W. Peer to
Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 3 X. POT: Portable operator's terminal. Y. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness. Z. RAM: Random access memory. AA. RF: Radio frequency.
BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer. CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database. DD. TCP/IP: Transport
control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows. EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus. GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This
protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol. HH. VAV: Variable air volume. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for
each control device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation,
start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. B. Control-System Architecture Diagram: Submit a system architecture one-line diagram
indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. The BACS vendor shall indicate address and type for each control unit; as well
as indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN. C. Floor Plans: Submit a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator
workstations, interface devices, UPSs, etc., located and identified. The BACS vendor shall indicate all network components (repeaters, routers, etc.); network wiring shall be shown
and identified on the floor plan drawings. D. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Include detailed wiring. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder
logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers
identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for
the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING
AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 4 drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). E. Sample Graphics
and Trends: Submit draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. F. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally
in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory.
2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller
type and for all workstation software. 4. All information provided during the submittal phase; updated with as-built information. As-built panel drawings shall also be included as
part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system
schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram. Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static
pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc. 5. Each control panel on the project shall include an as-built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that
panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. 6. The final as-built controls drawings (PDF) shall
also be accessible via the web-based graphics. G. Software Submittal: 1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server, gateway, and DDC controller.
2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross-referenced to products in which software will be installed. 3. Operating system software, operator interface and
programming software, color graphic software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third-party software. 4. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine
that indicates each program variable name and units of measure. 5. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source. 6. Listing and description of each
constant used in engineering equations and a reference source to prove origin of each constant. 7. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming. 8. Description
of each network communication protocol. 9. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database capacity and limitations to expand database. 10. Description
of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship to system timing,
speed, processing burden and system throughout. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL
SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 5 11. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of
sequence of operation including schematic diagram. H. Shop Drawings: 1. General Requirements: a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor and
issue date with each Shop Drawings submission. b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matches information in each title block. c. Prepare Drawings
using CAD. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable. 3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances,
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 4. Plan Drawings indicating the following: a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines,
HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping. b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated. c. Each desktop operator workstation,
server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project. d. Exact placement
of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition. e. Network communication cable and raceway routing. f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit,
and tubing, coordinated with building services for review before installation. 5. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following: a. I/O points labeled
with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve. b. I/O listed in table format
showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number. c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship
to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall
be consistently used between different drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays
and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 6 6. Control panel drawings indicating the following: a.
Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and connections. b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components, cabling and
wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space. c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel. 7. DDC system network riser diagram
indicating the following: a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate
communication protocol, speed and physical means of interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or fiber-optic cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each. d.
Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each. 8. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating
the following: a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. b. Each control power supply including, as
applicable, transformers, power-line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each. c.
Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each. 9. Monitoring
and control signal diagrams indicating the following: a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. 10.
Color graphics indicating the following: a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of pictures,
graphics and data displayed. c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens. I. System Description: 1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network
configuration, operator interfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies. 2. Complete listing
and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 7 3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to,
the following: a. Loss of power. b. Loss of network communication signal. c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. d. Operator workstation failure. e. Server failure.
f. Gateway failure. g. Network failure h. Controller failure. i. Instrument failure. j. Control damper and valve actuator failure. 4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media
to be delivered to Owner. 5. Description of testing plans and procedures. 6. Description of Owner training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROLLERS A. General: The control system shall consist
of an inter-network of controllers. It is intended to allow cost-effective application of manufacturers’ standard products while maintaining the integrity and reliability of the control
functions commensurate with their application. B. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in standalone fashion, with no communication to
other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. All points and functions
that make up a functional system (typically that are shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this standalone functionality. C. Where control
sequences depend on global variables such as outside-air temperature, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Examples of required
functional point groupings are as follows: 1. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes
the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include humidity, terminal-based reset parameters, and smoke modes. 2. All
points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system such as pumps, flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves, etc. This excludes the terminals
on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include outside-air temperature and humidity, emergency power source indication, and terminal-based reset parameters.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 8 3. All points and functions
required to control one terminal system including dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any outside air
that may be necessary for control. D. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with
the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. E. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required
trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade
the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. F. Volatile memory is required to be backed up
in the event of power loss. Software stored in nonvolatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. G. Controllers used
for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall
be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. H. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish
communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a selfdiagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment
to a predetermined failure mode. I. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be
required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary
to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the
panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts.
2.2 SENSORS A. General: All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in
control panels 5' above finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors: 1. Sensor Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of
no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). 2. Room Temperature Sensor: These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated
base. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 9 a. Sensing element:
RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.8°F accuracy at calibration point. b. Setpoint Adjustment: Provide where indicated. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment
shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS. c. Occupancy Override: Provide a button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated, generally in office spaces
that do not have occupancy sensors. Public spaces shall not have occupancy override. This shall be a momentary contact closure. d. Display: Alphanumeric. e. Sensors shall be provided
with communication jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. 2.3 CONTROL VALVES A. General: 1. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service.
Close off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. Valves shall be selected such
that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” 2. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions.
“Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines
are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and
flow. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0- to 10-V dc. b. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to
keep the valve closed under the maximum differential pressure. B. Coil Valves, Water: 1. Modulating water valves shall generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic.
Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50%-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9.
2. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed."
3. Type: Two-way, V-port ball valve with characterizing disk, 1/4 turn. 4. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated. 5. Ball & Stem: Stainless steel. 6. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon.
7. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4 inches and larger shall have single operator. 8. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 10 9. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: a. Terminal hot-water
radiation: fail last. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Belimo b. Valve Solutions 2.4 ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves
with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and adequate close off rating as required. 2.5 CERTIFICATION A. Each airflow control
device shall be factory calibrated to the job-specific airflows as detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST traceable air stations and instrumentation having a combined accuracy
of no more than ±1% of signal over the entire range of measurement. Electronic airflow control devices shall be further calibrated and their accuracy verified to ±5% of signal at a
minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the device. B. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory calibration data. At a minimum,
it should include the tag number, serial number, model number, eight-point characterization information, and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by the
manufacturer for use with as-built documentation. 2.6 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures: 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies,
termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall
be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central
panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be
mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 11 B. Power Supplies: 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce
at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off.
Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Contractor shall certify, in writing, at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause,
as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used.
2.7 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded cable. For communications, the
BACS equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 2. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible
shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. 3. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway.
4. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 5. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT.
6. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 7. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHUs shall
be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 8. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 9. Control wiring
shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 10. For sensors with twisted shielded pair cable, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor.
11. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 12. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures,
components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities: 1. The BACS Contractor shall be responsible for the following: a. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms
and functions to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head-end. b. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged
equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls.
c. All power supply wiring for all BACS components. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION
CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 12 2. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following as they relate to the BACS: a. The electrical trade shall provide “lock-out stop”
control wiring. b. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will
be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade. c. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually
controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric
damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This Section defines requirements for configuration and installation of
the BACS. B. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor
level without the use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. C. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted
within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION
A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this Section
shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific
conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met. B. Acceptable
Manufacturer: Automated Logic Corporation 3.3 CONTROL PANELS A. Control panels and enclosures housing the controllers shall be coordinated to the extent possible, to share vertical
and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of homeruns to terminal equipment. B. Control panels shall be located in equipment rooms, where practicable, and in locations
maintaining ambient conditions between 50 deg F and 90 deg F and 10% to 85% relative OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 13 humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall have enclosures outfitted with
heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall
be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. Cornell must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity
similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Field panels shall be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located
in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. D. Fabrication: 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such
that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire
way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and
components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source and
circuit number for each panel. 3.4 CONTROLLERS A. The controllers provided shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity,
etc., as stated in this Section and Section 23 09 25. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents.
While Section 23 09 25 contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example,
it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system
architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to
controllers are performance oriented, rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases
where distinguishing between controllers with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used (and is also defined in Section 23 09 25): 1. Building-level
controller: These are controllers that are connected to the campus backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor
one or more large systems or be applied to other buildingwide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller.
These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 14 large piece of equipment such as an air handler DOAS
unit or a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). 3. Field-level controller. These controllers
will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan-coil units, etc. They shall, at
a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). C. Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support
all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time
operating system software. 2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (with the exception of fieldlevel controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC
software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software. 6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database.
Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required,
control vendor shall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. D.
Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a
specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. E. Trending: To support commissioning and building
data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the
capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent
buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The BACS vendor shall
provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated
text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner-accessible SQL database. F. Trend Graphs: Web-based software
shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. The BACS vendor shall configure
these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control
loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING
AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 15 G. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These
graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult
with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. H. Web-based Graphics: A web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, the
following screens shall be provided: 1. Floor Plan Screens: a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that
is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes, chilled beams, etc., associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e.,
VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens. b. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers
as provided by Cornell University. Provide a graphic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic
screen. c. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical
equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic. d. If multiple floor plans are necessary
to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans.
Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic
floor plan screens. e. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens: a. Provide graphics for each air-handling system. Indicate
OA temperature and relative humidity, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system
and cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic. b. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one
graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system
shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names
(English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with
the cursor. 1) Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All OLIN HALL B01
AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 16 outputs shall be represented in terms
of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic. c. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. d. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system.
e. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum
heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. f. Link
screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. g. Link screens to all schedules and
setpoints. I. Alarm Programming: Alarms shall be “intelligent” based upon the algorithms in this Section. 1. In general, alarm programming related to DDC controlled equipment should
reside at the controller level along with the functional programming for equipment control. a. Intrinsic alarming associated with AI, AV, BI or BV objects (or any of the other 23 BACnet
objects that support intrinsic alarming) shall only be used where the alarm is valid regardless of the state of the associated equipment or where there is a ready means for automatically
suppressing alarm generation when the associated equipment is operationally secured. b. Alarm points shall be separate BACnet objects (e.g., BV or EEO) actuated by associated alarm
programming. c. Alarm objects shall have descriptive BACnet object names. BACnet alarm object names shall end in “Alarm”. For detailed information on proper point naming conventions,
see Cornell University Facility Services, Design and Construction Standards 15956 and Section 23 09 25 "Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability."
d. If it is necessary for the alarm to have latching functionality, the user shall be provided easy unlatching capability from within the DDC system if appropriate, taking into account
equipment safety concerns. This is in addition to any local alarm reset. e. Alarms designated for monitoring by EMCS shall be set up in the DDC system to report to the EMCS alarm server.
2. Analog Deviation Alarms: Analog deviation alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and the controlled variable setpoint (whether calculated or fixed).
a. When controlled variable deviates from setpoint above or below user adjustable high or low alarm thresholds, the alarm shall be activated. b. High and low alarm threshold values
shall have associated adjustable deadbands (hysteresis values) for alarm clearing conditions as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm threshold or rises above the low alarm
threshold. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays for active equipment operation. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 17 d. Alarm programming shall include startup delays to prevent nuisance alarms during equipment startup.
e. Analog deviation alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured. 3. Analog High Limit Alarms: Analog high limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison
between the controlled variable and a user adjustable high limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable rises above the user adjustable high limit, the alarm shall be activated.
b. High alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm limit. c.
Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. High limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment
safety considerations. 4. Analog Low Limit Alarms: Analog low limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable low limit alarm
value. a. When controlled variable falls below the user adjustable low limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. Low alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis
value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable rises above the low alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. Low limit alarms
shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 5. Binary Run Status Alarms: Status alarms shall be based
upon the comparison between run status and equipment command where applicable. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. 6. Binary Alarming: Alarms shall
be triggered upon associated BI changing state to the nonnormal or alarm state. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. b. Binary alarms shall be disabled
if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 7. Steam Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Temperature Alarming: Steam shell
and tube heat exchangers shall have two temperature alarms associated with them. a. Operational Supply Temperature Deviation Alarm when heat exchanger is in operation. b. High Supply
Temperature Alarm that is always enabled whether or not the heat exchanger is operational or not, so as to monitor for steam control valve leak by. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 18 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned.
All acceptance testing, documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS contractor’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include the following: 1. Provide
all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and
function contained within the BACS. 3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the subcontractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format.
4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing
that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four
weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7. The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been
adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from
specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8. The BACS contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from
Cornell. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and
verifying the operation of each control point. 9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to Cornell. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control
points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the
installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 3.6 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer
shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The amount of training that
is provided shall match the size of the project (e.g., no less than eight hours for small projects and up to 80 hours for large projects). B. Contractor shall make available to the
Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and softwareoriented courses as well as energy conservation
and management courses. C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility
for four people. This training OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23
09 23 - 19 only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products. If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with
the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 3.7 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against
defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner, and for that
period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of the work first performed after substantial completion
by the period of time between substantial completion and the actual performance of the work. END OF SECTION 23 09 23 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 1 SECTION 23 09 25 - BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL
SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill
the requirements of this section: 1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter
referred to as “BACnet,” American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2004. 2. B. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. B. ISO/IEC 8802-3
(1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications.
1.3 DEFINITIONS A. In addition to the definitions contained in the applicable standards of 1.03, the following should be noted: 1. ARCNET - Attached Resource Computer Network. See
BACnet, Clause 8 and ATA/ANSI 878.1. 2. BACnet/IP - BACnet Annex J Devices. Annex J of BACnet describes how BACnet devices can make use of IP directly for communicating across IP-based
internets. 3. BACnet PICS - A Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement that describes the BACnet capabilities of a specific device. See BACnet, Annex A. 4. BACS - Building Automation
and Control System. 5. BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device. See BACnet, Annex J. 6. BMA - BACnet Manufacturers Association. 7. BTL - The BACnet Testing Laboratories of the
BMA. The organization responsible for testing products to assure that they conform to the BACnet standard. Listings of tested products are available at www.bacnetassociation.org. 8.
Campus Backbone - A fiber optic data communication infrastructure on the Cornell campus managed by CIT. Users connect to the backbone by means of CIT-supplied Ethernet concentrators
in each building and appropriate 10/100BASE-T unshielded, OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 2 twisted pair wiring. The backbone uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for routing messages to and from computers
both on and off the Cornell campus. 9. CIT - Cornell Information Technologies. The organization that manages the Cornell campus networking infrastructure, including the provision of
network connections in Cornell buildings. 10. Computer Section - The computer group within the Cornell Utilities and Energy Management Department. The Computer Section is responsible
for the EMCS and the coordination of BACS device addressing and network numbering. 11. BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block. A collection of one or more BACnet services defined
for the purpose of describing communication functionality in an unambiguous way. See BACnet, Annex K. 12. Device Profile - A collection of BIBBs that describes the minimum BACnet capabilities
of a particular device in order to achieve reliable communication in one of five specified “interoperability areas.” Devices include BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced
Application Controllers (B-AAC) and BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC). See BACnet, Annex L. 13. EMCS - A computer complex, housed at Chilled Water Plant 1 that provides
Energy Management and Control System functions for the University. The EMCS is connected to the campus backbone and uses the IP for the routing of messages to and from individual buildings.
14. Ethernet - A carrier sensing multiple access with collision detection network technology defined by ISO/IEC 8802-3. 15. Gateway - A device that translates BACnet messages into
those of a non-BACnet protocol and vice-versa. 16. Internetwork - A set of two or more BACnet networks interconnected by routers. 17. Interoperability Area - A communications domain
in which functional cooperation is desired. These areas are currently: 1) data sharing; 2) alarm and event management; 3) trending; 4) scheduling; and 5) device and network management.
See BACnet, Clause 22. 18. IP - The Internet Protocol. A networking protocol originally developed by the federal Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. BACnet messages can traverse
the campus backbone by being encapsulated in routable IP packets. 19. Local - Pertaining to the requirements of a specific job or building project. 20. LAN - Local Area Network. One
of the approved BACnet network technologies: Ethernet, ARCNET or MS/TP. 21. MS/TP - Master-Slave/Token-Passing Network. One of the approved BACnet LANs. See BACnet, Clause 9. 22.
Network - One of the communication technologies for data communications specified in BACnet. Approved network technologies at Cornell are Ethernet, ARCNET and MS/TP. 23. PICS - Protocol
Implementation Conformance Statement. A document that describes in detail a device’s BACnet capabilities. See BACnet, Annex A. 24. UDP - The User Datagram Protocol. One of the IP family
of protocols. UDP is used to convey BACnet/IP messages and is characterized by a “port number” for each protocol. BACnet/IP typically uses UDP port X'BAC0' or decimal 47808. 25. VLAN
- Virtual Local Area Network. A network configuration that allows devices to communicate across multiple physical local area networks (LANs) using their hardware or “medium access control”
(MAC) addresses as if they shared a common networking medium. As with a physical LAN, “local” broadcast messages are also propagated to each of the participating LANs. VLAN capability
depends on the configuration of the OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 3 interconnecting data communication equipment. VLAN configuration is performed by CIT. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to any
requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall provide both proposed and as-built versions of the following: 1. Schematic drawings that represent the system architecture and
configuration, in both hardcopy and editable electronic format. 2. A points list that includes, for each physical or logical point, the name, description, display units, alarm limits
and definitions, along with the BACnet object description, object ID, and associated device ID. The list shall also indicate whether Trend Log or Schedule objects have been established
for the point. 3. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations utilized detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumerated
values. 4. PICS files indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each device. In addition to the requirements of BACnet, Annex A, the Contractor shall provide information
on any limitations on the numbers of supported objects in a given device including, specifically, Trend Log and Schedule objects. 5. Documentation on submitted products that have been
tested and listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) or a letter on manufacturer’s company letterhead indicating the anticipated date by which testing is expected to be completed.
If, for any reason, BTL testing and listing has not been completed, a written commitment shall be provided to upgrade installed controls to a version that meets BTL testing and listing
requirements should deficiencies be found during BTL testing. 1.5 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination of subcontractors’ work relative to the
BACS. Specific questions relating to communication and interoperability shall be submitted to the Computer Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Each networked device supplied
pursuant to this Section shall be installed and configured so as to correctly execute all sequences of operation for its intended application, as defined in other Sections of these
Specifications. In addition, each networked device shall provide, at a minimum, the BACnet communication capabilities prescribed in the device profiles for devices of its type. See
Article 2.2. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND
INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 4 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. This clause prescribes the minimum requirements for devices supplied pursuant to this Section. 1. Controller
Requirements: Controller devices supplied to meet the functional and operational requirements of this specification shall conform, at a minimum, to one the BACnet device profiles contained
in BACnet, Annex L: BACnet Building Controller (BBC), BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) or BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interoperability requirements
of such devices are contained in BACnet, Annex L. B-BC controller devices shall communicate using BACnet/IP. Other devices may use BACnet over ARCNET or BACnet over MS/TP. 2. Router
Requirements: In the event that devices are provided that do not use BACnet/IP over Ethernet as their communication technology, BACnet routers shall be provided that route between BACnet/IP
over Ethernet and the other BACnet LAN type(s), whether ARCNET or MS/TP. These routers shall conform to the specifications of BACnet, Clause 6. 3. Gateways: BACS devices that use BACnet
as their native protocol are preferred. The use of gateways, in circumstances where no native BACnet devices are available, requires the specific approval of the Owner in each instance.
4. Workstation Requirements: The EMCS operator interface is the responsibility of the Computer Section. If, however, a specific job requires a local workstation, the Contractor shall
provide a personal computer of current design and approved by the Owner equipped with a Web browser that can display information from a Contractor-supplied Web server that interfaces
with the local BACnet network and the campus backbone, as described for below-specified web server requirements. 5. Web Server Requirements: If a local workstation is required, the
Contractor shall comply with above-specified workstation requirements and shall, in addition, provide a Web server computer with the Web page presentation, data acquisition and storage
functionality described in this Section, including the specific functions listed below. The Web server shall be configured in such a way that there is no software-imposed limit to the
number of simultaneous users. a. Data Sharing: 1) Presentation of data (i.e., user-definable reports and graphics) 2) The ability to monitor and display the values of all BACnet
object types, including all required and optional properties. 3) The ability to modify set points and parameters. b. Alarm and Event Management: 1) Operator notification and presentation
of event information 2) Alarm acknowledgment by operators 3) Alarm summarization 4) Adjustment of alarm limits 5) Adjustment of alarm routing OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB
RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 5 c. Scheduling:
1) Modification of schedules 2) Display of the start and stop times (schedule) of scheduled devices. d. Trending: 1) Modification of the parameters of a trend log 2) Display and
archive of trend log data e. Device and Network Management: 1) Display of information about the status of any device on the BACnet internetwork. 2) Display of information about any
object on the BACnet internetwork. 3) Ability to silence a device on the network that is transmitting erroneous data. 4) Ability to cause a remote device to reinitialize itself.
5) Ability to backup and restore the configuration of devices on the local BACnet network. 6) Ability to query and change the configuration of local BACnet routers. 2.3 REQUIREMENTS
FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS A. This clause prescribes the means of interconnecting BACS devices provided pursuant to this specification. 1. Local Area Networks (LANs) a. All control
devices meeting the B-BC device profile shall be connected to an ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) LAN provided by the Contractor. This LAN, in turn, shall be connected to the campus backbone network.
Unless otherwise specified, the connection shall be via a 10/100BASE-T port provided by the Owner. The location of the jack will be determined in consultation with the Computer Section,
which will arrange with CIT for the jack's installation. The Contractor shall also provide any additional data communication hardware, such as hubs and repeaters, which may be needed
to interconnect the supplied BACS equipment and to connect to the Owner's backbone network. b. To facilitate maintenance technician access to the LAN, the Contractor shall also provide
at least one additional 10/100BASE-T access point in each mechanical room that contains BACS equipment. This requirement may be met by supplying either a hub with a spare port or a
dedicated jack. c. Control devices that meet the B-ASC profile, but do not support Ethernet, must use another approved BACnet LAN technology. These technologies are ARCNET and MS/TP.
If Ethernet is not supported on any part of the internet-work, a standalone BACnet router, or a BACnet Building Controller with built-in routing capability, must be provided for routing
between the Ethernet and ARCNET or MS/TP LANs. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This clause provides specific interoperability and networking requirements that pertain to
the use of BACnet. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS BY INTEROPERABILITY AREA A. This clause provides requirements pertaining to the five interoperability areas of data sharing, alarm and event management,
trending, scheduling, and device and network management. 1. Data Sharing: Data Sharing requirements apply to the exchange of information between BACnet devices for archival storage,
generating graphics and reports, the sharing of common sensor or calculated values, carrying out interlocked control strategies, and the modification of set points or other operational
parameters. All such data to be exchanged shall be represented as BACnet objects and conveyed using BACnet messages. Only standard BACnet objects and messages may be used to implement
data sharing requirements unless the non-standard extensions are explicitly approved by the Owner. Any extensions to BACnet shall be fully documented in the manner used within the BACnet
standard. Submission of such documentation is a prerequisite for obtaining approval of an extension. a. Points List: The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with
all points indicated in the BACS points list. The Contractor shall provide any additional points needed to fully implement the sequence of operations and other functionality described
in this specification. b. Data Presentation: In the event that workstation/web server capabilities have been specified, the following characteristics shall apply to graphic displays:
1) The graphic displays shall include schematic diagrams of the systems being displayed. 2) When a graphic display is being viewed all values displayed shall be updated when a change
of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV is not implemented, within five seconds. 3) Any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at a workstation
in real time. The operator shall be able to select binary and analog data concurrently and to plot multiple instances of each data type on the same screen. The operator shall be able
to select sampling intervals from 1 second to 60 seconds. For devices that implement COV reporting, the operator shall be able to select this as the means to update the plot. It shall
be possible to save such real-time plots for subsequent recall. c. Monitoring of Any Property: The operator shall be able to display any value of any property of any object from any
networked device including all properties required by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 7 d. Global Object Definitions:
The control system shall be configured with systemwide unique BACnet objects as needed to convey all globally significant information necessary to implement the control strategy. e.
Set-Point and Parameter Modifications: Operators with appropriate authority shall be able to modify all control loop set points and tuning parameters via BACnet messages initiated through
operator interaction with graphics displays. f. Peer-to-Peer Data Dependencies: All BACnet devices shall be installed and configured to exchange data values directly, without the need
for operator or workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the mechanical system drawings and to share global data values. 2. Alarm and Event Management:
a. Alarm and Event Management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the occurrence of predefined conditions that meet specific criteria. Such conditions are called
“events” and may be the basis for the initiation of a particular control action in response or the simple logging of the event’s occurrence. The event may also be deemed to represent
a condition that constitutes an “alarm” requiring human acknowledgment and intervention. b. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet event detection and notification
mechanisms. Either intrinsic reporting or algorithmic change reporting may be used but the intrinsic reporting method is preferred. See BACnet, Clause 13. c. Alarm Lists: 1) The Contractor
shall provide devices installed and configured to detect alarms and events for the points indicated in the system drawings. Software logic shall be provided to avoid nuisance alarms,
e.g., no temperature or status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running or during start-up and shut-down transitions. It shall be possible to configure a delay between
the occurrence of an alarm condition and its enunciation. 2) Alarms shall appear at the EMCS and any local operator workstation(s) within five seconds of their occurrence. The workstations
shall display an alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows. The alarm message window shall have a distinctive color and appearance to attract the operator's
attention. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to configure the workstation to emit an audible signal (or not) when an alarm message is received. 3) Alarms that require
operator acknowledgement shall cause the alarm window to remain active until such an acknowledgement is received. If multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed
on a first come first served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority alarms displayed first. 4) Alarms shall be distributed using the BACnet notification class mechanism.
Assignment of classes and destinations shall be configured according to details provided by the Owner. One destination shall, in all cases, be the EMCS. 5) BACnet provides a mechanism
for prioritizing alarm and event notification messages using a numerical range of 0-255 with 0 being the highest priority OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 8 and 255 being the lowest priority. The
priorities presented in the Table 1 are consistent with the safety requirements of UL 864 (applies to fire systems) and UL 1076 (applies to security systems). 6) Alarm and event notification
priorities shall be configured in the Priority Range as indicated in Table 1 below, and shall be conveyed using the indicated Network Priority. See BACnet, Clause 6. Table 1. Cornell
Alarm and Event Priorities Message Group Priority Range Network Priority Brief Description Life Safety 00 - 31 Life Safety Message Notifications related to an immediate threat
to life, safety or health such as fire detection or armed robbery. Property Safety 32 - 63 Life Safety Message Notifications related as an immediate threat to property such as forced
entry. Supervisory 64 - 95 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to improper operation, monitoring failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety monitoring),
or monetary loss. Trouble 96 - 127 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to communication failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety equipment). Miscellaneous
Higher Priority Alarm and Events 128 - 191 Urgent Message Higher-level notifications related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. Miscellaneous
Lower Priority Alarm and Events 192 - 255 Normal Message Lower-level notification related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. d. Alarm
Acknowledgement: Alarms shall be acknowledged through the EMCS alarm acknowledgement process. e. Alarm Summarization: Alarm summarization shall be handled through the EMCS alarm summarization
process. f. Alarm Parameter Adjustment: Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm parameters for all standard BACnet event types. g. Alarm Routing Adjustment:
1) Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm including the destination for each type of alarm and alarm
priority, the day of week and time of day, and the type of transition involved (TO-OFFNORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.). 2) Initially, notification classes shall be configured in a manner that
distinguishes between the EMCS and any local workstation, if provided. 3. Scheduling: Scheduling is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the establishment and maintenance
of dates and time at which specified output actions are to be taken. All schedules shall be implemented using BACnet objects and messages. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 9 a. Schedule Lists: 1) The
Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with start/stop, mode change, and night setback schedules as defined in the sequence of operations. As part of the installation
process, the Contractor shall configure vacation, holiday, and any special event schedules as provided by the Owner. 2) The system shall have the ability to program alterations to
programmed operating schedules based on the priority of events and shall include the following scenario: a) Based on operator privileges, the operator shall have the ability to temporarily
override the programmed schedule of equipment. Operational override of a programmed schedule shall be for a specific duration following which the schedule shall revert back to the preprogrammed
schedule. b. Display of Start and Stop Times and Actions: An operator shall be able to inspect the content of any schedule and determine the specific control actions that will occur
at any time, on any date. For any particular device or system parameter that is the subject of a schedule, an operator shall be able to determine the schedule of actions related to
that particular device or parameter. c. Modification of Schedules: All calendar entries and schedules shall be modifiable from the EMCS or local workstation by an operator with sufficient
privilege. 4. Trending: Trending is the accumulation of (time, value) data pairs at specified rates for a specified duration. Trends are distinguished from real-time plotting of data
by the fact that the data are destined for long-term storage. a. Archival Storage of Data: Archival storage of data will be handled by the EMCS. However, the Owner may specify local
trend archiving and display through the use of BACnet Trend Log objects. b. Modification of Trend Log Parameters: An operator with sufficient privilege shall be able to change the
data points to be logged, the sampling rate, and the duration of a trend log. 5. Device and Network Management: Device and network management is the exchange of data between BACnet
devices concerning the operation and status of specific devices. If local workstation capabilities are provided, the following functions shall be available: a. Display of Device Status
Information: Operators shall be able to display at any time the operational status of any device on the BACnet internetwork. b. Display of BACnet Object Information: Operators shall
be able to display, at any time, any property of any BACnet object. Operators shall be able to display property values of objects grouped by object type, object location, and building
system. c. Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data: Operators shall be able to direct a field device to stop transmitting event, alarm or COV notifications until a subsequent
command to resume transmissions is received. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 10 d. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network that supports time-of-day
functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device, or all devices on a single local network. e. Remote Device Reinitialization:
Operators shall have the ability to issue reinitialization commands to any device that supports remote reinitialization. f. Backup and Restore: Operators shall have the ability to
backup and restore all BACnet devices on the network that support this capability. g. Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs: Operators shall have the ability
to display and modify the routing table entries in all supplied BACnet half-routers and routers and the broadcast distribution and foreign device registration tables in all BBMDs.
3.3 USE OF BACNET OBJECTS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the representation of data and functionality using BACnet objects. 1. Naming Conventions: The following
sections list the requirements for the assignment of names and identifiers for BACnet objects: a. Device Names: 1) The EMCS uses a system for naming its control devices based on facility
name, location within a facility, the system or systems that the device monitors and/or controls, or the area served. Names can be up to 254 characters in length, without embedded spaces.
Only the characters A-Z, 09, ".", and "-" may be used. The goal is the shortest descriptive, but unambiguous, name. For example, if there is only one chilled water pump "P1", a valid
name would be "DUFFIELD.CW.P1.CONTROL". 2) If there are two pumps designated "P1", one in the basement mechanical room and one in the penthouse mechanical room, the names could be
"CHP.BSMT.CW.P1.CONTROL" or "CHP.PENT.CW.P1.CONTROL". In the case of unitary controllers, for example a VAV box controller, a name might be "COURT.122.TV-LOUNGE". These names should
be used for the value of the "Object_Name" property of the BACnet Device objects of the controllers involved so that the BACnet name and the EMCS name are the same. b. Device Instance
Numbers: 1) BACnet allows 4194305 device instances per BACnet internetwork, each of which must be unique. Cornell's unique device instances are formed as follows: Device Instance =
"FFFFNDD" where: a) FFFF = Facility Code (see below) b) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building. c) DD = 00-99 This allows up to 100 devices per network.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY
23 09 25 - 11 2) Facility Code assignments are currently: a) 0000-0999 Open b) 1000-1999 Statutory Facilities c) 2000-2999 Endowed Facilities d) 3000-3999 Housing and Dining
Facilities e) 4000-4999 Off-Campus Facilities f) 5000-5999 Utilities 3) Some facilities have a facility code with an alphabetic suffix to denote wings, related structures, etc. The
suffix will be ignored. Network numbers for facility codes above 4193 will be assigned in the range 0000-0999. 4) The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment,
or confirmation, of the Facility Code to be used prior to beginning device configuration. c. Non-Device Object Names: Objects other than Device objects shall be named in a manner analogous
to Device objects. The names shall consist of a facility.[subfacility.]system.[sub-system.]point designation. d. Non-Device Object Instance Numbers: The instance numbers for objects
other than Device objects may be assigned at the Contractor’s discretion subject only to the constraint that they be unique for a given object type within a given device. 2. Commissioning/Diagnosti
c Mode: In order to support commissioning and troubleshooting functions, the Out_Of_Service property of all Analog, Binary, Multistate, Loop, and Program objects shall be writable using
BACnet services. 3. Using Object Descriptions: a. Each device object and every object in BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) shall be configured with a Description property. The descriptions
used shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. b. For all object types in all devices that support Description properties, the available string length and whether or not the Description
is writable using BACnet services shall be specified in the device’s PICS. 4. Issues Relating to Specific BACnet Object Types: This clause provides requirements that pertain to the
use of specific BACnet object types. a. Analog Input, Output, and Value: All Analog_Input, Analog_Output, and Analog_Value objects shall have the capability of using the change of
value (COV) reporting mechanism and the COV_Increment property shall be writable using BACnet services. b. Binary Input: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Input
objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Input objects shall support COV reporting. c. Binary Output: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text
properties of Binary Output objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. All Binary Output objects associated with motor on/off status shall
track changes of state and runtime. Binary Output objects shall support COV reporting. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING
AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 12 d. Binary Value: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary
Value objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Value objects shall support COV reporting. e. Calendar: 1) Devices providing scheduling
capability shall also provide at least one Calendar object with a capacity of at least ten entries. Operators shall be able to view the calendar object and make modifications from any
BACnet workstation on the network. 2) If the Calendar’s Date_List property is writable using BACnet services, all calendar entry data types shall be supported. f. Loop: All control
loops using any combination of proportional, integral, and/or derivative control shall be represented by BACnet Loop objects. Operators with sufficient authority shall be able to adjust
at least the Update_Interval, Setpoint, Proportional_Constant, Integral_Constant, and Derivative_Constant using BACnet services. Loop objects shall support COV reporting. g. Multi-state
Input, Output, and Value: The text to be used for the Multi-state object types shall be determined from the points list. Feedback_Value shall be determined by sensing the actual condition
or mode of the device. All Multi-state objects shall support COV reporting. h. Schedule: All building systems with date and time scheduling requirements shall have schedules represented
by BACnet Schedule objects. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any BACnet
workstation. Required schedules are shown on the drawings as part of the occupied and unoccupied modes. 5. Dynamic Object Creation: BACnet Building Controllers shall be configured
to allow the dynamic creation of Trend Log, Calendar, and Schedule objects by means of the BACnet Create Object service. This shall be possible from any supplied BACnet workstation
by operators with appropriate authority. 3.4 USE OF BACNET SERVICES A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet communication services. 1. Interoperable
Commands : All dampers, valves, fans, or other mechanical equipment that may need to be controlled by more than one application shall be represented as commandable BACnet objects.
The application programs interacting with this equipment shall be configured to use the command priorities listed in Table 2. If implementing the sequence of operations or other required
functionality requires using a command priority not listed in Table 2, the priority assignment must be approved by the Owner. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO
PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 13 Table 2. Cornell Command Priorities
Priority Level Application Priority Level Application 1 Manual-Life Safety 9 Available 2 Automatic-Life Safety 10 Available 3 Available 11 Load Shedding 4 Available
12 Available 5 Critical Equipment Control 13 Available 6 Minimum On/Off 14 Available 7 Available 15 Available 8 Manual Operator 16 Available 2. Alarming: This clause
provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet for alarm processing. a. Alarm Priorities: All alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured as indicated
in 3.02.B.1. b. Notification Classes: 1) The EMCS shall be designated as a recipient for all alarm notifications. 2) The Priority, Ack_Required, and Recipient_List properties of
Notification Class objects shall be writable over the network using BACnet services. c. Event Notification Message Texts: Alarm and event processing shall be configured to convey descriptive
text messages along with the notification. 3. Operator Authority Levels: If local workstation capability is provided, there shall be at least three levels of authority: a. Administrator
- All privileges b. Control Shop - All programming and configuration c. Building Coordinator - Read only 4. Change of Value Processing: a. All local workstations shall be able to
display property values based on the receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. Operators shall have the ability from any workstation to subscribe to COV notifications
for all objects that support COV subscriptions. b. After initialization, all graphic display screens shall update the displayed values using COV notifications if COV notification capabilities
are available from the data source. c. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 14 3.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS A. This clause provides
requirements that are specific to the integration of multiple BACnet networks, possibly on different LAN types, into a single BACnet internetwork. 1. Network Numbering: a. Cornell
BACnet network numbers are based on a "facility code, network" concept. The "facility code" is the Cornell-assigned numeric value assigned to a specific facility or building. See 3.03.A.2
above. The "network" typically corresponds to a "floor" or other logical configuration within the building. BACnet allows 65535 network numbers per BACnet internetwork. b. Cornell’s
network numbers are thus formed as follows: Network Number = "FFFFN" where: 1) FFFF = Facility Code 2) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building. 3) N = 0 will
generally be assigned to a facility’s BACnet Ethernet LAN. Normally, this network is connected to the campus backbone. The additional N-numbers will be assigned to any ARCNET or MS/TP
networks as required. c. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Network Number(s) to be used prior to beginning device configuration.
2. IP Address Assignments: a. Cornell maintains specially configured VLANs for the purpose of securely transporting BACS communication traffic. Address assignments are coordinated
by the Computer Section. b. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment of IP addresses (and possibly non-standard UDP ports) prior to beginning device configuration.
3.6 BACNET ROUTERS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet routers. 1. Error Message Destination: The Contractor shall configure each BACnet
router to transmit network layer (routing) error messages to the EMCS. END OF SECTION 23 09 25 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BI
D METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts
and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes,
and flexible ducts. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Sealants and gaskets. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation,
including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration,
liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top and bottom of ducts. 5. Fittings. 6. Reinforcement and spacing. 7. Seam and joint construction. 8. Penetrations through
fire-rated and other partitions. 9. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2 10. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 11. Hangers and supports, including
methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: A single set of plans or BIM model, drawn to scale, showing
the items described in this Section, and coordinated with all building trades. B. Welding certificates. C. Field quality-control reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications:
Qualify procedures and personnel in accordance with the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding
Code," for duct joint and seam welding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and with performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment," and Section 7 - "Construction and System Startup." D. ASHRAE/IES Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IES
90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." E. Duct Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, all duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are inside clear dimensions
and do not include insulation or duct wall thickness. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13
- 3 2.2 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated
static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Fabricate joints in accordance with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. For ducts with longest side less than 36 inches, select
joint types in accordance with Figure 2-1. 2. For ducts with longest side 36 inches or greater, use flange joint connector Type T-22, T24, T-24A, T-25a, or T-25b. Factory-fabricated
flanged duct connection system may be used if submitted and approved by engineer of record. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved,
ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." All longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh lock seams unless otherwise
specified for specific application. D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Ch. 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1. Construct ducts of galvanized sheet steel unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other
provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 4 Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90
Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions
in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A653/A653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for
Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A1008/A1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with
ASTM A480/A480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated
in "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and
plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter
for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch- minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics
for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with UL 723; certified by an NRTL. OLIN HALL
B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5 B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber
impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 3. Sealant:
Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service
Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. C. Water-Based Joint and Seam
Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75
g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC
coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Base: Synthetic rubber resin. 3. Solvent: Toluene
and heptane. 4. Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent. 5. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60. 6. Water resistant. 7. Mold and mildew resistant. 8. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg,
positive or negative. 9. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 10. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. E. Flanged
Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6 F. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
G. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots.
2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Galvanized-steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods
or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Galvanized-steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel
shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and
diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for
air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and coordination drawings.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7 B. Install ducts in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install ducts in maximum practical lengths with fewest possible joints. D. Install factory- or shop-fabricated
fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. E. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular
to building lines. F. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. G. Install ducts with a clearance
of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through
non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal
thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. J. Install heating coils, cooling coils, air filters, dampers, and all other duct-mounted accessories
in air ducts where indicated on Drawings. K. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials both before and after installation. L. Elbows:
Use long-radius elbows wherever they fit. 1. Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes. 2. Fabricate 90-degree round elbows with a minimum of three segments
for 12 inches and smaller and a minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger. M. Branch Connections: Use lateral or conical branch connections. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part
tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush,
polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8 D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 ADDITIONAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR LABORATORY EXHAUST AND FUME HOOD EXHAUST
DUCTS A. Install ducts in accordance with NFPA 45, "Fire Protection for Laboratories Using Chemicals." B. Install exhaust ducts without dips and traps that may hold water. Slope ducts
a minimum of 2 percent back to hood or inlet. Where indicated on Drawings, install trapped drain piping. C. Connect duct to fan, fume hood, and other equipment indicated on Drawings.
3.4 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts at a minimum to the following seal classes in accordance with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 3. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A. 3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT
INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated
fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for
maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle
or channel supports. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9 E. Support vertical ducts with
steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install
upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.6
CONNECTIONS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.7 PAINTING A. Paint interior
of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests
and inspections. 3.9 STARTUP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized
sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: 1. Fabricate all ducts to achieve SMACNA pressure class, seal class, and leakage class as indicated below. 2. Lab Hood Ducts:
welded stainless steel. B. Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air: a. Pressure Class: Negative 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class:
A if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure. c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 4. d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 4. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10 2. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Fume Hood, Laboratory, and Process (ASHRAE
62.1, Class 3 and Class 4) Air: a. Type 316, stainless-steel sheet. 1) Exposed to View: No. 4 finish. 2) Concealed: No. 2B finish. b. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 4-inch wg.
c. Welded seams and joints. d. Airtight/watertight. C. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure
4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500
fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying
with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Rectangular Duct: Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE
3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3,
"Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID METAL DUCTS
23 31 13 - 11 3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and
Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately
fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four
segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5. b. Round Elbows,
12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Welded. D. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch:
Conical spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical
Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree
lateral. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 SECTION
23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5.
Duct accessory hardware. 6. Snorkel hood. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Access Doors: The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage
tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D. C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail
duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems
and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Fire-damper, installations, including
sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans,
drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers
of the items involved. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation
of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60.
2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and polished stainless-steel
finish for exposed ducts. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and
stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 MANUAL
VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek,
Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3 g. Trox USA Inc. h. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable
for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel to match system requirements.
b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade
design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized- or stainless-steel to match system material, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or
nonferrous metal to match system material. 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze or oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve to match system material. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure
classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS
A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add-on or
roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. OLIN
HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate
Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning
Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning
Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Double wall. 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED
ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck
Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Ventfabrics, Inc. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with
insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT
ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5 c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized
sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18
Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous
and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.7 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw
cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene
based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. 2.8 SNORKEL HOOD A. Basis-of-Design Product: Movex "MET 1900-100" for ceiling mount and Movex "MET 1650100" for wall mount
or approved equal. B. Wall-Mounted or Ceiling-Mounted Adjustable Extractor Arm: 1. Arm: 4-inch diameter, with three adjustable points. 2. Duct Collar: 4 inches. 3. Mounting: Manufacturer's
swiveling ceiling or wall-mounting bracket. Provide length of ceiling bracket as required to penetrate ceiling and manufacturer's ceiling escutcheon. 4. Hood: 5-inch, clear-plastic
dome hood. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal
ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts.
C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install
dampers with OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6 hat channels of same depth
as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories
and equipment at the following locations: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. 3. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 4. At drain
pans and seals. 5. Downstream from control dampers and equipment. 6. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire
dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors
installed downstream from dampers. 7. Control devices requiring inspection. 8. Elsewhere as indicated. G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. H. Access Door
Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches.
5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
J. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 OLIN
HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 1 SECTION 23 33 46 - FLEXIBLE DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-insulated flexible ducts. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For flexible ducts. 1. Include plans
showing locations and mounting and attachment details. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access
panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY
DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated.
Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 2 C. Comply with the Air Diffusion Council's "ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1." D. Comply with
ASTM E96/E96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials." 2.2 NON-INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. JP Lamborn Co. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC. 4. Thermaflex; a Flex-Tek Group company. 5. Ward Industries; a brand of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B. Non-Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 0, interlocking spiral of stainless steel. 1. Pressure Rating: 12-inch wg positive or negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 5500 fpm. 3.
Temperature Range: Minus 60 to plus 1500 deg F. 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in
sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install flexible ducts according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards
- Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Install in indoor applications only. Flexible ductwork
should not be exposed to UV lighting. C. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. D. Connect
flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. E. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID FLEXIBLE DUCTS 233346 - 3 F. Installation: 1. Install ducts fully extended. 2. Do not bend ducts across sharp corners. 3. Bends
of flexible ducting shall not exceed a minimum of one duct diameter. 4. Avoid contact with metal fixtures, water lines, pipes, or conduits. 5. Install flexible ducts in a direct line,
without sags, twists, or turns. G. Supporting Flexible Ducts: 1. Suspend flexible ducts with bands 1-1/2 inches wide or wider and spaced a maximum of 48 inches apart. Maximum centerline
sag between supports shall not exceed 1/2 inch per 12 inches. 2. Install extra supports at bends placed approximately one duct diameter from center line of the bend. 3. Ducts may rest
on ceiling joists or truss supports. Spacing between supports shall not exceed the maximum spacing per manufacturer's written installation instructions. 4. Vertically installed ducts
shall be stabilized by support straps at a maximum of 72 inches o.c. END OF SECTION 23 33 46 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 1 SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Variable-volume air terminal units. 2. Critical
environment control valve. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and
under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including sound
power data. B. The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage test reports performed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 130. C. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include
plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,
Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE-VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier. 2. Trane. 3. Price.
B. Leakage shall not exceed 4.5 cfm when test against a 1.0-inch w.c. pressure differential. C. Completely factory-assembled unit shall consist of an insulated plenum with air-inlet
collar, airvolume damper, flow sensor, and removable access panel. D. Unit casing shall be constructed of double-wall galvanized steel with 1/2-inch-thick, 2.0-pcf (minimum), dual-density,
thermal/acoustic glass-fiber insulation between walls. Insulation material not to exceed NFPA 90A smoke- and flame-spread-rating recommendations and to meet UL 181 anti-erosion requirements.
Double-wall construction shall have 26-gauge galvanized steel liner on the air-side surface of the insulation for complete metal encapsulation. E. Air-volume dampers shall be factory-calibrated
damper mechanism. Provide without mechanical stops. F. Air-volume controls shall be electric by means of an externally mounted 24-V actuator, positioning the damper. Damper shall
be normally closed. G. Unit controllers and damper actuators are to be furnished by BACs subcontractor for installation by unit manufacturer. H. Air-volume limits shall be field adjustable
to allow for future changes in unit airflow rates. Air- volume limits will be based on the minimum pressure drop rating for the damper unit. For damper with reset units, the minimum
and maximum limits will be set at the reset device. I. Each unit to be clearly marked with identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall include model number, cfm, coil type,
etc. J. Hot-water heating coils shall be factory-mounted to unit in galvanized casing. Aluminum fins shall be bonded to copper tubes. Coil to be leak-tested at 250-psi hydrostatic
pressure. K. Box sound power levels shall be as scheduled. Sound power-level rating of units shall be in accordance with ADC Standard 1062. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 3 2.2 CRITICAL ENVIRONMENT CONTROL VALVE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. 2. Phoenix Controls Corporation. 3. Price Industries. 4. Tuttle & Bailey; brand of Johnson
Controls International plc, Global Products. B. Description: Volume-damper or venturi assembly inside a unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud, for general
exhaust applications or for exhaust applications where pressurization control via exhaust and supply airflow control is desired and airstream corrosion and contamination may be a concern.
C. Casing: 1. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. D. Airflow Metering, Option: Calibrated shaft position with self-adjusting, spring-loaded cone. E. Sensors, Option: Multipoint, Type
316 stainless steel, removable. F. Direct Digital Controls: 1. Terminal Unit Controller, Section 230923: Controller is to be factory mounted and wired by air terminal manufacturer;
unit controller, actuators, and room sensors are to be furnished under Section 230923 "Building Automation Control System." G. Control Sequence: See Drawings for control sequences.
2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread
rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections:
Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Air-Terminal-Unit Attachments:
Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings;
aluminum for units with aluminum casings. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36
00 - 4 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880. 1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum
and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation
of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT
INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated
fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for
slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Hangers Exposed to View:
Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate
for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing air terminal units and
after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 5 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test:
After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment. C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage
a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. END OF SECTION 23 36 00 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101
RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 1 SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND
GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections,
apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed-face register. 2. Louver-face diffuser. 3. Linear slot diffuser. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct
Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser,
Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each
color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following or
approved equal: 1. Price. 2. Anemostat. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
23 37 13 - 2 2.2 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS A. Fixed-Face Register RA: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-
inch grid core. 4. Core Construction: Removable. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Face: 24 by 24 inches with blank-offs to reduce grille opening to 12 by 12 inches where indicated
on Drawings. 7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. B. Louver-Face Diffuser SA: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material: Steel. 3.
Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Mounting: Surface or T-bar—refer to Drawings. 6. Pattern: Adjustable core style. 7. Dampers:
Radial opposed blade. 8. Accessories: a. Square to round neck adaptor. b. Adjustable pattern vanes. c. Throw reducing vanes. d. Equalizing grid. e. Plaster ring. f. Safety chain. g.
Wire guard. h. Sectorizing baffles. i. Operating rod extension. C. Linear Slot Diffuser SB: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material - Shell:
Aluminum. 3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum. 4. Finish - Face: Special finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's catalog. 5. Finish - Pattern Controller:
Baked enamel, black. 6. Slot Width: 1/2 inch. 7. Number of Slots: Three. 8. Length: 48 inches. 9. Accessories: Plenum, frame, and end caps as required for mounting in architectural
metal ceiling. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 3 2.3 SOURCE
QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers and registers level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final
locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict
with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance
of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting
air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS
AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 1 SECTION 26 05 19 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Building wire rated 600 V or less.
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RoHS: Restriction of Hazardous Substances. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of
product. B. Product Schedule: Indicate type, use, location, and termination locations. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer's authorized service representative.
B. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise
on-site testing. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05
19 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Flexible, insulated and uninsulated, drawn copper current-carrying conductor with an overall insulation layer or jacket,
or both, rated 600 V or less. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. American Insulated Wire
Corp. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Cerro Wire LLC. 5. Encore Wire Corporation. 6. General Cable Technologies Corporation. 7. Republic Wire Inc. 8. Southwire Company. C. Standards: 1. Listed and
labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. 2. RoHS compliant. 3. Conductor and Cable Marking: Comply with wire and cable
marking according to UL's "Wire and Cable Marking and Application Guide." D. Conductors: Copper, complying with ASTM B 3 for bare annealed copper and with applicable ASTM specifications
for stranded conductors. E. Conductor Insulation: 1. Type USE-2: Comply with UL 854. 2. Type TC-ER: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 and UL 1277. 3. Type THHN and Type THWN-2: Comply
with UL 83. 4. Type XHHW-2: Comply with UL 44. 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class
for application and service indicated; listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and use. B. Manufacturers: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 3M Electrical Products. 2. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH
LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 3 3. Gardner Bender. 4. Hubbell Power Systems,
Inc. 5. Ideal Industries, Inc. 6. ILSCO. 7. NSi Industries LLC. 8. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 9. TE Connectivity Ltd. 10. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member
of the ABB Group. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS A. Branch Circuits: Copper. Stranded for No. 12 AWG and larger. B. Power-Limited Fire Alarm and Control: Stranded
for No. 14 AWG and smaller. 3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS A. Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. 3.3
INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable
termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or
lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. E. Provide supports according to Section 26 05 29
"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID LOW-VOLTAGE
ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 - 4 B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical
strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. 1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor
at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack. 3.5 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance
rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." END OF SECTION 26 05 19 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 1 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED
DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. Electrical equipment grounding and bonding. 2. Communications equipment
grounding and bonding. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories:
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials
and equipment. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.
2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. 5. ILSCO. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson
Industrial Automation. 7. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc. 8. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113
HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 2 2.3 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable
insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. 2. Stranded Conductors:
ASTM B 8. 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors
terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick. 2.4 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications
in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Beam Clamps: Mechanical type, terminal, ground wire access from four directions,
with dual, tin-plated or silicon bronze bolts. C. Cable-to-Cable Connectors: Compression type, copper or copper alloy. D. Cable Tray Ground Clamp: Mechanical type, zinc-plated malleable
iron. E. Conduit Hubs: Mechanical type, terminal with threaded hub. F. U-Bolt Clamps: Mechanical type, copper or copper alloy, terminal listed for direct burial. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 14 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 12 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations
and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 - 3 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated
equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment.
Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101
RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance:
Hangers and supports for electrical raceways and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI
7. 1. Design supports for raceways, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and system contents. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating
weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions,
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Hangers. b. Steel slotted support systems. c. Trapeze hangers. d. Equipment supports. 2. Include
rated capacities and furnished specialties and accessories. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which
the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2 1. Suspended ceiling components. 2. Structural members to which hangers and supports
will be attached. 3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Speakers.
c. Access panels. d. Projectors. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify
products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame Rating: Class 1. 2. Self-extinguishing according to ASTM D 635. 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4 factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following: a. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International. b. B-line, an Eaton business. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Flex-Strut Inc. e. GS Metals Corp.
f. G-Strut. g. Haydon Corporation. h. Metal Ties Innovation. i. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member of the ABB Group. j. Unistrut; Part of Atkore International. k. Wesanco, Inc. 2.
Material: Galvanized steel. 3. Channel Width: 1-5/8 inches. 4. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA4. 5. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's
standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-4. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3 6. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-4. 7. Protect finishes on exposed
surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 8. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Conduit and Cable Support
Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1
and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems unless requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Comply with requirements for raceways
and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." C. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMTs, IMCs,
and RMCs as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as
specified in this article. B. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within
specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. C. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted
Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood:
Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Existing Concrete:
Expansion anchor fasteners. 4. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS SP-58, Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27), complying with MSS SP-69. 5. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 6. Items Mounted on Hollow
Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 4 transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached
to substrate by means that comply with seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Comply with installation requirements
in Section 05 40 00 "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for site-fabricated metal supports. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. 3.4 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint
exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair
paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 1 SECTION 26 05 33 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the
Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal conduits, tubing, and
fittings. 2. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. 3. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 4. In-wall storage boxes for audio-visual systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel
conduit. B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all products. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS A. Manufacturers: Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable Systems; a part of Atkore International. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit; a part of Atkore International.
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc. 4. Electri-Flex Company. 5. FSR Inc. 6. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 7. Republic Conduit. 8. Southwire Company. OLIN HALL B01 AND
101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 2 9. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A
Member of the ABB Group. 10. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. 11. Wheatland Tube Company. B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled
as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. D. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL
1242. E. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. F. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel. G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. H. Fittings
for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. Material: Steel. b. Type: Setscrew. 2. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying
with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper. I. Joint Compound for IMC or GRC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by
authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
2.2 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. B-line, an Eaton business. 2. Hoffman;
a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 3. MonoSystems, Inc. 4. Square D. B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 unless otherwise indicated, and sized
according to NFPA 70. 1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 3 C. Fittings and
Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete
system. D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.3 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Adalet. 2. Crouse-Hinds, an Eaton business. 3. EGS/Appleton Electric. 4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.
5. FSR Inc. 6. Hoffman; a brand of Pentair Equipment Protection. 7. Hubbell Incorporated. 8. Kraloy. 9. Milbank Manufacturing Co. 10. MonoSystems, Inc. 11. Oldcastle Enclosure Solutions.
12. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation. 13. Plasti-Bond. 14. RACO; Hubbell. 15. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. 16. Thomas & Betts Corporation; A Member
of the ABB Group. 17. Wiremold / Legrand. B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for
use in wet locations. C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. D. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. Material: Sheet metal. 2. Type: Fully adjustable. 3. Shape:
Rectangular. 4. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb. Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed
and marked for the maximum allowable weight. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 4 F. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. G. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box.
H. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep. I. Gangable boxes are allowed. J. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 with continuous-hinge
cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished
with manufacturer's standard enamel. K. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's
standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and
voltage. 2.4 IN-WALL STORAGE BOX FOR AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide Chief "PAC526FW" and "PAC526FCW" or approved equal. 1. Refer to Drawings to quantities
of each. B. Equipment storage box recessed in-wall for audio visual equipment, typically installed behind a wall-mounted flat panel display. Power outlet (not included with product),
conduit, and data network jacks (not included with product) typically attached to/installed inside box. Flange for edge trim included. Contractor providing in-wall box shall also
provide specified power outlets, data jacks, conduit connections, and other accessories necessary to install the in-wall box. AV Contractor shall provide AV connectors. C. Color:
White. D. Switch Boxes for Electrical Outlet or Data Network Jacks: 1. Available Product: RACO #560. 2. 2.75 inches deep. E. Acoustic Putty: 1. Available Product: Kinetics Noise
Control IsoBacker. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33
- 5 F. Accessories: 1. Provide all fasteners, hardware, anchors, brackets, and other components to ensure complete, functional, and secure installation of all products. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to
Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include the following: a. Mechanical rooms. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Connection to Vibrating
Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 5. Damp or Wet Locations:
GRC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel or nonmetallic in wet locations. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size. C. Raceway
Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in
PVC coating after installing conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer. 3. EMT: Use
setscrew, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. 4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply
with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with
NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BI
D RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 6 B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal
raceway runs above water and steam piping. C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. D. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. F. Install no more than the equivalent of three
90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches of changes in direction. G. Conceal conduit and EMT
within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. H. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures
to which attached. I. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: 1. Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. 2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in
hubs or in an enclosure. J. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up
joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. K. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including
conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. L. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. M. Do not rely
on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. N. Cut
conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. O. Install pull wires
in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. P. Expansion-Joint
Fittings: 1. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure expansion joints. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 7 2. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting
selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement. Q. Flexible
Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission,
or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage. R. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If
mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to top of box unless otherwise indicated. S. Horizontally
separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. T. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. U.
Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. V. Fasten junction and pull
boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. W. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. X. In-Wall Storage Box for Audio-Visual
Systems: 1. General: a. Install all systems to comply with NFPS Section 70 National Electric Code, and local/state codes, ordinances, regulations, recommendations, guidelines and directives,
in a manner which complies with accepted industry standards of good practice, the requirements of this specification, and in a manner which does not constitute a life or physical safety
hazard. b. Comply with manufacturer’s written data and specifications, including product technical bulletins, installation instructions, and technical data sheets. c. Install all products
at locations and heights indicated on Drawings. d. Provide knockout closures for unused openings. e. Metal raceway shall be electrically continuous and bonded in accordance with the
National Electric Code for proper grounding. f. Raceway systems shall be mechanically continuous and connected to all electrical outlets, boxes, device mounting brackets, and cabinets,
in accordance with manufacturer’s installation sheets. g. All products described in this specification shall be installed plumb and square unless specifically detailed otherwise. h.
All supports shall meet or exceed the load requirements of the intended application with a minimum safety factor of five. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA
CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 - 8 i. Where penetrations of fire-rated assemblies are involved, the Contractor
shall seal penetrations with appropriate firestopping systems in accordance with Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." j. The Contractor shall investigate the presence of post-tension
rods before drilling into concrete floors/ceilings. 2. In-wall box interior shall remain open and clear of obstructions to allow for installation of audio-visual system devices. This
includes but is not limited to power outlets, data network jacks, and conduit stubs. In accordance with manufacturer instructions, power outlets and data network jacks shall be installed
on the outside of the in-wall box facing inward. 3. In-wall box shall be secured to the building structure per manufacturer instructions. Conduit shall not bear the weight of the in-wall
box. 4. Conduit shall terminate on the in-wall box. No free air cable runs from conduit to box. 5. Included flange shall be installed to conceal rough-cut of finished wall material.
6. Conduit containing AC power cables shall terminate at the in-wall box on the opposite side of the box from conduit containing low voltage audio visual system cables. 7. Conduit ends
shall not have sharp edges, or have an insulated bushing installed to protect wire pulls from damage. 8. Conduit to the in-wall box intended for low-voltage audio-visual systems may
not be shared by other trades or services, except by written consent from the Owner’s Representative. 9. Do not install in-wall storage boxes back-to-back in walls; install with minimum
6-inch separation. Install with minimum 24-inch separation in acoustic-rated walls. 10. In-wall box shall be installed flush with finished wall material. 11. Acoustical treatment to
be installed behind in-wall storage box: The complete outside surface of each of these in-wall storage boxes shall be treated with acoustical putty. 12. Interface with Other Work:
Coordinate with AV Contractor for installation of AV connectors in-wall boxes. 3.3 FIRESTOPPING A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply
with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized
finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 OLIN
HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 1 SECTION 26 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification
Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification for conductors. 2. Warning labels and signs. 3. Equipment identification labels. 4. Miscellaneous
identification products. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors,
and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to
be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar
concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 2 B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated
with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive
wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.2 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated. C. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS
MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 3. Arc Flash Protection
Label: a. Items: Arc Flash Protection Label. b. Type: Format 9. c. Color: White on red header/black on white body. d. Height: 5 inches. e. Width: 7 inches. f. Legend: “DANGER –
ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD, APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED, HAZARD CATEGORY -1.” g. Material: Write-on vinyl with acrylic adhesive. 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Adhesive Film Label
with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a weatherproof
and UV-resistant seal for label. B. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height
shall be 3/8 inch. C. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be
3/8 inch. D. Stenciled Legend: In non-fading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL
UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 3 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division
9 painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). B. Fasteners for Labels
and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each
item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation
and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces
before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical
fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE A. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Selfadhesive warning
labels. 1. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 2. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. B. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit
of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and
protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication,
signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Adhesive film label with clear protective
overlay. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 11/2-inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Stenciled legend 4 inches high. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 - 4 c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. d. Unless provided with self-adhesive
means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure. 2. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards: Typewritten
directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. b. Enclosures
and electrical cabinets. c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. END OF SECTION 26 05 53 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 1 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,
including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Receptacles, receptacles
with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 27 Specifications for data outlets. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit
interrupter. B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. C. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each
type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer.
Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed
and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. C. Comply with NFPA 70. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING
DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 1.6 COORDINATION A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES A. Where Basis-of-Design Product
is indicated below, provide named product or approved equal by one of the following Bryant, Cooper (Arrow-Hart), Hubbell, P&S, or Leviton. Provide one manufacturer for each category,
for entire Project. B. Receptacles–General Usage: 1. General Requirements: Duplex, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding. a. 20 Amp, 125 volts, 60 Hz. b. NEMA configuration: 5-20R. c. Parallel-blade,
double-wipe contacts; NEMA grounding slot. d. UL-listed and meeting Federal Specification WC596. 2. Standard: a. Quick-connect “plugtail” type. b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT5362
series. 3. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs), Specification grade, feed through a. Trip level: 4 to 6 mA; trip time: .025 second nominal. b. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT2095
series. 4. TVSS: a. Same as paragraph 3 above except TVSS. 5. Duplex tamper-resistant receptacles with two USB charging ports, 15-A rating. a. Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #TMB26USBLACC6.
6. Special-Purpose Receptacles: a. Sizes and NEMA ratings as indicated on Contract Drawings. C. Wall Plates: 1. Interior for Recessed Outlet Boxes: a. Finished Spaces: OLIN HALL
B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 1) Brushed aluminum. 2) Single multi-gang plate for multiple
devices at one location. 3) Manufacturer: Same as devices. 2. Interior for Surface Steel Outlet Boxes: a. Galvanized sheet steel; rounded edges. b. Single multi-gang plate for multiple
devices at one location. c. Manufacturer: Appleton, General Electric, Pyle National, Steel City, Universal. 3. Weatherproof: a. GFCI receptacle, with cover; wet location-rated while
in use. Provide at all exterior locations, at all interior wet locations, and as indicated on Contract Drawings. b. Manufacturers: Taymac, Carlon, P&S. 2.2 FINISHES A. Color: Wiring
device catalog numbers in Section text do not designate device color. 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Grey. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency/Standby Power
System: Red. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted. 1. Duplex Receptacles: 18 inches
above finished floor to centerline. 2. Outlets above Counter: 42 inches above finished floor; coordinate with Architectural elevations and counter installation. B. Coordination with
Other Trades: 1. Take steps to ensure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that
are guided by riding against outside of the boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate
the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the
face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 4 C. The location of any device box may be changed a distance of 10 feet from starting location before device is actually installed,
at no extra charge. D. Conductors: 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor
using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet
provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. E. Device Installation: 1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction. 2. Keep each wiring device
in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid
conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors
larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into
metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact. F. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically
mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. G. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes
when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and
with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates. 3.2 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non-feed-through-type GFCI receptacles
where protection of downstream receptacles is not required. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID WIRING DEVICES
26 27 26 - 5 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience
Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable
range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip:
Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating
damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove
malfunctioning units, and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION
26 27 26 OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 1 SECTION 27 15
00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Cable connecting hardware. 3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 4.
Cabling system identification products. B. Scope of Work: 1. Provide all necessary computer-data-distribution-system cabling and other associated devices, components, and accessories
as required for the system specified herein and as indicated in the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide horizontal copper cabling and outlets. 3. Provide Category 6 data jacks and Category
6, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cables to Category 6 voice/data outlets (RJ45). 4. Provide Category 6A data jacks and Category 6A, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cable for each
wireless access point. 5. Remove all existing unused cabling back to source. 6. Cable trays and pull boxes shall remain accessible. 7. Coordinate any disruptions in service with Cornell
University CIT and building-area occupants. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. C. IDC: Insulation displacement
connector. D. LAN: Local area network. E. Outlet: A connecting point in the work area on which horizontal cable terminates to a jack. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION
113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 2 F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. G. UTP: Unshielded
twisted pair. 1.4 REFERENCES A. The following industry standards are the basis for ALL of the structured cabling described in this document. This includes the most recent revision
of TIA standards for Category 6/6A Cable Installation and Testing, Pathways and Spaces, and Grounding. The list is incorporated by this reference to them. If there is a conflict between
applicable documents, the order below shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving the issue unless an enforceable local or national code is in effect. Note that specific reference
is made to both the EIA/TIA 568-B.2.1 standard for category 6 cabling and the EIA/TIA 568-B.3 standard for fiber optics. 1. TIA/EIA—Pertinent Sections 2. TIA/EIA-568-B and B3, Commercial
Building Telecommunication Cabling Standard 3. TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunication Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 4. TIA/EIA-607-A, Commercial Building
Grounding/Bonding Requirements 5. TIA/EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standards for Telecom Pathways and Spaces 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA-70 National Electric
Code (NEC) – 2002 (or later edition) 7. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations. 8. OSHA (Standards 29 CRF) Telecommunications – 1910.268. 9. Underwriters Laboratory.
B. National Electrical Safety Code Board of Fire Underwriters inspection is required for all new electrical construction work. Specific Cornell Fire and Safety requirements must be
met. In the event of conflict between or among such codes/requirements, the more stringent will apply. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications
cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.
1.6 SUBMITTALS A. At the time of Shop Drawings, submit applicable manufacturer’s literature, Shop Drawings, and Product Data to confirm the conformance to the Contract Documents. OLIN
HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 3 B. Product Data for each component
specified including detailed manufacturer specifications. Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components as needed.
Show access and working-space requirements. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transmission media certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and
that they have been coordinated with and accepted by manufacturer of connected equipment. D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification at time of contract award. No projection of certifications will be accepted.
E. Collect and submit any accompanying identification attached to every master reel of unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. F. Submit, prior to testing, the most recent calibration
reports for all testing devices used by the contractor performing the testing. Calibration reports older than those recommended by the cabling or device manufacturer will be rejected.
G. Submit a label example, pertaining to this project, for approval prior to printing bulk labels. H. Final schedule of cables as specified in Part 3. I. As-Built Drawings: 1. As-built
Contract Drawing shall be delivered to the Owner 2 weeks prior to occupancy for each Project phase. A set of as-built drawings shall be provided to the Owner in electronic CAD software
that is acceptable to the Owner. Provide as-built drawings with locations, cable paths, and cable schedule for Cornell University (CU) cable records. J. Project Record Drawings: 1.
Submit at conclusion of the Project and include: a. Approved Shop Drawings. b. Plan Contract Drawings indicating locations and identification of work area outlets, nodes, closets, and
backbone (riser) cable runs. c. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects, intermediate cross-connects, and horizontal cross-connects. d. Labeling and administration
documentation. e. Warranty documents for equipment. f. Copper certification test result printouts and CD. g. Operation and maintenance manuals. K. Test Reports--General: 1. Provide
a complete system test report (bound) of the complete existing data network at each building prior to starting work. 2. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the additions
and revisions to the existing data network. After the report is acceptable, upon Engineer’s review, the report OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 4 shall be included in the Division 27 O&M manual. Also, the acceptable test report shall be submitted
to the on compact disk in PDF format. 3. Refer to Article 3.6 of this Section for additional information. L. The Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings, product data, and samples shall
not relieve the Division 27 Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, product data, and samples. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish and install all equipment,
accessories, connections, and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work under this Contract for use, occupancy, and operation by the Owner. B. Unless specifically otherwise
indicated by the documents or the CM/Owner, all equipment and materials required for installation under these specifications shall be new, unused, and without blemish or defect. Equipment
and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the Authorities having jurisdiction over the work and as specified hereinbefore. Where such acceptance is contingent
upon having the products listed and/or labeled by FM or UL or another testing laboratory, the products shall be so listed and/or labeled. Where no specific indication as to the type
or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a first-class standard article shall be provided. C. Where equipment of a substitute manufacturer differ from that specified and require
different arrangement or connections from those shown or specified, it is the responsibility of the Contractor responsible for the substitution to modify the installation of the equipment/system
to operate properly and in harmony with the original intent of the drawings and specifications. When directed by the Architect, this Contractor shall submit drawings showing the proposed
substitute installation. If the proposed installation is accepted this Contractor shall make all necessary changes in all affected related work provided under his and other Sections
including roughing-in connections by other Trades, conduits, supports, etc. All changes shall be made at no increase to the Contract amount or additional costs to the Owner. D. Contractor/Subcontra
ctor Qualifications: The Contractor/Subcontractor shall have at least one Registered Communications Distribution Designer, RCDD, on staff that must be certified by the Building Industry
Consulting Service International (BICSI). Cabling installation shall be performed by a minimum of two installers and all installers performing the Work of this Contract shall be manufacturer-certif
ied installers with proof of a current certification. All installers must be approved by the Owner prior to contract award. E. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be Corning EWP-certified
for at least 6 months at time of bid for fiber-optic installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission. F. Contractor/Subcontractor shall
be part Panduit-certified for copper horizontal cabling installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission. G. Fiber-optic-trained technicians
shall have attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof shall execute the fiber-optic tests. Such certificates may have been issued by any of the
following organizations or an equivalent organization: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL
CABLING 27 15 00 - 5 1. The manufacturer of the fiber-optic cable and/or the fiber-optic connectors, 2. The manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification,
3. Training organizations authorized by BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Services International with headquarters in Tampa, Florida) or by the ACP (Association of Cabling Professionals™)
Cabling Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas. H. Inspect every cable reel to confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices
in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing of each reel. Reject any reels that do not comply with these criteria. I. Cable manufacturers shall be ISO
9001 registered. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Attention is directed to provisions of the General Requirements regarding the warranties for work under this contract. B. All materials, items of equipment,
and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault due to defective or improper material, equipment,
workmanship, or design that may develop shall be made good, forthwith, by, and at the expense of this contractor for the work under his contract including all other damage to areas,
materials, and other systems resulting from this failure. C. Materials and labor supplied will be warranted against defects for a period of not less than one year following final acceptance.
Materials, equipment, and cable installations found to be defective, as judged by the Owner, within the one-year period will be replaced by the contractor at no charge to the Owner.
The contractor is required to respond to a repair call no later than the next business day. D. Provide cable manufacturer's warranty naming CIT/Infrastructure Engineering as the Owner.
1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Project before, during, and after installation and to protect installed work and materials
of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the
Owner. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Use all means necessary to coordinate with other trades and ensure that proper and adequate provision is made in the work of other Sections to accommodate
installations of the work of this Section. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
27 15 00 - 6 B. Adjust the arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in telecommunication rooms to accommodate and optimize the arrangement
and space requirements of the telephone switch and LAN equipment. C. Coordinate with and obtain review of cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment
by the connected equipment manufacturers. D. Collect and submit any accompanying identification, if any, attached to every master reel of unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. Inspection
of every reel should confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing
of each reel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet from data room rack to outlet. This maximum allowable
length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet for patch cords and service loops. B. Cable slack shall be provided at each end of each cable to accommodate future work-area
changes. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-D when tested according to test procedures
of this standard. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
C. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A and NFPA 70. 2.3 UTP CABLE A. Category 6 Cable: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope "Systimax"
#1071E or comparable product by one of the following: a. BerkTek Lanmark #XTP. b. Panduit GenSpeed #6000. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 7 B. Category 6A Cable: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope
"Systimax" #1091B or comparable product by BerkTek Lanmark #XTP. 2.4 CABLE HARDWARE A. Outlet Faceplates: 1. Work-area faceplates shall be compatible with modular jack inserts iconable
and ivory in color. Faceplates shall have a covered designation strips that allow identifying each jack. Provide inserts that orient outlets to accept jack inserts at 45-degree exit.
a. Product—No Substitution: Panduit "Mini-Com Executive" series #CBEEI. b. Refer to Contract Drawings for exact quantity, number of ports required, and location of faceplates. 2.
Blanks shall be installed to all unused openings. B. Category 6 Jacks and Inserts: 1. TIA 568A termination procedures shall be observed. Verify with Owner’s Representative prior to
install. 2. Cable jacket shall be maintained to the point of termination. 3. Pair twists shall be maintained to within .5" of termination. 4. Excessive slack shall be removed from cables
so as to avoid overcrowding behind faceplates and exceeding recommended bend radius. 5. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ688TG. C. Category 6A Modular Jacks: 1. Product—No Substitution:
Panduit #CJ6X88TG, T568A modular jack for Cat. 6A cables. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating
adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Conceal cables in raceway. OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 8 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with
TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install TG termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect
point. 5. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 6. Cables may
not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 7. Bundle,
lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices"
Chapter. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged
during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the
communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. Horizontal cable shall route in front/rear vertical and horizontal cable managers. 11. Pulling
Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than
1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. B. Label colors
for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and CIT Infrastructure standards. C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet. List incoming and
outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for
Project. D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications
closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY
21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 9 horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment
grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label
each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted
devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Identification within Connector
Fields in Wiring Closet: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. 4. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the
MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label. F. Label each outlet using the CU labelling convention: Room number-alpha (clockwise around
room)-port; e.g., 101-A1, 2. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visually
inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding
for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch
panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling
for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but
not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in
"Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified
by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1
and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: OLIN HALL B01 AND 101 RESEARCH LAB RENOVATION 113 HO PLAZA CORNELL UNIVERSITY 21022OLIN-B01&101BID COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 10 1)
Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level
far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification
tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone
service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and
receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available
to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. B. Document data for each
measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved
as text files, and printed and submitted. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF
SECTION 27 15 00
Olin Hall B01 and 101_Drawings.pdf
U P U P U P U P U P U P D N U P U P D N U P U P D N U P D N U P D N D N 101 ROOM NAME 1 A101 SIM 1 A101 SIM A101 1 SIM 1'-0" B1 W1 F1 101 ROOM NAME Name Elevation W1 A101 1 SIM DETAIL
ENLARGEMENT WALL SECTION BUILDING SECTION DETAIL SECTION1 INTERIOR ELEVATION DOOR & INTERIOR WINDOW TAG WALL TAG ROOM IDENTIFICATION EXTERIOR WINDOW & LOUVER TAG ROOM FINISH KEY CONTRACT
LIMIT LINE EXISTING DOOR NEW DOOR PARTITIONS, DOORS AND ITEMS TO BE REMOVED FULL HEIGHT PARTITION PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION NOTE KEY FLOOR ELEVATION 100 100 1 REVISION CLOUD & TAG
PLAN ELEVATION 50' -6" SITE ELEVATION STRUCTURAL ELEVATION WORKING POINT WP CEILING HEIGHT EQUIPMENT TAG A101 SIM A1 A2 A3 A4 1 1i SCOPE LINE DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FRAMING AT NEW
CONSTRUCTION, TYP. DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FINISH AT EXISTING CONSTRUCTION DIMENSION TO THE FACE OF FINISH 50 ' 6" 50'-6" 1 EXISTING PARTITION PARTIAL B01 -ALTERATION LEVEL 1 FUME
HOOD INSTALLATION -ALTERATION LEVEL 2 101 -ALTERATION LEVEL 1 SET NUMBER ARCHITECTURAL SYMBOLS AND PATTERNSPROJECT INFORMATION Crescent Building 217 North Aurora Street Ithaca, New
York 14850 607.241.0244 G001 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 113 HO PLAZA Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS CORNELL UNIVERSITY ARCHITECTURAL A101B01 - DEMO & EQUIPMENT
PLANS A102101 - DEMO & EQUIPMENT PLANS A151B01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A152101 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A201EQUIPMENT MATRIX - ROOM B01 A202EQUIPMENT MATRIX - ROOM 101 A203EXISTING PHOTOS
- B01 A204EXISTING PHOTOS - 101 PLUMBING P001DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOL LISTS & ABBREVS. P101PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN - LAB B01 P102PARTIAL FLOOR PLANS - LAB 101 MECHANICAL M001DRAWING INDEX,
SYMBOLS & ABBREVS. M101B01 FLOOR PLANS M102101 FLOOR PLANS M601SCHEDULES & DETAILS M701CONTROLS ELECTRICAL E001DRAWING INDEX, SCHEDULES, SYMBOL LISTS & NOTES E101PARTIAL ELECTRICAL
PLANS - LAB B01 E102PARTIAL POWER PLANS - LAB 101 DATE: JOB NUMBER: BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TYPE: ALTERATION CLASSIFICATION: SPRINKLER PROTECTION: USE CLASSIFICATION: TOTAL EXISTING BUILDING
AREA: AREA OF RENOVATION: AREA OF ADDITION: TOTAL AREA OF PROJECT: F|S Engineering, DPC 721 East Genesee Street, Syracuse, NY 13210.1505 315.471.4013 1-A LEVEL 1
&LEVEL 2 SP B 129,897 SF 1,424 SF 0 SF 1,424 SF 1/32" = 1'-0" 1 OLIN HALL BASEMENT -WORK AREA 1/32" = 1'-0" 2 OLIN HALL FIRST FLOOR -WORK AREA LOCATION PLAN WOODEN WORK BENCH WITH VICE
(72" X36") OFCI LARGE HTL REACTOR WITH CASTING (80"X 42") OFCI THERMAL SPALLATION SETUP (138"x40") OFCI ELEC. CONTROL BOX OFCI TOOLBOX NIC STEEL MOVEABLE TOOLBOX OFCI MIN 3'-0" ROCK
SAMPLE TABLE NIC MOVEABLE TABLE (4'x30") -NIC STORAGE CABINET -NIC EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN EXISTING SINK EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN FUME HOOD RELOCATE FROM
WARD HALL BASEMENT, COORDINATE WITH OWNER. ELECTRICAL OUTLET -SEE ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR MORE DETAIL ADJUSTABLE SNORKEL EXHAUST ABOVE MOVEABLE TABLE (4'x30") -NIC ADJUSTABLE SNORKEL EXHAUST
ABOVE FLOOR MOUNTED GAS CYLINDER RACK. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH OWNER CLEAN AND PAINT EXISTING CABINETS PROVIDE COAT HOOKS FOR LAB COATS & WALL MOUNTED LAB SAFETY GLASSES BOX,
PROVIDE BLOCKED AS NEEDED, TYP. OFCI ELECTRICAL OUTLET, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DWGS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAIL COMPRESSED AIR, SEE MEP DWGS FOR ADDITIONAL DETAIL B00JB B01 MIN 3'-0 1/4" 469
SF B01 TEMPORARY PARTITION DURING CONSTRUCTION -FIRE RATED POLY RELOCATE THERMAL SPALLATION SETUP WITH CONTROL BOX FROM SNEE HALL 2157, COORDINATE MOVE WITH OWNER. ALTERATION LEVEL
2 EXISTING FUME HOOD EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN EXISTING SINK EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN B00JB B01 TEMPORARY PARTITION DURING CONSTRUCTION -FIRE RATED POLY 469
SF B01 REMOVE EXISTING MARKER BOARD, RELINQUISH TO OWNER. PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACE TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CONDITION. REMOVE EXISTING BREAKER PANEL AND ASSOCIATED
WIRING REMOVE EXISTING GAS CABINET EXISTING FUME HOOD FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED W1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL DOORS / FRAMES AND PAINTED WINDOW TRIM / FRAMES SHALL
BE PAINTED P2 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. ALL EXISTING CABINETS AND RELOCATED CABINETS IN ROOM 101 TO BE PAINTED P3 4. EXISTING FUME HOOD IN 101 TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH CABINETS P3 4.
ALL EXISTING CABINETS IN B01 OUTSIDE OF WORK AREA TO REMAIN NOT TO BE PAINTED, U.O.N. 5. MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PANEL COVERS, GRILLES, EXPOSED PIPES, CONDUIT ETC. TO BE PAINTED 6.
FLOORING AND BASE IN ROOM 101 TO BE PAINTED F1 A.SCRUB AND CLEAN FLOOR WITH BRISTLE BRUSH AND EMULSIFYING CLEANER & DEGREASER B. PRIME ALL SURFACES WITH EPOXY PRIMER C. PAINT ALL SURFACES
WITH 100% SOLIDS EPOXY FINISH KEY: PAINT P1PAINT COLOR 1 FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED P1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DEMOLITION NOTES: CEILINGS: REMOVE AND SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION
CEILING AND CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT TO ALLOW FOR THE WORK TO BE COMPETED. REMOVE ABANDONED CONNECTIONS, PIPING, CONDUIT, WIREMOLD, ETC. ALSO SEE MEP DRAWINGS, PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED
TO RESTORE SURFACE TO MATCH ADJACENT EXISTING CONDITION. GENERAL NOTES: 1. SEE EXISTING PHOTOS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE INFORMATION, TYPICAL 2. PATCH ALL DAMAGED WALL SURFACES WITHIN ROOM
B01 AND 101, TO MATCH EXISTING, TYPICAL 3. ALL EXISTING CABINETS, EQUIPMENT, AND FURNITURE TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION, TYPICAL. 4. RELOCATE EQUIPMENT FROM SNEE HALL AND WARD
HALL AS NOTED. COORDINATE MOVE TIMING AND DETAILS WITH OWNER. 5. ALL EQUIPMENT IN ROOM B01 OUTSIDE OF THE WORK AREA TO REMAIN IN USE BY THE OWNER DURING CONSTRUCTION. ANY INTERRUPTION
TO POWER, DATA, OR ACCESS TO THE EQUIPMENT IS TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER AT LEAST TWO WEEKS IN ADVANCE OF ANY INTERRUPTION. 6. REINSTALL CEILING, GRID, AND CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
TO MATCH PRERENOVATION CONDITIONS. DAMAGED CEILING PANELS TO BE REPLACED WITH MATCHING PANELS FURNISHED BY OWNER. 7. AT LOCATIONS WHERE OPENINGS ARE MADE IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO
FACILITATE THE INSTALLATION OF MEP WORK, RESTORE TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. 8. OFCI: OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 9.PROVIDE BLOCKING
AS REQUIRED AT ALL WALL-MOUNTED SHELVING, CABINETS, FURNITURE, AND ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT. 10. COORDINATE ALL POWER REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL POWER PLANS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, AND OWNER
PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. 11. MOUNT ALL WALL CABINETS TO BE 2' FROM BENCHTOP TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. P2PAINT COLOR 2 P3PAINT COLOR 3 F1 FLOOR FINISH ANSI -2003 FIG. 308.2.1 UNOBSTRUCTED FORWARD
REACH FIG. 308.2.2 OBSTRUCTED HIGH FORWARD REACH FIG. 308.3.1 UNOBSTRUCTED SIDE REACH FIG. 308.3.2 OBSTRUCTED HIGH SIDE REACH PROTRUDING OBJECTS CLEAR FLOOR SPACE Unless otherwise specified
may include knee and toe clearances CIRCULAR TURNING SPACE May include knee and toe clearances 'T-TURN' TURNING SPACE May include knee and toe clearances only at the end of either the
base or one arm. GENERAL -TYPICAL CLEARANCES AND REACH RANGES 48" MAX 48" 15" MIN. 20" MAX 48" MAX 25" MAX 44" MAX 48" MAX 15" MIN. 46" MAX 24" MAX 34" MAX. 48" MAX 10" 34" MAX. 4"
MAX 80" 27" 4'-0" 2'-6" 5'-0" 5'-0" 3'-0" 1'-0" 3'-0" 1'-0" EXCEPTIONS: (a) HANDRAILS MAY PROTRUDE 4-1/2" MAX. (b) DOOR CLOSERS & STOPS MAY BE 78" MIN. ABOVE THE FLOOR FIG. 307.2 WARNING:
It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal
of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a
specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A101 B01 -DEMO & EQUIPMENT PLANS 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP
CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza 1/4" = 1'-0" F6 PARTIAL PLAN B01 -FURNITURE & EQUIPMENT 1/4" = 1'-0" A1 PARTIAL PLAN B01 -DEMO
1/4" = 1'-0" E1 TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS #Description Date EXISTING BENCH AND CABINETS ABOVE TO REMAIN EXISTING SINK 5'-0" 5'-11" EXISTING FUME HOOD TO REMAIN EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN
CE-440 NIC 2'-0" REF 1 OFCI REF 2 OFCI ADA SINK OFCI 3'-0" MOVEABLE LAB TABLE (60"x30") NIC LAB BENCH -NIC (5'X5') 4'-8 3/4" 5'-1" EXISTING BENCH AND LOWER CABINET TO REMAIN SNORKEL
EXHAUST -50" ABOVE BENCH TOP 2'-6" 4'-0" (1) RELOCATED 3' WALL CABINET -OFCI ADD SECOND COLD WATER LINE, SEE MEP DWGS FOR MORE DETAIL ADD COMPRESSED AIR LINE, SEE MEP DWGS FOR MORE
DETAIL TALL METAL CABINET, NIC EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL 48"X48" PLYWOOD ABOVE SINK WITH BLOCKING AS NEEDED. MUST HOLD 300LBS ADDITIONAL BENCHTOP COLD WATER SUPPLY OUTLET, SEE PLUMBING
DWGS FOR DETAILS MOVEABLE TABLE FOR REACTOR PC (24"X36") NIC 602 SF 101 EXISTING DATA PANEL BALANCE TABLE (24"X36") -NIC BALANCE TABLE (24"X36") -NIC (2) RELOCATED 3' WALL CABINETS
-OFCI FLEXIBLE EXHAUST DUCT TO BENCH HEIGHT (2) RELOCATED 3' WALL CABINETS -OFCI 30" NEW PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP SECURE TO EXISTING BASE AND LEGS INSTALL MORGAN MILWAUKEE BENCH
VISE #45A COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH OWNER. OFCI. LOCK DOOR, PROVIDE SIGNAGEINDICATING IT IS NOT AN EXIT E4 A102 FLOOR MOUNTED GAS CYLINDER RACK. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH
OWNER FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED W1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 2. ALL DOORS / FRAMES AND PAINTED WINDOW TRIM / FRAMES SHALL BE PAINTED P2 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 3. ALL EXISTING
CABINETS AND RELOCATED CABINETS IN ROOM 101 TO BE PAINTED P3 4. EXISTING FUME HOOD IN 101 TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH CABINETS P3 4. ALL EXISTING CABINETS IN B01 OUTSIDE OF WORK AREA TO
REMAIN NOT TO BE PAINTED, U.O.N. 5. MISCELLANEOUS ELECTRICAL PANEL COVERS, GRILLES, EXPOSED PIPES, CONDUIT ETC. TO BE PAINTED 6. FLOORING AND BASE IN ROOM 101 TO BE PAINTED F1 A.SCRUB
AND CLEAN FLOOR WITH BRISTLE BRUSH AND EMULSIFYING CLEANER & DEGREASER B. PRIME ALL SURFACES WITH EPOXY PRIMER C. PAINT ALL SURFACES WITH 100% SOLIDS EPOXY FINISH KEY: PAINT P1PAINT
COLOR 1 FINISH NOTES: 1. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED P1 UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. DEMOLITION NOTES: CEILINGS: REMOVE AND SALVAGE FOR REINSTALLATION CEILING AND CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
TO ALLOW FOR THE WORK TO BE COMPETED. REMOVE ABANDONED CONNECTIONS, PIPING, CONDUIT, WIREMOLD, ETC. ALSO SEE MEP DRAWINGS, PATCH WALL AS REQUIRED TO RESTORE SURFACE TO MATCH ADJACENT
EXISTING CONDITION. GENERAL NOTES: 1. SEE EXISTING PHOTOS FOR ADDITIONAL SCOPE INFORMATION, TYPICAL 2. PATCH ALL DAMAGED WALL SURFACES WITHIN ROOM B01 AND 101, TO MATCH EXISTING, TYPICAL
3. ALL EXISTING CABINETS, EQUIPMENT, AND FURNITURE TO BE PROTECTED DURING CONSTRUCTION, TYPICAL. 4. RELOCATE EQUIPMENT FROM SNEE HALL AND WARD HALL AS NOTED. COORDINATE MOVE TIMING
AND DETAILS WITH OWNER. 5. ALL EQUIPMENT IN ROOM B01 OUTSIDE OF THE WORK AREA TO REMAIN IN USE BY THE OWNER DURING CONSTRUCTION. ANY INTERRUPTION TO POWER, DATA, OR ACCESS TO THE
EQUIPMENT IS TO BE COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER AT LEAST TWO WEEKS IN ADVANCE OF ANY INTERRUPTION. 6. REINSTALL CEILING, GRID, AND CEILING MOUNTED EQUIPMENT TO MATCH PRERENOVATION CONDITIONS.
DAMAGED CEILING PANELS TO BE REPLACED WITH MATCHING PANELS FURNISHED BY OWNER. 7. AT LOCATIONS WHERE OPENINGS ARE MADE IN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO FACILITATE THE INSTALLATION OF MEP
WORK, RESTORE TO PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS AND MATCH ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION, U.O.N. 8. OFCI: OWNER FURNISHED, CONTRACTOR INSTALLED 9.PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED AT ALL WALL-MOUNTED
SHELVING, CABINETS, FURNITURE, AND ANCILLARY EQUIPMENT. 10. COORDINATE ALL POWER REQUIREMENTS WITH ELECTRICAL POWER PLANS, EXISTING CONDITIONS, AND OWNER PROVIDED EQUIPMENT. 11. MOUNT
ALL WALL CABINETS TO BE 2' FROM BENCHTOP TO BOTTOM OF CABINET. P2PAINT COLOR 2 P3PAINT COLOR 3 F1 FLOOR FINISH REMOVE EXISTING WALL CABINET, CLEAN, PAINT AND RE-INSTALL IN NEW LOCATION
ON EAST WALL ABOVE EXISTING BENCH. EXISTING BENCH AND CABINETS ABOVE TO REMAIN EXISTING SINK EXISTING FUME HOOD TO REMAIN EXISTING BENCH TO REMAIN REMOVE EXISTING SINK & ALL ASSOCIATED
PIPING REMOVE EXISTING BREAKER PANEL AND ASSOCIATED WIRING CUT EXISTING COUNTERTOP AT BASE OF WIREMOLD. BACKSPLASH TO REMAIN. EXISTING BASE AND SUPPORT LEGS TO REMAIN AND BE RE-USED
WITH NEW COUNTERTOP REMOVE ALL SHELVING AND SUPPORT BRACKETS, COMPLETE. PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTERTOP, MATCH EXISTING COLOR RE-USE EXISTING BASE FOR SUPPORT 30" 1 1/2" EXISTING BACKSPLASH
& WIREMOLD TO REMAIN WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If
a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date
of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A102 101 -DEMO & EQUIPMENT PLANS
6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza 1/4" = 1'-0" A2 PARTIAL PLAN 101 - FURNITURE & EQUIPMENT 1/4"
= 1'-0" A1 PARTIAL PLAN 101 - DEMO 3/4" = 1'-0" E4 COUNTERTOP #Description Date FIT PANEL AROUND SNORKEL EXHAUST DUCT AND SUPPORT. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT. FIT
PANEL AROUND ADJUSTABLE FLEX CONNECTION FOR FUME HOOD FIT PANEL AROUND SNORKEL EXHAUST DUCT AND SUPPORT. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT. RETURN AIR GRILLE SUPPLY AIR
GRILLE EXISTING WIRE MOLD SPRINKLER HEAD EXISTING LAY-IN LIGHT FIXTURES 2' X 4' EXISTING ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES: 1. REPLACE ANY DAMAGED OR DISCOLORED
EXISTING CEILING TILES WITH OWNER ATTIC STOCK. DAMAGED TILES IDENTIFIED BUT NOT LIMTED TO THOSE SHOWN. 2. ALL SNORKEL EXHAUST TO BE SECURED TO STRUCTURAL DECK AND CENTER IN CEILING
TILE. 3. ALL EXISTING CEILING WIREMOLD TO REMAIN. 4. REPAIR CEILINGS DAMAGED BY CONCEALED SCOPE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MEP WORK THAT IS NOT SPECIFICALLY DETAILED ON THIS DRAWING.
5. REPAIR AND REPLACE DAMAGED GYPSUM SOFFITS AND CEILINGS IMPACTED BY NEW WORK AT EXISTING LOCATIONS AND CEILING HEIGHTS, U.O.N. 6. PAINT ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK, CONDUIT, WIREMOLD, PIPES,
ETC TO MATCH CEILING, TYPICAL. CEILING MATERIALS: LIGHT FIXTURES: OTHER: 2' X 4' EXISTING ACOUSTICAL PANEL IDENTIFIED FOR REPLACEMENT EXISTING GYPSUM CEILING WARNING: It is a violation
of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is
altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description
of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A151 B01 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY
CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza 1/4" = 1'-0" A6 B01 -RCP #Description Date FIT PANEL AROUND FLEXIBLE EXHAUST REPLACE GRILLE AND CEILING PANEL
FIT PANEL AROUND SNORKEL EXHAUST DUCT AND SUPPORT. COORDINATE FINAL LOCATION WITH OWNER/ARCHITECT. RETURN AIR GRILLE SUPPLY AIR GRILLE EXISTING WIRE MOLD SPRINKLER HEAD EXISTING LAY-IN
LIGHT FIXTURES 2' X 4' EXISTING ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES: 1. REPLACE ANY DAMAGED OR DISCOLORED EXISTING CEILING TILES WITH OWNER ATTIC STOCK. DAMAGED TILES
IDENTIFIED BUT NOT LIMTED TO THOSE SHOWN. 2. ALL SNORKEL EXHAUST TO BE SECURED TO STRUCTURAL DECK AND CENTER IN CEILING TILE. 3. ALL EXISTING CEILING WIREMOLD TO REMAIN. 4. REPAIR CEILINGS
DAMAGED BY CONCEALED SCOPE INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO MEP WORK THAT IS NOT SPECIFICALLY DETAILED ON THIS DRAWING. 5. REPAIR AND REPLACE DAMAGED GYPSUM SOFFITS AND CEILINGS IMPACTED
BY NEW WORK AT EXISTING LOCATIONS AND CEILING HEIGHTS, U.O.N. 6. PAINT ALL EXPOSED DUCTWORK, CONDUIT, WIREMOLD, PIPES, ETC TO MATCH CEILING, TYPICAL. CEILING MATERIALS: LIGHT FIXTURES:
OTHER: 2' X 4' EXISTING ACOUSTICAL PANEL IDENTIFIED FOR REPLACEMENT EXISTING GYPSUM CEILING WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the
direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document
his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D
E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A152 101 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113
Ho Plaza 1/4" = 1'-0" A6 FIRST FLOOR ROOM 101 -RCP #Description Date RELOCATED FROM WARD HALL NEW EQUIPMENT (FURNISHED BY OWNER): RELOCATED FROM SNEE ROOM 2157: 1. 6ft PROTECTOR XL
LABORATORY HOOD 37.7" EXTERIOR MODEL: 111614200-24577 A. WOODEN WORK BENCH WITH VICE B. HTL REACTOR WITH CASING C. HTL REACTOR CONTROLLER TABLE D. THERMAL SPALLATION E. THERMAL SPALLATION
CONTROL BOX F. STEEL TOOLBOX I. (2) SNORKEL EXHAUST NEW EQUIPMENT: 1. (1) 2 CYLINDERS (2X1) -BARRICADE -GAS CYLINDER RACK MODEL # BR2X1FS USA SAFETY 2" SQUARE STEEL TUBE CONTINUOUSLY
SEAM WELDED, 0.125" THICK CYLINDER CAPACITY: 1-2 CYLINDER DIAMETERS SUPPORTED: UP TO 12" CYLINDER RACK DIMENSIONS: 30"W X 16"D X 30"H MEETS USGS HIGH SEISMIC HAZARD ZONE REQUIREMENTS
WHEN INSTALLED PROPERLY OSHA, NFP1, NFPA 55 AND CGA COMPLIANT WHEN USED PROPERLY HOLDS TWO CYLINDERS, TWO WIDE BY ONE DEEP TWO LEVELS OF WELDED STEEL CHAINS SNAPS FOR EACH CYLINDER
3 PRE-DRILLED 0.531" DIAMETER FLOOR MOUNTING HOLES ANCHOR BOLTS (MODEL # ACITW5FS) AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE SEPARATELY (NOT INCLUDED) CYLINDER RACK SEALED WITH EXTERIOR GRADE BLACK POWDER-COAT
PAINT MADE IN THE USA PRODUCT WEIGHT: 91 LBS WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this
document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by
his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A201 EQUIPMENT
MATRIX ROOM B01 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza #Description Date NEW EQUIPMENT (FURNISHED BY
OWNER): RELOCATED FROM SNEE ROOM 3158: G. MORGAN MILWAUKEE BENCH VISE #45A II.ADA DUAL DEPTH SINK WITH BASE CABINET I. (1) SNORKEL EXHAUST NEW EQUIPMENT: 1. (1) 2 CYLINDERS (2X1) -BARRICADE
-GAS CYLINDER RACK MODEL # BR2X1FS USA SAFETY 2" SQUARE STEEL TUBE CONTINUOUSLY SEAM WELDED, 0.125" THICK CYLINDER CAPACITY: 1-2 CYLINDER DIAMETERS SUPPORTED: UP TO 12" CYLINDER RACK
DIMENSIONS: 30"W X 16"D X 30"H MEETS USGS HIGH SEISMIC HAZARD ZONE REQUIREMENTS WHEN INSTALLED PROPERLY OSHA, NFP1, NFPA 55 AND CGA COMPLIANT WHEN USED PROPERLY HOLDS TWO CYLINDERS,
TWO WIDE BY ONE DEEP TWO LEVELS OF WELDED STEEL CHAINS SNAPS FOR EACH CYLINDER 3 PRE-DRILLED 0.531" DIAMETER FLOOR MOUNTING HOLES ANCHOR BOLTS (MODEL # ACITW5FS) AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE
SEPARATELY (NOT INCLUDED) CYLINDER RACK SEALED WITH EXTERIOR GRADE BLACK POWDER-COAT PAINT MADE IN THE USA PRODUCT WEIGHT: 91 LBS WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for
any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect
shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT:
OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A202 EQUIPMENT MATRIX ROOM 101 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01,
101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza #Description Date WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter
this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed
by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A203 EXISTING
PHOTOS - B01 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza SOUTH EAST CORNERSOUTH EAST PARTIAL WALL NORTH WALL
CEILING -EAST WALL WEST WALL NORTH WALLNORTH WALLNORTH EAST CORNER CEILING -EAST WALL CEILING -SOUTH WALL CEILING -WEST WALL #Description Date WARNING: It is a violation of New York
State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the
altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration.
DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 A204 EXISTING PHOTOS -101 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 YNP CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin
Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 113 Ho Plaza NORTH WEST CORNER NORTH WALL NORTH EAST CORNERNORTH COUNTER SUPPORT EAST WALL SINK EAST WALL CENTRAL BENCH WEST WALL CENTRAL BENCH CENTRAL
BENCH CENTRAL BENCH CENTRAL BENCH SOUTH WALL SOUTH WALL -BASE CABINET SOUTH WALL -FUME HOOD SOUTH WALL -FUME HOOD #Description Date ISSUE: DATE: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: SCALE: PROJECT
NO. SHEET TITLE SHEET DRAWING NO. ALTERATION OF THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT BY A LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, IS A VIOLATION OF NEW YORK STATE EDUCATIONAL LAW. OF FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721
E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 Enter address here R:\Revit MEP 2012\Templates\S&A_Mechanical.rte 10/5/2011 4:16:29 PM Owner Project Name SK-M2
01/01/2019 Author Checker Project Number Unnamed MARKDATEDESCRIPTION PLUMBING SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS SYMBOLDESCRIPTION (ABBREVIATION) BALANCING VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTER (BFP) CHECK
VALVE PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE (PRV) STRAINER WITH BLOWDOWN UNION REMOVE TO POINT AND CAP REMOVE TO POINT FOR RECONNECTION SHOWER HEAD CLEANOUT IN FLOOR (FPCO) CLEANOUT IN SUSPENDED
PIPE (CO) FLOOR DRAIN PIPE BRANCH TAKE-OFF FROM BOTTOM PIPE DROP PIPE RISE ROOF DRAIN/SANITARY VENT ROOF DRAIN ABOVE VENT THRU ROOF (VTR) HOSE BIBB (HB) ANTIFREEZE WALL HYDRANT (AFWH)
COMPRESSED AIR PIPING FPCO CO CA CW HW (__) PIPE BRANCH TAKE-OFF FROM TOP SHUT OFF VALVE OST PD RHW SAN SAN ST ST V COLD WATER PIPING HOT WATER PIPING (____°F) OVERFLOW STORM PIPING
PUMP DISCHARGE PIPING HOT WATER RETURN PIPING SANITARY SEWER (ABOVE GROUND) SANITARY SEWER (UNDERGROUND/UNDERFLOOR) STORM SEWER (ABOVE GROUND) STORM SEWER (UNDERGROUND/UNDERFLOOR) VENT
PIPING EMERGENCY SHOWER ES ES/EEW EMERGENCY SHOWER CDCONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING GRADE CLEANOUT (GCO) GCO WALL PLATE CLEANOUT (WPCO) WPCO EMERGENCY SHOWER/ EMERGENCY EYE WASH PIPING TO
BE DEMOLISHED TYPE (D) AAVAIR ADMITTANCE VALVE SHOCK ABSORBER (SA-_) SWSOFTENED WATER PIPING POINT OF CONNECTION -NEW TO EXISTING P-TRAP CWCOLD WATER PIPING (UNDERGROUND/UNDERFLOOR)
EEWEMERGENCY EYE WASH UPPITCH OF PIPE DN TEMPERATURE WELL THERMOMETER PRESSURE GAUGE (WITH VALVE) PIPING EXISTING TO REMAIN TYPE (E) POINT OF REMOVAL -DEMOLITION TO EXISTING ACID WASTE
PIPING AW ? ?PLAN DETAIL BUILDING SECTION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF DETAIL EXTENT OF DETAIL A1
B1 C1 D1 E1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 E5 A6 B6 C6 D6 E6 DETAIL NUMBER DETAIL SCALE DETAIL NAME DETAIL NUMBER PLAN SETUP SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED
CAUTION: THESE DOCUMENTS WERE DIGITALLY PRODUCED AND/OR REPRODUCED. CONFIRM REDUCTION OR MAGNIFICATION USING DIMENSIONAL 3"-LONG LINE IN TITLE BARS. IF SCALING DRAWINGS FOR APPROXIMATE
DIMENSIONS, ALTERNATE ARCHITECTURAL SCALES MAY BE USED AS FOLLOWS: DOCUMENT REDUCTION/MAGNIFICATION SCALE IF LINE MEASURES 2”(67% COPY): USE 3/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 3/8th
SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG IF LINE MEASURES 1.5”(50% COPY): USE 1/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 1/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG 3" 3" ? ? ? ?XXX X" = X" 1.PLUMBING DRAWINGS ARE DIAGRAMMATIC
IN NATURE AND ALL RISERS AND DROPS ARE NOT SHOWN. CONTRACTORS SHOULD INCLUDE THESE IN THE BID. ADJUST INSTALLATION OF PIPING TO ACCOMMODATE WORK WITH OBSTACLES AND INTERFERENCES ENCOUNTERED
AS PART OF THE CONTRACT. 2.ALL FIXTURES SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUFACTURERS PUBLISHED INSTRUCTIONS. 3.MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION SHALL COMPLY WITH THE MOST RECENT PLUMBING
CODE OF NEW YORK STATE. APPLICABLE PROVISIONS OF THE EDITION OF NFPA, AND LOCAL UTILITY REGULATIONS. 4.SEAL ALL WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATIONS AIR TIGHT. ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH FIRE
RATED WALLS TO BE SEALED PER UL DETAILS. 5.PIPING SHALL NOT BE INSTALLED ABOVE ELECTRICAL PANELS. COORDINATE LOCATION OF PIPING WITH ELECTRICAL CONTRACT WHEN SHOWN NEAR PANELS OR OVER
ELECTRICAL ROOMS. 6.EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND LABOR REQUIRED BY THESE CONTRACT DRAWINGS SHALL BE GUARANTEED TO BE FREE OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP FOR ONE YEAR AFTER ACCEPTANCE
OF THE PROJECT UNLESS SPECIFIED OTHERWISE. DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP OCCURRING DURING THIS PERIOD SHALL BE CORRECTED AT NO ADDITIONAL COST. 7.PROVIDE SHUTOFF VALVES IN A READILY
ACCESSIBLE LOCATION IN ALL PIPING SYSTEMS IN ALL BRANCH PIPING SERVING MORE THAN ONE FIXTURE. 8.SCHEDULE NEW CONSTRUCTION WORK WITH THE OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE WELL IN ADVANCE. CONSTRUCTION
WORK AND DEMOLITION SHALL BE PERFORMED AT SUCH TIMES AND UNDER SUCH CONDITIONS AS SUITS THE OWNER, AT NO ADDITIONAL COST FOR PREMIUM TIME. 9.ALL FINISHES AND SURFACES TO REMAIN WHICH
ARE DAMAGED DURING THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE REPAIRED OR REPLACED. FINISHES FINISHES TO MATCH EXISTING TO THE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER. 10.EXISTING SYSTEMS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS
ARE BASED ON AVAILABLE RECORD DRAWINGS. THIS INFORMATION IS PARTIALLY VERIFIED. THE CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE TO FIELD VERIFY AND INVESTIGATE ALL CONDITIONS THAT AFFECT THE WORK PRIOR
TO SUBMITTING THE BID. PLUMBING GENERAL NOTES FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of
New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered,
the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the
alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 P001 DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOL LIST & ABBREVS. 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 DDD 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL
UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations PLUMBING DRAWING INDEX NUMBERNAME REVISIONS #DATE P001DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOL LIST & ABBREVS. P101PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN
- LAB B01 P102PARTIAL FLOOR PLANS -LAB 101 TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT, THE DESIGN OF THIS PROJECT CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: THE
2020 NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION AND BUILDING CODE THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE, 2016 ASHRAE 90.1, AND 2007 ASHRAE 183; FOLLOWING THE COMPLIANCE
PATH MARKED BELOW: ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1, AS AMENDED BY 19 NYCRR PART 1240. IECC CHAPTER 4 [CE] PRESCRIPTIVE PROVISIONS (SECTIONS C402, C403, C404, C405, C408 AND ONE OF THE SIX
OPTIONS IN SECTION C406 AS NOTED BELOW: MORE EFFICIENT HVAC PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.2. REDUCED LIGHTING POWER DENSITY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.3. ENHANCED
LIGHTING CONTROL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.4. ON-SITE SUPPLY OF RENEWABLE ENERGY IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.5. PROVISION OF A DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM FOR CERTAIN HVAC
EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.6. HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE WATER HEATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.7. ENHANCED ENVELOPE PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.8.
REDUCED AIR INFILATRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.9. TOTAL BUILDING PERFORMANCE PROVISIONS (SECTION C407) THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT ("SED") MANUAL OF PLANNING
STANDARDS THE 2014 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HOSPITALS AND OUTPATIENT FACILITIES THE 2018 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF: HOSPITALS OUTPATIENT FACILITIES
RESIDENTIAL HEALTH, CARE, AND SUPPORT FACILITIES ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE 'BASIN FIXTURES' FIXTURE TAGTYPEFIXTURE OUTSIDE DIMENSIONS (INCHES)
FIXTURE INSIDE DIMENSIONS (INCHES) BASIN DEPTH (INCHES) ADA COMPLIANT (YES/NO)MANUFACTURERMODELFAUCET OPERATION FAUCET SPREAD (INCHES)SPOUT TYPESPOUT LENGTHHANDLE TYPEOUTLET T YPEGPMDRAIN
TYPEFAUCET MANUFACTURERFAUCET MODELREMARKS SK-ASINK26.70 x 16.6925 x 155"Yes------MANUALSINGLE HOLEGOOSENECK5 3/44" WRISTBLADEAERATOR2.2GRIDT&SBL-5704-05FAUCET ONLY, INTEGRAL SINK BY
OTHERS PLUMBING FIXTURE ROUGH IN SCHEDULE FIXTUREWASTEVENTCWHWREMARKS SK-A1 1/2"24"1/2"1/2" PD (E) CA (E) ST (E) PD (E) CW CA 1/2" CW 1/2" CA 1/2" CW B01 EXISTING SINK P3 P4 P5 P6 P7
B00JB PD (E)AWCA 1 1/2" AV (E) 1 1/2" AV (E) 1 1/2" AV (E) 3" AV (E) 1 1/2" AV P11 EXISTING HOOD NEW FUME HOOD FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013
Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any
way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature,
the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 P101 PARTIAL FLOOR PLAN
LAB B01 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 DDD 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" P101 A3PARTIAL PLAN -LAB B01 PLUMBING
KEYED NOTES P3CONNECT 1/2"CA TO EXISTING 1/2"CA ON SERVICE SIDE OF REGULATOR. P4CONNECT 1/2"CW TO EXISTING 1"CW WITH VALVE. P5PROVIDE 1/2"CW WITH VALVE AND THREADED OUTLET. P6CONNECT
2"AW TO EXISTING IN WALL. P7CONNECT 2"AW, 1/2"CW, & 1/2"CA TO RELOCATED HOOD. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CONTROLS AND OUTLETS TO MATCH EXISTING. CONNECT AW TO EXISTING TRAP OUTLET. P11CONNECT
1 1/2"AV TO EXISTING ABOVE CEILING. DISCONNECT AW, CW & HW PIPING TO SINK. CAP PIPING FOR RECONNECTION. CA (E) HW (E) CW (E) CA (E) AW (E) AW (E) CW (E) HW (E) RHW (E) CA (D) CA (D)
CA (D) REMOVE CA OUTLET AND PIPING PIPING LOCATED BELOW CABINETRY EXISTING 1 1/2"AW DN EXISTING FUME HOOD EXISTING 2"AW DN EXISTING FD HW (E) CW (E) SK-A HW (E) CW (E) CA (E) CA (E)
CA (E) CACW HW (E) CW (E) RHW (E) AW (E) AW (E) EXISTING FD P2 P9 P4 P8 CW EXISTING SINK EXISTING PIPING BELOW BENCH 2" AW (E) 101 1 1/2" AV 1 1/2" AV 1 1/2" AV P12 P10 P1 HW (E) CW
(E) FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless
acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix
to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN
BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 P102 PARTIAL FLOOR PLANS -LAB 101 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 DDD 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall
B01, 101 Lab Renovations 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" P102 A2PARTIAL PLAN 101 -DEMO 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" P102 A6PARTAIL PLAN -101 PLUMBING KEYED NOTES P1PROVIDE 1/2"CW WITH THREADED
OUTLET, VALVE AND ESCUTCHEON LOCATED ABOVE COUNTERTOP. P2PROVIDE 1/2"CW WITH VALVE AND CAP ON WALL ADJACENT TO COUNTERTOP FOR CONNECTION TO COUNTERTOP EQUIPMENT. P4CONNECT 1/2"CW TO
EXISTING 1"CW WITH VALVE. P8CONNECT 1/2"CW, & 1/2"CA TO EXISTING HOOD. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL CONTROLS AND OUTLETS TO MATCH EXISTING. P9CONNECT 1/2"CA TO EXISTING 1/2"CA. P10CONNECT SINK
TO EXISTING 1 1/2"AW, 1/2"CW & 1/2"HW LOCATED BELOW SINK. P12CONNECT 1 1/2"AV TO EXISTING 3"AV RISER. ISSUE: DATE: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: SCALE: PROJECT NO. SHEET TITLE SHEET DRAWING
NO. ALTERATION OF THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT BY A LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, IS A VIOLATION OF NEW YORK STATE EDUCATIONAL LAW. OF FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY
13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 Enter address here R:\Revit MEP 2012\Templates\S&A_Mechanical.rte 10/5/2011 4:16:29 PM Owner Project Name SK-M2 01/01/2019 Author Checker Project
Number Unnamed MARKDATEDESCRIPTION 14/10RECTANGULAR DUCT (SIZE IN INCHES) ROUND DUCT (DIAMETER IN INCHES) 14Ø AUTOMATIC AIR DAMPER VOLUME DAMPER SMOKE DAMPER FIRE DAMPER SD VD FD SYMBOLDESCRIPTION
AAD DUCTWORK SYMBOLS & ABBREVIATIONS FIRE SMOKE DAMPER FSD DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR (FURNISHED & WIRED BY DIV 28, MOUNTED BY DIV 23. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS) DSD OVAL DUCT
(SIZE IN INCHES) 14/10Ø LOW VELOCITY DUCTWORK SYMBOLS SINGLE LINEDOUBLE LINE DESCRIPTION DIRECTION OF FLOW DUCT SIZE, FIRST FIGURE IS SIZE SHOWN12/2012/20 SUPPLY DUCT SECTION (POSITIVE)
PRESSURE, FIRST FIGURE IS TOP 20/1220/12 RETURN / EXHAUST DUCT SECTION 20/1220/12 ROUND SIDE TAP WITH VOLUME DAMPER (UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED) 90° BRANCH TAKE OFF (45° ENTRY TYPE FOR
RECTANGULAR DUCT)1-1/4A)XB (MIN) VD VD AxB 4" (MIN) 45° VD VD VD DUAL 90° BRANCH TAKE OFF (45° ENTRY TYPE) FLEXIBLE DUCT FLEX CONNECTION ACCESS DOORAD AD GRILLE REGISTER OR DIFFUSER
IN BOTTOM OF DUCT DUCT ELBOW UP OR DOWN TURN UP TURN DOWN 12x6 TURN DOWN 12x6 TURN UP OR LONG RADIUS 90 DEGREE ELBOW OR TURNING VANES TRANSITION: LOCATION OF TRANS. IS DIAGRAMMATICAL
CONTRACTOR MAY EXTEND LENGTH OF LARGER DUCT TO ACCOMMODATE STD. LENGTH DUCT SECTIONS. CONTRACTOR'S OPTION AS SHOWN 90 DEGREE BRANCH TAKEOFF FROM VERTICAL DUCT-45 DEGREE ENTRY TYPE ELEV.
PLAN PLAN ELEV. DUCT RISE / DROP TO AVOID OBSTRUCTION ARROW INDICATES AIR FLOW DIRECTION 90° BRANCH TAKE OFF (TEE TYPE FOR ROUND DUCT) RISE RD DROPRISE UPDN DROP VD VD RETURN / EXHAUST
DUCT PENETRATION OF FLOOR OR ROOF ABOVE. SEE PLANS FOR DAMPER REQUIREMENTS SUPPLY DUCT PENETRATION OF FLOOR OR ROOF ABOVE. SEE PLANS FOR DAMPER REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL PIPING SYMBOLS
& ABBREVIATIONS SHUTOFF VALVE (REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPECIFIC TYPE) CHECK VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE BALL VALVE PETCOCK CALIBRATED BALANCING VALVE UNION PRESSURE GAUGE (WITH VALVE)
TEMPERATURE SENSOR DRAIN VALVE WITH CAPPED AND CHAINED HOSE END PIPE UP / PIPE DOWN (ELBOW) BRANCH CONNECTION -UP / DOWN CONCENTRIC REDUCER PIPING (ARROW INDICATES DIRECTION OF FLOW)
PIPE ANCHOR PIPE GUIDE GLOBE VALVE PIPE CAP PITCH OF PIPE STRAINER W/ BLOW OFF STRAINER MVAV PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TEMPERATURE WELL THERMOMETER TRIPLE DUTY VALVE CONDENSATE "P"-TRAP
DN UP PS FS PRESSURE SWITCH FLOW SWITCH EXPANSION JOINT PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATOR VALVE T GATE VALVE 2-WAY CONTROL VALVE 3-WAY CONTROL VALVE MANUAL AIR VENT / AUTOMATIC AIR VENT SYMBOLDESCRIPTION
SPECIFIC SHUTOFF VALVE TYPES: SUPPLY DIFFUSER PLAN SYMBOL EXPLANATION: CFM SUPPLY AIR DIFFUSER (NOMINAL 2' x 2') SUPPLY DIFFUSER TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE) RETURN / EXHAUST AIR REGISTER CFM
SL8 REGISTER/GRILLE PLAN SYMBOL EXPLANATION: CFM (E = EXHAUST / R = RETURN) REGISTER/GRILLE TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE) CFM RE10 SYMBOLDESCRIPTION GRILLE, REGISTER & DIFFUSER SYMBOLS LINEAR
SLOT DIFFUSER WITH DISTRIBUTION PLENUM REGISTER AND DIFFUSER AIR FLOW PATTERNS 4-WAY BLOW3-WAY BLOW2-WAY BLOW DUCTWORK EXISTING TO REMAIN IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT
DUCTWORK REMOVED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT POINT OF CONNECTION -NEW TO EXISTING POINT OF REMOVAL -DEMOLITION TO EXISTING DEDICATED ELECTRICAL AREA -NO MECHANICAL
WORK ALLOWED IN OR ABOVE HIGHLIGHTED AREA UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED OTHERWISE PIPE REMOVED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT PIPE EXISTING TO REMAIN IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE
PHASE OF CONTRACT SYS (E) SYSTEM NAME (E) = EXIST TO REMAIN, (D) = EXIST TO BE REMOVED DUCTWORK PROVIDED IN THIS CONTRACT OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT PIPE PROVIDED IN THIS CONTRACT
OR ACTIVE PHASE OF CONTRACT SYS (D) SYS SYS (D) SYS (10x6) SYS (E) (10) SYS (E) DEMOLITION KEYED NOTE KEYED NOTE SYSTEM PHASING SYMBOLS M# MD# ? ?PLAN DETAIL BUILDING SECTION DETAIL
NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT OF DETAIL EXTENT OF DETAIL A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 A4 B4 C4
D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 E5 A6 B6 C6 D6 E6 DETAIL NUMBER DETAIL SCALE DETAIL NAME DETAIL NUMBER PLAN SETUP SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED CAUTION: THESE DOCUMENTS WERE DIGITALLY PRODUCED
AND/OR REPRODUCED. CONFIRM REDUCTION OR MAGNIFICATION USING DIMENSIONAL 3"-LONG LINE IN TITLE BARS. IF SCALING DRAWINGS FOR APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS, ALTERNATE ARCHITECTURAL SCALES MAY
BE USED AS FOLLOWS: DOCUMENT REDUCTION/MAGNIFICATION SCALE IF LINE MEASURES 2”(67% COPY): USE 3/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 3/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG IF LINE MEASURES 1.5”(50%
COPY): USE 1/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 1/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG 3" 3" ? ? ? ?XXX X" = X" FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax:
315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way.
If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the
date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M001 DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOLS
& ABBREVS. 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 TAM 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations MECHANICAL DRAWING INDEX NUMBERNAME REVISIONS #DATE
M001DRAWING INDEX, SYMBOLS & ABBREVS. M101B01 FLOOR PLANS M102101 FLOOR PLANS M601SCHEDULES & DETAILS M701CONTROLS HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA INTERIOR DESIGN CONDITIONS HEATING70 deg F DB
COOLING75 deg F DB / 63 deg F WB OUTDOOR DESIGN CONDITIONS SUMMER88 deg F DB / 75 deg F WB WINTER-5 deg F DB CLIMATE ZONE6 HVAC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS ITEMYESNO DUCT SMOKE DETECTORSX FIRE
DAMPERSX SMOKE DAMPERSX FIRE RATED ENCLOSUREX FIRE RATED ROOF / FLOOR / CEILING ASSEMBLYX FIRE STOPPING (REFER TO DIVISION 7)X SMOKE CONTROLX ECONOMIZER CONTROLN/A DUCT SEALINGX GENERAL
MECHANICAL NOTES AREFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR CEILING GRID WORK PREFORMED BY OTHERS. IF NOT SHOWN ELSEWHERE INCLUDE IN THIS DIVISIONS WORK AS REQUIRED. BWHERE WORK ISN'T SHOWN
BY OTHERS, HVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE, STORE, AND REINSTALL EXISTING LAY-IN CEILING TILES & TEES AS REQUIRED FOR ALL WORK SHOWN. CHVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE LEFT OR RIGHT UNIT
CONNECTION ORIENTATION. DHVAC CONTRACTOR SHALL INSTALL UNIT TO ALLOW FOR MAINTENANCE ACCESS TO FILTERS, VALVES, CONTROLS, LUBRICATION POINTS, INCLUDING MOVING EXISTING INTERERENCES
SUCH AS CONDUITS, WIRINGS AND PIPING. FCONTRACTOR SHALL FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS, AND REPORT DISCREPANCIES TO THE ARCHITECT / ENGINEER AND AWAIT CLARIFICATION PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH REMOVAL AND RENOVATION WORK. LATLEAVING AIR TEMPERATURE LWTLEAVING WATER TEMPERATURE MAX.MAXIMUM MBH1,000 BTUH MCAMINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY MGAPMEDICAL GAS ALARM PANEL MIN.MINIMUM
MOCPMAXIMUM OVERCURRENT PROTECTION MTDMOUNTED NCNORMALLY CLOSED NICNOT IN CONTRACT NONORMALLY OPEN NOM.NOMINAL NTSNOT TO SCALE OAOUTSIDE AIR OAIOUTDOOR AIR INTAKE OEDOPEN-END DUCT PDPRESSURE
DROP PHPHASE PLBG.CONTRACTOR FOR PLUMBING DIVISION PRVPRESSURE REDUCING VALVE PSPRESSURE SWITCH / SENSOR PSIPOUNDS PER SQUARE INCH RARETURN AIR RHRELATIVE HUMIDITY RVRELIEF VALVE SASUPPLY
AIR SENS.SENSIBLE SPLSOUND PRESSURE LEVEL SWLSOUND POWER LEVEL TATRANSFER AIR TCTEMPERATURE CONTROLS CONTRACTOR TDVTRIPLE DUTY VALVE TOSTOP OF STEEL TSTAMPER SWITCH UHUNIT HEATER UNOUNLESS
NOTED OTHERWISE VRAVENTILATION RELIEF AIR VRSVENTILATION SUPPLY AIR WBWET BULB ZVBZONE VALVE BOX AAVAIR ADMITTANCE VALVE AFFABOVE FINISHED FLOOR AFGABOVE FINISHED GRADE BFFBELOW FINISHED
FLOOR BFGBELOW FINISHED GRADE BOSBOTTOM OF STEEL BTUHBRITISH THERMAL UNIT PER HOUR CFMCUBIC FEET PER MINUTE COCLEANOUT COPCOEFFICIENT OF PERFORMANCE DBDRY BULB DIA.DIAMETER °FDEGREES
FARENHEIT EAEXHAUST AIR EATENTERING AIR TEMPERATURE EFF.EFFICIENCY ELEC.CONTRACTOR FOR ELECTRICAL DIVISION EWTENTERING WATER TEMPERATURE EXTEXISTING EXT. PDEXTERNAL PRESSURE DROP FFFINISHED
FLOOR FLFAIL LAST FLAFULL LOAD AMPACITY FLRFLOOR FPCONTRACTOR FOR FIRE PROTECTION FPMFEET PER MINUTE FSFLOW SWITCH FSDFIRE / SMOKE DAMPER FTFEET FT-HDFEET OF HEAD (PRESSURE) GCCONTRACTOR
FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION DIVISION GPMGALLONS PER MINUTE GRDGRILLES, REGISTERS, DIFFUSERS HGTHEIGHT HPHORSEPOWER HVACCONTRACTOR FOR HEATING, VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING DIVISION IN-WCINCHES
OF WATER COLUMN (PRESSURE) IN.INCH HVAC DUCT SYSTEM ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV.DESCRIPTION EAEXHAUST AIR OAOUTDOOR AIR HVAC PIPE SYSTEM ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV.DESCRIPTION HWRHOT WATER RETURN
HWSHOT WATER SUPPLY HVAC EQUIPMENT ABBREVIATIONS ABBREV.DESCRIPTION FTR-AFINNED TUBE RADIATION VAV GENERAL ABBREVIATIONS TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT, THE DESIGN
OF THIS PROJECT CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION AND BUILDING CODE THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION
CODE, 2016 ASHRAE 90.1, AND 2007 ASHRAE 183; FOLLOWING THE COMPLIANCE PATH MARKED BELOW: ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1, AS AMENDED BY 19 NYCRR PART 1240. IECC CHAPTER 4 [CE] PRESCRIPTIVE
PROVISIONS (SECTIONS C402, C403, C404, C405, C408 AND ONE OF THE SIX OPTIONS IN SECTION C406 AS NOTED BELOW: MORE EFFICIENT HVAC PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.2. REDUCED
LIGHTING POWER DENSITY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.3. ENHANCED LIGHTING CONTROL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.4. ON-SITE SUPPLY OF RENEWABLE ENERGY IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION
C406.5. PROVISION OF A DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM FOR CERTAIN HVAC EQUIPMENT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.6. HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE WATER HEATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.7.
ENHANCED ENVELOPE PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.8. REDUCED AIR INFILATRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.9. TOTAL BUILDING PERFORMANCE PROVISIONS (SECTION C407) THE
NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT ("SED") MANUAL OF PLANNING STANDARDS THE 2014 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HOSPITALS AND OUTPATIENT FACILITIES THE 2018 FGI GUIDELINES
FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF: HOSPITALS OUTPATIENT FACILITIES RESIDENTIAL HEALTH, CARE, AND SUPPORT FACILITIES ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED T T T T 469 SF B01 CONNECT
TO EXST. CAPPED 12" DIA SS LAB EXHAUST RISER 12" DIA SS EXH DUCT UP TO EXISTING TWIN CITY 911 RBA UTILITY SET EF-15 IN PENTHOUSE ABOVE. BALANCE AS INDICATED. 12" DIA EA DUCT DN TO FUME
HOOD. PROVIDE SS FLEX CONNECTION AS REQUIRED FOR ADA ADJUSTABLE HOOD. 10" 4"4" VD TYP CEILING MOUNTED SNORKEL HOOD. BALANCE TO 200 CFM RA-14/10 200 EXST. TO REMAIN SUPPLY TU-9. RUN
DUCT EXPOSED AND MOUNT HIGH AS POSSIBLE. TRANSITION AND CONNECT TO SNORKEL HOOD CONNECTION AS REQURED. RUN DUCT IN CEILING SOFFIT DUCT BETWEEN HOOD AND EXISTING RISER CONNECTION TO
BE WELDED 304 S.S. REST OF DUCT TO BE GALVANIZED. 3 M101 12/10 VAV-E1 VAV-E2 EXST. TO REMAIN SUPPLY TU-7. EXST. TO REMAIN FUME HOOD EXH. VALVE. EXST. TO REMAIN GEX TU-8. DISCONNECT
AND REMOVE EXST. 6" DIA EA DUCT AND CAP AT MAIN 3 M101 EXST. SUPPLY TU-9 AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS TO REMAIN. EXST. 26x12 OA INTAKE DUCT TO REMAIN EXST. 12" DIA SS EXHAUST
RISER TO EXST. EF-15 IN PENTHOUSE TO REMAIN EXST. SUPPLY TU-7 AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS TO REMAIN. EXST. GEX TU-8 AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS TO REMAIN. EXST. FUME
HOOD EXH VALVE AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS TO REMAIN. EXST. GEX TU-10 AND ASSOCIATED DUCTWORK AND CONTROLS BE REMOVED FROM SPACE IF STILL LOCATED THERE. REMOVE FROM CONTROLS
GRAPHIC AS WELL. EXST. 12" DIA SS EXHAUST RISER TO EXST. EF-11 IN PENTHOUSE TO REMAIN VAV-E1 VAV-E2 FUME HOOD FLOOREXST. SHAFT CONNECT TO EXST. 12" DIA SS EXHAUST RISER 12" 12" 12"12"
10/12 CEILING SOFFIT CEILING EXST. 26x12 OA INTAKE 8" DIA DUCT TO SNORKEL HOODS 12" SS REINFORCED FLEX DUCT CONNECTION TRANSITION TO GALVANIZED DUCT SS DUCT GALVANIZED DUCT SS DUCT
FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting
under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such
document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY:
A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 M101 B01 FLOOR PLANS 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 TAM 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations
3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" M101 1B01 PLAN -ALTERATION 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" M101 2B01 PLAN -DEMOLITION SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M101 3B01 FUME HOOD AND EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT SECTION NOTES:
1) PROVIDE PRE-BALANCE REPORT FOR ALL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS AFFECTED BY WORK AND NOTED TO BE BALANCED. THIS INCLUDES EXST. EF-15 & 11 EXST. TU-9, EXST. DUCT FLOW SENSOR AND EXST. FAN
EF-15 & 11 OA MAKE-UP CONTROL DAMPER, GEX TU-8, FUME HOOD EXHAUST VALVE AND SUPPLY TU-7. NOTES: 1) REMOVE EXISTING ACCUTROL FUME HOOD ALARM AND MONITOR AND ALL ACCESSORIES. PROVIDE
AND INSTALL NEW LOCAL ALARM. PRODUCT: DWYER #670. 2) PROVIDE UPDATED CONTROLS GRAPHIC FOR ENTIRE ROOM INCLUDING WEST SIDE AND EAST SIDE COMPONENTS. T T VD TYP WALL MOUNTED SNORKEL HOOD.
BALANCE TO 200 CFM. CONNECT TO EXST. 16x15 EXHAUST DUCT 8" DIA EXHAUST DUCT DN TO TABLE HEIGHT FOR CONNECTION TO HOOD BY OTHERS. PROVIDE 18" FLEXIBLE DUCT W/ DRAWBAND FOR OWNER CONNECTION.
BALANCE TO 200 CFM. RE-BALANCE EXST EXHAUST TU-27 TO 1000 CFM MAX AND 200 CFM MIN. BOX TO CYCLE WITH EXISTING TO REMAIN SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT. RE-BALANCE EXIST SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT TU-26
TO 1350 CFM MAX AND 300 CFM MIN (UNOCC.). 8" 8" RE-BALANCE EXST EA GRILLE TO 600 CFM RE-BALANCE EXST FUME HOOD TO 450 CFM EXISTING TO REMAIN SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT TU-26. EXISTING TO
REMAIN EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT TU-27. EXST. 12" DIA SS RISER TO EXST. EF-14 IN PENTHOUSE ABOVE. EXST. 12" DIA SS RISER TO EXST. EF-15 IN PENTHOUSE ABOVE. EXISTING TO REMAIN FTR. FS ENGINEERING,
DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction
of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and
the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D
E F 12345678910 12345678910 M102 101 FLOOR PLANS 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 TAM 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 3" SCALE: 1/4"
= 1'-0" M102 1101 PLAN -ALTERATION 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" M102 2101 PLAN -DEMOLITION NOTES: 1) PROVIDE PRE-BALANCE REPORT FOR ALL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS AFFECTED BY WORK AND NOTED
TO BE BALANCED. THIS INCLUDES EXST. EF-14, EXST. TU-26 AND TU-27, EXST. DUCT FLOW SENSORS, EXST. FAN OA MAKE-UP CONTROL DAMPER AND ROOM 201 EXH DUCT. FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee
Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed
Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation
"altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910
12345678910 M601 SCHEDULES & DETAILS 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 TAM 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations GRILLE AND DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
MARKLOCATIONMANUFACTURERMODELFRAME/BORDERMODULE SIZEDAMPER MODELFINISHREMARKS RASEE PLANSPRICE530LAY IN24/24OPP. BLADEWHITE VAV TERMINAL UNIT SCHEDULE MARKINLET SIZE (IN)CFMMAX DISCHARGE
NCMANUFACTURERMODELREMARKS MAXMIN VAVE11260020025ANEMOSTATEZT-121 VAVE21285055025ANEMOSTATXAFT-121,2 SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M601 2EXISTING LAB AIRFLOW NOTES: 1. EXHAUST AIR CONTROL BOX.
NO HEATING COIL REQUIRED. 2. LAB HOOD EXHAUST BOX INSTALLED IN STAINLESS STEEL DUCT. PROVIDE COMPATIBLE CONNECTIONS AND SS LINING. SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M601 3EXISTING PNEUMATIC LAB CONTROL
SYSTEM NOTE: 1. SYSTEM IS PNEUMATIC WITH CONNECTION TO BUILDING DDC BACKBONE. SYSTEM IS EXISTING TO REMAIN FOR ROOM 101. ROOM B01 WILL BE PROVIDING AND INTEGRATING A NEW GENERAL EXHAUST
AND A NEW FUME HOOD EXHAUST VALVE WITH THE EXISTING SYSTEM. PROVIDE ALL NEW DDC CONTROLS FOR NEW SYSTEMS. INTERFACE WITH EXISTING BUILDING PNEUMATIC CONTROLS AND BACS SYSTEM AS REQUIRED.
NOTE: 1. SYSTEM IS PNEUMATIC WITH CONNECTION TO BUILDING DDC BACKBONE. SYSTEM IS EXISTING TO REMAIN FOR ROOM 101. ROOM B01 WILL BE PROVIDING AND INTEGRATING A NEW GENERAL EXHAUST AND
A NEW FUME HOOD EXHAUST VALVE WITH THE EXISTING SYSTEM. PROVIDE ALL NEW DDC CONTROLS FOR NEW SYSTEMS. INTERFACE WITH EXISTING BUILDING PNEUMATIC CONTROLS AND BACS SYSTEM AS REQUIRED.
EXST. EF-15 IN PENTHOUSE TO RUN CONTINUOUSLY WHENEVER ASSOCIATED EXST. AHU-1 AND AHU-2 ARE RUNNING. EXST. EF-15 IN PENTHOUSE TO RUN CONTINUOUSLY WHENEVER ASSOCIATED EXST. AHU-1 AND
AHU-2 ARE RUNNING. EXST. EXH VALVE, FUME HOOD, FLOW SENSOR AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS HAVE BEEN DELETED FOR ROOM B01 SYSTEM. REFER TO NEW CONTROL DRAWING M701 FOR CONTROLS FOR NEW SYSTEM.
EXST. EXH VALVE, FUME HOOD, FLOW SENSOR AND ASSOCIATED CONTROLS HAVE BEEN DELETED FOR ROOM B01 SYSTEM. REFER TO NEW CONTROL DRAWING M701 FOR CONTROLS FOR NEW SYSTEM. EXST. MAKE UP AIR
DAMPER ASSOCIATED WITH EXST. FAN EF-15 TO MODULATE BASED ON ROOM OCC./UNOCC. SETTING. DAMPER TO BE CLOSED DURING OCCUPIED MODE. PROVIDE NEW ACTUATOR AND CONTROLS AND BALANCE DAMPER
TO OPEN AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE 700 CFM MAKE-UP AIRFLOW DURING UNOCCUPIED MODE. EXST. MAKE UP AIR DAMPER ASSOCIATED WITH EXST. FAN EF-15 TO MODULATE BASED ON ROOM OCC./UNOCC. SETTING.
DAMPER TO BE CLOSED DURING OCCUPIED MODE. PROVIDE NEW ACTUATOR AND CONTROLS AND BALANCE DAMPER TO OPEN AS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE 700 CFM MAKE-UP AIRFLOW DURING UNOCCUPIED MODE. SCALE:
NOT TO SCALE M601 1EXISTING FUME HOOD SPECS NOTES: 1) FUME HOOD IS EXISTING HOOD TO BE RELOCATED BY OTHERS. PROVIDE ALL DUCT AND CONTROLS CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED. REMOVE EXISTING ACCUTROL
FLOW ALARM AND MONITOR AND REPLACE WITH LOCAL ALARM DWYER #670. SASH STOP TO REMAIN AT 18". AO AV: MIN. SETPOINTAO AIAV: SETPOINT : HEATING BI AI AO AV: MIN. SETPOINT AV: MAX. SETPOINT
AV: SETPOINT: COOLING AV: MAX. SETPOINT AV: SETPOINT : MINIMUM OCCUPANCY AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AV: POSITION FEEDBACK(%) AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AV: POSITION FEEDBACK(%) AO AV: FLOW
SETPOINT (CFM) AV: FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) AV: POSITION FEEDBACK(%) BI AV: SETPOINT : MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SEQUENCE OF OPERATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION FUME HOOD WITH EXHAUST AIR VALVE (FEV) SUPPLY
AIR VALVE (SAV) GENERAL EXHAUST AIR VALVE (GEX) DUCT MOUNTED REHEAT COIL (RHC) BASEBOARD RADIATION HEATING (FTR) -WHERE SHOWN ON PLANS GENERAL SYSTEM SHALL BE CONTROLLED THROUGH THE
BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM (BACS). ALL SETPOINTS SHALL BE ADJUSTABLE. THE BACS SHALL BE CAPABLE OF RETAINING ITS PROGRAMMING AND TIME SETTING DURING A LOSS OF POWER FOR
AT LEAST TEN HOURS. LABORATORY AIR CHANGE RATES ARE BASED ON TOTAL EXHAUST AIR FLOW FROM THE SPACE. THE SPACE SHALL BE CONTROLLED TO AN AIR CHANGE RATE. THE BACS SHALL CALCULATE THE
REQUIRED CFM USING THE ROOM GROSS VOLUME (AREA X CEILING HEIGHT). IF THE ZONE BECOMESOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX TO OCCUPIED MODE FOR THE
DURATION OF THE OCCUPANCY, WHEN THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED AGAIN DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX BACK TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. AIR VALVE POSITIONS SHALL BE
BASED ON SPACE OCCUPANCY. ROOM OCCUPANCY SHALL BE DETERMINED VIA ROOM OCCUPANCY SENSOR. IF THE LABORATORY IS VACANT, THE ROOM SHALL BE PLACED IN VACANT MODE BY BACS. SETPOINTS SPACE
COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED:75°F +/-1.5 °F OCCUPIED SETBACK:75°F + 3°F UNOCCUPIED:75°F + 6°F SPACE HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS: OCCUPIED:70°F +/-1.5°F OCCUPIED SETBACK:70°F
-3°F UNOCCUPIED:70°F -6°F TOTAL EXHAUST AIR CHANGE RATE (ACPH): REFER TO AIRFLOW SCHEDULE ACPH = TOTAL EXHAUST CFM X 60 / ROOM VOLUME TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE: (CFM): REFER
TO AIRFLOW SCHEDULE SUPPLY AIRFLOW RATE (CFM): REFER TO AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TYPICAL = TOTAL EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE + OFFSET FUME HOOD EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE: REFER TO AIRFLOW SCHEDULE GENERAL
EXHAUST AIRFLOW RATE (CFM) REFER TO AIRFLOW SCHEDULE TOTAL EXHAUST CFM –FUME HOOD EXHAUST CFM SPACE AIR DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET (CFM): REFER TO AIRFLOW SCHEDULE -100 CFM FOR NEGATIVE
PRESSURE LABS FUME HOOD FACE VELOCITY: 100 FPM OCC / 65 FPM UNOCC. REFER TO SCHEDULE MINIMUM LABORATORY OCCUPANCY INDEX TIME: 30 MINUTES ZONE OCCUPANCY SCHEDULE: 6 AM TO 8 PM, MON-FRI
FACE VELOCITY CONTROL FACE VELOCITY WILL BE CONTROLLED BY MONITORING TERMINAL UNIT FLOW. TERMINAL UNIT ALARM TO NOTIFY BACS UPON LOSS OF FLOW. FLOW DETECTOR AT EACH HOOD OR CABINET
TO PROVIDE LOCAL ALARM UPON LOSS OF FLOW. MONITOR IS EXISTING TO REMAIN WITH EXISTING HOOD. LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL HOOD EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER POSITIONS SHALL BE AS REQUIRED
TO MAINTAIN REQUIRED AIRFLOW AT HOOD OPENING. HEATING MODE: GEX TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER SHALL CLOSE AND SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER SHALL REDUCE FLOW TO MINIMUM SHOWN ON SCHEDULE BEFORE
ANY REHEATING TAKES PLACE. COOLING MODE: GEX TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER SHALL OPEN AND SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER SHALL OPEN TO PROVIDE AIRFLOWS AS SHOWN ON SCHEDULE. UPON A REDUCED NEED
FOR COOLING GEX TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER AND SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT DAMPER WILL MODULATE SIMULTANEOUSLY TOWARD MINIMUM POSITION BEFORE ANY REHEAT TAKES PLACE. ZONE TEMPERATURE CONTROL TEMPERATURE
SETPOINTS SHALL BE DETERMINED BASED ON A COMBINATION OF PROGRAMMED SCHEDULE AND SPACE OCCUPANCY SENSORS. OCCUPIED HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED PERIOD
AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE OCCUPIED HEATING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE REHEAT CONTROL VALVE AND THE PERIMETER FIN RADIATION CONREOL VALVE SHALL MODULATE TO MAINTAIN THE
SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT. WHEN THE SPACE TEMPERATURE IS AT SETPOINT, THE CONTROL VALVES SHALL BE CLOSED. OCCUPIED COOLING: IF THE SPACE IS OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPIED
PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE RISES ABOVE THE OCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE HEATING CONTROL VALVES SHALL BE CLOSED. OCCUPIED SETBACK: IF THE SPACE BECOMES UNOCCUPIED
DURING THE SCHEDULED OCCUPANCY PERIOD, THE ABOVE OCCUPIED HEATING/COOLING SEQUENCES SHALL APPLY, BUT THE SPACE SHALL BE MAINTAINED AT THE OCCUPIED SETBACK TEMPERATURE SETPOINTS. UNOCCUPIED
HEATING: IF THE SPACE IS UNOCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD AND THE SPACE TEMPERATURE FALLS BELOW THE UNOCCUPIED COOLING TEMPERATURE SETPOINT, THE HEATING CONTROL VALVES
SHALL BE CLOSED. IF THE SPACE BECOMES OCCUPIED DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX TO OCCUPIED MODE FOR THE DURATION OF OCCUPANCY. WHEN THE SPACE BECOMES
UNOCCUPIED AGAIN DURING THE SCHEDULED UNOCCUPIED PERIOD, THE SPACE SHALL INDEX BACK TO UNOCCUPIED MODE. REHEAT COIL TU-2-S9 FUME HOOD VAV-E2 VAV-E1 FROM EXST. AHU-1/2 DAT -55°F F.L.
N.C.MOD dT sa OS T MOD MICROBIOLOGY 206A COM HOT WIRE MANOMETER FLOW DETECTOR WITH LOCAL ALARM. DWYER #670 COMMOD COM OS PROVIDE (2) OCC SENSORS FOR EACH LAB. IF ANY SENSOR IS IN OCC
MODE THEN THE LAB IS IN OCC MODE. EXST SUPPLY TU AND CONTROLS TO REMAIN EXST T-STAT AND CONTROLS TO REMAIN EXST FUME HOOD RELOCATED BY OTHERS TO EXST. EF-15 TO EXST. EF-15 FS ENGINEERING,
DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction
of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and
the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D
E F 12345678910 12345678910 M701 CONTROLS 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 TAM 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations SCALE: NOT TO SCALE
M701 1Tracking Laboratory Zone Control System -B01 DESCRIPTION HARDWARE POINTSSOFTWARE POINTS SHOW ON GRAPHICNOTES BIBOAIAOAVBVSCHTREND ALARM BACS/DDCDESCRIPTION SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT
VAV AIR FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM)XXX10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINTXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT FUME HOOD EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT VAV AIR FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) XXX10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINTXBACnet
MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT VAV AIR FLOW FEEDBACK (CFM) XXX10% FLOW DEVIATION FROM SETPOINTXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT FUME HOOD EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT VAV AIRFLOW
SETPOINT (CFM) XXXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%)XXXVALVE COMMAND ≠ FEEDBACKXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT FUME HOOD EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT VAV POSITION
FEEDBACK (%) XXXVALVE COMMAND ≠ FEEDBACKXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT GENERAL EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT VAV POSITION FEEDBACK (%) XXXVALVE COMMAND ≠ FEEDBACKXBACnet MSTP NETWORK POINT SUPPLY
TERMINAL UNIT POSITION COMMANDXXX SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT MINIMUM AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM)XX SUPPLY TERMINAL UNIT MAXIMUM AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM)XX REHEAT COIL LEAVING AIR TEMPERATUREXXXSINGLE
POINT SENSOR REHEAT COIL CONTROL VALVE POSITION COMMAND (%)XXX5°F ΔT ACROSS COIL WITH VALVE COMMANDED CLOSED XFAIL LAST SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT: HEATINGXXX SPACE TEMPERATURE SETPOINT:
COOLINGXXX SPACE TEMPERATURE & SETPOINT ADJUSTMENTXXX± 4°F FROM SETPOINTX SPACE OCCUPANCYXXXX SPACE OCCUPANCYXXXX SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM OCCUPANCY SETPOINTXX SPACE OCCUPANCY, MINIMUM
OCCUPANCY SETPOINTXX GENERAL EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT POSITION COMMANDXXX FUME HOOD EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT POSITION COMMANDXXX GENERAL EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT MINIMUM AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM)
XX GENERAL EXHAUST TERMINAL UNIT MAXIMUM AIRFLOW SETPOINT (CFM) XX SCALE: NOT TO SCALE M701 3B01 LAB AIRFLOW ISSUE: DATE: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: SCALE: PROJECT NO. SHEET TITLE SHEET
DRAWING NO. ALTERATION OF THIS DOCUMENT EXCEPT BY A LICENSED DESIGN PROFESSIONAL, IS A VIOLATION OF NEW YORK STATE EDUCATIONAL LAW. OF FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse,
NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 Enter address here R:\Revit MEP 2012\Templates\S&A_Mechanical.rte 10/5/2011 4:16:29 PM Owner Project Name SK-M2 01/01/2019 Author Checker
Project Number Unnamed MARKDATEDESCRIPTION ? ?PLAN DETAIL BUILDING SECTION DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED DETAIL NUMBER SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED EXTENT
OF DETAIL EXTENT OF DETAIL A1 B1 C1 D1 E1 A2 B2 C2 D2 E2 A3 B3 C3 D3 E3 A4 B4 C4 D4 E4 A5 B5 C5 D5 E5 A6 B6 C6 D6 E6 DETAIL NUMBER DETAIL SCALE DETAIL NAME DETAIL NUMBER PLAN SETUP
SHEET NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS LOCATED CAUTION: THESE DOCUMENTS WERE DIGITALLY PRODUCED AND/OR REPRODUCED. CONFIRM REDUCTION OR MAGNIFICATION USING DIMENSIONAL 3"-LONG LINE IN TITLE BARS.
IF SCALING DRAWINGS FOR APPROXIMATE DIMENSIONS, ALTERNATE ARCHITECTURAL SCALES MAY BE USED AS FOLLOWS: DOCUMENT REDUCTION/MAGNIFICATION SCALE IF LINE MEASURES 2”(67% COPY): USE 3/16th
SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 3/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG IF LINE MEASURES 1.5”(50% COPY): USE 1/16th SCALE ON 1/8”=1’-0”DWG USE 1/8th SCALE ON 1/4”=1’-0”DWG 3" 3" ? ? ? ?XXX X" = X"
NOTES: F S C FINISHED FLOOR 1'-6" 1'-6" 1'-6" DUPLEX RECEPTACLE DESK TOP TELEPHONE DATA OUTLET 2'-0" EXTERIOR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 4'-0" DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MECH RM LIGHT SWITCH 4'-0" PB
GYM DOOR PUSHBUTTON F SEE NOTE 3 FIRE ALARM PULLSTATION WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE/INTERCOM PHONE SEE NOTE 3 F 5'-0" DISCONNECT SWITCH 6'-0" PANELBOARD FIRE ALARM A/V DEVICE FIRE ALARM
VISUAL DEVICE SEE NOTE 4 EMERGENCY LIGHT CLOCK INTERCOM SPEAKER SEE NOTE 5 1. IN LOCATIONS WHERE SIMILAR DEVICES ARE MOUNTED AT THE SAME HEIGHT DEVICES SHALL BE PROPERLY "GANGED"
AND SHALL HAVE ASINGLE COVER PLATE. 2. IN LOCATIONS WHERE DIFFERENT DEVICES ARE MOUNTED AT DIFFERENT HEIGHTS WITHIN FOUR FEET OF ONE ANOTHER. DEVICES SHALL BE MOUNTED
SUCH THAT THEY HAVE A COMMON CENTER LINE. IF THERE ARE THREE OR MORE DEVICES THE CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST A DETAIL FROM THE ARCHITECT. 3. 42" MINIMUM TO 48" MAXIMUM AND
WITHIN 5FT FROM DOOR. 4. 80" OR, AT SHALLOW CEILING INSTALLATIONS, WITHIN 6" OF FINISHED CEILING. VERIFY WITH ENGINEER. 5. 90" AFF, OR, AT SHALLOW CEILING INSTALLATIONS, TOP
OF UNIT WITHIN 6" OF FINISHED CEILING. SEE NOTE 3 X2X1EXIT SIGN LIGHT FIXTURE WITH CONNECTION TO EMERGENCY POWER. COORDINATE TYPE AND MOUNTING. PROVIDE ARROWS WHERE INDICATED. DESCRIPTION
SYMBOL LIGHTING SYMBOLS DLED LIGHT FIXTURE, SUBSCRIPT D = FIXTURE TYPE, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS AND LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE. EMT VFC AFF AC G NF GFGROUND FAULT INTERUPT DEVICE NON-FUSED
GROUND ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER ABOVE COUNTER -6"ABOVE COUNTERTOP OR BACKSPLASH ELECTRIC METALLIC TUBING EWCELECTRIC WATER COOLER 3 aS NIGHT LIGHT NL AT UNIT
AU FIRE SMOKE DAMPER. PROVIDE CONNECTIONS AS INDICATED FS OS1 PC PANELBOARD, 208/120V - SURFACE MOUNTED BRANCH CIRCUIT HOMERUN: 2 #12, 1 #12G, 1/2"C TO PANELBOARD CIRCUIT NUMBER AS
INDICATED UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. B1 / 12 = PANEL NAME / CIRCUIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION SYMBOL ABBREVIATIONS PHOTOCELL. WALL MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, 1 = TYPE, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS.
WALL SWITCH, 3 = THREEWAY, a = FOR LIGHTING FIXTURE MARKED SAME. CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR, 3 = TYPE, REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS. SYMBOL GENERAL SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
COMBINATION MAGNETIC STARTER FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH SYMBOL SECONDARY SERVICE SYMBOLS PANELBOARD, 208/120V - RECESSED MOUNTED MOTOR CONNECTION. EQUIPMENT
AND CIRCUITRY AS INDICATED ON PLANS AND KEYED TO ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL SCHEDULE OR AS OTHERWISE NOTED. S F F F FIRE ALARM CONNECTION. SUBSCRIPT IDENTIFIES TYPE: FS -FIRE
SMOKE DAMPER CONNECTION FA -FIRE ALARM SHUTDOWN OF EQUIPMENT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ANNUNCIATOR PANEL SYMBOL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM CONTROL PANEL (FACP) FIRE ALARM SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM THERMAL DETECTOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MANUAL PULL STATION FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR, DUCT MOUNT FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMBINATION VISUAL AND
AUDIBLE INDICATING DEVICE, WALL MOUNTED. STROBE INTENSITY 75 CANDELAS, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. SUBSCRIPTS: WP -WEATHERPROOF, WG -WIREGUARD FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VISUAL (ONLY) INDICATING
APPLIANCE, WALL MOUNTED, INTENSITY 75 CANDELA UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE FACP FAA FS WP FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -BEAM DETECTOR TYPE, TRANSMITTER TR BR DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED
/ ABOVE COUNTER MOUNTED AC G.F.C.I. DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED / ABOVE COUNTER MOUNTED GF/AC GF DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED / ABOVE COUNTER MOUNTED
AC WEATHERPROOF DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET WP FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET ISOLATED GROUND DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET IG SPECIAL PURPOSE RECEPTACLE OUTLET, NEMA CONFIGURATION
TO MATCH PLUG BRANCH CIRCUITRY: 2 #12, 1 #12G, 1/2"C UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED B1/12 F FIRE ALARM SYSTEM COMBINATION VISUAL AND AUDIBLE INDICATING DEVICE, CEILING MOUNTED. STROBE INTENSITY
75 CANDELAS, UNLESS INDICATED OTHERWISE. SUBSCRIPTS: WP -WEATHERPROOF, WG -WIREGUARD FIRE ALARM SYSTEM VISUAL (ONLY) INDICATING APPLIANCE, CEILING MOUNTED, INTENSITY 75 CANDELA UNLESS
INDICATED OTHERWISE F DUPLEX RECEPTACLE OUTLET, SURACE MOUNTED FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -BEAM DETECTOR TYPE, RECEIVER S S DEVICE SYMBOLS DESCRIPTION SYMBOL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -SPRINKLER FLOW
SWITCH FS FIRE ALARM SYSTEM -SPRINKLER TAMPER SWITCH TS DSD 4 PORT (QUAD) USB CHARGER OUTLET WAP DESCRIPTION SYMBOL VOICE/DATA SYMBOLS DATA OUTLET, WALL MOUNTED (2) CAT 6 CABLES / (2)
RJ-45 JACKS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE TYPE WAP (WIRELESS ACESS POINT) DATA OUTLET, CEILING MOUNTED UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. WALL MOUNTED UNITS AT 90"AFF WITH 12" CLEARANCE TO CEILING.
(1) CAT 6A CABLE / (1) RJ-45 JACK WALL PHONE -(1) CAT 6 CABLE / (1) RJ-45 JACK E1REFERS TO KEYED NOTE ON RESPECTIVE DRAWING HP-012 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM MAGNETIC DOOR HOLD OPEN ETREXISTING
TO REMAIN 3 OS S FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTOR, ELEVATOR RECALL R JJUNCTION BOX AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH ATS PANELBOARD, 480/277V - SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARD, 480/277V - RECESSED
MOUNTED DIMMER SWITCH J CEILING MOUNTED, FLUSH, DOUBLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX FOR MOTORIZED SCREEN. COORDINATE LOCATION WITH AV CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT. MS DATA OUTLET FOR AV EQUIPMENT,
WALL MOUNTED AT 18" AFF, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE (4) CAT 6 CABLES / (4) RJ-45 JACKS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AV/4 J WALL MOUNTED, FLUSH, SINGLE-GANG JUNCTION BOX FOR PROJECTOR SCREEN SWITCH.
MOUNT AT 45" AFF COORDINATE LOCATION WITH AV CONTRACTOR AND ARCHITECT. SS DATA OUTLET FOR AV EQUIPMENT, WALL MOUNTED AT 78" AFF UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE (2) CAT 6 CABLES / (2) RJ-45
JACKS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE AV/2 A.REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS FOR EXTENT OF BASE BID NEW CONSTRUCTION AND RENOVATED AREAS, PHASING REQUIREMENTS AND ALTERNATES. PROVIDE MATERIALS
AND LABOR FOR COMPLETE, FUNCTIONAL SYSTEMS. COORDINATE WIRING AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, CONDUCTORS, WIRING DEVICES, ETC. SHALL BE NEW AND UL-LISTED,
SUITABLE FOR LOCATION AND FUNCTION. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND RACEWAY PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL PLANS AND ELEVATIONS. PROVIDE TEMPORARY POWER
AND LIGHTING. PROVIDE TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL CIRCUITRY AND CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN SERVICES. CONTACT CIT OPERATIONS SUPPORT AT 255-5500 TO DISCONNECT ACTIVE SERVICES AND
REMOVE IT HARDWARE PRIOR TO DEMOLITION OF WALLS AND PARTITIONS. VERIFY SCOPE AND PHASING OF DEMOLITION WORK FOR AREAS TO BE ABATED AND RENOVATED. PROTECT EXISTING CIRCUITRY SERVING
ADJACENT AREA/EQUIPMENT WHICH WILL REMAIN IN USE. PROVIDE SUPPORT AND TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS/RE-ROUTING AS REQUIRED. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS INDICATING REMOVAL SCOPE OF WORK.
CONTRACTOR FOR DIVISION 26 SHALL DISCONNECT AND REMOVE BRANCH CIRCUITRY, LIGHT FIXTURES, WIRING DEVICES, CLOCKS, SPEAKERS, TELEPHONES AND RESPECTIVE SYSTEM WIRING/CABLING COMPLETE.
REMOVALS SHALL INCLUDE ALL ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS IN/ON WALLS THAT ARE TO BE REMOVED. MAINTAIN CIRCUITRY TO EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN. FIRE STOP PENETRATIONS THROUGH
FIRE RATED WALLS AND FLOORS WITH FIRE STOP MATERIAL EQUAL IN RATING TO THE CONSTRUCTION OF WHICH IT IS PENETRATING. SOUND TRANSFERENCE: FLUSH WALL MOUNTED ELECTRICAL BOXES MOUNTED IN
COMMON WALLS BETWEEN ADJACENT ROOMS, SHALL BE INSTALLED INDEPENDENT OF EACH OTHER; EACH WITH SEPARATE CONDUIT RISER(S). NIPPLING OF FLUSH WALL MOUNTED ELECTRICAL BOXES NOT ALLOWED.
WHERE ELECTRICAL BOXES ARE MOUNTED BACK TO BACK, PROVIDE INSULATION BETWEEN BOXES. GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS 1.ALL GROUNDING SHALL BE IN STRICT ACCORDANCE WITH NEC ARTICLES 250. 2.ALL
INSULATED GROUND CONDUCTORS SHALL BE GREEN. PROVIDE EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT. 3.PROVIDE GROUNDING PER EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS. CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
FURNISHED BY OTHERS: 1.VARIOUS PIECES OF EQUIPMENT WILL BE FURNISHED TO THE PROJECT SITE AND INSTALLED BY OTHER DIVISIONS. 2.PROVIDE ROUGHING-IN AND FINAL CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS. 3.BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK, OBTAIN FULL INFORMATION REGARDING ROUGH-IN MEASUREMENTS, EQUIPMENT LAYOUTS, ELEVATIONS, TRIM
BEING FURNISHED, AND OTHER NECESSARY DATA. 4.UPON REQUEST, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER WILL PROVIDE THIS DIVISION WITH DIAGRAMS, PHOTOGRAPHS, DRAWINGS, AND/OR SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER COMPLETE
DESCRIPTIVE DATA. DO NOT ROUGH WITHOUT APPROVED LAYOUT FROM CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. 5.PROVIDE ACCESSORIES SO THAT CONNECTIONS MAY BE MADE IN A MANNER THAT SHALL MEET ALL REGULATIONS AND
CODES. 6.SEE APPROPRIATE SECTIONS OF THIS DIVISION'S SPECIFICATIONS FOR MATERIALS AND METHODS. USE OF SHALLOW FLUSH MOUNT ELECTRICAL BOXES SHALL BE PERMITTED WHERE DEPTH OF WALL CAVITY/FURRING
IS LESS THAN 2 1/2" AS INDICATED ON ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. CONCEAL ALL ADDED CONDUITS, EXPOSED CONDUIT INSTALLATION IS UNACCEPTABLE UNLESS PRIOR APPROVAL IS GIVEN BY ARCHITECT. ANY
EXPOSED CONDUIT INSTALLATION SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL FINISH. B. GENERAL NOTES C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210
Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this
document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by
his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 E001 DRAWING
INDEX, SCHEDULES, SYMBOL LISTS & NOTES 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 ASC/JLR 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations ELECTRICAL DRAWING
INDEX NUMBERNAME REVISIONS #DATE E001DRAWING INDEX, SCHEDULES, SYMBOL LISTS & NOTES E101PARTIAL ELECTRICAL PLANS - LAB B01 E102PARTIAL ELECTRICAL PLAN - LAB 101 SCALE: NOT TO SCALE
E001 A3DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHTS TO THE BEST OF THE ENGINEER'S PROFESSIONAL JUDGEMENT, THE DESIGN OF THIS PROJECT CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE PORTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING: THE 2020 NEW YORK
STATE UNIFORM FIRE PREVENTION AND BUILDING CODE THE 2020 NEW YORK STATE ENERGY CONSERVATION CONSTRUCTION CODE, 2016 ASHRAE 90.1, AND 2007 ASHRAE 183; FOLLOWING THE COMPLIANCE PATH MARKED
BELOW: ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA 90.1, AS AMENDED BY 19 NYCRR PART 1240. IECC CHAPTER 4 [CE] PRESCRIPTIVE PROVISIONS (SECTIONS C402, C403, C404, C405, C408 AND ONE OF THE SIX OPTIONS IN
SECTION C406 AS NOTED BELOW: MORE EFFICIENT HVAC PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.2. REDUCED LIGHTING POWER DENSITY SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.3. ENHANCED LIGHTING
CONTROL IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.4. ON-SITE SUPPLY OF RENEWABLE ENERGY IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.5. PROVISION OF A DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM FOR CERTAIN HVAC EQUIPMENT
IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.6. HIGH-EFFICIENCY SERVICE WATER HEATING IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.7. ENHANCED ENVELOPE PERFORMANCE IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.8. REDUCED
AIR INFILATRATION IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION C406.9. TOTAL BUILDING PERFORMANCE PROVISIONS (SECTION C407) THE NEW YORK STATE EDUCATION DEPARTMENT ("SED") MANUAL OF PLANNING STANDARDS
THE 2014 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF HOSPITALS AND OUTPATIENT FACILITIES THE 2018 FGI GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF: HOSPITALS OUTPATIENT FACILITIES RESIDENTIAL
HEALTH, CARE, AND SUPPORT FACILITIES ALL SYMBOLS SHOWN ARE NOT NECESSARILY USED 469 SF B01 36" CODE CLEARANCE E1E2 E3 WAP E7 EX. PANEL LPB3 469 SF B01 EX. PANEL LPB3 36" CODE CLEARANCE
ED2 A. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF RECEPTACLES & DATA OUTLETS WITH ARCHITECT, ARCHITECT'S ELEVATION DRAWINGS, AV CONSULTANT AND TASERIES DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. B. PROVIDE SEPARATE
NEUTRAL AND GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT INDICATED. C. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHT FIXTURES WITH ARCHITECT AND ARCHITECT'S REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND ELEVATION DRAWINGS
PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. D. CIRCUIT LIGHT FIXTURES TOGETHER WITH 2#10, #10E.G. -1/2" CONDUIT, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. E. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AT ROOMS/LOCATIONS WHERE DIMMING SWITCHES
ARE INDICATED PROVIDE 0-10V DIMMING / LIGHTING CONTROL. COORDINATE THE 0-10V DIMMING CONTROL WITH THE 0-10V LED DRIVERS AT LIGHT FIXTURES. GENERAL NOTES A. COORDINATE SCHEDULING OF
REMOVAL WORK WITH OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, PHASING DRAWINGS AND REQUIREMENTS. B. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND SCHEDULE OF REMOVAL WORK IN ALL AREAS PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. REFER TO
OTHER TRADES DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE REMOVAL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES DIVISION CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO STARTING. C. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
AND DEVICES WITHIN SPACES INDICATED. D. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED WIRING AND TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS NECESSARY TO MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY OF ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLES,
DEVICES, LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. E. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT FOR ALL EXISTING RACEWAYS AND BRANCH
CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. F. PROTECT ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLES, DEVICES, LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, TELECOMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, SECURITY (CCTV) EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES AND ALL ASSOCIATED RACEWAYS AND BRANCH CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN FROM DAMAGE AND DEBRIS DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. G. ALL ELECTRICAL
DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. H. OBTAIN A LIST FROM THE OWNER, OR THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, OF ANY ITEMS THEY WISH TO RETAIN.
DISCONNECT, REMOVE, INVENTORY AND DELIVER ALL ITEMS TO OWNER DESIGNATED ON-SITE LOCATION IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER. PROVIDE A TRANSMITTAL OF THE ITEMS INVENTORIED TO THE OWNER OR OWNER'S
REPRESENTAIVE. ALL OTHER ITEMS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE PROJECT SITE COMPLETE AND DISPOSED OF IN THE APPROPRIATE MANNER. I. EXISTING CONDUIT AND BRANCH CIRCUTRY LOCATED IN NON-ACCESSIBLE
WALLS/FLOORS, JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE ABANDON IN PLACE AS FOLLOWS: • DISCONNECT BRANCH CIRCUIT AT SOURCE. • REMOVE SURFACE AND FLOOR BOX(ES). • PROVIDE PRIMED STEEL BLANK PLATE ON ANY
FLUSH OUTLET BOX(ES) TO REMAIN. • CUT BACK RACEWAY SUBS SO AS TO BE RECESSED INTO FLOOR/WALL. • PATCH ALL ANCHOR HOLES FROM REMOVED EQUIPMENT. BOXES, AND RACEWAYS. GENERAL DEMOLITION
NOTES EXEXEXEXEXEXEX EXEXEXEXEXEXEX EX EXEXEXEXEXEXEXEX E6 E6 E5 FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax: 315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It
is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way. If a document bearing the seal of
an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the date of such alteration, and a specific
description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 E101 PARTIAL ELECTRICAL PLANS -LAB B01 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 ASC/JLR
113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E101 4BASEMENT PLAN B01 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E101 8BASEMENT DEMO
PLAN B01 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES E1208V 50A, 3 PHASE TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLE. CONNECT TO EXISTING PANEL LPB3. PROVIDE 50A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL LPB3. PROVIDE 3#6 #10G -
3/4"C E2208V 40A, 3 PHASE TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLE. CONNECT TO EXISITNG PANEL LPB3. PROVIDE 40A/3P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL LPB3. PROVIDE 3#8 #10G - 3/4"C E3208V NEMA - 6 - 15
OUTLET. CONNECT TO EXISTING PANEL LPB3. PROVIDE 15A/2P CIRCUIT BREAKER IN EXISTING PANEL LPB3. PROVIDE 3#12 #12G - 1/2"C E5LIGHTING FIXTURES ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. E6CEILING MOUNTED
WIRE MOLD IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. E7CONNECT WIRELESS ACCESS POINT TO EXISTING UNIVERSITY SYSTEM. ED2REMOVE 208V 30A, 3 PHASE TWIST LOCK RECEPTACLE. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING AND
RACEWAY BACK TO SOURCE CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY EXACT QUANTITIES IN THE FIELD. 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E101 1BASEMENT REFLECTED CEILING PLAN B01 101 EX. PANEL LP1A4 36" CODE CLEARANCE
WAP E7 101 36" CODE CLEARANCE EX. PANEL LP1A4 ED1 A. COORDINATE SCHEDULING OF REMOVAL WORK WITH OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE, PHASING DRAWINGS AND REQUIREMENTS. B. VERIFY LOCATIONS
AND SCHEDULE OF REMOVAL WORK IN ALL AREAS PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. REFER TO OTHER TRADES DRAWINGS AND COORDINATE REMOVAL WORK WITH OTHER TRADES DIVISION CONTRACTORS PRIOR TO STARTING.
C. CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ALL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES WITHIN SPACES INDICATED. D. PROVIDE ALL REQUIRED WIRING AND TEMPORARY CONNECTIONS NECESSARY TO
MAINTAIN ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY OF ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLES, DEVICES, LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES THAT ARE TO REMAIN DURING
ALL STAGES OF WORK. E. PROVIDE TEMPORARY SUPPORT FOR ALL EXISTING RACEWAYS AND BRANCH CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. F. PROTECT ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, RECEPTACLES,
DEVICES, LIGHTING FIXTURES AND DEVICES, FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, TELECOMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES, SECURITY (CCTV) EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES AND ALL ASSOCIATED RACEWAYS
AND BRANCH CIRCUITRY TO REMAIN FROM DAMAGE AND DEBRIS DURING ALL STAGES OF WORK. G. ALL ELECTRICAL DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT SHOWN ON FLOOR PLANS ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE.
H. OBTAIN A LIST FROM THE OWNER, OR THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, OF ANY ITEMS THEY WISH TO RETAIN. DISCONNECT, REMOVE, INVENTORY AND DELIVER ALL ITEMS TO OWNER DESIGNATED ON-SITE LOCATION
IN GOOD OPERATING ORDER. PROVIDE A TRANSMITTAL OF THE ITEMS INVENTORIED TO THE OWNER OR OWNER'S REPRESENTAIVE. ALL OTHER ITEMS SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE PROJECT SITE COMPLETE AND DISPOSED
OF IN THE APPROPRIATE MANNER. I. EXISTING CONDUIT AND BRANCH CIRCUTRY LOCATED IN NON-ACCESSIBLE WALLS/FLOORS, JUNCTION BOXES SHALL BE ABANDON IN PLACE AS FOLLOWS: • DISCONNECT BRANCH
CIRCUIT AT SOURCE. • REMOVE SURFACE AND FLOOR BOX(ES). • PROVIDE PRIMED STEEL BLANK PLATE ON ANY FLUSH OUTLET BOX(ES) TO REMAIN. • CUT BACK RACEWAY SUBS SO AS TO BE RECESSED INTO FLOOR/WALL.
• PATCH ALL ANCHOR HOLES FROM REMOVED EQUIPMENT. BOXES, AND RACEWAYS. GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES A. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF RECEPTACLES & DATA OUTLETS WITH ARCHITECT, ARCHITECT'S ELEVATION
DRAWINGS, AV CONSULTANT AND TASERIES DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. B. PROVIDE SEPARATE NEUTRAL AND GROUND CONDUCTOR FOR EACH BRANCH CIRCUIT INDICATED. C. VERIFY EXACT LOCATION OF LIGHT
FIXTURES WITH ARCHITECT AND ARCHITECT'S REFLECTED CEILING PLANS AND ELEVATION DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ROUGH-IN. D. CIRCUIT LIGHT FIXTURES TOGETHER WITH 2#10, #10E.G. -1/2" CONDUIT, UNLESS
NOTED OTHERWISE. E. UNLESS OTHERWISE INDICATED, AT ROOMS/LOCATIONS WHERE DIMMING SWITCHES ARE INDICATED PROVIDE 0-10V DIMMING / LIGHTING CONTROL. COORDINATE THE 0-10V DIMMING CONTROL
WITH THE 0-10V LED DRIVERS AT LIGHT FIXTURES. GENERAL NOTES EX EX EX EX EXEX EX EX EX EX E5 E6 E4 FS ENGINEERING, DPC 721 E. Genesee Street Syracuse, NY 13210 Tel: 315-471-4013 Fax:
315-471-4044 FS#21022 WARNING: It is a violation of New York State Law for any person, unless acting under the direction of a licensed Architect, to alter this document in any way.
If a document bearing the seal of an Architect is altered, the altering Architect shall affix to such document his seal and the notation "altered by" followed by his signature, the
date of such alteration, and a specific description of the alteration. DATE: PROJECT: OTHER: DRAWN BY: A B C D E F G A B C D E F 12345678910 12345678910 E102 PARTIAL ELECTRICAL PLANS
-LAB 101 6/2/2021 11614/COB# 2013 ASC/JLR 113 Ho Plaza CORNELL UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS Olin Hall B01, 101 Lab Renovations 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E102 1FIRST FLOOR POWER PLAN
101 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E102 2FIRST FLOOR DEMO PLAN 101 ELECTRICAL KEYED NOTES E4PROVIDE 120V, 20A TWIST LOCK PLUG WITH QUAD RECEPTACLE POWER BOX DOWN TO TABLE. CONNECT TO EXISTING
CEILING MOUNTED WIRE MOLD. COORDINATE WITH CORNELL FACULTY REPRESENTATIVE. E5LIGHTING FIXTURES ARE EXISTING TO REMAIN. E6CEILING MOUNTED WIRE MOLD IS EXISTING TO REMAIN. E7CONNECT WIRELESS
ACCESS POINT TO EXISTING UNIVERSITY SYSTEM. ED1DISCONNECT AND REMOVE EXISTING ELECTRICAL PANEL. REMOVE ALL ASSOCIATED CIRCUITING AND RACEWAY BACK TO SOURCE. CONTRACTOR SHALL VERIFY
EXACT QUANTITIES IN THE FIELD. 3" SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" E102 3FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 101